UHLEMANN'S

SYRIAC GRAMMAR,
TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN

BY ENOCH RUTCHINSON.
WITH A COURSE OP

EXERCISES

IN

SYRIAC GRAMMAR,
AND A

CHRESTOMATHY AND BRIEF LEXICON

PREPARED BY THE TRANSLATOR.

NEW YORK:
D.

APPLETOX &
T.

CO., 346

&

348
:

BROADWAY.

EDINBURGH
A
J.

CLARK,

38

GEORGE STREET.

1855.

Entered according to Act of Congress,

in the

year 1855,

BY

E.

HUTCHINSON,
of

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District

New

York.

TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.

THE

following translation

was undertaken

in accordance with

the suggestion of several

literary friends,

and

in view of

an

increasing desire

among American

students to become acquainted

with a language in which the earliest and best version of the

New

Testament
is

is

generally admitted to have been made, and which

essentially the language

spoken by our Saviour.

Uhlemann's Grammar
of rare excellence
will
;

is
is

acknowledged by

all to

be a manual
it

and

it

hoped

that, in

an English dress,

be found to be well adapted to promote the progress of

ori-

ental philology in this country.

Some

of our helps of

tliis

kind,

in the study of the Syriac, are too brief,

and others are too volumoderate lim-

minous.
its,

Uhlemann has aimed

to present, within

a work

sufficiently extensive for

ordinary purposes of instruc-

tion.

The

translator has endeavored to give as literal a transla-

tion as is compatible with perspicuity.

He

has added, where

it

seemed

to

be

necessary, occasional explanatory notes.

After

having prepared an abridgment of the paradigms of verbs and

nouns, following Winer's arrangement in his Chaldee
he, on the whole, concluded
to insert the full

Grammar,

paradigms as they
the attempt to im-

stand in the original work, and not to

make

prove a grammar BO nearly faultless.

Vi

TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.

The

translation

is

followed by a course of Exercises in Syriac

carefully studied, will,
it

grammar, which,

if

is

believed, mate-

rially facilitate the progress of the learner in

an accurate know-

ledge of the elements of the language.

After having read, with

care, the introduction, and cursorily examined other parts of the

grammar, the pupil may,

at once,

commence upon

the Exercises,

and merely consult the grammar

remarks
to the Exercises) as a

(as directed in the introductory

book of reference, in order to

with which he

enable him to solve the

analyzing the
trusts that
first

difficulties

may meet

in

page of the Chrestomathy.

The

translator

he shall not be considered as obtrusive in calling

special attention to a

method of analysis which he has found

to
in-

be of great advantage in teaching classes in Hebrew.

structors have probably adopted a similar one,

Some

and others may

have devised

still

better methods.

This

is

submitted to the con-

sideration of those teachers

satisfactory one.

who have not already adopted a

brief Chrestomathy

and Lexicon, prepared by the transla-

tor, follow the

Exercises.

The former

is

composed of selections

from that beautiful edition of the Peshito Bible published by the British and Foreign Bible Society in London, in 1816, and
reprinted in smaller type in 1826.
of the Syrian Christians in India.
It

was executed

for the use

It

was corrected for the press,

as far as the Acts of the Apostles,

by Dr. Buchanan, and com-

pleted by Rev. S. Lee, Professor of Arabic in the University of

Cambridge.
is

Several manuscripts were consulted, and the text

considered as very correct, though

errors.

we have discovered

in

it

some typographical

In the Exercises, an extended analysis will be found of the

first

TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.

vtf

page of the Chrestoraathy, and merely brief explanatory remarks on the remaining pages.

The

basis of the Lexicon

to

is

that inserted by

Uhlemann

in his

grammar,

which the translator has made many additions, having

consulted the Syriac Lexicons of

M.

Trost, E. Castell, ^Egidius

is

Gutbier, and ^Emilius Rodigcr.

to include those

The Lexicon

intended merely

words which occur in the Chrestoinathy.

Some
and

errors, in the author's

numerous references

to the

Old

New

Testaments, have

been discovered and corrected.

There

are, probably, others

which were not observed.

received with

The

translator trusts that this effort will be

indulgence

by the

literary public.

Errors will doubtless be

found by teachers who

may
it

use the Manual, and he will be very

thankful to receive suggestions from any quarter, by which a

future edition, should

ever be called for,

may

be improved.

The

publication of the

work has been unexpectedly delayed,

most of the stereotype plates, when nearly completed, having been

destroyed by a disastrous
fire.

The

translator avails himself of this opportunity to express his

obligations to

Mr.

W. W. TURNER,
T.
J.

late of the

Union Thelogical

Seminary of
sity,

this city,

CONANT, D. D., of Rochester Univer-

and

J.

G. PALFREY, D. D., formerly of the Theological School

connected with Harvard University, for valuable suggestions;

also to

Mr. A. H. GUERNSEY, of

this city, for

important aid in

the examination of the manuscript before going to press.

NEW

YORK, Jan. 1855.

EXTRACTS FKOM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

THE

earlier sheets of this

Text hook, designed, principally,

had heen printed, and that part of the Manuscript which contains the elementary principles and paradigms had been for a considerable time out of my hands, when the more comprehensive work of Professor HOFFMANN made its appearance. In the preparation of this work my plan had especially led me to present, with as much brevity as was consistent with clearness, what is most essential for
for academical instruction,

understanding the language in its grammatical forms. 1 was of the opinion that the more extended treatment of separate phenomena of the language might be dispensed with, since the greater portion ot the Syriac forms may be explained from those of the Hebrew language ; and in fact, a knowledge of the Hebrew implies an acquaintance with the principles of the Syriac. Upon a close examination of the above-mentioned work, I was convinced, that I had proceeded upon almost the same principles, had made a similar use of the older grammarians, such as Amira, Ludov. de Dieu, Buxtorf, Michaelis, and others, and had deviated only in the collocation of separate rules. Although I might have appr< >xi-

mated more nearly to the work of Hoffmann, by isolated alterations, yet I deemed it advisable, where deviations

my own views ; as for example, in the tabular arrangement of derivative nouns. Following the older grammarians, I have introduced a separate paradigm of the nouns placed under Declension III.,* instoiul of classing them with the Segholate forms ; this was done because the vo\\vl entering into the inflection of these nouns is not an original one, as in the case of the Segholate forms, but is introduced on account of the difficulty of pronunciation. Real Segholate
existed, to follow
*
48,

Ded. IIL

EXTRACTS FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

forms, monosyllabic nouns, namely, those derived from verbs 3 rad. Olaph quiescent, belong rather, according to their principal inflection, to the substantive-stems of Declension V., and, in only a few instances, coincide with the Segholate forms. In preparing the Syntax, I have, like Professor Hoffmann, followed the Lehrgebdude of Gesenius ; and like him, also. I have made use only of those passages of the Old Testament collected by Gesenius, in which the translator, unfettered by the Hebrew text, seems to have wrought more in accordance with the genius of his own language. In addition to this, I have frequently consulted the translation of the Tew Testament, as the oldest Syriac writing known to us ;* Ephraemi Opera Syr., Romse, 1743, torn. III., fol.; Barhebraei Chronicon Syr., ed. Kirsch. Lips. 1789 ; and Assemani Bibliotheca Orient. Clementine-Yaticana, Romae, 1719, torn. III., fol.; so that a close and impartial examination will easily determine what has been added from my own not inconsiderable collections.f

******

BERLIN, March, 1829.

document extant

* In point of time the Fesbito version of the Old Testament is the most ancient in the Syriac language, though the New Testament was transMichaelis suplated into Syriac from the original Greek about the same time. poses, that the Syriac version of both Testaments was made near the close of the TR. first, or in the early part of the second century. t The remainder of the Author's Preface relates mainly to his Reading Lessons, which we have not inserted, they being, in our opinion, too difficult for beg'nnera
Ttt.

11

CONTENTS,

INTRODUCTION.

Brief Historical

View

of the Syriac Languagt

and Literature

17

PART FIRST.
ELEMENTS OF THE LANGUAGE.

CHAPTER
{
{
1.
2.
3.

I.

WRITTEN CHARACTERS AND THEIR USB.

Consonants

.28
(Vowel
Letters and

Yowels

in general

Vowel

Signs)

30 30

Vowel Signs
Points which supply the place of Vowels
.

2
2 2 2

4. Diacritical
5. 6.

31

Kushoi and Rukok

Ribui

32

33

7.

Mehagyono and Marhetono

Linea Occultans

2
2

8.
9.

........
H.
% AND CHANGES OF LETTERS.

34 35
35

Tone

2 10.

Marks

of Punctuation

35

CHAPTER
PECULIARITIES
3 11. { 12.

General

View

36
36

Changes of the Consonants

in
g

CONTENTS.
turn

13. Quiescent Letters

\ 14.

Vowel

Letters which are not sounded (Otiant)

in the

...

39

40
41

15.

Changes

Vowels

PART SECOND.
ETYMOLOGY, OR PARTS OF SPEECH.

CHAPTER L
PRONOUNS.
16. Personal

and Possessive Pronouns

44
45
48

Table of Pronouns and Suffixes

2 17. Other

Pronouns

CHAPTER
THE VERB.
$18. General
I.

IT.

View
Regular
Verbs.

49

2 19.
I.

The

Inflection of

Regular Verbs in General

...
. .

50
52

Table of Personal Inflection Table of the Temporal Inflection of Regular Verbs

Inflections

II.

53

A. Personal

54
55
.

B. Inflection of the Tenses and Moods

2 20.

A. The Ground-form Peal

its

formation and signification

56

B. Derivative Conjugations.
2 21. 2 22. 2 23.

Ethpeel

58
59

Pael and Ethpaal

Aphel and Ethtaphal

Shaphel and Eshtaphal
Conjugations occasionally used and Quadriliteral Verbs
-

60
61

24.
2 25.

62

2 26.

Verbs with Gutturals

II.

63

Irregular Verbs.

2 27.

General

View

Table of Irregular Verbs

...

...

63 65

CONTENTS.
A.
{ 28. $ 29.
2 30.
\

xni

MB
Quiescent Verbs.

Verbs 1 Rad. Olaph Quiescent Verbs

1

67

Rad.

Yud

Quiescent
.

31.

Verbs Med. Olaph Quiescent Verbs Med. Had. Vau and Yud Quiescent
Verbs 3 Rad. Olaph Quiescent
B. Defective Verbs.

.... ....
....
.

68

70
70 72

2 32.

1 \

33.
34.

Verbs

1 Rad.

Nun

75 75
76

Verbs Med. Rad. doubled

Doubly Irregular and Defective Verbs
Regular Verb with Suffixes
Table of the Same

2 35.

Paradigms of the Regular and Irregular Verbs

2 36.

...
.

80
97

102
.

2 37. Suffixes to

Verbs 3 Rad. Olaph Quiescent

.103
108

Table of the Same

2 38. Auxiliary or Substantive

Verbs

110

CHAPTER m.
THE NOUN.
2 39.

Derivation of

Nouns
Verbs

Ill

2 40.

Nouns

derived from

112

Tabular View of Nouns derived from Regular and Irregular

Verbs
\

113

41. Denominative

Nouns

122

2 42. Composite

and Exotic Nouns

123

2 43.
2 44.

Gender of Nouns

124

Number

of

Nouns

2 45. Different

Relations (states) of the

Noun

....

126
129
132

Table of the Same

2 46.

Nouns with

Suffixes

2 47. Declension of

Nouns

in general

....

136

.139

xiv

CONTENTS.
PACK

\ 48.

Exhibition of

49.

Nouns according Anomalous Nouns

to Declension

139
145
148 150

Paradigms of Nouns with Suffixes

g 50. Adjectives

and Numerals

CHAPTER
PARTICLES.
\ 51.

IV.

Adverbs

152

52. Prepositions

Table of Prepositions with Suffixes

| 53.

.....

153
155 156

Conjunctions and Interjections

PART THIRD.
SYNTAX.

CHAPTER

I.

THE PRONOUN.
54.

Use of Separable Personal Pronouns and

Suffixes

.157
157
-

A. Separable Personal Pronouns

B. Suffixes
55. Pleonastic use of

159

Pronouns

160
160

A. Separable Personal Pronouns

B. Suffixes

161
.

General Remarks on Personal Pronouns

56.

.163
164
.

Use

of the Relative

Pronoun
.

57.

Use of Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns

166

58. Pronouns for which the Syrians have no special forms

.166
166 167

A. Reflexive Pronouns
B. Other Pronouns
.

....

CONTENTS.
CHAPTER
THE VEBB.
J 59. General

x*
FAOl

II.

View

172

g 60. | 61.

Use

of the Preterit

172 175

Use of the Future Use of the Imperative Use of the

Infinitive
.

62.
2 63.

178
.
.

.179
179
.

A.

Infinitive

Absolute

B. Infinitive with
2 64. \ 65.

^ or the Construct form

Manner

180
182

Use of the
General

Participle

View

of the

of Designating all the different

Moods and
fect,

Tenses, and particularly the Imperfect, Pluper-

and Optative
of the

188
190
different

66.

The Persons

Verb
Cases and with

2 67. Construction of

Verbs with the

Prepositions
I.

193 193

Verbs with the Accusative

II.

III.

Verbs with Prepositions Passive Verbs and their Construction

of expressing Greek Composites

Mode
2 68.

.... ....
in

196
201

203

The Substantive Verb and some

other peculiarities chiefly

relating to the Construction of

Verbs

General

204 204
205

A. Useof]oOl AJ) and

B. Indirect Discourse
C. Ellipsis

AA^
.

Zeugma

Paronomasia and Puns

206

CHAPTER m.
THE NOUN.
2 69.
2 70. 2 71.

Use

of the

Noun

in General

207

Gender of Nouns

210
212.

Number

of the

Noun

xvi

CONTENTS.
PAGE

\ 72.

Apposition and Duplication of Nouns

.212
214

73.
g 74.

The Emphatic State The Construct State and the Genitive

and Use of the other Cases

75. Designation
76.
77.

....
.
.

.215
218

The Case Absolute

Comparison of Adjectives
.

220
222 222 223

A. The Comparative B. The Superlative

\ 78. Construction of

Numerals

224 224
224

A. Cardinal Numbers
B. Ordinal Numbers
C. Other Eelations of
| 79.

Numbers

226

80.

Union of the Noun with Adjectives Union of the Noun with the Yerb

227

229
229

A. In Eespect

to

Number

B. In respect to Gender
C. In respect to both Gender and

Number

....
is

232

234

D. Construction of Sentences
or

in

which there

a Compound

more than one Subject

234

81. Peculiarities relating to

Nouns

237
237

A.

Ellipsis of the

Noun

B. Zeugma and Hendiadys

The rendering of Composite Greek Nouns

....

238 238

CHAPTER
PARTICLES.
2 82. | 83.

IV.

Construction and Union of Adverbs

240

Use of the

Particles of interrogation, affirmation

and negation

242

\ 84. Prepositions J 85.

244

Conjunctions

..."
Words
.

246 249
. .

2 86. Interjections

Peculiarities in respect to the Position of

250

T H O D U C T I O N.

BRIEF HISTORICAL

VIEW

SYKIAC LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE.

1. THE Syriac language (sometimes called the "Western Aramaean, to distinguish it from the Chaldsean or Eastern Aramaean, with which it constitutes the Aramaean dialect of the Semitic family of languages), formerly extended over the whole northern part of Aram, from the borders of Palestine to Natolia, and from the Mediterranean to and beyond the It degenerated at an early period, and, during Euphrates.*

the continual changes of government, particularly by the reception of Persian and Greek words, lost much of its original Of its pure state, no written monuments have come purity. down to our times. But at the beginning of the fourth century after Christ, the language enjoyed a flourishing period, and kept its place for a long time at Edessa as a written language. As from the earliest period the Palmyrene dialect was recognized as the principal one, so this period has been designated by the name of the Edessene Period. Moreover, at various times, mention is made of the Damascene, the Chalnic or Ctesiphontic, the Acharic or Nesibene, and the Maronite dialects. The essential difference between these consisted very likely in the pronunciation ; this may be asserted with still more confidence in respect to the Nabatoean The ancient written language of Antioch or Comdialect. is still used magene by various Christian sects, in particular
* E. Rodiger says of the Aramaean language: "It was called Syriac in the in which it appeared in the Christian Aramwan literature, and Chaldee when it appeared in the Jewish Araimean writings." See Geseuius' JK'b. Gramm., 15th edit, by Rodiger, Leipz. 1848 Einleitung, 1. 2. b. Tm
form
;

18

INTRODUCTION.

by the Maronites, Nestorians, and Thomas-Christians of India, as their ecclesiastical language. So also the Zabians, or socalled St. John's Disciples, are said to make use of it, in their religious ceremonies. But as the language, as early as
the eighth and ninth centuries, was greatly corrupted by the frequent use of the Arabic, and was driven by the Arabs from the cities in the tenth and eleventh, and from the villages in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, it may be safely assumed that it is no longer in use as a vernacular Ian guage. Although several modern travelers of note, as JSTiebuhr and Brown, maintain that it is still spoken in some parts of Mesopotamia, about Raka, Edessa, and Damascus, as well as upon Lebanon, they are opposed by Ferrieres Sauveboeuf and Volney, while Chateaubriand, Seetzen, Clarke, Joliffe, and Buckingham pass the matter over in silence; and Burckhardt only remarks, that the Maronites in the convent of Kashia use the Syriac, at the present day, as we do the Latin.*

REM.

The LXX,

even, use Syria, (2utec, 2poi, Ju^itfTt) in the

? *

wider sense, for the Old Testament

in

comp. the "Apijxoj Hesiod Strabo 783; Theog. 304; Geog. i. 2. xi. 14; Stephanus Byzant. under "Api/xa, and Bochart Geogr. S. ii 5, 6 ); and the Greek and Roman Authors often confound Syria with Assyria (comp.
ft^a

(^>1

Horn.

II.

ii.

Diod. Sic.
vii.

5,

31

Od.

II.

13; Herodot. vii. 63; Strabo xvi. 2 Xenoph. Cyrop. 1 Lucian de Dea Syr. Oppian, Kuvrj^ III. 402 Horat. 11, 16; III. 4, 32. Justin, i. 2; Ammian Marcell. xxiii. 6.
ii.
; ; ; ;

The Arabs

call

it

UiJf

as

it

lay at the

left,

when

their faces

were

turned towards the east (eomp. Abulfeda Tab. Syr. p. 5; Assemani In the earliest times this country Bibl. Orient. T. III. P. ii. p. 782.) was divided into several small nations, ruled by kings (comp. Jahn Bibl. Archaol. Thl. i. Bd. i. p. 51 seq.; Mannert Geogr. Bd vi. p. 1 seq.; Vater Commentar viber den Pentat. Bd. I. p. 152 ; Winer Bibl. Realworterbuch, Bd. i. p. 51 seq.); of these, subsequently to the time of

David, Zobah and Damascus are mentioned in the Scriptures, as the most powerful; David conquered them both (2 Sam. viii. 3 sq.; x. 6; 1 Chron. xix [xviiij 3, 4. sq), and Solomon kept possession of them
* Since Uhlemann prepared
has been ascertained that the Nes-

his

grammar,

it

" Most of their church books are written in them) Syriac, the Latin in the West, became the sacred language in the greater part Missionaries who are laboring See Layard's Nineveh, chap. viii. of the East." among the Nestorians, bear testimony to the same fact. TR.
rectly denominates
:

Mr. Lnyard, in his admirable torians use the Syriac language at the prrsent day. work on the ruins of Nineveh, sjiys of the Nestorians (or Chaldoeans as he incorwhich,
like

INTRODUCTION
nntil

19

Reson Ben-Eliada, who had been general of the king of Zoba (1 Kings xi. 23 sq.), re-established at Damascus a government independent of that of the Hebrews. Subsequently the Syrians were incorporated with the monarchies of the Assyrians (738 B. c.), the Per-ian.-.
(539 B. c.), and the Macedonians (331 B. c.). Though after the death of Alexander the Great, they arose again for a time under the Seleucidae (301 B. c.), yet they again lost their independence by means of Pompey (64 B.C.), and their kings reigned only at Edessa, till the third
century after Christ, when this kingdom came also under the Roman At the division of the Empire, under Theodosius (395), Syria fi-11 sway. to the Byzantine Empire, after Jovianus hud (A. D. 3G3) already surrendered Nesibis* to Sapores II, king of Persia. Afterwards it was taken possession of by the Arabs (636), and was subjected (660) to the Onimiades and several other Arabic royal families, whose dynasties At the time of the were, in 1086, brought to a close by the Scljooks.f Crusades, the Christians could maintain themselves there against the Seljooks but a short time (1097 and subsequently) ; and in 1171, Sahv In 1369, Syria became a prey to din wrested the country from them. the marauding inroads of the Mongols under Timor and it has now, for three centuries, sighed under the Turkish yoke(cf. Gatterer, Handluicli der Universalhist, Bd. I. p. 248 sq. ; Beck, Weltgeschichte, Bd. I. p. 213 sq. ; Heeren, Ideen iiber die Politik, u. s. w. Thl. I. p. 213 sq. ; Riihs, Handbuch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 152, The transition into broadness of pronunciation (irXarutfrofxov) sq.). seems not to have extended much beyond the time of the Babylonish captivity ; and the Palmyrene Dialect, which is known to us by some inscriptions found among the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and deciphered by Bartheleray and Svvinton, may have grown up soou after Solomon, the founder of that city. In the Edessene Period, during which flourished Ephraem (died 378), Jacob Vou Sarug, Isaac the Syrian, and Xenaias of Mabug, all of whom Jacob of Edessa, at the middle of the seventh century, recognizes as classical writers, theological learning was zealously cultivated (cf. Assem. T. III. P. II. p. 994). The Manmitcs on the Orontes and upon Lebanon, originally disciples and followerp of St. Maro (cf. Assem. I. 496 sq. ; PfeiH'cr, in his Auszuge, p. 166 sq. ; Kuhs, HandGieseler, Lehrbuch der Kircliengeschichte, Bd. I. p. 675 buch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 37) approximate to the ancient Syriac dialect still more closely do the Ncstorians (cf. As<cin. T. III. P. II. p. 379), and the Thomas-Christians of India, who differ from the N'cstorians nnlv in name and place of residence (ef. As<em. a. a. (). pp. 413, 435. sq. PfeUfer, pp. 2S5, 484 ; Giescler, Bd. I. pp. 417, 638), all of whom make use of it only as an ecclesiastical language the two former shaking Arabic in common life, ami the latter, the language
;
;

* A celebrated city ami military post in Mesopotamia, generally written Nisibia. f Called, also, Seljuka, Seljouks, or Seljoukian Turks. TR.

Ti.

20
of Malabar.

INTRODUCTION.
Different from this
is

the dialect of the so-called Johannes-

Christians, Mandaeans, or Zabians (who are not to be confounded with a Mohammedan sect of the same name, in Maraccii Coran. Sur. II. p. 33

Assem. T. III. P. II. pp. 509-515 Pfeiffer, p.510 sq.; cf. Gieseler, Bd. 66 Neander, Allgemeine Geschichte der christlichen. Religion uud Kirche, Bd. I. Abth. II. p. 427), whose religious books are written in a corrupted Syriac, and which appears, from the numerous Ghebric expressions which occur in them, to have been drawn up in the Persian Irak. By the Nabatsean, according to Barhebrseus (in Assem. T. I. p. 476) is to be understood the former language of the Syrian countryOn the question, whether the Syrian is still a vernacular people. language, compare Niebuhr, Reisebeschr von Arabien, Bd. II. p. 352
sq.
; ;

I. p.

Brown,

Biblioth. der neuesten Reisebeschr.

Thl.

I.

p.
;

489

Ferrieres

en Syrie,

Sauveboeuf, Mernoires historiques, etc., T. II. p. 169 Volney, etc., T. I. p. 331 ; and Burckhardt, Travels in Syria, 22, 186.

Voyage
etc.,

pp.

2. Syriac literature, vrhich extends over almost all branches of knowledge, and in a special manner over the department of Theology, and possesses valuable works upon Oriental and Ecclesiastical History, flourished principally in the period between the The language fourth and tenth centuries of the Christian era. itself, which gave proof of its versatility of expression by the

translations of Aristotle

and other Greek authors, and by its accurate representation of mathematical subjects, had found, at an earlier period, in its own country, zealous cultivators in the departments of Grammar and Lexicography. As the most ancient grammarians, whose works have been lost, history records the names of Achudeinen (died 575), Joseph Huzita (died 580), Jacob of Edessa (died G98), who labored to restore the purity of the ancient language, Jesudenah (at the beginning of the eighth century), John Stylita (about 830), John, son of Chamis, Bishop of Themanum (850), and Honain, the physician (died The first accurate grammar, however, was written by John 876). Bar Zugbi, a Nestorian monk, at the beginning of the thirteenth
century about which time, also, Joseph Bar Malcon seems to have composed his Rete Punctorum, and Barhebraeus (died 1286) At the beginning to have made known his grammatical works.
;

of the sixteenth century, the study of the Syriac language was Theseus Ambrosius learned the Syriac transplanted to Europe. language from Syrians at Rome, in 1514, and became, in 1529, teacher to Albert Widmansladt, who subsequently pursued the study under Simeon, Bishop of the Syrians upon Lebanon. Through the labors of these men, and of Moses vonMerdin, whom

INTRODUCTION.

21

Ignatius, Patriarch of Antioch, had sent, in 1552, to Julius III. at Rome, and whose instructions were enjoyed by Andreas Dumas (Masius), the publication of the New Testament was effected in

At the close of the sixteenth century, the grammatical study of the Syriac language was much promoted at Rome itself, by the Maronites Amira and Abraham Ecchellensis, whose
1555.
copious grammatical works had already been preceded by the attempts of Theseus Ambrosius,Widmanstadt, Tremellius, Dumas, and Waser. They were followed, about the middle of the seventeenth century, by Isaac Sciadrensis and Joshua Accurensis. From this period onwards, the Syriac language has been grammatically pursued in Germany; partly independently of other languages, most copiously by the two Michaelises and Hoffmann ; partly in connection with the Chaldee, as by Ludov. de Dieu and Jalm ; or with the other Semitic languages, as by Buxtorf, Hottinger, Schaaf, Vater, and others. The earliest attempts at Syriac lexicography in the ninth and tenth centuries, in Syria, by

were also made Honain Isa or

Joshua of Maruz, and Gabriel, the son of Bochticsu. More important, however, are the contemporary works of Isa Bar-Ali (about 885), of Ananiesu Bar-Saru (about 900), and the most serviceable work of this kind by Abulhasan, Isa Bar-Bahlul (about 963,) which is still extant. The lexicons of Dumas, de la Boderie,
Schindler, Crines, Buxtorf, Trost, Hottinger, Gutbier, Nicolai, Schaaf, and Zanolini, which have appeared since the sixteenth century, are confined to the New Testament, with which the FerSyriac literature in 1555 made its appearance in Europe. rarius, and Edm. Castell, on the other hand, availed themselves of the above-mentioned Syriac works relating to the same subject, and John David Michaelis enriched the labors of the latter by valuable remarks and additions. The valuable work of Lorsbach, who compared all the Syriac works which had then been printed, besides a number of manuscripts, and collected the words and
significations

pleted.

More

wanting in Syriac lexicons, still remains uncomrecently, copious works have been promised by

Bernstein and Quatremere, philologists of great merit in the department of Oriental literature. Glossaries are contained in the Chrestomathies of Michaelis, Kirsch, Tychsen, Grimm, Halm, and Sieffert.

REM. Eusebius (Hist. Eccl. I. 13) cites the letter of Abgarus to and the answer to ft, aa among the mst ancient Syriac writings III. P. II. p. 8 (cf. Assem. I. 554 Giesder, Bd. I. p. 74) and,
Jesus,
;

22
in like

INTRODUCTION.
manner, John
is

perhaps the translation of the New Testament,* which musi have existed as early as the second century (cf. Hug, Einleitung in die Schriften des N. T., Thl. I. p. 348 Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 123). That the Syrians considered their language to be richer than the Araand its capacity for bic is attested by Asseman (III. P. I. p. 326 sq.) rendering Greek authors may be judged from Barhebraeus (Chron. p.
city, is
; ;

language.

But the most ancient Syriac work

said to have written his Gospel in the Syriac of undoubted authenti-

gius, in his Historia Dynast., ed.

231. ed. Bruns), compared with Aristotle (Top. I. cap. 4). AbulpharaPocock, p. 147, mentions Theophilus of Edessa as the author of a successful translation of two books of the In addition to the larger work of Iliad (cf. Assem. I. p. 521). Asseman (Assemani Bibliotheca Orientalis Clemeutino-Yaticana, Romae, 1729,) 3 vols. fol, and the abridgment of it by Pfeiffer, Erlangen,

1776, we possess a brief history of Syriac literature by Hoffmann, in Bertholdt's kritischem Journal der neuesten theologischen Literatur,
Thl.

XIV.,

pp. 225-291.

I.

GRAMMARS.
etc.,

Thesd Ambrosii, Introductio in Chald. linguam, Syriacam,

1539.

Papiae,

Aug. Caninii, Institutiones

linguse Syriacse, Parish's, 1554.

Widmanstadii, Syriacse lingua? prima ekmenta, Viennae, 1555, 4to. ed. II. Antwerp, 1572. loh. Merceri, Tabulae in grammaticen linguae Chald., quse et Syriaca Eiusd. grammatica Chald. et Syr. Vitedicitur, Paris, 1560. 4to.
bergae, 1579, 8vo.

Imman. TremeUii, Grammatica Chald. et Syr. Genevae, 1569, 4to. Appended also to his edition of the New Testament. Aiidr. Masii, Grammatica linguaa Syriacae (im Tom. YI. der Antwerp,
Polygl.) 1573, fol. Casp. Waseri, Institutio linguae Syrae ex optimis quibusque apud Syros scriptoribus collecta. Lugd. Bat. 1594. 4to. Ed. II. Leidae, 1619,
4to.

Georg. Amirce, Grammatica Syr. sive Chald.

Christoph. Crinesii,
lo. Buxtorfii,

etc.

Romae, 1596, 4to.

Gymnasium

Syr. h.

e.

linguae lesu Christo verna-

culae perfecta institutio, etc.

Yitebergae, 1611.
et Syr. libri III. Basil. 1615.

Grammaticae Chald.

Ed.

II.

1650, 8vo.

* Hug, in his Introduction to the New Testament, says that the Translation of the New Testament was appended to that of the Old Testament, and that both were included under the same name, Pcshito. TR.

INTRODUCTION.

To. Casp. Myriad, Grammatica Syro-Chaldaea. Genev. 1619, 4to. Herm. Nicolai, Idea linguarr. Aramasaruin per comparationem etc Copenh. 1627, 8vo.

Abrah. EccheUensis, Linguae Syr. s. Chald. perbrevis institutio. Rom, 1628, 16mo. Ludov. de Dieu, Grammatica linguarr. orientt. Hebraeorum, Chald. et Syr. inter se collatnrum Lugd. Bat. 1628, ex recens. Clodii. Francof.

ad M. 1683,

4to.

Isanc Sciadrensis, Grammatica lingua? Syr. 1636, 8vo. loh. Michael. Dilherri, Rudimenta grammaticae Syr. Halis, 1637. Ed.
II.,

Rom,

1646, 12mo.

Grammatica linguae Syr. Roma3, 1647, 8vo. Ernst. Gerhardi, 2xia^a<pi'a, linguae Syro-Chald. Hal. Sax. 1649. Andr. Sennerli, Ebraimus, Chaldaismus, Syriasmus, Arabismus nee non Rabbinismus, etc. Viteb. 1666, 4to. Eiusd. Chaldaismus et Syriasraus, etc., 1666. loh. Henr. Hottingeri, Grammatica Chald. Syr. et Rabbinica Turic. 1652, 8vo. Eiusd. Grammatica quatuor linguarr. Hebr. Chald. Syr. et Arab, harmonica Turici, 1659, 4to (the Syriac also printed
losephl Acurensis,
lo.

ad lectionem linguarr. orientt. Hebr. Chald. Samarit. Syr. Arab. Pers. Armen. Copt. Loud. 1653, 12mo. lo. Leusdeni, Scholae Syriacae lib. III. etc. Ultraiect. 1658, Hvo.
Guil. Bevendgii, 8vo.

separately). Briatii Waltoni, Introductio

Grammatica

Syr. tribus libris tradita. Loud. 1658,

quontum fieri potuit grammaticae Hebr. Chald. Syr. JSthiop. Arab, et Pers. delineatio. Lond. 1669 (preceding his Lex. Heptagl.) Dav. Grafunderi, Grammatica Syriaca cum Syntaxi, etc. Viteb. 1665. lo. Nicolai, Grammatica linguarr. Ebr. Chald. Syr. Arab. ^Ethiop. Pers.orientalium secuudum prima prasccpta delineata harmonica. lenae, 1670. 4to. Ed. II. Critica Sacra Francof. et Hamb. 1686. lo. Altingi, Synopsis iustitutionum Chald. et Syr. Francof. ad M. 1676. Ed. VI. a Georg. Othone adornata, 1701, 8vo. Christ. Cellarii, Porta Syriaca. Cizas, 1677, 8vo. Eiusd. Porta Syria?
linguarr.

Edm.

Castdli, Brevis et harmonica

patentior, etc., 1682.

Henr.

Opitii,

et Francof.

Syriasmus facilitati ct integritati suas restitutus, etc. Lij>s. 1678. 4to. in compendium redactus a Christ. Ludovici

Viteb. 166U, 4to.

Car. Schafii, Opius Aramaenm complectens grammaticam ChaldaicoSyriacam, Lugd. Bat. 1686, 8vo. Ed. III. lo. Au>r. D<i/i-ii, Aditus Syriae reclusus, etc. lenoe, 1689.
1715, 8vo.
lo.

Ern. Gerhardi, Harmonia Hugua3 Chald. Syr. et JBthiop. leiwe, 1693, 4to.

24
Herm. von der Hardt
8vo.

INTRODUCTION.
Syriacae linguae fundamenta.
orientt.

Helmst. 1694.

Ge.
lo.

(Only Paradigms.) Othonis Palaestra linguarr.

Francof. 1702. 4to.

Chald. Syr. Arab. -^Eth. Pers.

etc.

Phil.

Hartmanni

institutio

Sam.
Christ.

harmonica. Frid. Bucheri

Hebraicae, Chald. Syr. et Samarit. Francof. ad M. 1707. 4to.

linguarum
et facilis

Thesaurus

orientalis

s.

compendiosa

methodus

linguarr. orientt. etc. Francof. et Lips. 1725. 4to.

Bened.

Michaelis

Syriasmus

i.

e.

grammatica linguae Syr,

Grammatica Syr. Halis, 1784. 4to. G. Kals Grammatica Hebraeo-harmonica cum Arab, et Aram. Amstelod. 1758. 8vo. lac. Ge. Christ. Adlerii Brevis linguae Syr. institutio etc. Altonae, 1784. W. Jfesel, Syrische Sprachlehre. Lemgo, 1788. 4to. loh. Gottfr. Hasse Practisches Handbuch der Aramaischen oder lena, 1794. 8vo. Syrisch-Chaldaisch-Samaritanischen Sprache. Innoc. Fessleri Institutiones linguarr. orientt. Hebr. Chald. Syr. et Arab. Vratisl. Halis et lenae, 1787 et 1789. 01. Gferh. Tychseni Elementale Syr. Rostochi, 1793. 8vo. (Ap/.

Halis, 1741. 4to. lo. David Michaelis

to his Chrestomathy.) lahn. Aramaische oder Chaldaische und Syrische Sprachlehre Wien 1793. 8vo. neu herausgegeben von Oberleitfur Anfanger. ner Elementa Aramaic* s. Chaldaeo-Syriacae linguae etc. Viennae, 1820. 8vo. loh. Sev. Vater Handbuch der Hebr. Syr. Chald. und Arab. Grammatik. Leipzig, 1802 u. 1817. 8vo. Thomas Yeates Syriac Grammar, principally adapted to the New Testament in that Language. Lond. 1819. 8vo. Hampus Tullberg Elementale Syr. P. I. et II. Lond. 1824. 8vo. Paul Ewald Lehrbuch der syr. Sprache. Erlangen, 1826. 8vo.

pended

lo.

Andr. Theoph. Hoffmanni

1827. 4to.

Grammatics

Syriacae

h'bri

III.

Halae,

II.

LEXICONS.

Andr. Masii Syrorum peculium.

of the
Val.

Antwerp, 1521. folio. Fabr. Boderiani Dictionariurn Syro-Chald. Antw. 1572. (Tom. VI.

Antw. Polygl.)
Lexicon pentagl.
fol.

Schindleri

Hanoviae,

1612.

1649.

Lond.

1635 Francof. 1653. 1695.

Viteb. 1612. 4to. Christoph. Crinesii Lexicon Syriacum. loh. Bapt. Ferrarii Nomendator Syriacus. Romae, 1622. 4to.
Basil. 1622. 4to. loh. Buxtorfii iun. Lexicon Chald. et Syr. Martini Trostii Lexicon Syr. etc. Cothenis Anhalt. 1623. 4to.

SYRIAC CHBE8TOMATHIE8.

g5

Thomas a Novaria Nomenclator Syr. llomie, 1636. 8vo. Andr. Sennerti Lexici Chald. et Syr. compendium. Viteb. 1666. 4to. loh. Henr. Hottingeri Etymologicum oricntt. s. Lexicon harmonicum
heptagl. etc. Francof 1661.
Turici,

1664.

4to.

Dav. Grafunderi Compendium Grammar.)

Lexici, Syr.

(Appended

to bis Syriac

Hamb. 1667. 8vo. (Appended to his Aegid. Outbirii Lexicon Syr. New Testament.) Edm. Castclli Lexicon heptagl. Lond. 1669. From this has been specially edited the Syriac, by J. G. Michaelis, under the title, Edmundi Castelli Lexicon Syr. Getting. 1788. Tom. II. 4to. lo. Fr. Nicolai Hodogeticum orientale harmonicum etc. lense, 1670. 4to. Christoph. Cellarii Glossarium Syro-Latinuin. Cizae, 1683. 4to. Car. Schafii Lexicon Syr. concordantiale. Lugd. Bat. 1708. (Appended to the New Testament ) Ant. Zanolini Lexicon Syriacum. Patav. 1742. 8vo. (Appended
to the

New

Testament.)

IIL

CHRESTOMATHTES.

loh.

Dav. Michaelis Syrische Chrestomathie Thl. 1. Gottingen, Die II. Ausg. 1783. mit einem Glossar. u. Anm. 1768. 8vo. loh. Dav. Michaelis Chrestomavervollstandigt unter dem Titel
:

thia Syr. Ed. III. glossario adnotationibusque instructa a /.

Ch.

Dcepke. 1829. /. C. Cf. Adleri Chrestomathia Syr. Hafn, 1784. loh. Gottfr. Ifasse Lectiones Syro-Arabico-Samaritano-^Ethiopic Regiom. et Lipsias, 1788. 8vo. Georg. Guil. Kirschii Chrestomathia Syr. Hofifi, 1789. 8vo. (Newly
edited

by

Bernstein.)

Olai Gerh. Ti/chsen Elementale Syriacum etc. Rostochi, 1793. 8vo. Henr. Ad. Grimm Neue Syrische Chrestomathie mit einem Glossarium u. s. w. Lemgo, 1795. 8vo. Gust. Knoes Chrestomathia Syr. maximam partem e Codd. MSS. collecta. Getting, 1807. 8vo. Aug. Hahn et Sieffert Chrestomatliia Syr. s. S. Ephraemi carmina selecta. Lips, 1825. 8vo. (With a Lex. Syr.)

SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
ELEMENTS OF THE LANGUAGE
TABLE OF CONSONANTS.
1

PART FIRST.

28

CONSONANTS.

CHAPTER

I.

WKITTEN CHARACTERS AND THEIR USE.

1.

Consonants.

The

Syriac, or "West

consisting, like that of the

In common with the Arabic, it connects together the several letters of a word by horizontal lines at the bottom ; from which arises a fourfold form, though essentially the same, according as a letter is initial, medial, or final, or is connected or unconnected with the preceding letter, 'as exhibited in the table on the preceding page.

Aramaean Language, has an alphabet Hebrew and Chaldee, of twenty-!

two consonants.

REM.

1.

The
and
is

character

exhibited
It
is

in

the

preceding alphabet,

is

called Peshito,
Jacobites,

i. e.

the simple. said to have

the seventh century. not from rfrpoyyuXo?, round, (see Asseman Biblioth. Orient. T. III. P. II. p. 378.) which, according to Micbaelis Gram. Syr., p. 15, means the Gospel character (scriptura evangelii). It was the basis of the Nestorian smaller character, to Avhich the so-called double

employed by the Maronites and been invented by Jacob of Edessa in Besides this, Amira mentions the Estrangelo,

alphabet, used for inscriptions and titles of books, bears a strong There is also the Palmyrene alphabet, found in inscripresemblance. tions on the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and the Mandwan or Nabatcean alphabet. The latter, in consequence of the amalgamation of the gutturals | with 1 and Ol with A* consists of only twenty con, ,

sonants.

It is written in a continuous line, with four different forms of

each letter, viz., the simple consonant, and the consonant with the vowels a, i, or u. REM. 2. The letters \, r Ol, Q, I, *, ' r A, connect only After one of these letters, therefore, > with the preceding letter. .
,

stand unconnected

and

also,

with the exception of ^

always
.
, ,

at the
"\

beginning of a word.

The

final letters are

it

'X>
,

before

^ is

written

-^

and

after

or

)$
G,

Double
in

at the

end

of a

word takes the form of m.

The

letter

words adopted from

CONSONANTS.

29

Several consonants, where they terother languages, is written "XS minate a word, are slightly inflected upward ; e. g. JD, ID, a, etc.

REM.

3.

The

gutturals express the several gradations of guttural

|

and Ol may be compared and Spiritus asper of the Greek language with the sounds are *** ( the German ch ) 12. 5. Deeper guttural b). ( and 1 which the Greeks express, sometimes by the Spirilus asper, and sometimes by 7. The sound of 2 is formed in the fore-part of ** that of O farther back towards the throat. the mouth "Qj sometimes stands for at the end of Greek words, and is pronounced, according to Amira, p. 9, sc before e and i. The aspirated consonAl2 r .f> are, in some MSS., marked as such with a red ants
sounds from the weakest to the strongest.
Spiritus lenis

point placed over them; the removal of the aspiration by the same sign beneath them ( 5).

is

indicated

REM.

4.

The

division
is

of consonants,

with

reference

to

the

organs of speech,

the

same

as

in

Hebrew.

But the
as the

gutturals

MA*OI| occasion

less

difficulty

than in Hebrew,

Sheva and

Daghesh forte are wanting in Syriac.

with
JL

Of the
(

gutturals, in connection

and Q,

it is

to

be remarked
*P
7

a) that
;

between two vowels has

f
4>

the sound of y

e.g.

iO^O ko-yem
*

1} that

O
e),

quiesces in

and

(=

o and

u\ and
;

after

and
.

(=
.

a and

forms the dipthongs

is

au and eu
fixed, it is
(

c)

that initial
t
;

with

=
i

i,

and even when }

;
7

pre-

pronounced
is

e. g.

pOOUf
*i

Ihudho
;

d) that initial

8.

b)

before Ol
5.

pronounced

like

e.

g.

>Oli chadh.

REM.

The
far as

letters of

numerals as
In

the Alphabet suffice for designating the 400 (Vid. Table of Consonants, Amira, p.12. sq).
;

compound numbers, the larger stand first e. g. poZ 441. From 500 900, the tens of 50 90 are denoted by a dot over the letter
;

Thousands are designated by placed under the units, ten thousand by ~=, ten thousand thousand by The numbers 20 and 50 are also expressed by double ^2 and ,-J. tuc Fractional numbers final loiters tailing awav \\ lien- units arc :uM'tl. are designated lv :v small line drawn obliquely downward, from left to right, over the letter which expresses the denominator of the
-co GOO, e.g.
>

800.

fraction

"e.g.

2 =,

i <fec.

80
2.

VOWEL LETTERS AND VOWEL

SIGNS.

Vowels in General (Vowel Letters and

Vowd

Signs).

InSyriac, the vowel-letters }, o, and *a originally served to designate the vowels, and, at the time of Mohammed, the Syrians were acquainted with only three vowel-signs, which sufficed for their language,' and which the Arabs appear to have borrowed from them. Afterwards the Monophysites sought to express the Greek vowels, and increased their number to seven (v. Asseman T. I. pp. 477, 478 ; Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 34), and since the time of Theophilus of Edessa, in the eighth century, the Greek vowels appear to have been in common use. The Nestorians, on the other hand, make use of diacritical points (Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 378). The Monophysites or Maronites commonly use them only in doubtful cases.
'

REM.

Even

in the last century, the

Maronite Gabriel Heva em-

ployed the vowel-letters to designate the vowels,

I

o,

==

e,

_t

making

*\

or,

i,

and

(v.

Michaelis. p. 29).

3.

Vowel

Signs.

The Syrians denote the vowels by diacritical points, or by characters formed from and in imitation of the Greek vowels, the latter mode being that now generally used. In ancient
manuscripts both modes occur together.
FORM.
SYRIAC.
7

NAME.
GREEK.
or

SOUND.

Pethocho
Revotzo

V *A LaAS

\
)

a.

or

or
or
x

Chevotzo
Zekofo

or

(jabl

o.

Etzotzo

DIACRITICAL POINTS WHICH SUPPLY TJIK PLACE OF VOWELS. 31

REM.

1.

The names

pronouncing the vowel.

are easily recognized.

are derived from the form of the organ used in The Greek forms from which they are derived
*

also occurs without

=u

vi
in

^\O

and

^&SO.
Psalm
xi

(For |A-*r^>, Luke

6).

The

first

xvii. 29, stands more correctly ]A*;I3 three vowel-signs may also be written beneath
7

the consonants.

REM.
though
k

2.

As

to pronunciation,

seems to have denoted a and

ae,

was sometimes sounded by the Nestorians like a (V. In foreign words it quiesces in Q. Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 379).
In
ff

are contained both the

German

and

u.

REM.
that

3.
is
*

As

to quantity

it

may
7

be assumed with some certainty

;

always " long, and

*

always short
7
.

according to others,

with **,

and

with

Q are

long;

is

short, except in foreign words.

T

Amira, on the other hand, maintains that

others,

#,

6,

and the

Some grammarians also denote even with Q, are common. the quantity of the vowels by different signs, thus ;
LOXG.

SHORT.

Revotzo.

Chevotzo.

O
REM.
with
Oj

-O

O
are formed with

Etzotzo.

4.

The dipthongs

Q and

**.

With Vau
;

a)
g. g.

preceding at the beginning or

7
ft)

middle of a word, au

e.

(ZolD:
I

with
;

A
)

preceding, ol

nearly
of a

(the German eu
word,
with
after
.

e.

_OlQjA')
Amira
with

in

the

middle

a,

I'M

e.

g.

7
;

^aiQj^QJ
to

d)

Vau

doubled, the

first

ou

according
c above);
f

u).

With Yud
7

(besides the combinations b

7
'

and

a)

a preceding
at the

ai

Q.

g.
e.

p*\
g.

b)

with

in the

middle and

end of a word,

oi

4.

Diacritical Points which sujyrfy

tin

place of Vowels.

Tliese

were employed

earlier than

were the vowels, and

32

KCSHOI AND RUKOK.

after the invention of the vowels,

were used even

Nestorians.
fern.

by the

The point which

designates the suffix 3 sing.

OT

seems to have originated from that system.

X
7
;

REM.
wiOl

According
i
;

to
9
<

Amira
.

p. 51,

OO1==OCTI

while OO1

O01;

wiGl

wCl= -Ol

Ludov. de Die.u has treated

p.

this subject

more

definitely in his

Grammar,

35

seq.

according to him the

point when above the consonant denotes

a, o,

and

u,

under

it e,

un-

The principal use of this point in der wi and ( i, and under Q u. the verb, is to denote the different persons and tenses (v. Amira, Lud. de Dieu, p. 37). Throughout the preterite, with the p. 51 In the partiexception of the 1 sing., it stands under the radicals. y it denotes, over the first radical, in Peal, _L, in Aphel, or ciple, * In the imperative and infinitive it may be in Verbs med. Vau, omitted or written underneath. The future takes it only under the radicals, not under the preformatives, with the exception of the 1 where it stands above it (comp. Isenbiehl, Beobachtungen sing., von dem Gebrauche des Syrischen Puncti diacritic! bei den Verbis,
; , .

Gottingen, 1773).

Kushoi and Riikok (- *r>o 5. According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the Syrians have in fact the Sheva, and pronounce a vowelless consonant
1.

with a short half-sound of e

e.g.

^OQQJ pronounced n kum.

""

and the Zabians, use according to Asseman, the doubling of consonants in pronunciation (Daghesh forte) occurs among the Oriental Syrians, and, according to the analogy of the Hebrew, in Pael
p.42,

Some Grammarians, as Amira,

too,

So

andEthpaalofVerbs^2>andMi* But as the doubly consonant falls away where analogy would require
retained
2.
(

written
it

8),

this
is

This duplication

to be grammatical usage is still very doubtful. retained only in foreign words.

is Kushoi,(\.Q. hardening), a red point inserted over the aspirates, in manuscripts, which removes the aspiration. The retention of the aspiration is indicated by a point placed underneath, called liukok (i. e.
*
It

Analogous withDaghesh lene

>vriuc,

should be borne in mind that Sheva and Daghesh are not^ in denoted by any written characters, and appear only in pronunciation.

'Tr.

EIBDI.

33

REM. Some consider Kushoi to be Daghesh forte, which is Lud. de Dieu, p. '25 sq., places denied by Amira and Gabriel Sionita. it a) at the beginning of words, except where ^OpO precede, or where
;

the

preceding

word ends

in

w, O,

f,

in in

which case Rukok

the
;

is

retained;

e.g.
;

,V,
e.

^So,; 6)
;

middle,
g.
;

after

quiescent letter

g.

OlluXSD
17 as.

c) after dipthongs

e.

AA_^ IZoSo,

Rukok, on the contrary, occurs, besides the cases noted under'a above a) when one of the aspirates ends a syllable, but is in the same case hardened by a preceding vacant
;

consonant

T.yo
;

e.

g.

^\OL\
Sheva
;

b)

when, according

to

Hebrew analogy, they

an open syllable
;

follow a movable
"\r*\-

e.

g.

(Ab)QO

c) after

e.

g.

So too

these consonants are not pronounced as aspirates in

Pa

e.

and Ethpa. of Verbs ^<b, when the J preceding them has fallen away ; from \yXJ and in verbs with the middle radical doubled, g. iQAo
;

where, in Hebrew, Daghesh forte stands. Furthermore, here belong the letters in which one having fallen away before them, is to be compensated
for, in

where Daghesh

the future and infinitive of verbs jk2>, or in general forte euphonic stands in Hebrew. These points do

not occur in printed works.

6.

Ribui

1. To distinguish the plural of nouns and verbs from the singular written with the same consonants, the Syriac makes use of Ribui, i. e. two points placed horizontally over This sign is still retained, like the vowels, in the word.

printed books.

Thus, by means of these points

|nV>

is

read

|n \V)
Olaph
guish

This sign
it

the kings, and distinguished from pVf), the kiny. is also used in the 3 pltir. fern. pret. of Verbs 3 rad. in all the conjugations except Peal ( 32), to distinI

from 3 sing. masc.

,from

e. g.

*a\

T yV*1

..tZ|

they

naveprafad
In liko

tJieinselves

A\
loin.,

..Z] he has praised himself.

mannor Uilmi
pret.

strongtln'iis llu> distinction

muse, and

betwoon the 3 i>lur. where the formatives Q and ^ at the

end sometimes

fall

away from the 3 sing, masc.; e. g. VL4o The plurals, which are easily recognized, re-

34:

MEHAGYONO AND MAKHETONO.

this designation, though it is not omitted in suffixes. In numerals the usage is arbitrary. forms with plural Some mark with this sign only the feminines, and the forms

main without

with suffixes
REM.

e. g.

-aZ>l2, tQQj>_2. v
omits Ribui,
*k*
*"

Amira,

p. 48,
**

when
I
1

the plural form

44)

has the signification .QJ| or OOUAjf, i. e. they are, but adopts the above-mentioned use numerals, and uses it also with prepositions joined with plural suffixes ( 16. c).

2.

Ribui also serves

to

denote collectives

e.

g.

1;QO a

beeve,

a herd of beeves.
pret.

REM. and

When
fut.,

and the

Ribui stands over > (with the exception of the 1 sing. 4. participles Act. Pe., according to REM.),
7

or coincides with a diacritical one of the points , point representing is omitted. When three points come together, one of them represents

Kushoi.

7.

Mehagyono and Marhetono.

an accumulation of consonants without vowels, and the Syrians wish to indicate that a monosyllabic word is to be pronounced as a dissyllable, or a dissyllabic word as a trisyllable, and so on, they place a line under the
occurs,
7

When

consonant to which a vowel (usually

more rarely
is

is

to

be supplied

e. g.

}AL**j.

This line

called

Mehagyono, and

accumulation in utterance denotes a removal of this is to If, on the contrary, the voice hurry over (Diaeresis). these same consonants, a line is drawn above them, which is
called

REM.

Marhetono, e. g. lAojl. 1. Some Grammarians

before

place

Mehagyono
p. 41. sq.,

only

before

viVnX and

**

in

jA**)>.

Amira,

compares the

two with Diaeresis and Synceresis, which may have been transferred from prosody into prose. (Vd. Chrestom. Syr. ed. Hahn et Sieffert,
Lips. 1825. p. 11).

REM.
e.

2.

Sometimes a
.
.

line is

found over consonants a) in numerals " ~

;

g.

*1*

12

b) in
v

abbreviations

e.

g rO

for

T 7

|A-*rO

of exclamation O|, to distinguish

it

& from Of.

c)

over the particle

LINEA OCCULTANS.
8.

35

Linea Occultans.
;

letter

This line placed under consonants denotes a) that the under which it stands is not pronounced e. g.
;

Z^a

12. 1); b) that

is

by Ol
1.

beginning of a word, followed to be pronounced weaker, and like 1 e.g. >Oll (vid.
at the
; ;

Rem.4)

c)

that the letter quiesces,viz., in the imperf. of

;

^4^1, pronounced and imp. from ^O19 which with the transposition of the first two radicals is *>O1 (comp. 12. 1).
e. g.

the pass. Ethpeel and Ethpaal

;

ethkatl,

REM. Some have extended this also to the imperatives Ethtaphal and Eshtaphal but in the latter especially, it appears to be merely a diacritical designation of the imperat. As such it may in general be regarded as coming under b and c above.
;

9.

Tone.

1.

ble,

The tone when the

;

stands regularly upon the penultimate syllaultimate does not terminate in a movable

consonant
REM.
(

e. g.

fov/), Mdlco.

7) the penultimate syllable

In an accumulation of consonants, where by Mehagyono becomes the antepenultimate, the tone

remains upon the stem-syllable. It is more difficult to determine whether words, which, according to Amira, p. 462, have Q in the penultimate, follow the same rule
;

*.

'

'

e.

g. (JCUjj,

and should be pronounced ackuno or achuno.

is

2.

The tone
;

on the ultimate, when

it

ends in a movable
-i.

consonant

e. g.

oA*

so too with
A*.
;

Q and

final,

if

they

have arisen from 2a and

vid.

e.

g.

m\V)

from ZosXso.

Amira, pp.

467469.
10. Signs of Interpunctum.

The Syrians, who do not possess the accents, divide their periods, according to

Hebrew system of
Amira,
p. 475, into

36
protasis

GENERAL VIEW.

and apodosis, which again are subdivided into smaller parts, and include the more precise designation of In this respect they designate ; a) subject and predicate. the separate members of the protasis with (:) ; i) the close of the protasis with (.), which is also the sign of interrogation ; c) the separate members of the apodosis with (.*), which also marks longer interrogations ; and d) the close of a period is marked by a point, which as it also occurs in the middle of a period, some consider to be the smallest mark of interpunction, and (>) or (::) the largest point. REM. Amira, p. 479, mentions a point standing over a word which indicates a question, address, admiration, praise, command, and
the
like.

CHAPTEE

II.

PECULIARITIES AND CHANGES OF THE LETTERS.

11.

General View.

As the changes in the different parts of speech are effected partly by consonants and partly by vowels, this chapter is In the first place, those naturally divided into two parts. take which place uniformly, in accordance with changes fixed laws, in pronouns, verbs, and nouns, must be accurately distinguished from those which occur only in individual forms. Though the former class of changes will be here principally treated, yet in order to afford a proper connection between them, that which occurs universally will be first treated of, and that which takes place in special and individual cases will be appended, either independently or in remarks.

12.

Changes of the Consonants.

those changes in the radical consonants which Hebrew grammarians classify as Assimilation, Transposition, Falling

Of

CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS.

87

away, Exchange, and Addition, the first only is wanting in And this want is only in form, for in point of fact Syriac. this feature exists in those cases where a letter is dropped in pronunciation by the occurrence of Linea occultans (^ 8. comp. Gesenius, Lehrgebaude, p. 132). Here should be noticed the following
1. Consonants are dropped in pronunciation, by the In Oeneral ; occurrence of Linea occultans, as follows A)
:

a) in

nouns whose middle radical

b) >

is

doubled
e.

e. g.
;

mano ;

without a vowel before 2;

,

12,**
Q

c)
%.

Ol in
f

suffixes of the 3 masc. sing. wiOl

..lOlO

woUb,

wiOiCu.

of

the verb, and

i
*,

uOlQ

of the noun plural

(v.

Table to

16); or

when Linea occultans has arisen from theGreek Spirilus asper;

* c

e.g.
ff

^LDOOl>
p

Pw|jw]

(I)

O in derivatives of verbs ^^aand

In particular
*

\S>,

<

as (jijoo* V"

from

1^
*

B)
"
*i
,

is

this the case

a)

with
s*

1
,

'^

initial

in

^-^l
-

^-***!

**J|

t>

an d in the pronoun _ *
9
;

Ml in connection with the participle, p] \\+

particularly in the following cases
;

b)

with

Ol.
.

a) in the
*
.

pronouns OOl

and wOI

with the throwing back of the vowel upon the

;

preceding vacant consonant

falling
^ *

e. g.

ooi

A^A

or with the
;

with the preceding vowel e. g. ooi |AO pronounced frsheu; in which case, however, before r

away of the
*

letter

"*>

OOl,
(v.

passes into

e. g.

ooi p|
T 1

^'^*

lor

p|

p) in ]ooi
^'

'

38)

when

il

is

an auxiliary verb;
f

tt

e.g.

(OO1
c)

xs^O
..

he /mil killed]
in ^l]
to

y) in

oou
it

for

OOU fo
(v.

give;

with

go away,
the
1
;

when
e. g.

should have a vowel which

28)
;

falls

back upon

&Sffbt ASif
an<l
in

d) with J in
their plurals

the pronouns AJ]

mase.
fi'in.,

**hl\ fern.,

and

oAj) masc. ,-iAj]

and

sonic other words; e.g. ]Als;

;

and

finally

c)

with

> in

2^3 duiujhUv
nmlrr
,

(v.
|

8).

U.KM.

Linoa occultans
(/
;

is ivt:iinrtl

in

nouns

(Icriv.-d
.

from

those

adiliH-otl undi-r

I-.LT.

jZni>t|

|2>*|

|2omJ^

and ninnv

38
others.
It

CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS.

*
>

**
,

*X

"X

OO1 and w01 when they are used occurs in (j| 16. 1., 54. A. 3. for the logical copula or substantive verb (comp. a and c). In these pronouns, even when they stand pleonastically oo. A), the logical copula is fundamentally involved, as is con(
also
,

firmed by the pleonastic use of ]ool ( 68. A), which verb loses Liuea occultans only when it is used absolutely in the sense of to be, to become, to come to pass ; As to further inflection of
7

bOTU
2.

compare

Transposed

Etihta.- e. g.

for

k is

.LDfl|

2*
29. 1.
is

Rem.

L before

sibilants in Eihpe., Etlipa.,

,

and
7
i

wi^Am] from VCD

changed into
7 7
*>
..

*jjoA] from _oo.

"
]
; ,

is

after

into > after

is

e.

g.

i"^^

?
j

^-?l

for

^-J

1<

^_1^|.

There

no transposition when
;

Z
(v.

doubled in Ethpe. of Verbs 31. 2). j as middle radical

^L
is

and Ql

e.

g.

J>Q...Co22]
;

sometimes transposed
(v.

e. g.

,a3|Zl from
3.
5

|O* Also > in the imperat. from ,.oi)

K

8).

07

for

Dropped 7 fc*J| ^) and

and
;

are

with Linea occultans

radical
]si
;

e. g.

>>J;Q

as

first

in
(

the 1
;

sing. fat. Be.

e. g.

intin.

part. Pa. of
in

Verbs
^}

28. 1)
+*
(

^cb]

for

^oa"!)

and

^>]

for

%a]

b)

and

J as first radical,

and Q as middle radical

and Ql
(

in

Verbs

+*s>

29. 2),

^S

33. 1),

31. 1)

e. g.

Qio fromQ2j.
}iamk>
;

Here belong such

is

nouns as |innV>

for

The same

true also in

respect to the middle radical of

nouns derived therefrom

standing between them
three
;

c)

Verbs ^il ( 34. 1), and the one of two Z without a vowel
jZp** for IZZpAi.
;

e. g.

Also when

L stand together in the fut. pass. e. g. *\&oLL for ^\4oZZZ. Finally Z falls away at the end of the fern, endings
4.
e. g.

ZQ and

AJL

e. g. <*>^\^"> for
;

Zo^ALo.
2

Exchanged are
^iOl] for
f -^

a)
b)

the gutturals

and

before Ol

^011;

in transferring

Hebrew words
into
Z^,

into

Syriac,

passes into >,

^
^

into

-,

-35

sometimes
Ol
;

1 into

and

J
;

also

of verbs

*\y

into

e.

QUIESCENT LETTERS.

89

c) 2, when transposed with sibilants, in the into > and ^, according to Rem. 2. above; over passive, goes 2 in construct state fern., and before suffixes with the ] (t)
(

45,

-46);
;

aud in the Ethpe. and ^Apa. of verbs ^ -*

"

]s>

28.

Rem.
REM.

e. g.

r^ZZf for r^|Z|

has been also applied to nouns derived from
|2>

This
e.g.

last
t

Verbs;
ful
;

JjxlZ.
*f
a r

from **jJ|,

In

many

cases this usage

r
*
'

is

doubt-

e.

g.

Irvi^
T

the form

)">
(

\
is

which may be derived from *

found.
7

<L
\^

or J v t|
\^

Hence

j..

here;
5.

(A^joZ from ^?O|. Added are a) sometimes

e.

^ IL

|Z

The

derivatives from
T

1T

Aphel do not belong

g.

at the beginning, before a

;

vacant consonant
also in
S-aSiw
e. g.

e. g. 2a3} for 2aD Greek words beginning with 2

;

wAl
9

for wiA
i
.

e. g.

I))

oi to denote the Spiritus asper in Greek"

'Pwftaioff
(

^QJ.^OI words

=
;

)jL.k>ooi> "

12. 1.

A.

c);
^

even in compound
*,

words in the
cases

later Syriac; e. g.

DOOUQD
it

tf-jvoiJoj ;

and
;

in

where
*

Ol

does not represent Spiritus asper

c) J is

e. g.

added where
;

supplies the place

-,

of Daghesh forte with Linea occultans

e. g.

'r

21 ^

= TUWi

13.

Quiescent Letters.
,

Tlie
Ol
also,

w. vowel-letters o, 1, and, according to some, in the preceding vowel. quiesce

REM.
ft

Here belongs only Ol

letters
;

for

oi

of the suf. 3 sing. fern.

of the Hebrew.

The following
1.
1 final in
;

quiesce
e. g.
;

and
^o]!sD
,

]3^,

Uy-J
it

medial in this
g.

and
falls

e.g.

D|SD

and

if

have a vowel,
;

back upon
for

the preceding vacant consonant

e.

^lij

^)*J.
*. g.

And
>p

so in words transferred from the

Hebrew;

40
REM.
words
i

VOWEL-LETTERS WHICH ARE NOT SOUNDED.

1
j

quiesces in
on are

y 1 / 1 in pfl.,

P^,
,

f\
|f

77

and

"iV

fl>[

11*

In Greek
|
;

and

represented by
;

ai

sometimes by

e.g.

1Zao]r>
for

xi/3w<ro
e.

fD j|o

xcupoj.

In the later Syriac

stands

a and
2.

o quiesces in Jljooi (3. Eem.

REM.
In
05
e.
;

e.g.

SOOD and sometimes OQ

?

e.g.

4).
,

OQ =
for
ai
;

Greek words O quiesces in

x
e.
-

in the termination
"

pp>r><y>

also

In hCDQ2)| = a^aij. x.7 = kDaL^| 'ASr]vai; DQ3)| =

^

g.

N.g>

= $iXK'of.
r

QDQ

is

also

used
find

%^

g.

the later language

>

we

i>

*i

ap%aff.
1

3.

^.,

medial and
-

final,

quiesces, in

and
;

e.

g.

^.u^, kjJiL..Z1*

initial

usually quiesces in

e. g.
;

V>1^,

and

falls

71
for QlrtO "

back upon the preceding vowelless prefix e. g. 7 T OL^O* Also between two consonants A quiesces ' Vt * \
jA^JJ for jA^J).
(Oliant).

e. g.

14.

Vowel- Letters which are not sounded

j, O,
],

In the following cases

1. ) in

are not sounded

fern.

the pronouns 2 plur.masc. and

^oAj]

^-iAj)

conjoined with the participle

e. g.

to denote the present

kotelitun, in

tense,

toAj]

^\fto pronounced

which case the

^ of the participle is not sounded. at the end of words ; a) in verbal endings 2. O and w without any vowel preceding (2 pret. sing. fern. ; 3 plur. masc. and fern.: imperat. sing. fern, and plur. masc. and 2
;

fat. sing, fern.)

e. g.

^lAL^fi
,

0^4
is

&)

n the suffixes
fol)

^^a

n>.
*

wkOiQ
~
e.

where w.
OOl

sounded only when

c

lowed by 001
.

g.
.

li^O pronounced bekyu ;

and the
like,

in

\V)Z] yesterday,

i\
(

rest,

which form

]1 in

the emphatic state

46. 1).

CHANGES
15.

IN T1IK VOWELS.

41

Although

Changes in the Vowels. to a less extent than in Hebrew, the

vowels

in

Syriac, undergo various changes and modifications in pect to formation and derivation, still they are exchan>/l.
transposed, dropped or
I.

add"

I.

exchanged partly in accordance with tli<_They genius of the language, and partly in transferring Hebrew and Chaldee words. The genius of the language requires the following exchanges of vowels a) in the preformativ ~
are
;

of the
+*S)
,

fut.

and infm. Pe. in simple

32),

syllables,
;

in

Verbs

(U-*

passes over into

> at

e. g.

^D)J,

rS]io
;

but before gutturals and

>r

the end of words, into

e.g.

for jf

b) in the feminine
'
;

with
e. g.

V, .90
^04

in the con-

struct state, passes over into

construct state

In transferring words from the Hebrew and the Chaldee, following vowel changes may be noted a) for

Ao4

45. 2).

the Syriac prefers

6)
is

e.

g.

M VI
\\

= nb} ^M = 0~i^ XT-:

5
r.

names mostly with exchanged in proper * *

with
;

e.

g.

**A2Lt

= nSlSP

e. g.

c)

1 with

Q-

c.

g.

l*?OO

= ^'i

or with

Q_

e. g.

]k>CLt

= (ChaKl.
in the iin-

2.

Vowels are transposed

A)

in general; a)
is

perat. plur. masc. Pe.

when
;

a suffix

added

e. g.

n ^ n ^P,
tl

with suffix woi ciL^ao

6)

concerning the falling back of

13.

u-

vowel over
52. 1;

ever

is

A^ll for

3; ^, OH, upon prefixes, compare Rem. B) in Particular ; a) in ^l), win-nvacant, the vowel of the ^ falls back upon it e.g. ASlI (12.1); b) in some nouns of the form ^OfO.

},

or

1.

53.1.

when

a syllable
(

is

U?QO

45. 3

appended and in the emphatic state of the form 48. A. Decl. IV) Ijoa.
;
;

emphatic state
pn>lixcd,
;

]Xoa
placed
7

is

^OOb and VOfOO with .^ before Q wlu-n Q and > retain tlu-ir
r)

in

e.

ir

^DQQ^

T-VoonVw.

In ,1

whon

it

enters

int..

42
composition,
3.

CHANGES

IN"

THE VOWELS.
;

moves forward upon r e. g. ^-kOpl, l^Orl* The vowel of a final mixed syllable is dropped, wKen an entire syllable is added at the end, especially when
the last radical begins the

new

syllable

e. g.

in the verb

masc.

HEM.

A&jQ fern.; in the nouns This vowel remains unchanged a)

;

when merely a
;

formative

letter, without a vowel, is added ; e.g. ClX^,O from ^j^O b) a syllable is added, if the stem-syllable remain a mixed one ;

when
e.

g.

from

o^O

and moreover

c)

when
)

the following cases ; of the 3 fem.plur.pret.and 2 fern. plur. imperat;

in

becomes a simple one,

forte stands

the stem-syllable in the second form

/3)

where inHebrew

Daghesh
^0

e.

g.

^Ql emphatic
-p
7

state

/)in words ofDeclension I.masc. (comp.

7
.

48.A).

In

^i\

emphatic

state

(1 *,S;

iOQj emphatic

state

0Q-, the

original vowel only

reappears (comp. 48. A. Decl. IV).

4.

Vowels are added ;

;

a) with

1,

*, and

i,

at the begin;

ning of words
7

*
;

and 1 usually take I

wi

and
i*
;

e.g.
I
;

^QD\
of two
takes
7 g

(imp.), >Oll

but
y

usually takes
-p
7

e. g.

JDAj

b)

vacant consonants at the beginning of a word,the *

first

y
f

e. g.

vf>*"> for

(Vf>~>

so also

when two vacant

P
(>.

consonants in the middle of a word follow

for

e. g.

|A>j^j

IA.MJO
e.
;

or

when

in

Hebrew, the

first

has Daghesh

from tl^K or finally when VAytf three vacant consonants would come together in the middle
forte
g.

ft,.") for

of a
is

word

e. g.
T

Al^L^t
;

for
*

AS&of.

This assumed vowel

.

.7

.7
;

sometimes
(v.

e.g.

before A,

13.
fern.

the participle

* from \v4^ in the emphatic state of 3), excepting and pass, of Verbs |] in Pa., Aph.,

&.QO

(pret. PC.)

where is added to distinguish it from the^active Eshta., 48. B. Decl.IV. Kern.). Finally Q is asparticiple (comp. sumed in the emphatic state sing, of some words ; e. g.
")'A^Q2iS>

from ]3aLo for "jAlaSo c) a vowel is assumed this vowel is _I_ with Q between two vacant consonants e. g. :vhen it stands at the beginning of a mixed syllable
; :

CHANGES IN THE VOWELS.

j
;

43
e. g.

but

when

it

stands in a simple syllable

d) The assumption of a vowel is arbitrary, when there are two vacant consonants, of which the first can be attached to the preceding, and the second to the following
syllable
;

e.

g.

VQ,V)

and )A.O^D;

if

the second consonant

f

be

must be assumed, for .*., Q and 1, without a vowel between two consonants.

cannot stand

PART SECOND.
ETYMOLOGY,
OR,

PARTS OF SPEECH.

CHAPTEK L

PRONOUNS.

16.

Personal and Possessive Pronouns.

:

The Personal Pronouns are divided into two classes Separate Pronouns, which stand as separate words, and and Suffixes, consisting of mark the nominative case
;

syllables

formed from the separate pronouns, which are appended to other parts of speech appended to Verbs, they mark the accusative appended to nouns, the possessive
; ;

tions,

pronoun, or the relation of the genitive they form the remaining cases.

and, with preposi-

TABLE OF PRONOUNS AND SUFFIXES.

TABLE OF PRONOUNS AND SUFFIXES.

SUFFIXED TO VERBS.

8CFFIXED TO NOONS.
IK

Sim.

In

-*

Sing.
1
C.

1.

2.

2 m.
2 f
.

OOI
3 m.

01OOI

01-

f.

Ol

01

01

OU.

Plur.
7

c.
.

in.

.on*.

2 f

SEPARATE FROM THE VERB.

3 m.

OOI

,-UOI
f.

QL*.

46 REMARKS AND EXPLANATIONS CONCERNING THE TABLE.

REMARKS AND EXPLANATIONS CONCERNING THE TABLE.
I.

Tke Personal Pronoun.

third persons have

The second and

first
is

two genders, while the

sing.,

.7

person is denoted by

of the

common
+*.
t>

appended
fern.,

gender. The fern, of the 2 to the masc. In the 3

sing.

001 masc. and wOl

X

are used rather in a

I

demon-

strative sense, while ooi masc. and aOT fern., are used in connection with adjectives and participles rather to designate the present tense. And so in the plur., the first forms given above are used rather substantively as nominatives, and the second as accusatives (comp. 36). Concerning Linea occultans under 1 and Ol of the 1 and 3 sing., see 12.1.
II.

Suffix Pronouns.

A.

SUFFIXES

OF THE VERB.

In the suffixes, or abbreviated forms of the separate pronouns, an ancient obsolete form whose characteristic was not 2 but D, lies at the basis of the 2 sing, and plur. (comp. Gesen. Lehrgeb. 203).
suffixes to verbs, given in the Table, those marked two classes ; the first of which are attached to consonants (with the exception of ) in the forms of the regular
a, fall into
^

Of the

verb

and the second mainly

to the

to the

same forms of Verbs

]),

and in part

imperat. and

fut.

of the regular verb.

The forms placed between 1 and 2, are common to both. The suffixes marked b are appended to forms with Q and Where this form is A, which then quiesce in _1 and _L.
wanting under b it is comprehended under a. Finally the and also to suffixes under c are attached to the forms with ^, The forms wanting the ii sing. masc. and 3 plur. fem. pret. under c are comprised under a. On their mode of union, 36, and 37, and the accompanying Tables. comp.
1

B.

SUFFIXES OF NOUNS or POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

The
in

suffixes of the

noun

nouns masc.

sing.,

(possessive pronouns) are attached, to the emphatic state ( 45,) with the

SUFFIXES TO PARTICLES.

47

e.g. ,AV) away, of \emphatic state *) Vf)> In the with suflT. plural they coalesce with the endfalling
; ,

ing of the construct state

-.,

so that they

may be
;

considered
construct

as attached to the final consonant of the

state
-

noun

e.g.

^V^n with

suff.

"iVv~

Only

in the 3 sing. masc.

does

jk

pass into Q,

and

in the 3 sing. fern.

_L

is

the union
is

vowel.

In the noun

fern,

the suffix with a union vowel

attached to the emphatic state,

I
,

with the falling away of

state

e.

g.

oiA^oAo from emphatic

]A^oAo.

In

the remaining persons (1 sing. 2 and 3 plur.) suffixes sing. e. g. 46. 2) are attached to the construct state (v.
;

*jASoA^ from
from construct

the construct state

state

A^oAo,

plur.

^^DA^oAc

A^oAo.

REM. For the complete union of nouns and suffixes, compare 46 48, and the accompanying Tables. Besides, the possessive pronoun may be expressed in a
separate form from the noun,

(from

>

"ittfja

chald.

i 1}

by means of some form of and ^ ) with a suffix, thus

Singular.

Plural.

2.

^i-lNo
^_OlXj>

<QQAjj
jOOl\j>

your.
their.
j

'>.

<JLl->

/ier.

Ou^i>

A/x.

REM.

This form, which corresponds with the

I
T

German der meinige

;

(mine)etc. occurring after a suffix to the

T
<r-

noun, indicates an emphasis

e. g.

v^-^t)

,ij
e.

AV^\Zo,

but thy scholars.

to us.

Sometimes

it

signifies

relating to;

g.

^Qn\j>
G.

SUFFIXES TO PARTICLES.

The

Prepositions,

which were

take suffixes sing, and plur.

in part originally nouns, Singular suffixes are attached

48
to

OTHER PRONOUNS.
JS
in,

the sign of the dative,

after,

2oL

to,

^D

from,
15.

jAcQQ and jAa

2.

\>,*Snn\ towards, against, comp.

Plural suffixes are attached to

without,
Jr** or *J9,-K about,
after,

>QM>-^O

aside,

only
>]

,S\Q
or

*?\\**for,

^^ over,

yj.

towards^

io^o

oe/ore,

2ox2

(AjjaZ before

nouns) under.

The
e.

suffix plural

fern,

occurs with

^&k>

ow account of ;

g.

oA^Lo

with both plural suffixes

compare the Table

and Ai
REM.
belonging to

."> between.
suffixes,

For the complete union with

52.

17.
1.

6Mer Pronouns.
is

The Demonstrative Pronoun

Plural.
C.

declined as follows
Singular.
F.

F.

M.

M.

(,6.)

(>

REM.

Sometimes, in the
-\

sing.,
.

the

fern.

(>O1
I

is

united with the

personal pronoun 3 sing, masc.

^

OO1 and fem.

^
;

*jOl, forming
-.

70 QJO1 and
this,

wC7l|)C7I.
"

~>

Sometimes OO1 and ^O1 precede

<Ais.

e.g.

pOl

OOljiist

(JO! ^01,/MS^

ti7

The Chaldee ^--^l

7

f^

^
7

is

only used in compari-

sons;
2.

e.

g.

^i\|

y^|>,

or

^\O1

^*J!>

WCft.
is -7
(

The

Relative for all

numbers and genders 7

7

J,

"

which, that,
pi.
*P

cow. preceding,
*7

and with the pronouns ^So M-] it becomes interrogative.

c.

r/2.

H /
it,

REM.
3.

|L| having

a relative signification with J following

rule.

is

an exception to the general

The

Interrogative
is

a) for persons of both genders

It unites

and

numbers

^0 who.

with ooi following, and

II

IK

VERB

GENERAL VIEW.

49
I) lib
T

forms oilo and ]L*\ masc.

who? VrO &" who?

1 -

and

TD

what, refer to things both persons and things.

4.

Jiib, iOLo

c)

'^'] refers to

The Reciprocal and Reflexive Pronouns are formed 21. 2. 22. 2. 24. 2), or by the nouns ( l*U soul, and ]V>Oin person, with suffixes appended
partly by passives

(comp. the Syntax).

CHAPTER
THE VERB.
18.

II.

General View.

1. The Verb is, as in Hebrew, the most important of the parts of speech, since it lies at the basis of the formation of the others. Verbs may be divided into the three following classes, in so far as new verbal forms are derived from them

in

accordance with definite laws, or as a noun

a)
7

is

to

be
to
;

considered as their stem:

'write,
1>

Primitives',

e.

g.

*oAD

VH&O
J

to

Mil

5)

Verbal Derivatives (Conjugations)

;

c.

g. *ojl to justify,

from *D>1
;

c)
7

Denoiiiumtu'tt*, Bnltteqnent
7
T

formations from nouns

7
fc^

e.

g.

;fiQ^ to tithe,
t>

from paoi ten

.*)]
'2.

to celebrate

Easter, from
in

j**^

Easter.

The Stem-form

the 3 sing.

masc. pret.

consists

usually of three radicals (verbum triliterum),

and

is

pronoun-

ced as a monosyllable, by the help of

placed over the

middle radical intransitive, and

3.

in intransitive verlx.

Derivatives or Conjugations, which agree closely with the ground-form in the inflection "f persons, and the principal characteristics mood and tense. Modem graniniariaus have added a third conjuo;ation, Shaphel, to the two originally derived from the groima-form.
this are fornu-d
flu(

From

.t'

The passive

formed by prefixing Z|, and has not only a nassive but also a reciprocal and ivtlexive signitication.
is

^>

">0

THE REGULAR VERB.

The Conjugations
Active.
1.

are

as

follows

Passive.
to

Peal
Pael

,0

kill;*

Ethpeel
; ;

2. 3.

^\&O

to
to

murder

Ethpaal Ethtaphal

Aphel
Shaphel

^&o)

cause to kill

^^n* to cause to kill

(rare) Eshtaphal

REM.

All verbs

do not have the whole of the conjugations; and

is
T

wherePael andAphel are found together, there

77
7

usually a difference
to be

in their signification;

e.

'

g. r

d*

to

honor, J-DO|

burdensome.

4.
terit

The

Syriac,

like the other Semitic dialects, has a Pre-

and Future. It has, moreover, an Imperative in the passive, and two Participles, an active and a passive, in the active. The Hebrew Infinitive absolute and Infinitive construct are in Syriac united in one form (v. 19.B.3).
REM. manner

The other
;

relations of time are supplied in the following

is

the Present

expressed by the participle with the personal

001 It

The Optative and Subjunctive^

the former joined with the participle, the latter with the preterite. are contained in the future, to denote which more explicitly, (OO1 is also frequently used (v.Syntax).
5. Verbs, finally, are divided into two principal classes, In regular verbs the radical letters Regular and Irregular. remain unchanged, while in irregular' verbs, one of the radicals either falls away (Defective Verbs), or quiesces (Quies-

cent Verbs) v.

27.

1.

REGULAR VERBS.
Regular Verbs in General.
tense,

19.

The

Inflection of

The formation of Verbs, in respect to person, mood is effected, in general, by uniform laws.

and
irre-

The

gular verbs are formed in a different manner, in particular

The infinitive being considered in English the *Literally, he killed, etc. is ground-form of the verb, and for the sake of brevity, uniformly used to TR. represent the Syriac ground form 3 masc. sing.

REGULAR VERBS.

51

It will therefore cases only, according to their special laws. be most convenient to treat, under the regular verb, of whatever belongs to the universal analogy of the verb.

In the following Tables of the Inflection of Kegular and Irregular Verbs, the following signs are used The radical The vowels which stand immeletters are denoted by *. the over *, diately belong to the inflection of transitive verbs; and those vowels which are separated from the * by .... belong to intransitive or guttural verbs, or denote Radical letters which have fallen other forms in erjual use. in of Irregular Verbs, the Table are denoted 27 by away, Those which take their place, stana over this sign.
:
.

52

TABLE OF PERSONAL INFLECTIONS.

8 O S
p^

^
o 02

W
An

O W H? w <1 H

fe

TABLE OF THE TEMPORAL INFLECTION OF KEOULAB VERBS. 53

g w

w w H O
hrt

54

PERSONAL
A.

INFLECTIONS.
1).

Personal Inflections (comp. Table

The
are

inflection of persons is

found in

its

most simple form

and imperative, where formative syllables appended only to the stem (Affirmatives). In the future the form is more complex, additions being received at the beginning (Preformatives\ and at the end. The inflection
in the preterit
is

as

follows

In the 3 sing. pret. the simple verbal stern suffices for the masc.; but in the fern., 2, preceded by _!_ (= n~)> i g appended and considered as a sign of that gender. The 3 plur., which has a two-fold gender, is distinguished in the masc. by the addition of the plural-sign Q, from which the fern, in its simple form is distinguished only by a silent - instead In the same person of the fut. the inquiry into the of Q of the preformative J in the sing. masc. and the plur. origin masc. and fern., is a difficult one. The opinion that the J had its origin in * is opposed by the fact that among the Zabians this preformative exists, while there is no similarity between those two letters. More consideration is probably
*
&
-X
>

due to the derivation from poi and ^QJOI (comp.

the
plur.,

17).

In

the masc., in addition to the preformative J, is distinguished as in the pret., by the plural-sign Q with ^ paragogic, which causes the vowel of the last radical syllable And thus the ^ in the fern, reminds one of to fall away. the paragogic final syllable H5 in Hebrew. The abbreviated

form of the personal pronoun evidently appears in the 2 Thus in the pret. sing., L masc. and .-/ sing, and plur.
\\\ masc. and uAj] fern., as ,oZ masc. ~ ~**A"lT A" n* and ^_Z fem. are to ^pAj) masc. and ^Ajj fem. in the plur. The same is true of the preformative L in the same person of the fut. sing, and plur. where the fem. sing., in order to designate the gender, takes wi final and ^ paragogic, with a like influence upon the vowel of the preceding radical

fem. are related

*1

>

In the plur. the 2 pers. shares with the 3 pers., syllable. this same character at the end. In the I sing. pret. the original form of the L with _L
if|

preceding, has not been

T
-

shown.

But

in the plur.

^ and

^J,

as well as

before the

INFLECTION OF THK TENSES

1 sing,

AND MOODS.
more

~>

and

J before the 1 plur. tut. refer us the

defi-

and ^J**. Here too it should be noticed nitely back to that the 1 plur. tut. is distinguished from the 3 sing. masc.

which has the same form, by Ribui.

The prefbrmatives of the fut. uniformly take except in Pael and Shaphel, where (with the exception of the 1. sing.)
they are vacant, and in Aphel, where they take _. The imperative coincides with the future in respect to formatives at the end, except that the paragogic ^ in the 2 sing. fern, and 2 plur. masc. falls away, the former person ending in the feminine sign -, and the latter in the plural
sign

In.

both cases in Peal,

is

retained as the vowel

of the radical syllable. Finally the fern. plur. ends with and the vowel of the final syllable is retained.

^*

B. Inflection of the Tenses and Moods (comp. Table

1.

11).

With the

preterit

(the

characteristics

of which

are

more

specifically

given in Table 11. and the section following),

the imperative most nearly coincides.

receives, in
radicals,

The imperat. IV-il Verbs Med. A, between the second and thinl but in Yerbs Med. E. and 3 Q quiescing in
;

Gutt. the

All the remaining imperatives are like preterits, except that in Ethpe. and Ethpa., Linea occultans stands under the middle radical
7

middle radical takes

with REM.
and
J. ] 2.

preceding. The same holds good

if

in respect to the imperatives Ethta.

Eshta.,

Linea occultaus be admitted in them

The future is formed from the imperative by prefixing In Aphel the characteristic falls away, and in passives
.

In Ethpe. and Ethpa. after of the formative syllable 2] the rejection of Linea occultans, the vowels of the preterite re-appear. 3. The infinitives (of which the simple form denotes the

gerund

in do or the absolute state, but with \ pivtixed denotes the construct state) are formed from tin- preterites by prefixing Lo. They end (excepting in the Peal, \vlu-iv they
t

coincide precisely with the preterit)

in

Q and
,

in the apoco-

56

THE GROUND FORM PEAL.

pate feminine form, in

syllable of the preterit

2a

changing the vowel of the

i

last

into

4. The participles are formed from the preterit as folin peal, active form, the first radical takes -2-, and lows in the passive form *..*_ is inserted between the second _L the last two radicals. In the other conjugations So is prefixed, and _L, in the second syllable of the active form, is But this distinction appears changed, in passives, into _L only in the absolute state of the masc., and even here is lost in verbs 3 Gutt., >, and oi, the active form of which like;

wise takes
5.

_!_

The preformatives of the fut, infin., and part, mostly take JL. but in Aphel they take _L. rejecting the ] accor;

ding to No. 2 a vowel.

and in Pael and Shaphel they are without

REM. For the reciprocal use of these twoTables, which suffice for the complete formation of the regular verb, it is to be remarked ; The forms in that Table I. contains the personal inflection of Peal. Table II. in the inflection according to Table I., retain their characteristic vowels,

and merely take from Table

I.

the aftbrrnatives with

the vowels thereto belonging. Where, in pret. Peal, the vowel of the stem falls away, the remaining preterits also lose the vowel of the but Ethpe. takes 7 over the first radical,where last radical syllable
;

this

has _L in Peal.*

In the
9,

fut.

the vowel of the last radical

lost syllable is uniformly

where

Q falls

away

in Peal, except that in

this case also in Ethpe.the first radical takes

_L

In imperatives the
X

vowel of the
imperat.

last radical syllable is retained, as

is

retained in the

Peal.

20.

A.

THE GROUND FORM PEAL

SIGNIFICATION.

ITS

FORMATION AND

1. The usual form of Peal is *\&O (transitive verb mcd. A). Besides this the form with _i (med. E) is always used

*Tho
in

inflection of the different persons in the preterit order to perceive the verification of this remark. TR.

should be noticed

ITS
for intransitives

FORMATION AND SIGNIFICATION.

;

57

e.

g.

*oAft

to *//,

J3\&

to be

near.

To

this

class also
first

belong Verbs ],
;

which throw back

upon the

radical
*\y
;

e. g.

>)a

to feel

pain, or derivatives of

Hebrew
still

Verbs

e. g.

zfy

= m't>
T m

Tne form Med.

O.

ap-

pears in the Verb >Q2iO to shudder. REM. With the inflection of Verbs Med.A. agree those with 3
y

rad.

Ol
+

e. g.

OliO
in

to

name,

OlioZ
r

to

admire.

Verbs Med. E. retain

In
;U|
''

when

Verbs Med. A.

stands in the radical syllable.

-

iv- >rrt
1

to the forms of the 3 plur. fern. pret.

^&

r>
,

^5*"*
(J

^5

adduced by Buxtorf, the

first is

found only in Verbs

and
ik

the second seems to have originated from crasis with the alHx

_O1.
placed

There are instances to be found, though

over the third radical in the 1 plur.
*

rare, in

which

is

the infinitive with

*
T
1>

Q is

also

^\^Q The apocopate form of sometimes found in Peal e.g. Luke ix.
;

33.

Q;2lklJi.
;

quiesces in
(p.

***>. dAd^O.
e.g.
7
.

In the imperat.plur.masc. with

paragogic,

final

Besides the 2 plur.fera.with ^k,

:

Amira
*

300) adduces another form,viz

*

.iSQ^D* The imperat.ofVerbs

transitive

Med. E.takes
also
n

instead of
.

though the
tk

form with

is

found
;

e.g.
e.

occurs

QfDO^O from JD^O* Sometimes another form with More rarely the vowel of the g. Rom. xiii. 3. r^l*
fut.

imperat. differs from that of the

as in the

Verb

^tyj, fut.

^1 P,

imperat.^1* Not only the imperat. but the fut

fut.

of Verbs Med.E. and

;

of those having the third rad. a guttural, take 3 sing. fern, the form with - attached is

e.g.

^M*U.

In th-

more

frequent.

Also

a form of the

fat.

with

e.

g.

.n.Sl

together will:

Instead of the part. act. vt^O, the participial

noun of the
tin-

emphatic

state

|J-x>,

is

often used.

In the part. act.

;

emphatic
active
*

state masc.

and the

absol. fern, are alike

xiv. 67),

e.

if
form

g.
(

|J

^f)

The
\\ith

(verse 54), is ji.'rhajis to be regarded as an error in in intransitive \.rl-s passive form is always fully written
;

^*x

(Mark

in

iinincilialf

..niiccticn

^>xB transcribing. The

tin' first

radical

sometimes takes

Passsive intransitives occasionally occur in

58
an active
bearing,
sense,
I .V

DERIVATIVE CONJUGATIONS.
sometimes derived from transitives
holding.
;

e.

g.

H-^|

To the inflection of the participle belongs also the idiom by which the present tense is expressed by abbreviated perple.

sonal pronouns, appended, like afformatives, to the particiBut this formation occurs only in the 2 sing, and the 1 and 2. plur. masc. and fern., and is as follows :
Participle Passive.
Participle Active.

2. From the preceding remarks it appears that the signifi cation of Peal may be transitive or intransitive. Sometimes we find both forms in the same verb. In some cases there
is

ms\ and rf>S\ to e. g. no difference of signification chew ; and in other cases there is a difference in signification;
;

e.g.

*y*^>

to divide,

*Mt2>

to be

divided.

B.

DERIVATIVE CONJUGATIONS.
21.

Ethpeel
as in the other
*

1.

The

characteristic of this conjugation,

?v*

the formative syllable \ and the vowel or in passives, Verbs 3 Rad. Gutt. _L, in the last syllable (vid. Amira, The passive conjugations are distinguished from p. 278). each other generally by the vowels over the radical letters, or by the addition of 2. (Ethta.) or by the insertion of *
is

(Eshta.}.

REM.

The

first

Upon the transposition of the sibilants with Z see 12. 2. radical takes y in the 3 sing. fern, and 1 siug. pret., in all

of the imperat., in the 2 sing. fern, and 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fern.

DERIVATIVE

CONJUGATIONS.

59

of the future, and finally in the part,

excepting the absolute state

masc.

According

to others
;

is

used,

but only in Verbs

Pk even

e. when 1 falls away ASA*|. This g. Acts. xx. 27. usage however is confirmed neither by examples nor by Amira. The 3 sing. tern, and 1 sing. pret. the imperatives, 2 sing. fern, and 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fern, of the fut. and the part, excepting the absolute masc. cannot be distinguished, according to Lud. de Dieu p. 217, from llif same persons of Ethpa. excepting when the first radical is an aspirate, which, in Ethpa. becomes hardened. The passive form
;

A|^1

^4>o2l
JL_
is

'

not mentioned by Amira.

In the

Verb

ff\ lf

ib

in Ethpe., infinitive

inserted
is

between the two

;

final radical letters.

The

however
2.

excepted

e.g. pret.

.m*^^Zj
;

infinit.

orozi^AiD.
e.g.

The
?

signification of Ethpe. is
b) reflexive;
c)
e. g.

a] jiassive of Peal;
to

^\4o|
x
*

iD>Z|

reflect
;

by or

ones self;
..*
* l

= Peal
d)
to be

in intransitive verbs

e. g.

upon and
;

<fiL\ to

return ;

sometimes Ethpe.

is

passive of Aph.

e.g.

^o_..A|

embarrassed, from

22.

Pael and Ethpaal

1. Both of these conjugations are characterized by _1 in the penultimate, and _^_, in Pa., in the ultimate syllable. The vowel is changed into _L, in Verbs 3 Rad. Gutt. or >, as it is in the The preformative 1 of the 1 sing.fut. passive. Pa. alone takes _l (comp. 19. A. and B. 5). The imperat. Ethpa. with Linea. occultans and the part. fern. Ethpa. are like the same forms in Ethpe.

REM.

The

passive form

4o|
only in

does not occur in Amira.

p.

It is
f r

*.*

rejected also

by Euxtorf.

Amira remarks,

339, that in

i>O-*J >Z|.
ix.

the second radical takes

I

the imperat. (vid. Matt.

19. B.4.

27).

Concerning the part. act. and pass, in Pa. vid.

7

The form

^*-'r^ (Mark.

x.

1C

in pret.
x r

Pa. must be considered as an incorrect

is

Diode of writing, since ^CLtfO (verse 32)

a participial noun.

60
2.

APHEL AND ETHTAPHAL.

The
to

signification
to be

of Pa.

is

a)
to

causative
b)

e.

g.

^\li>
e.g.

cause
to

afraid,

from ^**>
to

fear ;
<;)

Ma^
7

overwhelm from ^li

press;
to

intensive ;

Pe.; e.g.
;

and nal
to

to

Hss

rf)

to

AotoJ forth,

declare

e.

g.

pronounce just.
;

The

signification of Ethpa. is
to be

a) passive

of Pael o>2]
to be

e. g.

^&o2]
i.

murdered ;
c)

to

wonder within
to

one's self;

= Peal;

b) reciprocal; e. g.
e. g.

made

blush,

e. to

blush

23.

Aphel and Ethtaphal.

1. Aphel is characterized by } placed before the stem, After the preformatives of the fut., which quiesces in _L infinit. and part., ] falls away, and its vowel falls back upon

the preformative. occurs in the second syllable, and, only is _L found in that in Verbs 3 Bad. Gutt. and J syllable.
,

In the passive, to compensate for the loss of the characteristic ] of Aph., L mit _L is inserted between the stem and the
formative syllable of the passive Z]
7

The

..
;

able takes

e.g.

.> xy^oZZf*
T

final radical syll-

7j

REM.

The

characteristic

of

Aph.

is

retained after the preforTl

mative, in verbs, which lose a radical letter

e.g.

_*~K(^
;

from

(^M
or

Under the same

&
t\

rule should be placed

y

Verbs |l

e.

g.
is

*A2p

T*

k*^iJ

But the Verbs o*.2s|

to be able,

and

v*A|

to drink,

do

not belong here, since _2_ already re-appears over ( They are rather forms of Pe. with | prosthetic, as is also shown by their further for7
-n

4k

mation
P.

e.g. fut.
7

*O.J,

infinit.

Qn^aV)

(comp.

20.Rem.), part.

and the passive ..**^A"j. In respect to the participles of 22. 1. Rem. compared with Aphel the same rule holds good as in 19. B. 4. Buxtorf and others do not recognize the passive. Lud. de Dieu p. 238, approves of the abridged imperat. with Lin. occult.

-"^*

SHAPHEL AND ESHTAPHAL.

61

Later Grammarians however doubt the correctness of

this

form (Comp.

8.

Rem.).

2.
e. g.

The

signification
to

of Aphel

is

a) causative as in Pael
it

wi A^l

briny forward ;
;

and then
to

frequently takes
*

two accusatives

e. g.

*Q^

cause

to

put on (something *
|

b) imperative or permissive ; e. g. %1D> upon some one) to suffer to mount a horse ; c) intransitive ; e. g. ^oJ*10} to be Pael ; e. g. ^**> and ^I*>] to frighten. The weak ; d)
;

passive has either the passive signification of

* x
*.

Aphel or
to

co-

incides with Pe.; e.g.

*oA*

to dwell,

*oZoZZ|

keep house.

24.
1.

Shaphel and Eshlaphal.

Shaphel

is

one of the conjugations, admitted into the

(

paradigm

at a later period

18. 3).
_ZL

Its characteristic is

with _L prefixed to the stem, and inflection it coincides with Aphel.

in the last syllable.

in the last syllable. In

In the passive (Eshtaphal) occurs the transposition of * and L and _L appears

The preformative of Shaphel, like that of Pael, takes _L only in the 1 sing. fut. REM. In verbs which lose a radical letter, this conjugation someT

times furnishes a

new stem

e.

g.
is

Xlu.*

to be black,

from

Shaph. of i>o!U. The same

furnishes the
2.

true in Eshtaphal.

Thus

new

quadriliteral

The

signification of these

wT^A*). two conjugations

Sliaphel
is,

is

similar to

that of
still

Aph. and Ethtaphal.

)

in the
fall
;

examples
6)

extant;
e. g.

causative
to

e.g. ^\ir*

to let

inten-

sive;

.^Sn.,*

exchange, from

.^Sn

to cJt(in<j>.

Kshta-

phal has sometimes a passive and sometimes

signification
to
;

a reciprocal
to err,

or

it

forms iutransitives

%t
;

e.g.

^..jAsf

sin.

62
25.

OTHER CONJUGATIONS AND QUADRILITERALS.

Conjugations occasionally used and Quadriliteral Verbs. The occasional conjugations (vid. Agrell in Otiolis Syr. p. 28 sq.) are similar to Pa. and Aph. and take, for the most
part, their signification.

They

are also to be considered as

initial,
*

quadriliterals.
letters

To
,

Lo

CO

2,

verbs, which take the and are,

;

prosthetic
y

A. similar to Aphel, belong

poor, pass.

a)

Maphel,
b)
,

^mV)

to

make
to

^QCQksZ]

to

become poor ;
=====

Saphel,
pass.

JDOl^fi

permit

to

hasten
;

and
7

to

hasten

*S01 i)

^^oAco')

to

persecute

c] Thaphel, ,^f)\L
1*

to teach.

^""

REM.

For ^.LOiOl

(wA|

vid.

23.

Rem.) no

special

form can

be assumed, as similar examples do not occur.

B. Similar to Pael are those conjugations which insert ' == *, So, r Q, after the first radical viz.; a) Pauel Poel,
,

.77

usually transitive
to

e.

g. J *

Q yt
vk

to

chew

the cud,
7
;

pass.
7

jjOoZ]
to suffer ;

become divided

b) Paiel, transitive
to

e. g.
;

}*">m

c)

Pamel
7

e.g.
7

^mVu

remain

d) Parel

^ir^

to

dance,

pass. iOj;.iZ|

to

be cut off.

C.
iteral

Not very
X

different

from the

last are also

verbs with prosthetic j and

final

^,

viz.
I
7

the quadril===== ; a) Pali

j*<
.

Pael; e.g.
wifJi

wAxa
b)

to

domesticate,
1>

pass.

*jA^OI| to converse 77
pass,

one ;

Palen, ^*-o

to be

master,

^a iZ]
y

to

malce

one a master.

D. Here belong quadriliterals with a radical doubled

Pilel

=
to

and Pilpel
;

a) Palel

= Pael

1>

e. g.

j^Cll

to

reduce

slavery
finally
;

b)
c)

Pealel with

its pass. S>Q>>to>>.*2] to

e.

dream,
to heal,

and
pass.

Palpel (in

Verbs Mi);

g.

Xu&Sooo

^iiZfto
RKM.
also

be broken.

Those verbs, which are compounded of two ground forms,

belong here

77^

e.

g.

;Wl(^|

to blush,
(e.g.

from

MSo^

and fi*.

In

quadriliterals

formed from the Greek

Q^A)

to elect

a Bishop).

VERBS WITH GUTTURALS.

a letter of the ground form frequently
to

63
falls

away

e. g.

appoint as Patriarch.

26.

Verbs with Gutturals.

Since the peculiarities of Guttural Verbs, are not marked in Syriac, as in Hebrew, either by Daghesh forte or Sheva, the irregularities in verbs of which the first and second radicals are gutturals are entirely

wanting

and those only, of

a guttural or >, deviate, and those in but very few cases from the regular verb, in connection with which these deviations have already been cited. (Con-

which the third

radical

is

For 28, 30, 32). cerning Verbs Ja, K, and 11* compare more convenient reference, these cases of deviation are here
brought together.
perat.Peal,

These verbs take

1) inthefut.
;

and im-

instead of

e. g., fut.

>r*J

in like

manner

in the other conjugations,

and

imperat. >,; 2) in the part

act. Peal,
e. g.

they exchange the _i of the

act. Peal, jiol;

last syllable for

_L

part

pret.

Ethpe.

rr
T.
T

* T

.*

o)2ti

fat-

Pa. pret. >,*, fut. >r*J,

imperat. >,, part.act.

r

& pass.

>

Aph.
pass.

Pret. ^l>f,

fut.

*^

^l*p,

imperat. ^i>|,

part. act.

and

RKM.
following
to be

In the same manner in

;

Pa. and Ethpa. are formed the

to soil,
1 1

1*2

to console,

{iQ

to defile,

and

adorned (comp.
II.

13. 1.

Rem).

IRREGULAR VERBS.
27.

General

View.

Irregular Verbs, are to be comprehended, those in which there is a change in respect to one of the three letters
1.

Under

of the ground form.

(

Such

letter either quiesces or falls

away
let-

Quiescent

and

Defective Verbs).

verb

in,

which two

64:

IRREGULAR VERBS.
to

ground form are changed is said omalous ( Verbum dupliciter imperfectum).

ters of the
2.

be doubly an-

The
Olaph

Quiescent Verbs
(]a),

are the following

verbs with

1.

rad.

^D^

1. rad.

Jud

(**2>\

(k),

^l;
rad.

med. rad.Vauand Jud (oL,^)

*\ med.rad. Olaph A.VQ. 5>oo

(^ono)

and 3

Olaph

(B) B'yi*

To

defective verbs

belong

those

with

1.

rad.

Nun

and med. rad. doubled (Ul); e.g. (^a); e.g. .o^n,

Here, and frequently in subsequent sections, the designations of classes of verbs are taken from the position of the radicals,

REM.

of the

Verb ^\12)

^3)

^7 which the

variations affecting the

radical letters of irregular verbs are kept in view.

TABLE OF IKREG
VERBS
fi
;

|L .

32.

VERBS |i

ULAB VERBS
f

Vid. pp. 51, 63.

*la.

30.

VERBS.
A.
28.

67

QUIESCENT VERBS.

Verbs 1 rod. Olaph quiescent (Ja)

^af

to eat.

following are the irregularities of these verbs. 1. In the Pret. Peal, where, in the regular verb, the first radical has no vowel, ] takes _L but in the imperat. and
,

The

part, pass.,

it

takes

e. g.

^QD| ^xDJ.
,

If the preformit
e.

ative or characteristic consonant of the conjugation be with-

out a vowel, the vowel of

Pa.

1 falls

back upon

g.

fut.

^tf;

pret.
fut.

Ethpe.
and

^ftf.
.."*,

RKM.
verbs

In the

H^ ^Of, UV
I
is

infinit.Pe. the preformative takes

"

in the

rl>>E rT'r V(K-g. ^obft^fco.

7
1>
1.

f>

But -e.

used in the verbs

,0]*

^ft .S&T, ^lo

first class

;io|" y\]~
It

g. ;!D|J.

o)lD

Both

of these

forms are found in ^Z|

should further be remarked that the

of verbs mentioned

above, form the fut. and imperat. Pe. like transitives with ting Verbs 3 rad. Gutt. or >, and the second class form
intransitives

Q, excepthem like
,

with

_!_

correctness of the

Lud. de Dieu (p. 265), rightly doubts the double form of the infinit. and fut. Pe. with *

and _L, although the form

the
...7
i

IiQ-^

is

found in I Cor.

x.

27

but

fut.

of

it is

not found with Q.

is

Also the correctness of

of the

in 1 Cor. x. 28,

is sometimes found in the part. pass. Pe. of the regular verb (20.1. Rein.). In
.
-

r -* (>? V>( and ^i V">(

suspected.

The forms

^Q^OJZ

3 plur.
r

fern, pret,

are not approved.

The vowel

the passives Ethpe. and Ethpa. of the the preceding Z;

e.

Verb

,-M|,
is

is

assimilated to

g. pjstZZl*
little

This formation
;

also found in
e.

some
and

other verbs varying

from regular verbs

g.

^oZZ)

2.
e. g.

The

radical } usually falls

cat,
0"!

away

in the 1 sing. fut. Pe.;

"\

^oa] / ic ill
away
the

/ will speak.

fall

in the other persons.

infinit. fut.

The same

does not so often peculiarity ex-

ists in

back

upon

the

and part Pa., and the vowel is thrown *Al and e. g. preformative
;

68

QUIESCENT VERBS.
The Verbs ^J| and form
;

REM.
imperat.,

to

go away and

|Z| to come,

lose

in the

f,
,

Qlf, *Af,

^f

oZ, JZ, 12.

3.

ed into

In Aphel and Shaphel with their passives, 1 is changwith the preceding _L forms au ; e. g. O, and,
,

REM.

In two verbs 1
fut.

is

changed into w
infinit.

viz

]Z*)

Aph. w A*},

imperat. l^uf,
*
y

}XJ

*CL*!LlO

part.

]L**>.
lT^*

For this reason *L^t and Aph. ^SQ^OI "li^^n )* are sometimes found together.
,

General ^Remarks.

The Verb
ticed in the

^
fat.

(according, to

12.1
;

15.2) should

be no1 sing.

following persons

pret.

fern,

and

Alf A^lf;
In the
larly.

2 fem.sing. and 2 and 3 plur.

etc.; part. fern. sing. \t]]

and plur.masc. and

of
iise,

fern.
it is

sigriification,

to be

to

profit,

formed regu-

Verbs which commence with on,

it

like
,

Verbs )a,

as-

sume the vowel and throw

those, reject or

back upon 1 but do

not, like

change

it,

although this latter occurs in

the Galilean dialect, which had but a single character for the two gutturals (comp. 1. Rem. 1).
29.

Verbs ivith 1 Rad.

Yud
it

(+*&)

to

bring forth.
:

In respect to these verbs

1.

should be observed

That

.1. in

in the pret. Pe. even when transitive, they take the ultimate syllable (excepting Verbs 3 Rad. Gutt.) ;

VERBS
e. g.

1 RAD. JUD, ETC.

radical, be without a vowel, the case (in pret., imperat., part. pass. Pe.), it usually In the fut. and infinit. Pe. the vowel _L falls quiesces in JL

JD/U

(^r*)*

If

*>

the

fi 1 8 *

"

as

is

back upon the vowelless preformative falls back upon L So too in Ethpe.,
these verbs are regularly inflected

e. g.
e. g.

A)io.

^2).

But

where, in the regular verb, the first radical takes a vowel,

;

e.g.

L^*.
T

REM.
r

In the part. pass. Pe., besides the regular form, one with
;

appears

e.

g.

-*>>over the
A

x r

Only
*

2OLi

takes
r
,

but where the

regular verb takes

first radical,

with Linea occultans

*

under

Ol, falls

away
A

e.g.

A)GLi
with a

Lin. occultans with

suffix

in the 3 fern,

and

1 sing. pret. * *

attached

e.g.

OlAoou
"*

appears * f

she hay given

ilar

him (OOLi)

In 3 plur. inasc. and

falls

fern,

under simT

circumstances, Lin. occult,

away

e.

g.

wiGlQOGLi

they

have given him

2.

(QQOU).

In the fut.and imperat.Pe.the second syllable takes .!_. In the fut. and infinit. Pe. this class of verbs is similar to
1

Verbs
above).

J2>,

and changes .t into But in the 1 sing.

%
|

which quiesces
a
falls
;

in
;

(vid. 1.
e. g.

fut.

away

,SV

The

imperat. on the contrary retains *

e. g.

REM.
e.

^1 and
7

S2\I follow the

fi

inflection of
F*

Verbs ^2)
infinit.
f

( T

33)

g.
r

imperat.

^> and
like

*32.,

fut.

^-J and SAJ,

imperat. from

^> r

LD and

^)Ak3.

In

manner

2O1

>OL* follows the

same
3.

rule.

In Aph. and Shaph. with their passives a

is

changed

into

(vid.

Verbs ]a,
retained in

28. 3)
tit*
"i

e.g.
*

jSof, ^?di.
\*
;

REM.

is

m*| and ni*|

still

it

should scarcelj
,

be considered as an irregularity, since from JLi appear Pa. '

'

Etbpa.

72
3.

VERBS 3 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT.

In Aph. the preformatives of the fut.,infinit.,and characteristic _L excepting the 1 sing. fut.
,

part.,
;

lose the
X
7

e. g.

V>if)(.

The

part, pass., contrary to the

analogy of other

part, passives,
it

changes

.*.

into
.

e.g.

^oaSo, to distinguish

from the active form ^o^oLo

REM.

No

example

is

found of Shaphel.

32.

Verbs 3 rod. Olaph Quiescent

to disclose. (]3) 13-..

These verbs, which include the Hebrew j$^ and ni> Verbs, are different from the regular verbs in the following cases.
1.

The

third radical

"j

either quiesces or

is

changed into
ends in
)1;

wi

Here

it

should be remarked that the

the other preterits
in
**.
;

pret. Pe.

e. g. )]-..
*

e. g.

Ethpe.
;

*jL^.i2]
^\ e. g. Pe.

The
^^
7

futures of all the conjugations

>

end in |_

V-.-J the imperat. Pe. * T

T

in

-i._

e.g.

-^Xt

imperat. Ethpe.
.
;

in

-!._

e.g. *xJk..Zf
/^

the other conjugations in j

of the
infinit.

e.g.
;

Pa.
e.g
f

]]....

The termination The

^
ma
7
,

Pe.

is

the same

^\

(J.^-So*
V>,

other conjugations in the

infinit.

end with <L_;

*
;

e. g.

Aph. cuA.^_lo
Pe.

the participles generally with |_

e. g.

W-yT

Omy
;

the part. pass, of Pa., Aph., and Shaph.,

ends with
REM.

--

e. g.

Pa.

Some

verbs with

(-)

in the pret. Pe. are inflected

intransitives, or

like the other preterits.

Here belong mostly

*

Verbs

Med. E.
Verbs

e.
f

g.

|Su

-^.^ ^> I I and - >^>'

to be great.
to

Both forms

are found in the

this

swear.

The imperatives of
XT

kind of

verbs, take

.-__
;

at the end.
7

Some

verbs with 3 rad. He.,

.

seem

to

belong here

e.g.

OlSQs

to

name, Pa.

>*fl

Some grammarians,

VERBS 3 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT.

78

without proof, derive from the imperat. Ethpe. the forms U-tt^i and
(J_..Z(.
>

The
*

Verb fOOl has two forms of the future

1<

e.

g.

(OOU

and |OOU.
the pronoun,

^*

In the formation of the present tense in connection with

-

the part, takes

**_

quiescent,

instead of

{_

e.

g.

A^IOjliO

for

AJ| Ifojlio.
;

From

]lfiD to hate
(jJLffi*

appears a double

form of the

part. pass.

e.

g.

J1CD and

The former

refers

more
2.

particularly to things,

and the

latter to persons.
is

When
JL

a letter or syllable
entirely away.
is

added,

] is

either

changed

into

or

falls

A. In the
fern,
"jl
;

first case, JL

a) movable in the pret. 3 sing.

of

all

the conjugations excepting Pe. of verbs ending in

e.g.

Ethpe.
;

A^..Z]
V^

PC. AS..
l.x
i 7
;

in the second form of

3 plur.fem.

e. g.

Pa. ^i
Pe. ^i

V.
*t^

\^

in the 2 plur. fern,

;

of

all

the

imperatives;
all

e. g.
;

\t

^
;

in the 2
f

and 3
in
-9 .0

*
;

plur. fern, of

the futures

e. g.

Ethpe. rr*-\VAJ
^\^k

the fem. sing.

;

and

plur. of all the participles

*

e. g.

Pe.
;

M-X
e. g.

and

finally

in all the infinitives except that of Pe.

*

Aph.

o^^lo ^^
manner
T
;

(Pe.

JJ

^..So)

b)

.*.

is

quiescent in the 1

and 2 masc. and fem.

in such a
)

of both numbers of
that
e.g.
j.
-7

all

the preterits,

and
T

in Pe. (excepting the 1 sing. A*-Xi

.

.f

A*-^l,

oAj^...

In other cases

quiesces in
X
;

quiesces in

e.g.

Ethpe.

AftS^T,
1 falls

(OAJi^
in the

B.

away

3 sing. fem. pret. Pe. of Verbs

;

ending in |^ with -1 retained

3 plur. masc. Pe. of Verbs

e. g.

^\t

in the 3 plur.
*

masc. and fem. pret. Pe., and in the 3

plur. fem. (in the

-A and of

.,

other preterits,
;

**_

remains) of

all

throughout
is

in

in the fut. the preterits ; e. g. Pe. oXt the 2 sing, fem., while the regular form ^-.
;

changed into

e. g.

Pa.

^..,

and

in

the 2

74
and 3

VERBS 3 BAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT.

-X
f>

plur. masc.

e.g.

Pe.

tOX,_J

imperat,,

2 plur.
olk.il

where - quiesces e.g. Pa. --\t masc. imperat., where Q quiesces in

;

"^

also in the 2 sing. fern.

T-.

"*.

T
;

also in the
e. g.

Aph.
reg-

finally in the plur. masc. of the part.,

x * is

where the
*e
9

ular form ^*

exchanged with <-_

e.

g. Pe.

^Xt*

REM.
I
7
.

Instead of Pa. and Ethpa.,sometimes the quadriliteral form

7

-OA.

appears.
occurs,

The

3 plur. masc. pret.

'

Q-Xt (with paragog. Nun

sometimes with
i*

retained

e.

g.

Acts

xxviii. 2.

But the form

&Xt

which Buxtorf adduces,

is

neither

confirmed by examples nor found in Amira. In all the conjugations excepting Pe., the 3 plur. fern. pret. differs from the 3 sing. masc.
only by taking Ribui (vid.
1
I
7

6), for

which Amira

(p.

266) in verbs
i

ending with wk.-, and in Pa. of verbs ending with l_, writes a

a~ I n ^he imperat. Ethpe., besides the form 1 X ^\ j*^ in the paradigm, occurs the 2 plur. fern, ^i > .^..Z( given
double u
;

e.

g.

GENERAL REMARK.
]L (comp.
Alfl,
etc.,

Verbs

|J

or w^A,

which are
|J
;

at the

same time
Pe.
tjiy.

30. 1), are inflected like

Verbs

e.

g. pret.

M),

^A^tf, plur. 0lJ,

etc.,

infinit. itfk),

imperat.

vB, J$,
pret.

fut. l]]j, X

plur. tO(Jj, etc., * it *

infinit.

part. act. 1|J, *f 7

pass. }]], if*

fut.

Aph.

oi]]]

and **X|,

CUjJlD, imperat. **Ul,

^(JJ, part. ^

APPENDIX TO
.

8 32.

Inflection of the Verb

U-M

to live.

In the Verb |JUM with j. movable, j. is rejected when the e. g. first radical and the preformative are without a vowel
;

infinit.

Pe.

V*^

f r

]*Vf

Sometimes

this

verb takes
e.

between the preformatives and the

first

radical;

g.

DEFECTIVE
(better

VERBS.
-

76
for Jl**J
*

perhaps U*]^)* fut

U^

and with

inserted
fut.

^cu.]j,

IMJ and
falls

.*>'

Aph.

pret. **-**), infinit.

^ *
^*

ClJuV) or
i
?

IA*P,

imperat. )AJ f,

part. (j*i>O

and

also

away when no preformative

first
i

precedes,
;

and

its

vowel
Pe.
.

falls
x

back upon the

. i

vacant radical .C0.ee

(
t

e.g.

imperat.

for

.,
is

part. fern. ]+** for

>

The form

(Matt. xv. 27)

found in the

part. plur. masc.

B. DEFECTIVE VERBS.
33.

Verbs with the first radical

Nun

(^2>)

-<-*

to

go out.
:

The

irregularities of these verbs are the following

fut.,

Tn the

imperat.,

and

infinit. Pe.,
;

and
*.

in all forms
*
*
T

of
*

Aph., the
*Q2>1
e.
-

first rad. J falls

away

e. g.

DQ2U, *Doa, -r^Vn

and
;

The
71.

fut.

and imperat. Pe. sometimes take

g.

->",

\y*u.
to this rule
b)
e.

REM.
doubled
c)
(

The exceptions T
34)
;

are

a)

Verbs Med. Rad.

f
;

e.

g.

,J
;

Verbs Med. Rad. Quiescent

y

e.

g.

Verbs Med. Rad. Ol

is
.

g.

JOU,

fut.

>QIU.

Those verbs whose

third radical
e.g.

or 2, are not changed by assimilation, as in

Hebrew;

^.liQjGI we have believed,

to

tOZAMJ
pret.

ye have descended.
part. Pe.

TheVerb
MT>
(vid.

nmi
35.2).

mount

up, takes

its

and

from

-<">

Upon

retaining the characteristic 1 in Aph.; e.g.

]o]2

for ]aj.

Comp.,

23. 1.

Rem.

34.

Verbs ivith Med. Rad. doubled

(\lL)

%mflD>

to

sprinkle.

In respect to these verbs it should be remarked 1. That the middle radical falls away in the pret.,
:

infinit.,

76

DOUBLY IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.

over the preformative) Pe.

imperat., and fut. (having

7 *
. ,

e.

g. pret.

fiD)

mnnit. *CO;lD

7
f

**

fut. *QDO;J

imperat.,
e.

* flOO>

Also Aph. and Shaph. with their passives; v

7
7

g.

*CD>),

)\*

jao>ZZ|

The

part.

act.

Pe. takes

in
e.

place
g.
;

of
;

the
}

middle radical, which has fallen away

falls

)> e.

but

away again when a

syllable

is

added

g.

plur.

iM. Those verbs whose 2 and 3 rad. is | are exceptions, and are inflected according to the rules for quiescent verbs ( 35. 1. d).
,

in the
!

77
,

fut.

and imperat. Pe. forms with

(not)

appear;
plur.

e.

g.

<-4
to

The
go
in.

part.

act.

Pe. has ^-

>P> in the

from the

Verb ^\i

appears again, but

)

it

In the part. Aph. sometimes the middle radical is marked by Linea occultans e. g. Heb. ix. 5,
;

In Aph. the characteristic

e.

sometimes remains
23.
1.

after the

preformative;
2.
f

g.

Q*^*lO

from -*^*~*-* (Comp.

,

Rem.).
;

The part. pass. Pe.

.^
* 7
, ,

JEujaci

Ethpe., Pa. and Ethpa.

e. g.

are regularly inflected, with the retention .rr>frZ] JCQCOJ of the middle radical. Instead of the last two forms, however, Palpel. and Ethpalp. ( 25. D) are more in use; e. g.

REM. The last remark holds good more rarely (Comp. 1. above).

also of Shaphel,

which occurs

35.

Doubly Irregular and Defective

Verbs.

1.

By Doubly

which occur two of those

irregularities.

Irregular Verbs are understood those in letters which usually give rise to In the inflection of these verbs, either one

or both of those letters may retain their peculiarities. This class of verbs consists of (vid. Lud. de Dieu, p. 340, sq.); a)

Verbs Verbs
Pa.

^S
]z>
,

and
]]

]]

e.

g. ICQJ

Aph.

*XQO] to approve ;
,

b)

and

e. g.

j2] to

come, Aph. **L]

]flb} to heal,

^J1

1s>] to boil,

Ethpe.

**>]]

c)

Verbs Jia and

U',

DOUBLY IKKEOULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.

e. g.

77

UQ*
x

f<>

swear, impcrat. iiV)i,

;

fut.

iop,
\\^

infinit.

A [li.
**|a

**!*>ol
^^
I ;

]lu

to

sprout, imperat. **L*,

^ "
\\ tf
;

Aph.
imperat.

and .j-U
,

d) Verbs |i and U

e. g.

|p

to cAzdk,

infinit.

Ifc^O

*]] to be displeased,

Aph.

HL.

2. To Defective verbs (see Lud. de Dieu, p. 344) belong the following, in so far as they occur in the language, either in individual forms only, or have borrowed their defective forms from synonymous verbs, or, finally, vary from the

regular verb in inflection and interpunction.

a)

Impersonal

Verbs.
it

From
befits.

o>1

to be bit,

occurs only the part. act.

fern.

From

)&

appear the 3 sing.

pret.

it is

disagreeable, the part. act. fern. ]j]lo

;

and the 3
act.

fut. tllojZ eing. fern.

and from

|lo

and

]\*

appear the

part, flo

and 1)1

it is suitable.

b)

The following
n\rr>
,

defective verbs
:

are completed
to

from
part.

others which are

act.
y
;

synonymous
y

.n\m
-

mount up,
>

the other tenses of this

71>
,

-rtmi
part,

imperat. .OCX)
r
,

fut. -^f*) 1
r
r

verb are formed from *V infinit. Offft ^r> Aph. OCD[

..*'*
A
similar

-offn^rt

Ethpa. .r>VAcp| T
to

complement

is

found in vOOii
infinit.

give (see

29. 1. Rem.), imperat.

^&G

fut.

^A/

from ^Aj, Ethpe. *oau2|l

c)

Those which

differ in
;

form and
to ^<?

inflection are
to

to

run, imperat. ^ioi

28. 2. 3.
38), fut.

^l]

aw?ay and ]Z|

(see

and

32. 1. Rem. Rem.); also 16(31 to fo (see IOCTU and loou also from ]ooi is found a
;
,

fut. apocopate ICTU l(Jl2, plur. fication of the conjunctive as well

tOOU

etc.,

as
;

having the signiof the usual future

to
,

(comp. Agrell. Otiola Syr.

prosthet.

p.
,

46)

1A* lA

drink,

with
,

wiAl
,

imperat. <-iAl

part.

fut.

]AaJ

infinit.

lAaLo

^>1 Aph.
11
f
,

to believe ; ^S>Q*oi

U-~

(see

App.
;

to
g.

32),

to //uc.
,

Finally, in four verbs 3 rad. Olaph.

e.

V^
its

l^Zl

(1>2),

which merely occur

in Pa.

and

78

DOUBLY IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.

the second syllable quiesces in _L, as in Verbs 3
13.
1.

passive,

Gutt. (see
tenses

Bern.),

and
its

is

retained in all of the

falls

and moods, while

vowel
e. g.

back upon the

fern. pret.
,

preceding vacant consonant

3 sing.

The formation
infinit.

is

as follows

pret. Pa.
.

|*a
,

part.

oKnV>
,

imperat.

"Ua

fut.
,

]*Xj

Ethpa.

part. U>A&

infinit.

olIoAsi

fut.

80

PARADIGM

I.

A
Ethtaphal.

*^-'

*g

}
3Q

like

Aphel.

f <
^
g

*1
,j

i ^
-Q

f<3)

f-^p

r-<3i

r-

'I

&

f_.

81

<
1X1 <

''

^ y
-Q *Q
f-9>

^
'

'D

-Q

'"a*

^
k

Ji
'Vd.

^
Q

sa

si

Jvj

<

vj id vq
-Q
.

-Q

<i

<j

^Q

"Q

vg
fc

^j

<s

^_4__,^
'

____.

^f
*^"

i
*-vi

V
*^T

r
-3
^si

^
Cj
-3

?=x

1-3

^
q
*<j>

'-vj

-3

"51
i

q
f-d>
I

a
f

-a

q *Q -q -a .n

^ <

^P'

V
A* A*

^f
*
'

<

X.

s.

^1

-_

1
j

82

PARADIGM

II.

ooo 13 3
00 <M

'I tTv| O
-n
ia

."3J

fl

t-Q
jgj

'

-'

v "
f
.

if
f

I
Q,,

1
s

co

co

Q' CO

CC

Cl

(N

t-i

-X

Verbs First Rad.Olaph.

83

a o

3
O
o

"

'\

-I 'I :l

1 4 ^ * J.4 1 *
2

33
.Si

84

PARADICrM

III.

O5 <M
093

Verbs First Rad. Jud.

85

A
f

H
f

ii

^
y\ _

3 ^

^ ^ ^ *f ^i
'6

'o

"b

^i ri

" L ^ "v i
I

^
-_

QO
'

-i fl

>.'-l

!vj

iT>4

r"

O ^^ O

.n

v|

iT*l

l.

H.

Q
'

V
^ Vj ^ ,H: 4. 4. i
*"^~
x|
f

-4. sd. x ^i -"

^.t^. ~

f*^!

^J

"vl

*< '.

^H-iM.-15-iil"li3: "^ ^ '^

i"

T^'5J
:

^:H:

4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4.4.

.. ,

s'L

I-

i.:

i;

^o^

<o.

v i. PI "'

'

'-^i

/I

'

"<] "<!

1^1.

-!

86

PARADIGM

IV.

8-1

.1

(.vp

t-'^p

t^>i)

tTsj)

^i>

i.vD

t*-

o CO
f

j <3
f

"d
<i
f

<J

9 'd <j
f

Q
f

Of
t f ^_
f^.

'

_^

i
.<

"-3

^2 1 1

^
f

3 il <l *3 t <O 1> - V '

CO

t
1 -

<S
-c

k
f**f

*f

a
s

*d
<o

rf 7j T*
<j

'

a ^d <
-J

-<J

^ O

^j
.a
'

cT*
<i

*T da
t"^

a ;t
:t
1

7
?

O
'ts
fc

'oi

T/
*a
: ,

^
^s

ci

xi

ra

"Q
*

< < ^ <

IT

^ 'T
3

JI

*X
:1

la
1

* ^ ^

i
3
'^cj.

.3

^**

3--S3 ^ 4
;

^1,^. * 1

V3.

'^2-5^^3 3-1-S-5*\ 1
t
"
TO

\i_

^ ^^^^
6
(M
i

VS.

e a
C^ TO

c5
I

S
TO

^
TO

Q
Ol

Verls Mill,
*

/i'i'1.

Quiescettt,

37

3
i

-4
'.

i a

-a
i

a
-\
*-v
fc

^
.

.^n

*N

>-

"1

-!

n
t.-

44
t*
'

81
4,

a
1

a s3 '
1

-i
' .3 -

"5

"T

'3

II 41
-t
**>!
:

'4 '4
'

tfl

'4 '4 '4

"\ '

'41

r
i

<3 ~

-i
f

a 44 '
-3 ~*
r^i
:

'IS

44
*
CO

4 i
a
C<

r^

-xi

-3
-I

4 i
1-"

n '1
-g

i 4
;

T3

4-jl

r<g -ri
g g
O* <N
r->

'U
a
.

uCO

%i
<M
?T*

CO

CO

0.0,

88

PARADIGM

V.

HQ

T/

! 'J 'I -I

HQ
|2

H<J

HI

HQ

HU

1
S

*t

oQ U Q 3 ^-3

aQ
<d

Q 'I

;Q

"i J1

I
^

g a
co

eo

fa

2.,

o<

CO

CO

(M

<M

rH

Verbs Mid. Rad.

Vau and Jud.

'3 '3

-C

'\
-

'1-4

*%*J/li 4

13

iii ?
v

IT %
T/
"s
l

'

>!

SI

si

1 -I

'8

'8

'1

-1

-i

^(N(Nrrw

^ a

^ ~

B
<N

^
<N
rH

r* CO

CO

<N

C^

1-1

90

PARADIGM

VI.

3^1

.<w
i

*J

'I

7?
f f

"1
<=

<0

<=_

<=

*_

',

n^l&

<O -

V
I
^

y TT

=3

"oj

S3

V*

Verbs TJiird Rod. Olaph.

91

-a

-a
-

-a
V
-a
a

'

'V'

'

i-i

eo

co
ft, ft,

92
4

PARADIGM
-a

VII.

r^

-Z

&

-61

.1

-61

161

ll

1
co co

-a

61

i
*

*^N|

"~M

'^J

rt

'^

'^

'3

Verbs First Rad.

Nun.

'I

'

,rv|

"t

-r

'*

111.1111111 9 <, > *<H

q

i,

.8,

PARADIGM

VIII.

-5 -*> K^
<
J*>

*J

I
SQ

Is
*_
t*'*

*_
**s

'

^.^

*s

fc

'^
c_,r\

I I

'I

'1

,1

-I

f if 1

1
:

V"

't
Q
'I
^

I
S
*3

I l
y S
*j

J s

. ^S W (M

Verbs Middle Bad. Doubled.

95

11

<

I
a

<

- _
-*

f __^ * -

-n.

.a

-.

S|

.^.a

^^

~
M
'

"

H%
d
^xJ
.i
/

^3
M i
.

-I

fl

'I -| i, i
f

n
.

...

in

!*+l

(1

*v

^i

*M

eceo

<N

4<-

96

PARADIGM OF THE VERB WITH DIACRITICAL POINTS.

PARADIGM OF THE VERB WITH DIACRITICAL

POINTS.
(

Compare

4.

Rem.

).

3m.
Preter. Sing.

3 /.

2 m.

c.

^^4^ A^&
!

Al^4^>

Plur.

Fut. Sing.

Plur.

Imper.Sing. m.

^o4^ ^d4o

jPlur.

m
\\f\oVr. r>\/\oVn e t c

Infin.

\>4QiO Xy^QiO \\f\oVo

Part. Act.

^4^3 m

REM. ^The forms of the verb which are omitted in the foregoing fable are not marked with diacritical points, since they may easily De recognized from their formation.

VERBS WITH SUFFIXES.

97

36.

Verbs with Suffices.

suffixes
first
is

The union of verbal forms with simple in Syriac than in Hebrew.

in

much more

It should

general that the vowel of the

*

be remarked or second syllable

either falls
*.

away

e.

g.

in the 3 fern,

and

1 sing. pret.
falls

and Q in the fut. or the vowel of the second syllable back upon the preceding consonant e. g. in the same
;
;

per-

sons of pret. Pe. in which

of the

first

syllable falls

away.
Verbal

The

verbal endings
unless

and O quiesce
4t

in

and

forms,

they terminate with k*. and

"* ,

Gu

remain

unchanged before the suffixes .OS

istic

^2*

Also the character-

syllable of Pa. and Aph. remains unchanged, and the suffixes of the 3 plur. are attached to verbs in the form of separate pronouns. In respect to the

vowel of the

first

the following should be remarked (see particular persons Table of the pronouns, 16. and table of the verbs, with
suffixes,

36).

A.

PRETERIT

WITH SUFFIXES.

3 sing. masc. 2 plur. sun. a.

1.

\^o

before the suffixes tQO

^^2

in the

masc. and

fein.

The

other

persons

^^o
others

with

3 sing. with suff.

fern.
a.
1.

ANfin before ^oo

Q-

The

2 sing. masc. with sun. c. 2 sing.

1 sing.
fern.
.

A\^n

unchanged, and by way of exception

iA^n is

changed

into

ufto
suff.

with

sufi*.

b.

com.

A^n

forms A\{j>n with

>

a. 1.
suff. b.

3 plur. masc. n ^Q n becomes ci\fln with

parag., excepting before

or with

^oa

^2*

3 plur.
parag.

fern.

**^&

cither

^^O

with

suff.

c.

or with

98
2 plur.

FDTUBE WITH SUFFIXES

masc. and
,

fern,

and 1 com.
suff. c.

retain the forms

.oAl&o,
REM.
suffixes

^Al^ ^4
The
3 fern. 2

with

masc. and 1 com. sing, in some forms with only distinguished from each other by the diacritical point, which, in the first person, stands over the consonant (vid. Verbs Med. E. with suff. follow the form of Verbs Med. A., 4).
are retain

and
with

where the

latter retain

e.

g. 3 sing. fern.

suff. OlAl^Q. Yet the form OlASQ*j> occurs in Ps. cxviii. 167, instead of which, since no similar example occurs, the punctua-

tion should perhaps

be

The same
the vowel
.

is

the case even in Verbs

Med. Olaph.
into

Quies.

So
;

belonging to

^J*
;

is

changed

over

Ol^(s

but in the 1
|

sing.,

remains

e.

g.

quiescent, it should be remarked, that where, in the regular verb, the first radical is without a vowel, |

In respect to verbs

1 rad.

and

jt

retains its

and a

its

_;
g

e.

g.

OlAoj.

But where,
-

in the regular
it

verb,

stands over the

first
r

radical, this class

suff.

of verbs retains
-i.

in

i
i

the
,

same manner;

e.

jiof with

Oljlo|

>

with

suff.

Defective verbs, or those with Med. Rad. doubled,

in the pret.

retain

*
sing,

unchanged,
'

like the 7 *
g.

form
with
g.

v^O
A*
.

The 3
7
;

fern,

and

change

into
.

e.

Ao>
*
;

unchanged

before

tOO and ^i2

first

e.

suff. OlAoj but they remain V .Q3Ao> Pa. and Aph. retain
*.

the vowel of the

syllable
>e

unchanged.

In respect to

of the
,

second
retains

syllable, it
;

should
7

observed that where Pe. retains

Pa.

but where

falls

away

or

falls

back upon the

first

sylla-

ble

is lost.

The 3

and Pa. with

suff.,

masc. and 3 plur. masc. and fern, in Pe. are hence all similar, and can only be distinguished
sing.
;

from each other by their signification in the context

(from

e. g.

vy^O

or

\^O)
before

But these forms

.

are exceptions to this rule

when standing

tQS and

*)

B.

FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES.

Throughout the sing, and in the 1 plur., Q which has been inserted, remains unchanged before the suffixes tQa and
,

IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

Before the other suffixes

99

it falls

away, and the form

takes the suff. a. 1. ; but if the suff. is in the 3 person, only the suffix, a. 2. is used. The other persons are treated according to the rule laid down. In the plur. the 2 and 3 masc. and fern, remain unchanged with suff. c.
RKM.
with the

parag. of the 3 sing.

after the

fern,

falls

away, and
is

is

connected

suff.

form

\y^oZ.
and

What

true of

in Pe. is
last

also true in

Pa

in respect to the falling

away of the vowel of the

syllable, excepting before

suff.

^Q2
e.

^>O

In the 3 sing. masc. with

,

of 3 person masc.

g.

^O1Oi\^ni

appears sometimes

But this form is neither mentioned by Amira nor by Sionita. The 2 sing, sometimes takes JL before the suff. of the 1 The same is true in respect to the imperat e. g. sing, and plur.
over

Q*

Z* 01OL
p.

5 ll" (J

put me not
*

to

shame.

In Verbs Med. E. the middle

r

radical retains

_,

and

in

Verbs 3 Gutt.,

389, refers exclusively to quadriliterals

;

are also found in Pe.

ed. Paris.

e.

g. Ps. Ixxi.
in

9.

This peculiarity, Amira, to Aph.; but examples f *. .^ ed. Erpen. -* 1 <"><>*">*/ |]

.
,

i.

e.

iiin*"lZ and
,

Pa. Ps.

cxviii.

172,

*\**l\{*

Amira

adds that this form is found particularly in prohibitory negations, which remark is likewise confirmed by the examples given. The But it should be persons of the fut. with ^ remain unchanged.

remarked that
masc.
25,
;

if

the form

^oN^OI
,

takes the suff. of the 3 per. sing,

falls

e'

g.

-*<"n.m\^rM sometimes

away

e.

g.

Matt

viii.

C.

IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

The 2
2.

sing. masc.

Q&o

remains unchanged with

suff. a.

of the 1 per. sing, and plur., and of the 3 sing. fern. "When the suff. is in the 3 sing. masc. the form of suff. c. is used.

lu the 2 sing.
quiesces in
buff. b.

fern,

of the form

Xofrf) with

sufl'.

b.

*-

_.

In the 2 plur. masc.

a^o&o

passes into

n\^nn

with

100

INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

plur. fern, is rare,

The 2
HEM.
1

and omits
j

before the suffix.

in Pe.

The imperative with

7

and
;

and
T

in
T

the other
^

conjugations, retains its

vowel unchanged

e.

g.

>i

vVn^ ^ ear me
*

>uOli

V">O

receive

him.

The forms

of the imperat. pass., with an

7
;

active signification, also remain

7

unchanged

e.

g.

J2JM

be reminded,
-x

with
plur.

suff.
it

..il

*^S>I|>

In respect
"

to the

transposition of
(

Q in

the
its

should be remarked that 1 of Verbs \S)

28. 1) loses

vowel

_
7

But
is

in

those

(> Verbs whose imperat. does not take

first

this
.

vowel
*

inserted after the

radical
*.

e. g.

O^3|

with

suff.

^CnojLDO|
as

Yet
7

this transposition of

Q
.

does not always take place,

the form

w>JQ\O^O
,

sometimes occurs.
7

In Pa. and Aph.

with
suff.

_,
*.

in
T

Verbs 3 Gutt.,
praise kirn,

falls

away;
suff.

e.

g.

**")

wiOlO*jJQ*
Verbs

Q\OO|

with

*01Q\*">O| lead him

;

hither.

p, are an exception, as they retain

e.

g.
;

-JQlD]-4) do me good.
e. g.

Also a form with

1^ t

parag. sometimes occurs

i n tlie
tern.

tOSn^n
is

with

suff.

rn v io
;

x^no*
in

plur. the

paragogic form

the more

usual

but

Pa. and Aph. both forms occur together.

D.

INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

The

infinitive

Pe.

^4^

changed before the

suff.

with su ff- a ! remains unof the 2 per. plur. The suffixes of

-

the other persons are attached to the form

\4

1^
.

D
>

But

the infinitives of the remaining conjugations with d are treated as feminine substantives, the feminine suffixes of which (those of the 3 plur. excepted, which are attached

with Q) they take, attached to the separately to the form

termination Zol (Compare declension 1).
45. 2.

and

48.

B. feminines, some

R EM

In Pe., where

of the second syllable falls away, A "\

;

grammarians

insert, in its place,

e.

g.

Ol\ftnV>\

Buxtorf adds
;

forms with yet two other

Q a Q inserted after

the third radical

e. g.

PAKTICIPLK8 WITH SUFFIXES.

101
as in

an j
-

^oin\flnV)
;

If the vowel be
*
i '

Verbs

Cll

it

remains unchanged
E.

e.

g.

OlSOCuQ^*
WITH SUFFIXES.

PARTICIPLE

Participles,
suffixes.

which are considered as nouns, take their This occurs, however, more rarely in the part, act,
,

where either prepositions are used ; e. g. y\ v '^ who seek thee, or a noun formed from the participle is joined with
' *

the suffix; e. g. >A supporting, oiio^ his helper. On the 1*. \. contrary participles with separate pronouns (vid. Rein.), or with afformatives ( 20) form the present tense.

102

REGULAR VEKBS WITH SUFFIXES.

Proper Form.

Sing.

c.

2m.

f.

Pret.

Pe. Sing. 3 m.

^n

n VA o

3f.
2 m.

2f.
i
c.
.

Plur. 3 m.

&&0
.

">

V^ Q
T

m*"V" \Ap
.

2 m.
2
f.

.1

\Ar^

Infinit.

^
7
.
>

Imp.

sing.)
)

2m.
2
f.

\r>

Plur. 2

m.

\rA
Fut. sing.) 3 m.
]

>.

Plur. 3 m.

X^
. .

Pret. Pa.

i\Ao

Infin.Pa.

REGULAR VERBS WITH SUFFIXES.

3 m.
Plur. 1

103

c.

2 m.

f.

^aol^o
*
* *>t
i

*A
<

V
*
'

^r;sAn

^qii\A^Q

^o
K^^A

^fn
.

\r> Ao

.<nn . \r> Ao

\oAr>

rninV^oi

.nVAo

104 SUFFIXES TO VERBS WITH THIRD RADICAL OLAPH QUIESCENT

37.

Suffixes to

Verbs with third Radical Olaph Quiescent

(]J).

Verbs
with

]] (

suffixes, from treatment. It

32) differ so widely in their regular verbs, as to

mode of connection demand a separate

:

may be remarked

in general
,

as in the 3 sing. 1. That the termination )_ either loses ) masc. pret. Pe., or in the sing. masc. of the imperat. Pa., Aph., Shaph. with suff. c or ) is changed into _. movable,
;

as in the infinit. Pe.

*>
,

with

suff.

a.

1,

excepting before tOa

\

where the
to
ft

*.

which has arisen from

also falls
fut.

away,
\.
is

according

some.

So the termination of the

suff. b.

changed into ._ with

2.

Forms which end

suff. a. 1,

in
JL

connect the

with

.JL eitlier omit entirely, and movable, as 3 sing. masc. pret.

Pa. and Aph. (and sometimes Pe. with -i. final), or remains with suff. b, as 2 sing. masc. imperat. Pe., and,
x

_
,

without exception

remains also in the

^

first

case before

OD
f

>Q ,

The

terminations of the imperat. fern. <-i_

T
ft

^v
J-i

>

are changed into

A.

(or .{_)

with

suff.

b,

and

into

with
3.
*
r

suff. c.

The forms which end with Q

r

otiant, take for

>

the

OQ (and o]_) ; and for Q^_ the form CU unchanged in the preceding cases with suff. b ; e. g. 3 plur. masc. Peal. pret. of all the conjugations excepting In respect to individual persons of this class of verbs with suffixes, the following should be remarked
forms
all
:

A.

PRETER. WITH SUFFIXES.

|J

(Comp. Table of Verbs

with Suffixes.

The 3
Buff.

sing. masc.

jj.t '^

loses }

*aLi of the 3 sing. masc. to

and appends the form ^.t

suff

b,

and

FDTDKE WITH SUFFIXES.

105
suff. a. 1.

The 3

sing. fern.

&..

same

^ takes,
.

unchanged,

The

is

true of the 1 sing. A^-\i

2 sing. masc.
2 sing.
euff. b.

A^M

takes, unchanged, suff.

c.

fern.

3 plur. masc. 3 plur. fern. 2 masc. and

oA^V. attaches suff. b. to the form ^A^A... oXi " is changed into ocA., (and ol^.t) with

*-Xi remains unchanged with

fern,

suff. c. suff. c.

and

1 plur. take,
,

unchanged,

R&m. Verbs 3 rad. j as they are mostly intransitives, take no suffixes in Peal. But Pa. and Aph. of these verbs
with
a. transitive signification, as
suff.
a. 1,

well as of Verbs
X

U with
The 3

the
,

same ending, take

excepting before
fern,

*
,

with the falling away of

^a

tOD , where

_ remains.

sing.

remains unchanged in Pa.

A--^ and Aph.

Ax..

The

same is true also of the 1 sing, in both conjugations. The 3 plur. masc. occurs mostly before the suff., with O doubled
(see Amira, p. 372); e. g. Ps. liv. 3, ed. Erpen.^ they have sought them. Sometimes the original 1 appears

before both OO;

thee.

e. g.

Ps. Ixxvii. 16, ^.ooll*. they have seen

falls

In Pa.

QJL

the

suff.,

and

and Aph. Q-A^l, becomes movable but

;

^M

away

before
;

quiesces in

e. g.

GuJ*I

with

suff.

plur. fern, in

The 3 with suff. )Q3CuLJ(. r&*r ; Pa. and Aph. in the simple form, takes the suff.
over
wi
;

0*M

given in the tab. with the falling away of

**O1

e. g.

Vtl*
suff. c.

The paragogic form of

these two conjugations

takes

given in the table, without change.

B.

FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES.

The 3
*

sing. masc.
,

|Lj and

nil
*

the persons which terminate

suff. b.

with

affix to
fern,

the form

-\J

The 2 and 3

plur.
in

masc. and

remain unchanged, and are connected, as

suff. c.

the regular verb, with

106

IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

This

Rem.
Aph.
3 sing.

mode

of formation also occurs in Pa. and

takes the place of
i.

Sometimes
fern.
;

also

in the suff.

e. g.
;

Matt.
g.

19,

6u;*J

that he should dismiss

I 7. -K

her, or in Pa.
it.

e.

Luke

xiii.

18, 20, oixLojj

**
;

And

with the falling away of

e.

g.

I shall liken .Q2CU] / will

p. 398,

show you, the correctness of which Lud. de Dieu,

doubts.
C.

IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

is

2 sing. masc. --^v

1

sing. fern.

--\ 7^

^ is
is

unchanged with x
l*

suff. b. suff. b.

changed

into

with A^y * 7^

2 plur. masc.
suff. b.

oX. "

changed into

OQ^ v

vM
oJJ..)

V
i

(and

with

>

2 plur.

fern.

i^S.i affixes suff. c. to

the form J-^Xt*

imperat. Pa. yyt and Aph. jj.il take the suffixes of the pret. in connection with the 3 or 1 person ; e. g.
.

Rem. The
o

-7

The same is true in the plur. masc. of the same conjugations. In the fern., the paragogic form with suff. c. is the usual one. (Compare 2, above.)
Oicoj heal her.

D.

INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

In the
is

infinit.

Pe.

VM^ m place of
a. 1.

**

without a vowel

inserted with suff.

In respect to the falling away

of -. before 1. above,) Lud. de Dieu, p. 395, , (see ^QO , doubts. The infinitives of the other conjugations are treated as in the regular verb. (Compare 36, D.)
B.

^2

PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES.

(Compare
20 and
36. E.)

Passive.
Plur.

Active.

Sing.

Plur.

Sing.

xj,^

^
1.

PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES.

107

The participlevS of the other conjugations are inflected in a similar manner, retaining the characteristic vowels ; e. g.
*.
.

Pa. act. .o/uA^lo ye ask, Aph. ^L*>oLo * 7

^i
i I

we thank, Ethpe.

^ASo

w<? />///* about.

General fiemarfc.

Verbs of the form of to console, never lose the third radical letter ] when taking a suffix, but throw back its vowel upon the middle radical, which, according to 36, usually stands vacant
;

|a

e. g.

pret.

3 sing. masc.
fern.

~u)u^

o)_-a
tut.

pi.

masc. *_jjo]^o, ^oV^a, r

.r
7
t

IjUi, aOu|l2,
2 sing. masc.
,

sing. masc. *jJ|^j3J, ^(i*^i, imperat.

rr jtOU)^o,
..

iry
.

TTT

fern.

ifiQ,

uCTiCLi|jjD

2 plur. masc.

r r

fern. .il|*-),

^r

108

VERBS

]]

WITH SUFFIXES.
Verb

j]

Proper Form.

Sing. 1

c.

m.

f.

Pret. Sing. Pe. j

.

\O
r
7

3 m.

Pa
P..

1
.

wQ>j
2-0

Pa.
i
c.

Pea/.

PZwr. 3 m.

OXQJ
3

nn ^ en

/mp. 2 m.

j
]

Pe.

Pa.

P/wr. 2 m,

Futur. 3 m.

..^r>i

VERBS U WITH

109
2 m.

3 m.

3f.

Plur. 1

c.

01*^0
fc

Ol7;O

*.

0100*0

rt.mi

.* .^o'vn

0140

.^rno.

.<">

oiol-o

A
>n.'O
1

110
38.

Auxiliary Verbs, or Verbs Substantive.

1.

There are in Syriac two auxiliary verbs (verbs sub-

stantive). exists as

One of these, Van conversive,

is

]ooi to be, which, in Hebrew, used to form the moods and

18. 4. Rem\).

tenses which are wanting (see

The

other,

which
tia),

is

properly a noun, A* being, substance, essence (essen,

with Olaph prosthetic A*]

takes the place of the aux. p

iliary

verb
|J
,

to

be.

The former of

these,

fool

belongs to

Verbs
it is to

like which it is inflected, but in respect to which be particularly observed, that, when connected with

the participle, preter.or future, the Ol (with Linea occultans)

not pronounced this is also the case when the verb is i 7 added merely for the sake of emphasis e. g. |ooi -;* he
is
; P
;

has begun.
,

Upon

the double formation of the

c.

fut.

IOGU
:

and IOCTU see

35. 2,

The

inflection of A*)

is

as follows

Plur.

Sing.

F.

C.

M.
*

F.

C.

M.
1.

(we are)
are)
T
I

**L$
i
Y
T

(7 am)

>V (thou art)

*
(Ae, sAe is)

^AjT

(&ey are) *OOLiAft|

is

2.

In connection with p
e. g.

formed A.^, which

is inflect-

ed similarly to A"f ;

*jk*.

I am
e.

not.
g.

A*] in connec-

tion with looi forms the imperfect;

]ooi Ai] or looi

.jOio^uY^ was.
looi.

The same

tense

is

also expressed
;

by ]ooi

looi doubled marks the pluperfect

been.

e. g.

Aooi A*OO1

/ had

DERIVATION OF NOUNS.

Ill

CHAPTER
THE NOUN.

III

39.
1.

Derivation of Nouns.

Nouns, as in Hebrew and Chaldee, are primitive, and sometimes compounded. To primitives belong nouns of one and two syllables, which indicate animals, plants, metals, numbers, members of the bodies of
derivative,

animals, etc. (See Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 478, sq.). Inasmuch as they coincide with simple verbal forms, they are always recognized as nouns by the nature of the object which they

designate; e.g.
derivatives,

\Sb& flesh,

JZOlj

gold,

^amo

silver.

The

which are by far the most numerous, are form ed partly from verbs (verbals), and partly from nouns
(denominatives).
2.

The

derivation of nouns
;

is

effected
e.

a) without

any

change of the original word

,

g.

,i

.\So counsel, from

to

Vf)
f>

to

counsel

\>)\ mourning, from ^\a}

;

mourn

or

by a mere change of the vowel

;

e.

g.

..i

SSn
;

king,
e. g.

;CD| fetter
] AL

b)

by the

falling
;

away of the
care,

radical letter
>

sleep,

from <-Ju
>*a*"i\
;

1 Aa

from
e)

i
;

P3-^ the
addition of
letters,
.*.

heart,

from

but especially

by the

formative letters or of entire syllables. Those So A, L if medial, they are initial, are 1
, , ,

if
;

and Q

final,

1,

Several of these formative letters are someX

.
f.

times found in

the

same noun

e.

g.

A^Q-^Z scholar,
jlame.

dominion, 12oiSfii;V) compassion,

]A^2O1\

112

NOUNS DERIVED FROM VERBS.

40.

Nouns

derived

from

Verbs.

Verbal nouns are kindred either to

participles,

and de-

note the subject or object of the action (Concrete Nouns), or they are kindred to the infinitive, and receive the signification of the action or quality itself (Abstract Nouns).

But

frequently in the formation of these nouns, rare or obsolete forms of the infinitives and participles arc chosen. The
following tables present a collective view of the formation.

modes of

TABULAR VIEW

OFDERIVATIVE NOUNS.

118

or

NOUNS DERIVED FROM REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS.

I.

PARTICIPIAL FORMS.
A.

OF PEAL.

a.

The simple but unusual Participial Forms, which are mostly Adjectives.

Absolute

state,

Emphat. state.,
^O..

V&O
|JQCD
foolish.

a man.

an
>;..

associate.

UO12
^iLO

rural, quiet.
cXr.

^
*

leprous.

Ql and
i

mournful

|,OJ

^>wrc.

U and

-k-^
r

hard.

i'np urc

>

t""

From

these

are derived

Abstract

Nouns

e.

g.

^AltAO hardness;

multitude.

114

b.

Usual Participial Forms of Peal.

a.

Active.

/3.

Passive.

Absolute

state, j
<

Emphat.
o

state,

JOICD a witness

sound.

>] righteous.

(ft
i*
z

^7
I

black.

given.

rr--y

hireling.

and ^*A

an inhabitant.
.2)
f

^i.\ cursed.
"*

(>*S.i

(fry.

so/15.

2)

a herdsman.

/oft^-SMjfmny.
X X
7

and

-A

reviling.

Q^

renowned.
ree.

|*^i*^
>

beloved.

V
a herdsman.
# #

17

y -\*

rare.

(JOl>j a landlord.
13"

concealed.

and

la

0"and

U
f.

a physician.
|3" and ]l

m. "JAjjS

beautiful.

* beautiful.

13"

and

_a

r*"n prophet,

|A^*-n prophetess.

Here belong
publication,

also AbstractNouns, as *)2cLkQol healing,

|2oLi^

]2o>l* freedom, QCL>1 and IZoCLijl righteousness,

dry ness.

TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.

115

c.

With Immutable Vowels,

Ab.

stat., j
^
,

O
Q$0
.

0&>
.

O&O
5
l
>

Q^T)

Emph.

flo&O ]]o4^
JQil MMMii
T

]Ta&^
p

OD & with ffoo Jl

.0
.

CT

ft^xgi a plough-

jao

ry\ '

MM-

JjQSOQflD
ft

^phemer.
a ^06, |^O>] a 5ower. a rabble.
^ "*.<>

(color).

^ASQx> a friend.

_>
and
<-kA
11"*- A

2)

(2)

lj a carpenter, \\ozi\a preacher.

|*O j] a Aaw- jlooo]

"
.
.

6/acJt.

t J

^2)
,

dL

and i^A

>Q*j a spend/7tr//Y.
T
P

ilQQJ damp.

**. pQ-1 a
*

ppMOja possessor. * OL jkl and ///''/-.

1
i

oi
>

and

^A
.'

a judge. (*CLi) a destroyer. \LQ*l mortal. \1)CL& fortunate.

k

IMrih

\L^
T

>**
.

,*,
a youth. llOUi
barber.

divorce.

>

a combatant.

l?ryt
11"

Jjioj

6?7/ o/"

an
11*

orator.

U and
a
"'"

V wA
''

POT

MH

p>7

U and

x ^V

|JQA.. a *^y. ^* IV U and

c/e/(f.

'mournful.

MO^ creator. ^* |OO> a

^
.

>

U and ]>

!.

From
.
>

these are formed

.

Abstract Nouns,
%*''
'*

like
<

/r> ^

rejection,

-X

|IO>Q11

littleness,

|QO)|

division,

jZQJOul giving,

etc.

116

TABULAE VIEW OP DERIVATIVE NOUNS.

B.

PARTICIPIAL FORMS,
the other Active

a.

Of

Conjugations.

Pael.
It takes

Aphel.
usual ^
j

Shaphel.

the
l>

form, and the form

Usual
F

form
f
-X

with IL_ and the

%.
form

V^^

^,

"6 oVn

and ) 7?"

Usual

form

and

7_

leader,

a dwelling.
pincers.

r/cA.

poor.
l^h
A
o o

a
changing.

an

offense.

[I*

7!

Vf) a

teacher.

Vn.rn^n

a deliverer.

P-^liD

a torturer.
*j-L

Band
despairing.

Ql and
LiOliO

]t\M<^ ^rOM
Part. pass.

rf.

united.

r^

in>ncm S

^^SDiSo com^^erf.

Vmm
j
P

high.

Qi and

wA

and ^-^
SC?i/tOMS.

Vand
a watch-tower, a
"i^

(lajGllD a leader.

U and

a physician.
|J

and
a confessor.

a comforter.

From

these are derived Abstract Nouns, as

sf)

direction,

doctrine, lZoi*rf)flb healing, &c.

TABULAR VIEW OF DEBIVATTVE NOUNS.

b.

117

Of

the Passive

Conjugations.

Ethpeel.

Ethpaal.

Eshtaphal.
i

Usual

form

and
j )

Usual form and

those with T, ]!'

Usual form
those with
t
,

and
j

those with T, ]A

pL

01

and
entreat-

curdled.

U and

%A_^

renowned.

eloquent.

C:

PARTICIPIAL FORMS OF LESS FREQUENT CONJUGATIONS.

Palel.

Pealel.
)
(

Paiel
)

Usual form and

Usual form and

r

Usual form and

\0m

**

7
"^

(^Q^OOI a
treasurer.

church-

|V)\V)\0 unhurt,

a farrier.

<m
Parel.

Taphel.

Quadriliterals.
")

Usual form and

Usual form and

1*

an accuser.

Uyir"
+

a pitcher.
r

pL.)Z
if
(
t

a/i interpreter.

f^

sudden.

^Vf>\/ a pupil.

\.*1

118

TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE

NOUN'S.

INFINITIVE FOKMS.
A.

OF PEAL.
Segholates.

a.

Simple Infinitive Forms

Absolute

state, j
'

Emphat.
>

state,

(ai

the soul.

> rain. >

holiness.

bread.

morning.

L
P

sea-grass.

a way.

r* herbage.

child.

diligence,

)
a f

dl and wiA
*
13" and

and wiA
peace.
* *

Ql

and

-iJL

goodness.
9

|J^>
I]

a dwelling.
'and

(HOD an end.

treasure.

coldness.

B'and

|J

and wk2>
anguish.

It is

seldom that
}V
'

all

three forms are found derived from one orig11'

inal

e.

g.

\1C1** a rope,
JJl

U^LM

a pestilence,

\\

"'

ySQ^j

<7t7^ ;

oftener

two forms, as

aw oak,

\1\

a storm (from ^1).

TABULAB VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUSB.

b.

119

Infinitive

forms

with Immutable Vowels.

Abs.stat.

Em.
.
o

stat. (
a-

|>Ui

herd.
% 0.
>

seizure.
0*

Q\~ltt) folly.
t '

a MOfm

/"/v.

p*)OniO
gleaning.

affiance.

\LQn.) a kiny-

^2}

a.girdle.

]e> (and

B)

U><^>V

a fetter.

ing.

Ol and -iA
tradition.

*
)

a vessel.

UfO*

..

Ql
*^'
JJ

and
^ favor.

5 5

talkative-

Ql and

~_1

ness.

nature.
>

a question.

and

A^

a flowing.

indecency.

1)

Vand

|i.CL*OV*j appearance.
l'l
*
r

(LOQJLO possession.

arrival
,

]3
.

and ]i
orna-

Ml

]NnV> fullness.

IZ,Qal)

U and -*^
a sprout.
^0

dence.

U and _>
K

fj_Qj

error.

120

TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.

B.

USUAL INFINITIVE FORMS OF PEAL AND OF THE OTHER CONJUGATIONS.

Peal
Pael.

Aphel.

ShapM.
Usual form and

Usual form and

Usual form and

or

thought.

change.

O
a
"

a
7

led.

]n

* \ ef)L flattery.
Ae/f/>.

'jZo,'"^* slavery.
concussion.

desert.

j^plZ *
^^
*"

fjAoSo a

QSO a
)

thrust.

\ODOL
ijfi

combat.

2. mera speech. "\LyQ.^\

chandise,
u
-

struction.
1
-

g*i

^>
^{/Y.

g>

insight.

"\*OLdespair. (A^CTIQiba

(^lOQji

deliver-

Ql
departure.
bellows.

and wkl

^.2)

l;rf>V>

ri

saw.
Aoe.
|J

and

-i-l

^A*Q^Z V and *j-^

rubbish.

I^OSO a
U (and ]a)

and

harkenin^.
]]

lAxQ2Z
V

a wan- "jZcuAAiD an
#0.

as-

fi\Vna

con-

sembly.

elusion.

and

.-i-S

and *j.2

y and

jh2>

U and w^2
misc.

a drawing lA^joZ doctrine. ]Zni fc^QSo con- jjjOQ* a joro-

*o/

(of water).

elusion.

IT and

]a

arrival.

TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.

C.

121

INFINITIVE FORMS OF

THE LESS FREQUENT

CONJUGATIONS.

Palel and Palpel.

Pealel.

Pavel and Paiel.

splendor.
"

)lXo2 a worm.
nocence.
(J

i and -iA
..

and -iA
b a mystery.

motion.

(Ali
\9
9
fc

Pali.

contamination.

ment.

Parel.

Pamel.

Taphel.

JQCD

swiftness.

shame.

IjicAoZ

doctrine.

122

DENOMINATIVE NOUNS.
41.

Denominative Nouns.

Here belong
1.

Nouns

a)

without any formative additions, derived

from some other nouns, which

D a

may
7

be either primitives or
** *
*

derivatives of verbs
*
9

e. g.

pj.t a gardener, from pQl.t a

V-'A

garden ;

|u>Vf> a seaman,
_<?

from

(\V>

salt ;

b)

with the
T

formative syllables
;

U- masc., V
7

1/L-

fern.,
<\

(Patronymics or
f f P

Gentile Nouns) e.g. j^ioocnj Roman, \Lt^fL^\Israditess ; with the falling away of the syllable *CDQ in names

of towns

e. g.

^i.ffl* )]

an Ephesian, from *COQQaf

a youth

or
e.g.

Feminine Abstract Nouns, terminating in ]2a and }Aj_L

^Zoi\
ness,
Aeac?,

youthfulness,

from

]]!_

}2o^OL

blind-

from ^idL blind ;

principal
fern,
;

}LLJL*J

beginning,

from sa_o

c)

diminutives with .a or
;

DQ masc. and
a
little

}A*JQ from la
tle

attached to the noun

)/cu*l'a
little

e.

g.

fcob
dog,

son,
lit-

brother,

from

W;
;

T/uJoZ^

daughter from 12^3

7

|g)nn\n a young
7

from |*">V\
and

Sometimes we

find both forms in use

l**

a manikin, (CDO^yi . pound nouns also occur

p^' from
;

fr^yt*

]jo^.. -y>^ Diminutives from come. g.

7
^.

e. g.

V'^'

*
;

(JQAJ^ irom paJ^

also

a double -*.*

formation

e.

g.

|jQCOO*a.. a very

little

man,

fAoJQAjoZ'rQ a very
REM.

little

daughter.

letter

mentions a form with the third radical (p. 145) * * * i"i k ^ a little doubled, and Q inserted between them e.g. E4n{)nN

Amira

<

D.

assembly, from
2.

t&^^*
;

Adjectives belong here, which are formed

\3

a)

by

affix-

ing the terminations

masc. lAoJUiOj

masc. and 1/UJ

fern.

e. g.

U**o>
affixing

fern., spiritual,

from
fern.
;

U*>

b)
i
* *

the terminations

!*** masc. (Ax-

by *

e. g.

fjkSQAQ.i masc.

COMPOSITE AND EXOTIC NOUNS.

..

123

fern, corporeal
;

from JSo^Q..
the third,

ordinal numerals

(see

50. 3)

e. g.

l[*LL
V*->

from

]^2

c)

by

affix-

ing the terminations

>.

masc., }AjU

fern.; e.g. V*-L**O>

masc^

k.
fern.

|AoJU,O>

RKM.
marks

In respect to

the cases under

latter
is

a.

and

c.

above,

Amira

re-

(p. 106) that the

rather used in metaphorical lan-

guage, yet he also admits the interchange of the two forms.

42.
1.

Composite

and Exotic Nouns.

The formation of words by composition

;

m Syriac than in the

p.

is more frequent other Semitic dialects, (see Michaelis,

151

Lud. de Dieu, pp. 73,

74).

The words most

fre-

quently used in forming compounds are

^ son
;

e. g.

man, UoZjGtwce; ^\1Q

e.

sir; e.g.
*
"

fcia,\V") enemy;
e. g.
"

g.

]Ax>
YA

*3 y
r

householder;
e.g.

**j J principal
i

firstling;

(AxO house;

L** (mao

corn-house; sometimes

^a]

In changing the eating ; e. g. 1 ;n\">] adversary. Concrete idea into the Abstract, either the last part of the
;

compound word only is regarded

e.g. *|^r>*">*"\VO^ hostility,

;

or both parts are changed into the feminine

e. g.

(ZoAAQ
44.

Ao5
2.

house-holding.

Upon

the plural inflection see

their language,

or

The Syrians have introduced many Greek words into and given them either Syriac terminations permitted them to retain, more or less, the Greek forms.
j

-,

The

following are examples . 7.1 IK

;
.

M-y!

7',

'""
t

Q -\^

su

L.J
jxaXXov,

There are some

peculiarities

124

GENDER OF NOUNS.
which see
12. 5.

in the formation of these words, for

and

44.

Rem.
the

8.

At

the time of the Crusades,

7

the Syrians
;

introduced words also from the western languages

ivs 7
I

e.

g.

O*A

v1

>

Franks,
wt) JG1

pO|J

Germany,
etc.

y\LL\^\

England,

Prince,

Henry,

43.

Gender of Nouns.

The Syriac language has but two genders, masculine and The latter is distinguished partly by the signififeminine. cation and partly by the form.
1. In respect to the signification, the gender is fixed by the same rules as in Hebrew. Masculines are the names of

men, masculine offices, nations, mountains, 'months and rivers. Feminines are the names of female persons and animals, countries, cities, and members of human and animal bodies, which are found double although they have mascu9*
-

< t

line endings in the plural

2.

e. g.

^-Xi ' feet from

is
9 P

^o... >, etc.

In respect to form, the feminine I

*<?

characterized
first

by
of

the terminations

Pj

)>

But the
\?
7

those final syllables, which

is

particularly used for the

(e. g.

for-

mation of feminines from masculines

|^M female

com-

panion from

^M masc.),
To

must not be confounded with a

similar sounding termination of masculines (the emphatic state, 45, 3) usually given in the lexicons, as the only mas-

culine form in use.

distinguish this fern, form from the

;

masculines,
e. g.

it

is

usually given with the termination ]2

*|Aa^V)

the queen.
-j

The forms with ol and

*
Os

*JLx
9

have

arisen

by apocope from
AjiD part.

|Z

e. g.

">*^

I c/oodness, **;o learn.

is

The
e. g.

last

of the above mentioned endings L

seldom used

GENDEB OF NOUNS.
REM.
lives
;

125
in adjeo
|
,

1.

The feminine ending \-

is

generally found

e. g.

*d

masc.
*.
,

(L

fern.

If the
t:

word ends with

-,

this
fern.

letter is

changed into

and forms

e.

g.
i

lU

masc.

|>ni

Gentile nouns and numerals ending with w change that terminax x * if f y. wOCTLi fern. masc. Nouns with tion into fV*JOCTL e.g.
;

final are

masculine

when Z

is

a radical letter of the

ofo've.

noun

e. g.

(A&O

bow,
2.

|Ao. ornament,

|A*1

REM.

Many nouns
ship,

with a masculine ending are feminine or

(

common.
6.
'_r.

They

are usually given in the emphatic state

45. 3)

pb_&
we//,

|>.>0j way,
herd,
P

|JL_^ rib,
.

(i>*| earth,

P-vil pitcher, ?T ^
9

|;nO
*

!?^i; ^'we

q/" ^ff

battle,
T

(l^l com. /tm,

T

leather bottle,
r^//<-,

(2^M
/"
^

sword, com.,
l
1

tl^QlD burden,
?

|^3

talent.

Icop
^

//y,

*^- com. 1 tongue, f^*^ A-O/,

\ff^m com. mo/A,
X
^

] JQJ ^re.

pOICO com. moon,

J 7

(JHCD shield,

(guv branch,
*

*.

t^O'rL

&/, (MO*

"!*'? )* com. wmr/, (AjiZ) com. terror, ( v

com. firma-

ment,
MW,

vQj_

hades,
^'^y-

jAxiQs ?/, (jlSAs com.

? r

heaven,

\ml*

coin.

^*^*
^
;

Names
a
ass,

of animals also are of the

common

gen-

der
bers

e.

g. |;Vn

(J-^.t a
\4

ca;?ie/ ;

also the cardinal

nume.

from 20 to
O
<\

100^
' :

Greek nouns
'
'

retain

their gender

g.

"i

CO,JQCD

tfuvodoc,

(OjAj)
all

^ia^r)XT].

In general,

those nouns are

considered as feminine

which come from the feminine of the Heof those nouns which, in the emphatic

brew, ending in H~T, and

state,

end in

"|2

45. 3).

J26

NUMBER OF NOUNS.

44.

Number of Nouns.

There are two numbers in Syriac, the singular and plural. There are, indeed, four dual forms, taken from the Hebrew,
ending in

^_

(^-*2 masc. two, ^-i2>2 fern, two, ^-2]lo two

Tt
Ti

hundred, and ^-> *So Egypt] but they cannot be considered as a special form of the language. Pairs are usually expressed by the plural, and duality by the numeral two. The plural of masculines is formed by annexing the
;

syllable
*"

^i_

to the

noun

sing.

e. g.
"

^-OCL

mountains, from
*f

io

that of the feminine

by ^

(instead of

A
)
;

*"

e.

g.

IjoAo

virgin, plur. ^.XoA^),

Item.

1.

Plural masculines of derivatives from Yerbs U,

ending with J- and

..
1>

77

-*-.

terminate in ^JL_ *
plur.
$,,

e.

g.

]].

boy,

plur.

^i^>
in
:

^'fjalo

dwelling,
p

ending
f>

J^ Q and L

take tQ

e.

g.

mvr>
i>

^u^So* 7
x
;

Feminmes

kingdom, plur.
+*\> creature,

Q"AV>
V

those ending in
i\

take

^
;

e. g.
n

plur. ^->'r^

if the doubled consonant appear again in the plural, take Linea occultans
,

Nouns derived from Yerbs Ml

e.

under the
07

lki

of the similar letters I..7 D7 sea, ^-tV^^S from pni people.

first

g.

^*SnVu from
same
**

Rem.
manner
"

2.

Some masculines form

"T

the plural in the

:

as feminines.

Here belong
^ "j" 7
(

fco)
T

physician, plur.
"
1

''V

^'*1
plur.

.*
""

>

'i

1*1 7
;

77

.OO3|; (jjo| cno, plur. |Zcujo|

.

fj>|

MOTI, plur.
l"?
"

7..7

"/l^ 7

-i

"

7
;

iO>^| ; JuOM snake, plur. *0. 07*. ^'".Omwte, plur. fZajjas ; froos throne, plur.
5^1 J9to<?^,
-,

(loow
P7.-X
*Z

.a0>c3
*
ifl
-

; * ;

P. 7

-7
;

t>

night,

plur.

,n\ i N
V

\\

UQO member,
T,p

plur.
7
C ;

IZalao
"

Jl>

herdsman,

plur. (as
,

a part.

^J>-1')

^Qi>

J*

cup-oearer^
varietafo

&c. (Compare Agrell, Comment, de plur. ]2on generis et numerl, p. 68 ; and upon the absolute " form and 45. 1. 3.) use, see phatic states. tli"
;

and em-

NUMBER OF NOUNS.
REM.
lines
;

127

3.

The following

feminities

form the plural like mascu-

a)

by rejecting the feminine ending of the emphatic singular

t&fell, ^>SfiV;
,

45. 3),

(1'ZAl)'

woman, ]mj)
Ijioa
;

\hsrfiwall, ]a>f
}

coaf, j tear,

\&>* fig-basket,

J^SOJ

window,

]Q>

}An^

ft'fe,

]lO\

(o/ paper),

seve,

\\OMD

lA^lD

wore?, ]]io

l^li

//'</>.

VZ^DD
cluster (of grapes),
bridle,

ftar/ey, IJl

\l
SarAr,

lAoji

i/tow.;/,

UJjl

")

1>i^

l^Sn
;

]*/Sn

yar, ^JL!*

1'Al* hour,
e.g.

l^p..* almond,
;

V^Z
; ;

/y, tff,
cry,

etc.

by retaining Z;

]}&

booty,

fi}^

"jAl^
jZ|

lAiy.

ZfA noxious
15\S\
care,

means, |Z]\

ugliness, |Z| .;
r?/sf,

1^25 ^

*,

}^O

calling,

]&)

"j^Q*

"JA^O*

(see Agrell,

passim,

p. 70. sq.)

REM.

4.

Some nouns form a double

.7
;

plural

(the feminine form

IT

father,
^ y
;

<>

..

and iOlo|
breast,

\L*M
T

army,
f

^>\>
<

^*r+*

"W
;

rr
T

and ^O\i

^O,-M
7

tn repetition)

^2] mni^ ^a1*^l and ^1^1 z X ' * V >

7

(times,

>OGU *D

TT

pi Aawc?, ^->r*|

and iOl,-| (gripe of the hand);

heart,

(/ay,

^V)CU I

and

1"C
;

^LoCLi
T
;

and ^\*~\\ "~

1^

>

* '

V*
:

iO*"l \
t .

j'fiD lord,

^i;V> and ^OpO

:

9OU
1
;

stream,

^-)OU and ^O9OU

T
*

and ^>(1
X

'

(1 *,S eye,
-

^>1*S and
.
;

^1

iS (t'omiT

'r^ (corner)

\1* (LQ*
;

heel,

^*">n\ and z^OHS *

Hf/;/<c,

p^O

Aor;t,
,

i;r>

and

^_OllQ* and ^OliQ*

etc.

128

NUMBER OF NOUNS.

masculines as in some of the above examples, take

the plural ending and the last radical.
take

or Ol between
1^9

Also some feminities in (Z

;

and Ol before the plural ending

e.g.

fASDo") people,

ZoiiO
^Pf

lASl
*>
**

offering,

l2ol;
^

^fmother,
Sometimes
a.
^P. P

handmaid, (ZoiSo] (compare

*i&t.

49).
*
^
;

is

in*X
;

9'*

(\

serted

e.

g.

ZjQOj

5ee,

|U)O2>

A30> p&u*, (A^2O>

jAflOQCO mare,

|AxCDQ0,

etc.

REM.

5.

The composites (42.1) form the

;

plural in such a
-o
7
>

man;

ner that either

a) the last part of the composite is inflected

ff

e.g.

granary, or
?,

6) the
e.g.

first
. J

part

e.

g.

|^i

i*">

?an-

TV ..(>

or

c)

both parts

\J-QL13

tattling.
yl..
;

REM.

6.

Some words
V""l 7 \S5\face,
1*'"
7

only occur in the plural

worth.

**><">

e.g.

water,

life,

M^D)
D

REM.
Hibui
(

V.

Some
6)
;

singular
-.7

names
'

(collectives)
7
|* r

take the plural mark,

!>

e.

g.

(*2)
?'

horses,

CiO

also places here (p. 95)

1^4 ^^^
*

cattle, P" X

(j-1 sheep.

Amira

and |,-AO

draft-cattle.

REM.

8.

Greek nouns, without regard to gender, take the Syriac

*
;

-x

T<

1**

plural ending of masculines in

(_

e.g.

^>QOQ^2>|
^"*
;

eifufxotfoi,

Lk^2) ^aXayysj, |LQ.iO)

the plural terminations offeminines in \L

rfra^ia.

^o^jxara.

Less frequently do they take

^"
r

e.g.

(IQIO^O

/u-yj^ava/,

which constitute the Greek singular |Zo)Aco| terminations are commonly omitted; but in some instances retained;
Letters
e. g.

(CDOSQJ
i?

vo|aoi

from

vojxoj.

The
by

plural terminations Sss

|

and

reg,

from from

and

0.5,

are represented

and J4

yi>

v*
;

e.

g.

d-kAo

xXsjJej

xXsij;

]4l^9 r]') av^iavrss from

av^iaj:.
*

The Syriac
1*
7

often re-

tains the termination of the Greek plural

and of the
JQD,

cases, represent-

ing the accusative a;

e.

(first

declension)

by

CD|,

fiDO

and

g.
.

01
;

and

ou

(second declension) by

and

DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN

e.
<">-

129
and

g.

n^oo

Zrwixoi,
T
">

.nnot^.x.^
YlV"
|

<i>/Xjflrirou;

*
;

neuters of this declension by |; e.g.

|JLO x69aXeca
as of the
;

the genitive

by .o)
-

e.g.

ft

>n *l

ax

twv

an(l

third declension

are represented
7 7

by .m*.,
~X -***-;

1 .\rn 'EXXr,vaf DjO-i2)*Xaxaj, tOPQ

*CD, .J&1 * * *

and .ICO
;

e.g.

%flP^CiD Kaitfa^af,
iff

eig

from the singular in

;

I ^**

is

represented by
in a<ra,

e.% g.

m>fT|
r

ai^erfeij
f

and the neuters

T T >

T
;

ending

are represented

by (4 an d J4l
.7
.

e.

g.

^SQ..O> and
The same
r

|^]iQ..O9 ^\

(5oy(jiaTa.

Some
f

-r

~*

of these plural endings occur in Latin

;

nouns

e.

g.

CDpQJ|

annonce

D(^0(O
.

U^*
castra.
'

is

garden, for P-

from

]Al

'.

(comp. Agrell OtioL Syr. p.

4649).

45.

Different delations (States) of the

Noun.

1.

Besides the absolute and construct state of the Hebrew,

is

of which the latter marks the genitive, there

in Syriac

and Chaldee, an emphatic

state.

It

originally

marked

the

noun with the

definite article.

It also

occurs where

we

should not expect to find the definite article.

REM.
r

The

indefinite article

is

expressed by the
f

absolute state,
r

or by ,-w one.

There are many nouns which never, or very seldom,

^
;

occur in the absolute state

bull,

e.

g.

(2Q*

heat,

jlDdO

situatio/i,

]2a&

death,

etc.

2.

The

construct state

a) of
;

nouns masc.

differ

from the absolute

state

e. g.

sing.,

does not

good ;

but in the

130
plural, the

DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN.

ending ^* * ' from
*(>
is

struct state
*

^^L
ft)

Nouns

Q^ conchanged into -.- e. g. which form the plural masc.,

;

7
;

by

44.Rem.l), change that termination into ->

e.g.

fcj-ipD

from

^-r;

in the fern, sing., ].

;

of the absolute

state is

e. To the terchanged into L g. A^2 from \4>* 2nnVn from minations Q and w_ only 2 is added e. g.
;

QnS>V>

Aa'pO
t
;

from w;o
i

In the plural, 2

is

appended

9 9

instead of
3.

e.g.

Ari from
emphatic
|-j

The

characteristic of the
is final }

state,

for

both genThis

ders and numbers,

is
;

(=

the

Hebrew

article).

a) attached to the sing, of nouns masc. with JL preceding;

e.g.

.07 pQl from

7

^(XL people.
T*

In the plural the noun masc. takes

7

the termination
In..

(_ with the falling

state

away 7 of o^.
?..

e.
r

g.

fi\ithemen, (from the con str.

fca^yi) from 'r^u;

plur. |I
is

6)

in the emphatic state fern. sing,

and

attached
before 2
;

to the construct state.

e. g.

In the

falls sing., _!_

away

jALoAa from

constr. state
e. g.

A^oAa

In the plural,
7

is

retained before 2;

]A^oA^ from A^oAo.

plur.

REM.

1.

The emphatic
1.

state
(

masc. ends in

i'

(A.
.9 7"
7
;

in

nouns
7

which take ^*_ in the 1\.. 7

plural,

44.
*f

Rem.l)

e.

g.

M r *So from
1 *
viz.
r
,

alO
7>..

Only three nouns take

9

*>

instead of

1"

M_

-^-fo
sing.

i-.A

KO frogmen ts,
>

and

ip** breast,

from the emphat.

water,

\^
] -j

V* t^

Hr***
-f

The emphatic forms |!JL^O

Buxtorf
26.
cites
(>..

and

.Vn
f

heaven, belong here.

ix.

yet a third form, with

("!>

(I.; e.g. Rom.

24. ^ifO;

l-*ifi);

Ephes. n. 11.
in

But these forms

are not recognized

by Amira, and the form

should perhaps be restored in these cases, as more correct.

The
:

fol-

forms lowing should be noted as irregular emphatic plural

DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN.

.
0.1.

131

from JOf

y0

.1

f
ocfor.

-.

//'//'/, .ft f

pUxj) from IMUI)

etc.

l-JOp* from

from

|A^2 AOMM,

REM.

2.

Feminines_with masculine endings

43. Rem.2), form

(1;

the emphatic state like masculines by attaching the termination

*S T

e. g.
> .
.

^>

earth,

emphat.
*.*

state Jl) ]

*O T
;

j^O^O

/w,

emphat.
is
D

state

pjOO.
quiesces in

Before the ending (. of the

*
;

fern, absol.,

inserted and
t

e.g.

\LO r^t
in the

from (0,^*^0^.

Forms with

Jj

take

lA^-.
radical
;

Some words
e.

emphatic form take

before the last

g.

|A^Q2p0

from \j3feofood.

Feminines which are

r^ii,

formed from masculines, like

adjectives,

|Z^l.^

from

and especially
the
syllable

form the emphatic state

;

fern.,

by

(2 to the masc. absol.

in (1

e.

g.

]Ao- (from
-i_
g.
;

^
i
ff

affixing

masc).
r

Adjectives
f r

change
9

this termination into

e.g.

|Ai\4

from |J^ dull.

Those in

^
into

take

A
e.

after

e.

|Al^fl;V) from ^^n..;V>

compassionate.
before
.
j

In the
;

emphat.
0l

state

f"T

Q
i>

g.
,

|Z.OU from
/*"/V.

plur.,

some words change

sAeejs.

(ni

Some
e.

take

A Q
;

e.

g.

(ZoiiD from AllD

r.
.i

Othei-s insert

g.

(l

from

JZ-'rCDflD bundle.

REM.
which
(vid.
is

3.

The emphatic form

1

is

found even before the genitive,

V
T

formed by
73).

>

e.

g.

p>>Sf)>

|p^

servant of the king

Syntax,

132

TABLE OF RELATIONS OF NOUNS.

Table of the Different Relations (States) of the Noun.

(

45 and 48).

MASCULINES.
A. Nouns of one and

two
(Decl.

syllables
1.

with

immutable

vowels.

48).

Plural.
emphat.
constr.
absol.

Singular.

emphat.
} Im
o

constr.
f

and

absol.

<

.m

Head.
Vessel.

..

-.

r>

jfcfl

Thief.
>.
7

"7

-X

Herb.
Nazarite.

Nation.

B.

Nouns

in

which

and

of the ultimate syllable

is

fall

away,

but the vowel of the penultimate

7

retained

(Dec!. II).

7"

-?

rOD

-r
7

Talent.

(JOTED

w.?01

Witness.

Hand.
..L0)
'*
)

DECLENSION OF NOQNS.
r

133

C.

Nouns
falls

in

which

(in gutturals

of the ultimate syllable

away, and the vowel

(Decl HI).

appears over the antepenultimate

radical consonant.

(One dead).

D. Segholate forms, which begin with

F

a vacant consonant, over

*.

which the original

or

reappears in

inflection,

or

is

assumed in

their stead

(Decl. IV).

"I n V.D

"i

<

|^\Vn

.\^n

t*

King.
/:..-/-.

Holiness.
JI/ii*^.
> .0.
r r
..

(iDCL.
T

^LOOi
T

^^iDCLi

pOOi

^OOi

Day.

E.

Nouns
|

IV'

derived from Verbs

into
wi

^ *

'

(J

ending with (-,**, *A_, in which

passes

and

is

movable as in both the other forms

(Decl. V).
t 7

t"
.

UA 9
~.

S
f 7

t" 9

*
>

Tf-

^-

k-^'

M^'
.(>

^'
Herdsman.

P 7

"P

mOr>

. .

VmVn

VmVr)
*

77
Prisoner.

184

DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF TUB NOUN.

FEMINIZES.
A. Nouns with immutable vowels (O, *_,etc.) before the ending

\L

(Decl.

I).

Virgin,

Bride,

iO

City.

Plural. emphat.
constr.
absol.

Singular.
emphat.
constr.
absol.

A^oAa
/ffia
A'"*. Aiu io

,oAo

VAloAa

A^

B. Nouns, whose
in the

final syllable

begins with two consonants, which,

_I_ or Jl_ inserted

emphat.

state

sing, have

between them

(Decl. II).

if Widow,

JlLi

Chariot,

]oy] Alms.

.0.

|Aoji

C. Nouns, in whose emphat. state, the vowel of the

first

syllable is
).

moved forward

to the second vacant consonant

Decl. Ill

^Qjs* Partner,

p.^l
12'rfiM

Cow.

iiy

Ay

DECLENSION OP NOUNS.
D. Derivatives of Verbs
|J

135
whose
Decl.
**

ending in

)_ and |O
and __

and

in the

emphat.

state sing, quiesce in_i.

IV

).

/![' i //>',

ft
J

Animal,

Ujt>jO
9

^Jsl*
f i
.

xAj
/n

^k_Kl

e.

,r

.ft

|Z.Qj_K

.FT "
|

2 ), beginning |J ending in Q and .( with two consonants, and having O wnd -i movable in the plural
E. Derivatives of Verbs
(

Decl.

).

>

Thing,

Q^^>
o

Plague,

^'r-^ Creature.
>

Ct

Request,

AliD Parf,
ff

O^D

.Dominion.
ci
.
.

Qr3

'

Q:>
>

1'2a*lD

iio

ZoiiJD

.aiiD
o-j
>

lAilo

Aiio

Aiio

.0,10

136

NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.

46.

Nouns with

Suffixes.
16. 2.

The noun,
suffixes,
1.

in taking suffixes (see

B. and table of
:

16),

undergoes the following changes

;

In masculines
state,

a) the suff. in the sing., is attached to

;

the emphatic

with the falling away of ]L

e. g.

pVf)

In decl. I. III. IV. V. (from V .SV)), with the suffix .inVn In nouns 48. A) the radical vowels are not changed. ( of decl. II., the final vowel of the absolute state _JL or r reappears before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plural
,

tT

(>

. 7 9

e. g.

XL-AL,
i>

emphat. (V)NS,
*x
,

with suffix
i

.vn\v
;

jOl-CD,

with suffix .OCljOiflD. So also monosyllabic nouns, which lose _l or _L in the emphatic state, take it again before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur. e.g.

emphat. fjoico

5>Q

emphat. ]Sn.

with suffix .>V)

.^^n

(**> from

jo), etc.

In nouns, derived from Verbs U ending in ^J o

(Decl. V),
wi

emphat. state V
sing.,

before the suffix of the 1

i
;

7
,

2 and
|J.
,

3 plur., quiesces in _1
;

e. g.

\^

.nn.\^
is

from

emphat. )>\(^
;

but before the other suffixes _

movable
e.g. ii

e.

grammarians,

g. '^iN^ wi is movable
,

Ol^

even

to Syriac before the suffix 1 sing ;

and according

i).

The same

is

true also of nouns ending with

*
T

(passive participles of Pa.

of Verbs fy' Aph. and Shaph. x *

7

32.1,

48 masculines, Decl.V);

from wA*lD drink.

sing, are

^oouA*SD, These nouns with

e.g.

^A*LD
;

(.

.A^^)

suffixes of the 1,
e. g.

pronounced

like the absol. state

*aA*lD

my

drink,

(*AD)QD
all

my

throne

from jff>9Q2

is

an exception).

Here belong
with a suffix

the emphatic forms ending with V

a vacant consonant preceding, excepting

is

]ao
oi;io
p
,

having master, which

,

as follows

^^ ^D
,

.001^0, V

etc.

Finally, in emphatic

nouns ending
is

in
;

\+,

having a vowel

preceding, the general rule

followed

e.g.

KiOi

reflection,

NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.

.

18'<

ff

with suffix
fc

w_i..iOl

^O^D.
..CO*

The same
.
.

or
is

MO;2
J>l>
,
>

creator,

with
*

suff.
.-

.0

true of nouns with

.*

f|

for
plur.
]\

e. g.
T,

with f JjQO
*^i]liQO

suit.

wi^iQO

^Uoa, wk2(4O2,
1

etc.,

*^QQ,

But
,

in Ceases

where the termination

takes Lin.

does not

stand for Vi

as in

]]lD
;

occul. in suff. 1 sing.

,

and 2 and 3
other

plur.

e. g.

4lD

^oaUa>

etc.

In

the
is

suff., plur. with suff, the vowel of ) thrown back upon the preceding vacant consonant e.
;

and in the

g.

etc.

b)

Plural suffixes in the masc. are attached to the construct

(

form
e. g.

45. 2. a) with

which the suff

1 sing,

forms a crasis
passes into
oi,

*Av>

In the

sing, masc., however,

**.

e. g.

wiCTinnV/) (also ^O1Q_

= Germ,

aii

(Engl.

nearly),

according to Lud. de Dieu, T p. 160, but not according to

Amira)

and
(

in the 3 fern.

before ** passes into

e. g.

16. B).

Plural nouns with

^1
;

attach the suf-

fix to the construct

form ending in

JLJ

e. g.

^*t

with

suff

.,.

i.i\..
;

wiOiCL*^,...
,

So

also in the

with

e.g. >*^yi ^Oio^yji (see ~V* "t?^ -TlP^ "t T N I and Also plurals with |A.-; e.g. U-X- with suff. and those plurals which, with the suffix of 1 sing.,
.

V-

emphatic ending Lud. de Dieu, p. 163).

Tf
'
7

-^^

differ
;

from the

sing,
T

with the same with

suff.
T
.

suff.
;

only by taking Ribui

plur.

e.g. ]lAjfcLo drink,

..

i^^
T

emphat.

with suff -lAmio and jjAjtVo

REM.
o.jj.

my

drinks.

1.

Collective nouns sing, with Ribui, take the suff. sing.;

suff.

Illwith

Olil

j^il.
p.

Only

]JLJ]

takes

the

suff.

plur.

e.g.

^OIQAj]*

Amira

213, supposes that (j'Q-

'

tu both

suffixes belongs here.

188
REM.
7

NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.

2.

JO

father,

\*j>]

brother,

pO** father-in-law,
suff. *

are formed

anomalously.
into
;

The
e.

first
k0

two, with the

of the 1 sing., change

T\

g.

wk>|
is
7
,

The

last takes

e.g.

-^^>r

Final

before the other suffixes

r
1
,
.

01

00

7
1
,

changed
etc.

into

e.

g.

^OQJ
;

2.

In Feminines

a)

the suffix in the sing,

is

attached

to the

ing

form of the emphat. state with a union vow el precede.g. oiA^k5>1 from USDS') widow, emphat. state ]A^oV).

The

suffixes of the 1 sing,

and of the 2 and 3 plur. are

attached to the construct state without the union vowel,

to avoid the concurrence of three vacant consonants
*<>
;

e. g.

"
,

from
REM.
p

|^U
|2jSsD

constr. state

From
y

(emphat. state) mistress,

?

is

found iO

In \L'f> daughter, constr.

state,

L'^ with

the

sufF.

of the 1 sing.,_
;

^7
-iZ;^5
i (p.

moves forward from the

It

first

to the second consonant

e. g.

should be remarked that the letter marked with Linea occultans

-a

is to

be pronounced,

if

the above suffix occur

e.g.

(Al^rSo with
190)

suff.

.obAL^D, T^A

with

suff.

wiZ^L

Arnira asserts
,

that the laterSyrians have the form.tOCTlAla,iO

etc.

b)

In the

plural, feminines take singular suffixes

,

e. g.

etc.

REM.

In respect to the cardinal numbers

sing,
*

50. 2),

it

should be

remarked that they take both the

with the
first,

and

plur.

suffixes,

possessive pronouns,
T

and with the

7"
j

last,

forming demonstrative
'j" J
7

pronouns
two,

e.g.

OlI^CQl

his ten,

^OOU>Z

those two,

^_iOUoZ,

those

iOOL*A_LZ

those three.

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
47. Declension of Nouns in General.

139

Nouns are varied in respect to inflection (44.46) according to their form, either with or without any vowel changes. Thus they are divided into two principal classes, viz. those with immutable and with mutable vowels. The latter class, on account of its diversities, may be arranged under several paradigms, and together with the former class, takes the place of the declensions of the western languages (comp. 48).
;

48. Exhibition of Nouns according to Declension.

A. MASCULINES.
Decl.
x

I.

This includes

all

monosyllabic nouns as well as

those having
els
T

more
.

syllables than one, with

x
9

immutable vow*,

(A,

Q, Q,)
P

e. g.

**>

head,
0%
T.

master,

*o.^0 ^
is

lean,

Q.. midst,

belong likewise those nouns whose penult, syllable

a close one
e. g.
;

*2ZoZ native. 4t-Xo2) partition, v V

e. g.

To

the latter class

either
;

-^J
if

^CID^ herbage, (gentile nouns with *_ Nazarite), or such as would have a close penult
the
;

syllable,

Syrians employed duplication of letters

e. g.

(=

Dagh. forte)
Here

*^Lyi

thief.

REM.
which
first
T

also belong

nouns derived from ^il Verbs with

final

in the plural,

double the

radical letter,

and mark the

;

of

the

two

$Qnation,

plur.

<^nv- But monosyllabic nouns having Q and

state,

IT

doubled

letters

with

Lin.

occult.

e.

g.
X .. ,

and in the emphat.

which change

and

into
i

belong to
x
;

segholate forms(Decl.IV); e.g.

t r

^OCU

day, emphat.state
also in

pOCU ^i\

eye,

emphut. state

p_A;

as

do those
;

which under the same

emphat. state

circumstances

is

transposed

e. g.

^sOpD

holiness,

jj>OO.
_f_ falls

In

^ i\\ young man,

in the
inflection
,

v-1QL
and
etc.

//'./.

and
_

*OL>;) jxtradise,

away

with _y preceding, forms

at ; e. g.

emphat. state (SfliNs

140
Decl. II.

DECLENSION OF NOUN'S.
This includes nouns, with _L and JL, which have
;

two consonants

e.g. $OL

name, or two syllables, of which

as in

the penult, is either a

mixed one
;
7

^^nLo
;

(part. pass.

Aph.),

j.->V> mighty
77
e.g.
;

or whose middle radical must be

doubled;
table

;22 a

talent ; J2>

70

sparrow
f>

or has an
7

immuwheel.

vowel

e.g.

^Q\L

eternity

JOICD witness
final
suff.

^-^..

In these nouns, the vowel of the

excepting in the sing, before the
fore the 2

syllable falls
*i

away,

of the 1 sing, and bet

and 3

plur.

e. g.

emphat. state fV)\S with

suff.

OlSoll
REM.
etc.

. ,

iVlSy

and .OGlSoXl.
also

Here belongs
also like

^
7*

Acme?, emphat.state
7

1^
*7

plur.,

i^,
here,
f

Forms

>^,lO

tar,

and

f^>,^b belong
first
e.

which take a new

syllable with. _^_ over

the

radical letter in
\
V

consequence of an accumulation of consonants

15. 4).

g.

pjJS,So
-

(see

The following
etc.

are examples
7

ojJ,lD morning,

A<y>Vn
state

opening,
]l
i

From
. i

v^r>

fountain, appears the

empliat.

W)

plur. }\

\V>
belong those nouns, which, throughout
_1_

Decl. III.

To

this

their inflection, lose

(before gutt.

_I_)

of the final syllable

but take _L as a helping vowel over the antepenultimate

radical

consonant,

viz.

in

participles Ethpe.
*

e.

g.

^4oASo dea d, emphat.

Decl.

state

V4a ^D

IV. Here are to be enumerated

all

nouns which cor-

respond with Hebrew segholate forms (see Gesen. Lehrgeb. Such for the most part in Syriac, are monosylp. 568 sq). labic nouns which begin with a vacant consonant, and have for their characteristic vowel _L or _1, which appears first In this form the in the emphat. state over the first radical. noun remains unchanged throughout its formations. They ** of verbs may as in Hebrew, be divided into derivati
with and without gutturals, and derivatives

DECLENSION OF Noi

141
i

A) To
state

the
;

]n\Sn

belong forms like ^V<^> king, emphat. \ZXD book, emphat. state )*1CD rV 1 child, emfirst class
;
,

phat. state

the form with

^ r l~. To 1'^; with suff QinVf) .ooi;aff> ^ ^ Hholem in Hebrew corresponds *O,O holiness,
,

emphat.
(comp.

state

15. 2. B. b).

!*JOQ; ^iO^D knee, emphat. The same applies

: ;

state

pioa

B) In forms with gutturals

e.g.

,M slave,

emphat. state
also

lrH; ^1Q

master, emphat.

state |Jl3*

Here belong

emphatforms

like ]i>1 earth, ]\y\ cedar, Jtao] food,

l*>o) way.

or C) Finally, derivatives of Verbs ^A and oi lose radicals middle or to the ^ Q* In conquiescent belonging
nection with _1,
T

^-^ eye, (AxQ constr.

REM.
yt^^p
if

and Q form the dipthongs ai and au v r emphat. state p-iA; JDCU. ^Mi^, emphat.state
..

e.g.

state, Jiouse,

emphat.
,

The following forms take

1
*

viz.

counsel,

and the emphat. forms |JS| mourning,

*
\.\

PCX>|)

]>jj threshing floor,

\ZL^

^* ship, \'^G\

lamb; from ^\Ol,

v\

*<*a,

etc.

Some
;

words which would

in

Hebrew, take Pattah,

>

in Syriac, take _^_

e.g.

vw..>/oo, emphat.state Wit'

at tho
constr.

etc.

is

considered as a guttural
*

when

end of
1

PL
i

impure, emphat. state |pQ^. plur. absol.

'

wipD^
(

empliat.
)

IPH^

and

in the

emphat. form (|>Z,

plur.

also

^?K

^rom the absolute

form f>2 grass.

DecL V. Here belong derivatives (mostly participles and

infinitives) of Verbs

(comp.

40.)

ending in
that
1 is

\L,

wkand**.
*^,

The distinguishing characteristic is,

and
is

changed into

movable

as well as both the other endings in the

emphat. state sing, and before the suffixes with the union vowel e.g. emphat. state H^i with sntV. oiL .. But
.
,

before thcsuff. of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur.

quiesces

in.

142

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
e.

the plur. which g. ^oou-^.i. ends with 44. Eem. with the ( 1) falling away of ] e.g. -i>
;

The some

is

true in

^*Xt
with
)JL

The

suffix is attached to the

emphatic

state

ending

as well as to the constr. state

it

ending with **

In

respect to the changes of the vowels,

\*
'

should be remarked
it

that the form with |- takes __ in the emphatic state, if

be

a monosyllable and begin with a vacant consonant

e. g.

In words of two or more syllables V ^ mf the preceding vowel remains unchanged e. g. f^VMJk) from

U-Xi from

]].. revealed.

]v*So,
*.

UX^ASo

from

|]..Ak>.

Monosyllabic nouns with

;

mute likewise

retain their vowels

e.g.

^*^ from

--^^

wine.

Finally nouns ending with *j- (part. pass, of Pa. and

see
T

Aph.
.J

82. 1), lose

t7
'

_L in the emphat.
7

state sing.

e. g.

|* \rnVr)

from >i\mV) abandoned;

;

but

appears again in

the emphat. state plur.

e. g.

Uwith
;

we

find forms

e.

g.

fpft^ (Matt.
f

vi.

4)

from
*

|D2

Also from |J^ we

>,\ ^
state

have the plur. emphat.

>.
7

^^

as

though from

also

(^>*

from the obsolete form pQ*, constr.

of the

Here belongs 7 plur. UL^O*.

The

part Pe. act. differs from the noun

same form by being

inflected as usual, while thenoun,in the plur.takes the form of feminines

of decl. IV.,
.*
.g.
J

and

is

changed into
"
l>^
,

Q movable
T

with
,

_!_

preceding
.0 7
;

~0

(i> pasturing, plur.

A

^-*A'

constr.

S>

emphat. JjA>
p

*/ (i>
7

7"?

r..} .?.

herdsman, on the contrary, becomes in the plur. ^Qi5, ZdL5, |ZQlJ. *

P

From

|jlb master, both, forms of the plur. cccur

throne.

the latter form in

The noun
1
;

>*"**
f

prophet, in the plur., contracts

.

and

] into

..,

17
omphat.

]*^
,

while the adjective

.iCP takes yet another},

-1X7
plur.

(MfiD

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
B. FEMININES.

143

1 )<>!. I. This includes all the Feminines ending with )-, which have an immutable vowel in the penult syllable. In this case tin- penult syllable has either a vowel with a letter

quieting
<>!'

in it;

e.g. ]]oAoi?i/v/m, or the

in

noun

is

a derivative

the plural, the first of the (injilicafe radieals reappears, and takes Linea occultans
in
;

Verbs Mi,
Ui, (also

which case

]\\^ pretense from ^il

is

]ta bride, plur.

^VSn.

appended %^A^oAo. The suff. in other out the union vowel e. g. persons is joined with the form of the emphat. state e. g.
;

The

sulK of the l.sing.

to the constr.state with-

j.&LoAo
REM.

etc.

(eomp.

46. 2).
the plur.

From )j-Zo2 icaistcoat, appears Some forms from jjuJuZoD or _iJ-2a3

occult, in the emphat. state

^il Zo3

as if

with
X

final
city,

take Linea

under J

e.g.

U-i,iO

emphat. state

]Al_t,lO;
state

or J

falls entirely

away

as in

P^M!

another,

emphatic

Decl. If.

Here belong

all

nouns

fern,

whose

final syllable

begins with two consonants. They have the peculiarity, /hat between these two consonants, in the emphat. sing.,
or is inserted. This vowel is determined by the vowel belonging to corresponding masculine terminations; e.g.
irfdow,

(from

^O>

mase.),

emphat. state

(from
rals
is

^^^

masc.), emphat. state

lA^3

before guttu-

always the vowel inserted between the two conso;

nants in the empliat. e.g. j**;)/ou;?, emphat. state lA^^. In the reception of suflixes this declension agrees with decl.
I
;

e.

>;.

lii:M.

^Ab^DiV, OlA^Loi)], **t&&o and OlAS^O. J T 11 i ^ Some insert Q; e. g. [iS&Ofall, emphat. jA\f>^^>>

So

too

"\D"*L

tt'iinder,

(M.*^*/

love.

III.

Thiri includes those

is

nouns

fern,

whose vowel of

the

first

syllable

moved

forward, in the emphat. state to

144

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
e. g.

the second vacant consonant

);*^* female companion,

emphat.
class,

"\L\zi**

Wi^

cow, emphat. ]A^.Il.

Nouns

of this

taking a

suff.

in the sing., are treated like

nouns in
Thus
"jAojl.
terror,

decl. I.

and II. REM. Some nouns have

several
;

emphatic
g.

forms.

j!b>l alms,

has three emphatic forms

e.

}Aojl
>

]Aoj1
,.

.0

In the same manner also are inflected *.0

1\

p*2>
"
7

offering,

|Aoi2

J*"im woman,
emphat.
for

|Jxi> fear,

etc.

The following
:

contractions in the
9 ^

%Pj

%^A
I

**

state

should be mentioned

\t- r

* for I^I-M wew,

A^vt

VAl^u
Dec/.

fro

Usiyt

vine,

}h
fern,

for

]5\LDl from

]l^ Jricfc
|1

TY. This includes

derivatives of Verbs

end-

It should be remarked in reference to ing in ]a and ]o them that the immutable vowel of the penult syllable is retained, and a. and Q in the emphat. state sing., quiesce
,

*"

in

.07
first

and

1*A
;

x *

.0*
\*-**O

e. g.

[ZLkxiO

from

fl*'
.

reproach,

]/<>.>>

from (QJLM animal.

of the

If the masc. be monosyllabic the vowel

syllable falls

away

e. g.

lA^!l

from }*\
all
A 7 7
,

girl,

$4 masc.).
j.
9

But

in the constr. state,

;

and in
7
T

and
-X

a
,

are
etc.

movable

e.

7 * g. AJLA*O . J

the plurals,
1
7
,

Zcu^

L\

plur.,

Ot t
KEM.
the

Here belongs
7

also the participle act. of Pa.

and Aph.

but

fern, participle

pass, in the
7

same

conjugations, ending, in the

X

masc., with

_.

takes
a.

instead

of

in
;

the
e.

emphat.
g.
|

state.

With

this
0.

vowel
7
i

forms the dipthong ai

7 7

,\.

emphat. (A
Decl. V.

N.i V) from

wA..lD.

AQ

To

of Verbs

|)

belong mostly monosyllabic derivatives ending with Q and JL (some end in L ), which
this
;

begin with two consonants e. g. Ouio calamity, jfi creature. Also dissyllabic nouns belong here with immutable

ANOMALOUS NOUNS.
>

146
T

vowels in the penult syllable

e.g.

OS]

victory,

*>oZ

thanks^

whose o and *
plur.

quiesce, throughout in the sing.

<a are

But

in the

where o and
take
t.

movable, some nouns (derivatives second radical

..
.?
.
,

of Pa.)

after the
T..
,

letter

f.T

e.g.

oL.

(Zo^.. Nouns ending with entreaty, plur. iOif ZQJ* . 2 belong here, which in the plur. take Q with the falling

away of L
ical letter

e. g.

ASl

offering,

plur.

tQAl ZQA^ iZoSl. ^

,
,

Other nouns (derivatives of Pe.) take

;

after the first rad,

e.g.

oSo> resemblance, plur. tQSo>

;

Zoic >. IZoioj;

or with gutturals following, they take

f T

e. g.

o*iD

blow,

plur.

tOM^o,
a

etc.

REM.
.

The same

peculiarity of taking a
f

new vowel
ci^qp,
*k*~

is

found also
j

"T

ff

.
,

in

authority, plur. O,lD ' ^"7^^ " |(lO a hundred, plur. (Zo(S0 as
r

O^O

etc.
if

(*ni
k
11"

plur.

tOOJ and
So
also in

from

OOJ
(J
;

and
e.

OD.
y

some nouns which are not

plur.
t<">
T
i

derivatives of

g.

^^
;

.0. >

O)GIQD
,

^o r on^Lo
.

testimony,

plur.
,

|^O)GICD,
others.

and even

besides

.anNV)

and some

49.

Anomalous Nouns.

Some nouns

of very frequent occurrence are inflected in

less

a manner varying more or

from the above mentioned

paradigms

47, 48).

This arises either from an attempt

to unite different ground-forms, or

from the simple ground

form conforming

less closely to

the general laws of inflection.

:

These nouns are the following

146

PARADIGMS OF NOUNS.

MASCULINES.
Plural.
emphat.
constr.
absol.

Singular.
emphat.
constr.
absol.

*s]
?
"

JD) Father.
7

oia|
-.7

iOis I
1 *"* y* ..x

^_iAo
p

0"

. DO DOZoiSQ

FEMININES.

>

"7

"%'

^p

ZOM|

tOwf

|Ax
7
.

- 7

Daughter.
Sister.

Ml.
7

.7

Al
.

pL
^* *

Fear.

!>.(>!).

|Aiao>

.O"* Alaoj

nft

^'i';

|Aao>

ADO>

i7 *

po>

Place.

148

NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.

Paradigms of Nouns
A. MASCULINE NOUNS.
SINGULAR.
Stat. absol.

Decl.

II.

Decl. IV.

Decl. V.

JOTCD
Witness.

J&D
King.

]]^

wA*Lo
Drink.

Boy.

Suff.Sing. 1

c.

2 m.

2f.
3
3

m.
f.

OljOlCD
dijoico
.JOICD
.

Suff.plur. 1 c.

-*p

2 m. 2
f.

~_k3>Gl0
OOlJOlCD

nnVAn

*i.V^

^.AaVn

3 m.

tOCJLd^lD

.nm \ /

_Q

(To the

suff. 1 sing,

of the forms y.

and wiAak) add

i\4 and

PLURAL.
Suff. sing. 1 c.

^_JOT2D
7
P

ki>G1D
7 P

^in\So 7. 7 t n>V)
.

2 m. 2
f.
-

t^k>Gl0
.

^ .;mm
7 #

3
Suflf.plur.

f.

OUJOIOD
^-ijOlCD

1 c.

^ n Vn
i

2 m.

.QSU JOICD

tC

2f.
i

ni.tuuujuujj
f.

<

_iOL5OlCD

NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.

I

149

with Suffixes.
B.

FEMININE NOUNS.
Decl. IV.

Comp.

49.

Table.

Decl.

1.

Decl V.
*i n\.
Petition.

IV-A
Son.
Father.

|JoAs

v \/ %
t.
|

Virgin.

Maiden.

>r

rs
ii.\i

^>

AGIOS)
01*2

01

oi'Zol.

oiAloA^

cnZoX. ^ r, *

Flood,

Waters.

J&a
.

.Vrt

CTUlD

^
.

..

^ooiAiS^ * rt
* *i

.ooiZo^*
^
* i

^t?"

150

ADJECTIVES AND NUMERALS.

50. Adjectives

and Numerals.

Adjectives being derivatives of verbs (see 40. and and having the same form as nouns, are inflected acIn respect to 44, 45, 48). cording to the same laws (see
1.

tables)

denominative adjectives, see 41. 2. REM. The Syriac has no special forms for the comparative and For the manner in which these are expressed, see superlative.
Syntax
2.

77.

Numerals are either cardinal or ordinal. In the former should notice the peculiarity, that masculines from 3 to but feminines, on 10, as in Hebrew, have feminine endings the contrary, have masculine endings. From 20 to 100 there is only one form for both genders.

we

The numbers from

1 to 10 are the following

CARDINALS.
Fern.

Masc.
i.

Fern.
.

Masc.
o.

|A

6.

Jloi")

4.
5.

\i*Z
'JX&

\L
1-J2O1

9.

10.

REM.
see

Upon
2. b.

the union of these numerical words with suffixes,

46.

Rem.

The

tens from 30 to 90 are expressed

;

by
30,

the plural of

the cardinals from 3 to 9

e.

g.

^RLl

^-^aif

40,

^V^i
The
the

50,

^-iA* 60,

^iSn

plural of 10

(,-1,1x11)

90. ^i1^>Z 80, All plurals are of represents 20.

70,

^12

common

gender.

11&

signifies 100,

^ZJlD

200,

l]SoA^

or ")Zo]SD AlkZ 300,

inine.

&
,

etc.,

signifies

with the preceding unit in the fem1000 (instead of a^s. or 2llL, em, ;

phat.

]a!Sv

plur.

^i^i^ ^a!k )

^i^^s. ^->2

signifies

ADJECTIVES AND NUMERALS.

151

A 3000. etc. (with the preceding unit in 2000, the masculine). The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19 are formed by the union of units with 10 in one word, in the following
manner
:

Fern.

Masc.
11.
f

Fern.

Masc.

m
'

)
"

'

JOHjZ

12.
^>..
r

QlZA
J J

VA

1ft
>

13.

,msn
T

;m\n
',^111^2
1?

17.
)
I

14.

r-rr%CiVA;
I
I

1 ft

>'l 16 T f
>>.
J I

-rmiAisoZ)
..

rnva/

mva/

T .

19^

intermediate numbers from 21 to 29, 31 to 39, etc., are formed by the numeral representing the number of tens,

The

followed by the numeral under ten preceded by o e. g. *' x /t* t't fern. 65. masc. j^OwO Sometimes (AlZo ^-lA^Z 33, ^-A* _ x * ^ the units precede e. g. ^s*;mio p^3> 24, etc. So if the number of numerical words combined be large, the greater numerals are always placed before the smaller e. g.

rx

]Lno
3.

The

1827. ^."rmlo IJSniioZo ordinal numbers, from 3 to 10, are formed from

-^^

the cardinal numbers

by adding the terminations V

masc.,

]AA- fern., and inserting A. before the ultimate radical. Foi a particular word is used, and for the second, a form tfo, first, differing somewhat from the form of the cardinal for 2.

ORDINALS.
Fern.

Masc.
the first.
the second.
the third.
]',

Fern.

Masc.

"|A^uA

]l/uA

the sixth.
tin*

]A.v.*^a ]i\in*
]A.i
.0-.7
")'>!

seventh.

jV)Z
i

^y

the fourth.

VZ\iStZ

] t'%

152

PARTICLES

ADVEEBS.

The
either

tens of ordinals from 20 are expressed, as in Hebrew, by cardinal numbers or by the addition thereto of the
"f
9

..
|

.0
;

terminations I*- masc.,

_

A*. fern.

e. g.

.1
f

P
. i .

.;mv
;

_7
,

v.oVj
I

etc.

The

units

are

put after

e. g.

|iii;ms*

The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19, etc., are formed by uniting the ordinal number 10 with a unit of the cardinals,

into one word, the unit

J> >

preceding
.
o o
i

e.
T

g.

r.

fem.,^>;ims,-M masc.

the eleventh,\L*\

msZ>Z fern.,
is

masc.

the twelfth, etc.

Sometimes the ordinal 10

is

united
>
;

with a cardinal number and the word

etc.

preceded by

e.g.

REM.

The

Syrians, like the Hebrews, express the idea of apart,

,

by a feminine form
letter
;

and the insertion of

,

after

the

first

radical

e.g.

l^oZ

JiOOi, ]*SOOM

third part, etc.

78.

Upon

the

other relations of

numbers comp. Syntax

CHAPTER FOURTH.

PARTICLES.
Particles belong adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions In respect to their origin they may be considered as primitive, derivative, or transferred from other The last are by far the most numerous. parts of speech.

To

and

interjections.

51. Adverbs.
1.

The
]]
,

following
QUk
not,

may be

considered as primitive adverbs:

_]
2.

so,

^O^

there,

|a

here.

Those derived from nouns and adjectives with the are the following characteristic endings A_ Zo. and AJI]
, ,

PREPOSITIONS.

153

at last,
)

2oilj2 again, 4ujOl2L AAiOjjQ at first, A^(;1L

Ifcbraically,

godly,

in short,

transferred from considered those :

3.
)

As

other parts of speech are to be

a

from substantives
finally,

with a preposition

e.

g.

"\J\M& truly,
4>

mediately,
e. g.

]lQ]Q once, <\v-^ inwardly, T ^ anew lto tA> r ; ft) without a preposition;
(AfioSo enough,
~t. p.. y

-^*"*

^aw)

rzo,

oiXo
;

^3

wholly, enadjectives,

ftVeZy,

also in the plural ]Al2] sometimes

;

b)

from IT

numerals and pronouns

.

e.

g.
o?icc,

r
4jT

.
T
,

->T

JQ^ >A..m
,

very,

>CUiAo

o?^<y,
D

".

r**^!? Ir**^! a ^
*f
.

,"

|r*-*0 immediately,

how much ? |jV^ QlSo tf /ty ? c) from verbal infinitive, *aoZ again ; or participles
almost.

forms, as the

RKM.

Some adverbs
aaXXov,

are

transferred
(AaXitfTa,

from the Greek

e/xrj.

e.

g.

nWvn
guage
lowing
is
:

^tT>i\V)
in

IQ^]

especially rich
l^jil where ?
/""''

compound

adverbs.
|J

The Syriac lanSuch are the fol-

PJ|] ]^b^ wherefore?

?

^Aa^ not yet,

n^<7

wiALo]] ]lbp^

long

l*Ol mnr,

P5,A ^CTlX
the

now,

etc.

Among
Aj|\ not

compound adverbs
to be

may

also be placed

circumlocutory

The simple interrogation is either not r of wtD addition the negative the or at all, by expressed interrogaand |O1 |J. The syllable -i") prefixed tion, is expressed by |J
(see

38).

"

to pronouns and adverbs expresses an interrogation

i
|

e.

g.

|H

^">

whence

52. Prepositions.

Prepositions belong the prefixes *S and ace.) which are always joined with a noun or pronoun, and are vacant when the noun or pronoun
1.

To

j (gen.),

the original
(dat.

e. g. V>**~> ]r>VOr>V begins with a regular consonant Prefix prepositions take the vowel, which is usually _1. when
;
,

154

PREPOSITIONS.

the following consonant is vacant e. g. or when the vowel falls back from the quiescents
;
,

or oi;

e.g.

l)Sfla

from

for

v*icooi}
,

for
,

Before words which begin with

* or oil

the vowels, in

which these letters quiesce,

prefix
}1>V,
;

fall

e. g.

]l>Ja

\L >o
and

back upon the preceding fjj f.i^SiS* joil^ from

, ,

etc.

REM.
7
*>

Before |A
y *

6,

^-A, these
t

prepositions take

pro-

bably because they were also written

\\

lA1

and

XS^QO

and

>O>QO

the preposition .1 quiesces in

c.

_iA*f ^
,

In
falls

* which

back (comp.
,

15. 2. B.

and the

tables

following); e.g.

ViorinV

^OfOClL except when

which case the
form reappears
tions
_^_
;

appended with a union vowel, in of the second syllable falls away and the original

suffixes are

e.g.

OlXQQ,n\

etc.

Among

the original preposi-

may
to.

also

be reckoned the monosyllables ^CLL with,

ZoiX

6y,

ZoL
2.

ferred

Most of the other prepositions are considered as from other parts of speech a) substantives
; ;

transin the

constr.state

e. g.
'

iOpO

before,

Aoo>

and

Al,*"> between. >,**

and ^>rx

>Ao ^Lo (fromAlLo part) from,

prefixes
before
* ;
;

e.g.
c)
*

iAcQO according
;
"

compounds
9

e. g.

,\^^ ^^>
3.

without, >,**

^LO around, about,

nally plural nouns,

Several of the prepositions seem to have been origion which account they are united with
suffixes.
\?

plural
gainst,

Here belong Clover, >].,,_.

"
'

*aXk*/or, iO,O before, Zo^iZ under (comp. and the following paradigms).
*Instead of saying that
said that

quiesces in

takes the vowel

13).

with

quiescent (see

TR.

_
about.
;

instead, **i\t,tfor,

2ox2 and LjL**L

b)

after
to,

substantives with

^nooL against,
wnfo7
7

^0,00^
over,

^ I^A

to,

^i^
*

x^onN ^O against.
after, a-

-X

16. 2. C.

the author should have

it,

quiescing in

as

is

not a

PREPOSITIONS WITH SUFFIXES.

155

Prepositions wit// Suffixes.

(

16. II. C.

and

52

).

A.

WITH

SUFP. OF THE SINO.

B.

OF THE

PLDR.

Masc.

Fern.

in.

to.

after.

against.

over,

on account

of.

Sing.
1
c.
- *

*"*

-L

/o x

<A*^
.

\~ion\
.

11
2 m.
'*">

wi^oA

uiAo

IP .\*^no\
\.

**

1?
.

. .

\v

_/

3
3

in.
f.

Old

OlZo^

Plur.
1
c.

m.
f.

tQQO tdoZo-^ tQ2>Ao f>*^V*~>on\ * t*t >n<A~> .^\-> .^^ .^/r>\

,r>n

xv.

3 1H..OO1O
3
f.

.rTrnVoonV ^nm . Kv ^ ^OOlZo^ .OOlJAiD .m . Vv tOLD i"" /O^ .rnCAX .mV^>r^nV ^ .

1

.rn

REM.

The following take no

suffixes

A^3

/,

;*
<<7

without,
/o,

within,

^iL

o<rr,

A*AL

n</er,

]iD,A

and

except.

156

CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS.

53.

Conjunctions

and

Interjections.

1.

The

original Conjunctions are the copulative

tl if,

> that,

because (^before infinit.),

-7

,2

05, since,

o] or,

-i^> hence,

^oii (for this preposition in questions see

51. 3.

Hem.)

namely. ^O>

lest.

REM.

O and

like

*2 and ^,
are

are prefixed (see

52. 1).

2.

Compound Conjunctions
and]]a^v
t

a) with
^-i>
;

e. g.

|J]

unless,

^af
it ;

although,

ooul and
lest,

5w<, .]o

}o

5e

^
;

be
e.

b)

with
>

>

e.g. 13>
,

especially

after prepositions
because,
e. g.

g.
*

>

^JL} as,

^\4^o
^
7

>

^1 and > >a\j

;

?e5^, ^So i VJLSOI Amce,

t>

>

>

until; po^ ^
i

c)

with other conjunctions

.Q..

\>i^V> now,

therefore,
(j

n^

,0

although.
^

From
7

the Greek are borrowed

. aXXa, ^. v ^ ya^,

>

8s

3.
e.

Interjections as primitives are mostly onomatopoetic

-J>

x*
,

<\

ff

g.

They
e.g.

Oj ^Of are sometimes borrowed from other parts of speech

7*e?/

jiO w;o /

|O1 behold !

wicru

7m

/
;

2)oA*]

^Q^ if yet!

n\*"i*">

I pray you

PAKT THIRD.
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER
FIRST.

THE PRONOUN.
54.

Use of

the

Separable Personal Pronouns

and

Suffixes.

A. SEPARABLE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

1.

These pronouns

at the

beginning of a sentence, denote

a certain emphasis, and stand in various relations to the verb which follows in the same person. This relation is not only ;
a)

that of the nominative absolute e. g. Rom. xiv. 10. * * ^V \ ^ * * *v ^OM]J AJ I . j> pV ^_> AJ| but thou, ivhy judgest tJiou thy
*

brother !
it

may
7

Eph. iv. 20., Acts xix. 15., II Tim. iv. 5 be also represented b) by the oblique cases
;

but
e.g. a)

by

the genitive
ff

e.g. Matt.

iii.

11.

r>Vo<^>V

\i\ -

IQ

]3>

ooi
xix.

wiOlOJEQio whose shoes

11.,
0-

I am
j8 )

not worthy

to unloose,
;

John

Ephes. *vi. 20
.T
9

by

the dative

e. g.

Kirsh.

i>.

2.
;

--B

*j|
7)

1>

*O;JD U

p|o
;

but no one comes

e.g. Kirsh.iv.7.-9.

to

me,

Luke xxni.41

k.f.

by

the accusative

^-^^

ooi ^oAjf> ]k)

u'hat
the

you

seek to find in
it

tfie

night,

I seek

to

find in

day

time,

and find

not.

158
REM.
^1*4

THE PRONOUN.
They
are
also

emphatic

after the

verb;

e.g.

Luke

iii.

14.
* n

a)

,QM

plSo what then shall we do ?

16.

Upon

^Qj")

and

as accusatives,
2.

comp.

Rem.

1.

and the preceding

table.

United with substantives, adjectives or adverbs they mark the Present a) of the substantive verb }ooi (see 38);
;

T 7

'ri'r*

she is true.- Matt. xxiv. 26. O01

i7
*
""

-xr

IOM> he
AJ]

'

is

in the desert

verse 23. OOl

participle
;

p>Ol
e. g.

he

is

here

b)

of the finite

verb with

its

]j] ;io]

/ say,

HhS
of the

thou art born

REM.
pronoun

64). (comp. and Ol see j (Upon

7
p

12. 1. B).
i
.

The contraction
one word
i
y

with the participle or adjective into

TI

is

found in the
It is

1 pers. plur.

e.

g.

ive

read

i
,

^o
g.

ioe

are holy.
iii.

also

found sometimes in other persons

X

97

e.

Eph.

13.

MH*

"t v*'

I beseech
3.

Gal.v.3.

(1O*

**

he

is

guilty

iii.ll

(comp.

20.and37.E).

Farther in these cases

person

may

the pronoun of the same be doubled, so that the former will denote the
;

subject and the

\i\

latter the substantive

t

verb

e, g.

John

i.

20.

p|

/ am
;

xiv. 20.

oAj*|

**} . oAj]
*
7 K

ye are in
is
;

me

Matt,

xxvi. 73

or the part, present of the finite verb

*
C

placed bexxvii. 4;

p**

tween

e.g.

Matt.
;

iii.

11.

p| ,V)SV)
;

JJ|
;

baptize

John

xiii.

13

Barh. 68, 16

105, 14

148, 15.

b) In the simple pronoun may the subject and substantive verb

;

be contained
e.

both
4.

g.

Gen.
?

xxix.

1>t

.>* ^So

iOAj] ][aVn*|
I.

whence are ye

we are from

Haran ; Assem.
c
)

33

12. 13.
,

The pronoun OOl

and 2 person
ooi pi

as substantive verb,

may

follow
8.
/|

the 1

as

subject

e.

g.

Acts

xxii.

^Q*j

lam Jesus; Luke

Messiah
;

xxii. 67.

],V) ooi AJ}

;

if thou art the

verse 70; xxiv. 18

Ephr.

I.

214. B;

Barh. 173, 18-20.

Also Qjf and

^]]

follow the 1 and 2

PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES.
pers. as subject
e. g.

159

Matt. v. 13.
I.

liijj

oiVf)

ye are the salt of the earth;

Cor. in. 17; Barh. 133.

1.

REM.

M
1.

Instead of the pronouns, thePhiloxenian version of the N.T. T T * T A ^ 1*l* * 4 *A V with Mill'.; e. g. ^OloAaf p| /am; ^QO^AjJ .oAjfye are.

B.

SUFFIXES
verb denote the accusa-

The pronominal
;

suffixes of the

tive

rarely,

and

for

the most part in translations from

;

the Hebrew, the dative

hast
to

e. g.

^jAoou

for jJ^

A^xru

tkou

given REM. This imitation of the Heb.

;

me.

O. T.
4,

is neglected in passages of the Zach. vii. 5. comp. with Ephr. II. 296. B. and'lsa. xxiv. comp. with II. 65. C.
e.

g.

2.

the

nomen rectum or
*
1*

In the relation of genitive, the suffixes are attached to to the genitive proper; e.g. Ez. xvi. 18.
4"'*
k

wfcOAoo p
Matt.
vi. 11.

pio

thine embroidery

thy embroidered garments, of literally or ornament vii. 20; xi. 15 xxvii. 16, 27;
;
;

^iniQCDj
is

|V)\

our necessary bread,

literally
; e.g. Ez.

of our need. REM. The suffix

xvi. 27.

seldom found with the nomen regens

*|2o^Jl> wi^AljJOf ^SsO of thy lewd way*, usually in conX T <> f nection with (1 Sf)i the right, and (J2CD the left ; e.g. Acts. iii. 7.
T |l
7

Sn.j)

* ^ X

Olpi^

on his right hand; Matt.v.29; Rev.i.I7. Sometimes

;

a double

suffix occurs

e.g.

Ephr.

I.

204. B. and C.

thy first born.

3.

The noun taking a

it
;

suffix

stands before an
>

adjective

T 7

**
*

connected witn

e. g.

Ps. Ixxxvii.

1.

i*-r

oi>a&s
' f

in his holy mountain'^ Ez.

his
4.
e. g.

vi. 9;
is

Ephr.

I.

284.

A.

|n

oii.of

good

treasure.

The

suffix to the

noun

often understood objectively;

before
;

Exod. xx.

20.

OiA!LL>year

him

I Cor. xi. 25.

10.

wijpo,-^ in remembrance of love to'him\ Barh. 218, 14.

REM.
B)
;

me

John xv.
by
his

uioo+*
suff. (

1.

Possessives are also expressed

^o with

16.

e.

g.

Barh. 49.

7.

OliLj ]]^^kAa)

commander

146, 10.

160

PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS.

This manner of expression is used particularly when a stronger emphasis is required than is indicated by the mere suffix ; e. g. Matt.
*'

-X

vi.

13.

(ZciQ^lO w01

X l^

^-^->>

thine is the

kingdom

Barh. 146,

1.

to the

^A.2> . noun be

^** jAoj l^r^ our

also repeated,
;

great church in Haran.

If the sufF.

it e.

indicates (emphatically) the

g.

Greek

possessives
(JLOV

s^s fo, &c.

;

John
3.7.

iv.

/3w/ji,a

vii.

xv. 9

Rom.

34. >i\i> *aAXobjl> The same repetition of the

1*

suffix occurs also

v

in
ii.

fyuv

John
i
f

prepositions ; e. g. II Cor. v. 19. - \j> ^-O 2, and in certain forms of expression; e.g. Matt.
TI
irpo
-Jjjuiaff
;

xxvii. 4.

^ ^
(ID
2.

John

xxi. 22.
P

REM.
for the

We

7
,

should mention the use of the

"77

suff.
4

in
7

_;iO
ff

*D,
r
1

pronoun of the second, and

of the
;

in

w*a,JQL,
the
16.
t

^.ALDj

the pronoun
to

firet

person,

when
xliv.

discourse

is

^,jQL,for addressed

superiors

e.

g.

Genesis

_rrSD.A

i^DM

piD

what shall we say

servants') iniquity ;

to thee

(Ol^js* our (thy (my ^iverse 32. So kings in speaking of themselves

lord] ?

*^^^-

use
in
is

]SL&
(my)
;

e.

g.

Esth.

viii. 8.

l^Vf>> ]^>^^>
in
p

QQoAo
:

write
^t7

the
e.

king's

name; "and
v. 1.

reference

to

God,

<""-

used

g.

Gen.

Also
;

w^O
Mark

stands connected with the

f
"*

*"^

second and third persons

he calls

e.

g.

xii.

37.
'
*

wi^Lo
,

01^ |JO

(my) Lord, and differs from ^jSo in that the former is the common form of salutation, while the latter marks the pluralis majestatis, and is used of Christ in the version of the New Rom. xiv. 8. Testament e. g. Acts i. 1
his
; ;

him

be considered as an imitation of a Hebrew idiom, when the suffix relates to a noun which does not occur till later in the discourse (comp. Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 739) or when the noun itself is repeated instead of the pronoun; e.g. Gen. xvi. 16.

REM.

3.

It is rather to

55. Pleonastic Use of Pronouns. A. SEPARABLE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

*

Here belongs the pronoun of the

(comp.
sing, 12. 1.
plur.,

third person

001

(Oi)

and

B) united with nearly all persons of the by which an emphasis is denoted, which is
It is

disregarded in the later language.

found

still

in such

PLEONASTIC USE OP PRONOUNS.

passages as
that (exactly)

161
001
;

John

viii.

26.

]Sn\sn p]
It is

\\Vsn V>

I
;

speak before the world;

verse 28
.

xv. 16
.-7

Rom.
as

iii.

31

Heb.

ix. 17.

to
t

be considered merely 7 x
QOI ^'r^U
;

pleonastic in

Luke

vn. 19.

.^rrtVo

^i
;

of

or shall we wait for anofJicr ?

Rom. xiv. 8 Heb. xiii. 22 I Tim. i.4; v. 9; Barh. 133, 3 Assem. I. 221, A.5, especially where it occurs with a feminine noun e. g. Rorn. iii. 2tf.
;
;

9 1
;

77

'*

'

f*
is
X

Qj>1iO OOl (ZaiSn*aia by faith

;

is

man justified.
Ephr.
I.

OOl

sometimes connected with a plural 7

*7

e. g.

214, D.

-X

1\

_7

-ft

OOU.1QO OOl .OOLkJ

children.

A\^*") on account of his wives

and

REM.
found
;

Sometimes
e.

also

the

fern.

_cn

(still

more emphatic),

is

g.

Rev.

xxi. 2.

L\+*

TA*Jr
*

ai
*

')Ai-i r
"

in^o

and I saw

the holy city ; xxii. 19, (it) r k

and the

plur.

.dJOl Assem.I.
>

77, A. 20, 21.

OOl and OOl

*
y

are sometimes united together without

7

emphasis
3.

e.g.

John
;

v.9. e.g.

(iOQa OOl OO1O and

,

7*
1.

this
f

day
..7

Barh. 148,

Also in the plur.

Matt.

iii.

tOJOl ^

^0

]A!DQAS ^ij tOOl^ ^

but in these days. The pleonastic use of OOl is confirmed from the fact that the Philoxenian version omits it altogether.

B.
1.

SUFFIXES.

The

suffix is often used pleonastically with the verb,

when
-

the object with

e. g.
(it)

as

follows;
shall bless

Matt.

i.

21.
;

though by way of explanation 7 r 7 * OISQIA ^O1QM,1 ^i... OGlfor he

ii.

his people

verse 24;

6,

11

Mark

xiv. 47.

Without
thy
talent
1.

^ in
;

Matt. xxv. 25. ^jaa I Tim. vi. 14. xxvii. 5

;

OuJu^ I buried (it

REM.

The

suffix also

occurs pleonnstically with

;

after vorbs

of motion, going, coming,

viii.37.

<fec.

e.g.

Gen.

xxvii. 43.

^ ^|
;

go

Luke

OlS ^lll>

therewith he departed; Matt.x.6

lie

Johu

xi.31; iv.3.

fcOoZ CTQk ]Zlo ami

he went out
;

came again

Asscni. 1.44, A. 17.

OlX -0^1 1

186,A.30.

]V]

Ai*">^ OlS loOl AliJ he had gout

162
to the

PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS.

Aramaeans
iii.

Eplir.

I.

226, B.

^QSO OlS ^QO

Ol^ Ao;)
14. Ol.^
;

Moses stood

up

Matt.
is

2. ;

U^*? IZmVf)
the

the

kingdom of
(

heaven

near

same
e.

is

true

frequently,

after

A.Vn

to

depart from this

is

life) ;

g.

John

xi.

AA!O 5]A^ Lazarus

;

dead

Mark

ix.

26

Assem.I. 367, 9
7

Ephr.l.204,A
;

sometimes
e.

with verbs which have not the signification of motion

to

g.
\

**"^
to

M&w ;
REM.
2.

John
i.

xi.

31

'

^L

.0.

to

make, Barh. 217, 10

*4*

be

foolish,

Rom.

22

and even

after

JOOl John

i.

15.

the contrary, the suffix in active verbs, sometimes, falls away when it can either be easily supplied from the context, or the same object has already preceded ; e. g. Barh. 424. 9.

On

_ IfoiO ^OlQiO^O |*OO

all

;Lo VlO ^naf

(it) X 7

he

brought

out

of the silver coin and heaped

e.

up
7

before

him ;

particularly the

me thereof. In many neuter; g. Gen. xxiv. 49. *-ftJO|CUj inform verbs following each other the suffix which is to be repeated falls away ; e.g. Matt. xiv. 19 I Cor. xi. 23, 24. Where two follow each other the suffix is usually added to the latter verb e.g. Barh. 419,5.
;

71

OlJk
2.

.*>. vno

V
| t

*");QSo we esteem

1.7

and honor

it.

The
x

suffix is also pleonastic in the

>
;

nomen
iii.
*x

regens^

which
*

the genitive with precedes ^

* p p

e. g.

John
xii.3.

18.
-R

OikiAQ
11

fupkM^) in the
the feet

name of the only begotten;

;

^Q*-i? wOlo.^.. j
I.

REM.

of Jesus ; verse 31 Here belongs also

54. B. 4.

Acts
the
after

v.

Ephr.
of

87, B.
suff.

repetition

the

before

^o
it;

Rem.

1)

and

^\O
the

all,

without > following

ii.

e.g.

Matt.

xiii. 2.

palD OlXo

whole multitude;

3,

Kirsh. 114, 10. lAJL,So

suffix occurs after the

^aOl^D
;

all cities.

Sometimes
^>
.

^3
*
e

with
7

noun

e.g.

Barh. 71,6.
*

t"

Ol-^O ^i> (SQl but

o

the whole people

Matt.

vi.

33.

^-uOl^O _iACF1

all these things.

Without the

suffix

vJ3

signifies each, every ; e. g. Matt. iv. 4.

^\O

fJSD every word ; Acts xviii. 4. 3. Finally, a pleonastic suffix

is

attached to prepositions
ia

thus

> is

placed before the accompanying noun and

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
considered cither as a sign of the genitive
relative
tfie
;

163
(

52. 2)

or as a
to
(if)

e. g.

I Tim.
i.

i.
+.

8.
*

)coaSQJ> OlZos] according

". f

law

John
v.

42. <iCULij Ol JAs

;

to

(him) Jesus
;

xviii. 15;
-

Rev.

11

2ol Luke
(it)

xxiii. 7

^k&Lo
iii.

Kom
;

viii. 3.

oi^S^io for
xiii.6
7
;

sin

^So Acts

^i Rom.

Barh. 74,18.
;

MO^> ^OlO-H
v.

against (him) the tyrant;

^oi

76, 11

y>rO Luke

19

6)

or the preceding preposi-

tion with the suffix is repeated before the

ii.8.

noun

e. g.

Luke
1,

]\2.]z>

OlL

in
;

(it)

the fold;
ii.
7

Barh.192,7; Assem.l. 27,

29; Ephr.I.87,B
*

^ John
35
x
;

2.

]2oAaVi\ oil
ix. 21, etc.

to

(it to) the

feast;

^So Acts

ft

viii.

\i Acts

General

Remark on Personal Pronouns.

In Sjriac, we also find in personal pronouns enallage ; a) of number in A*] e.g. Barh. 166, 6. ^*rDl tOOLD *jOioA*|
;

yi..

.(>

fr^i*

|jQlo (AJ ^ere were among

Y**

tl>em

twenty
is

women and
e.g.

ten children; in
xxiii. 45.
1

words whose plural only

*j

used;
-j

Luke

OlA^So _V> ^
was
;

aaOlj
its

a ^tlo
xi. 26.

^Ae vail
is

o/

^e

temple

rent (in
e. g.

midst) in twain.

The same

true in the dual

Hebrews

,-? ^lD>
;

diAiOjjr
;

the treasures (of it)

Egypt; Barh. 108, 2

9, 10.

of gender

e. g.

Michael. Chr. 20,

in these
tives
;

^OlQ

l2o>2V^OOlLs
if

a!l places

of gender and number together,

sing. fern, are signified

by collecnames of countries and cities,

men

or inhabitants

e.g.

Barh. 565, 18, 19.

]Zaj]
into

a*n1
;

"\n\ ,n o^)j .oai^k a|o and these also many men,

580,
1,

]ZV.^cD they found a gnat

they
5,

led
;

captivity

fAi^^

591,

^;2>Vl50,

11, 12.

164
56.
1.

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
Use of the Relative Pronoun
>
(

17. 2).

The
etc.,

Relative

gives to adverbs of interrogation, place,

e. g.

time,
there,

a relative signification;

]i] where?
there,

V^\

where,

John
;

i.

28.

^L^CU Tool
;

.^QlSo? fa*1
;

where

John

baptized

verse 40
e. g.

Barh.82,2
xiii.

\LHSwhiiher

? y Jiu]]

thither,

where;
;

John

36. \i\ \\\y

2.3.v.

p^V

whither
?
?

Igo ;

Barh. 198, 13
wsi!
ff.s

Assem.I. 27;
iii.

Jiiuf how
33
;

fcLT
?

e. g.

John

14

v.

26

xiii.

*uASc| when

^lALo} ivhen, as

; e. g.

v. 25.

shall ^QLSQjUj waALo] w/ien they

hear ;

]V^ how much ?

as

y ]SfiO so

much ;
y
;

e.

g.

John

vi. 11.

OS
ing

> fe">">

much as

they would,
;

gives the same meany

sometimes to nouns
iii.

e.g. >2)

place

>2]

where

e.g.

John
2.

8.

The oblique

cases
;

case followed by a suffix the suffix added to the

are formed by some mark of the a ) the genitive is indicated by

e. g.

nomen regens ;

John

ix. 11.
;

olLo> whose name

the dative,
!>

is Jesus ; Assem.I. 165, A. 14 Rom. i. according to the following example

;

b) 9.

1>

p|
thus

*Sa*k)
;

Olju> w/zora
i.

I serve ;

verse 31

c)

the accusative,

e.

g.

John

26.

Ol^ ^oAjf ,-xlj!

is

]]'^oAj]j

whom

ye

know

not.

The

accusative
;

also expressed

tached to the verb

sent
;

e. g. iii.34. Ol>,!

by the suffix atlouL> whom God hath

d) the ablative by e.g. In a similar manner the relative

;

John
is

i.48; by ^So Rom.i.6. united with the preposi-

tion

e.g.

^Ol, John

iii.2.

OliQl

1oi^> with whom is God,

etc.

In connection with the suffix of the 1 and 2 person, added a preceding subject of the same person, the oblique cases who, I, whom, me, like
to the verb, it (the relative) forms, with reference to

REM.

the Lai. qui

e.

g.

Gen.

xlv. 4.
;

^jLUoAlOlj

*21TDCLi

I am
(Ephr.

Joseph
11.88.

whom

(me) ye have sold

Num.
thou

xxii.

30

Isa. xli.

E)

^.A^Lsjj A/) ^U*mji

firt

Israel

whom

(thee)

I have

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
made
30.
strong.

165
e.

The same occurs with prepositions;

-

g.

Num.

xxii.

/////

she ass

>^ Aj|

*"1**3>>

upon whom (me) thou hast ridden.

7
.

The
lativo

relative alone
e.

sometimes marks the accusative, particularl}

f

the neuter;
is
7

Gen. i. 31. r^>? * that he mad(, The re sometimes used before" the mark of the case e.g. Barh. 43,
g.
7

^^

4,

12.
to

OLL4>>

to

which time

137,

5.

l'l*
|OO1
\

<>

'iiV

fi\> which belonged

the Arabians.

3.

The Syrians express the

he,
,

relative with a demonstrative

preceding
>

or

t/iis,

who,

that,
>

which,
,

etc.,

as follows
fern.,

a)

by

001

oai

> Vioi

masc.,

^Ol
;

> ]joi
e. g.

and
vii.

in the

plur.

>

^OJOl masc.,
his,

> <-iJOl fern.

John

16.

\}]

^Jir*) OO1> but

ii.6.

who has sent me; Rom.iv.

which was; John
;

5; vii. 6; Phil.

^aioAjilj 1>O1

that,

i.24.
;

oi>A*)> .0101

t/iose

who were
fem.,

sent; Barh. 17, 2

j
to

170,5
Matt.

b)

by

^Lo masc.

and

and

^O^o

neut.

e. g.

xiii. 12.
;

A^j ^Sp\
iv.

%QOi~4Aj ot^
v.30
;

him who
;

hath, shall be given

John

34

vii.17,
;

18
i.

Mattxiii.17. ^oAlf ^^I|

;

^o^>

(hat ichich

ye see

Rom.
v
;

28

viii.

25
e.

and
he

plur. >
is

\} com.

g.

c) by Rom.
;

>

U-1

masc., > 1,^1 fem.

ii.29.
ii.

OOl
3
;
;

|^mnoj
iv.
;

]i^\

2, inwardly /John Barh. 85, 3 (1) frequently by the participle

who

ix.

Rom.

e.g.

7 v. 14 ; Rom.vii.l.

ICOQSQJ wLLpA those

who know

the law.
is to - f

REM.
live is

If

a particular emphasis
;

doubled
he

e.

g.

John

ix. 8.

bo indicated the demonstrar r -f |001 2Aa> OOl QJO1 this very

the
iv.

one

is

who
is

sat.

Sometimes,
e.

like

Greek

attraction,

the

.l.-monstrative
roj {jSarog
T

wanting; lyu Sutfu aoToi

-,

g.

John

14.
is

Ol.^ \>L\ Pfj jJlLo

or the relative
this)

wanting

e.

g.

Heb.

*.

\.'2.

..*^*Vn

pufo and he (or

who can;
;

loss

frequently arc both

xxiv. 19.

wanting,
tli.-

according to

llebrew usage
ff

e.

g.

Job

Finally
vi. 1.
1.1>.

relative occurs pleonastically before participles; e.g.

Amos

toot to those

who dtpiseZion

Ephr.II.-J7

166

DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.

57.

Use of Demonstrative

and

Interrogative Pronouns.

The
does
it

give,

demonstrative is neither used for the relative, nor as in Hebrew, a special emphasis to particles

It is p. 750 sq.). used only in its proper signification. REM. It is emphatic in connection with OO1 and _O1 ( 17. 1. \99 Sometimes pOl may be translated by Rem.) e. g. Matt. v. 47. hicce ; e. g. John xix. 19.
;

and numerals (comp. Gesen. Lehrgeb.

17. 3 ) is united with 2. The interrogative pronoun ( e. g. Matt. xii. 48. nouns of both genders and numbers
;

..?

II

1>

..>j ,QJ

_SsDO wkio] *aOl

V> who

is

my

mother and who are

The oblique cases are either so brethren f that, in the genitive, the noun in the constr. state

my

expressed precedes
;

e. g.

Gren. xxiv. 23.

uAj) ^Lo L\* whose daughter art thou ?

j

or so that

^D follows with

preceding

e. g.

Sam.

xii. 3.

^Lo> |r H ^ofrom whose hand? or QlSoj stands before the noun QlLo> e. g. Matt. xxii. 20. }L Aao pal whose linage and writing is this ? The other cases are form;

]&i

ed by the special case-signs preceding, or by prepositions

e.g.

Assem.

1. 34, 6.

^1}
*f

^^
>

to

whom

shall

I give ?
relative

Matt.

xii. 27.

llSflQ whereby ?
*

REM.
indirect

Sometimes P-I| occurs instead of the

question, |Z|

i"

in the

without

following

it

e.

g.

Matt.

xxiv. 42.

includes

|Al* ^*
fOOl

\fA\^ at what hour your lord will come ? and

;

e. g.

John

xviii.

38.

"j4'

r7

p^

OlV) what

is

truth ?

vii.

20.

58.

Pronouns for which

the

Syrians have no special forms.

A. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. The Syrians express the reflexive pronoun ( 17. 4) as fol. fows a) by the passive (comp. 22. 2. 24. 2); h) 21. 2. often, particularly in the third person, by the personal pro;

OTHER PRONOUNS.
noun
77,
e.

167
OO1 he killed himself;
themselves

g.

Barh. 54, 15.

&

Oi

5.

]a\Lo <ooll

oV^nf
;

they chose

a king

83, 16;

by
is

prepositions

e.g. Barh. 164,12. tOOijJ^l

;

oiL|o
The

and

they lead by themselves

c)

by \?*i and ]Looio.

;

former

used in reference to persons

OlMZU !>0^>
15
;

144, 12
xi. 17.
is

e.g.

Matt, xxiii. 12.

^So he

who exalteth
w AaZ'Zj
*
itself.
;

himself-;

Barh. 56, 2
;

84,

less frequently,

Luke
which
to

dla2U

in reference to things

e. g.

o-A^ ^5o
9

*
is

every kingdom

divided against

]k)Qio
II Cor.

used in reference

both persons and things

myself;
is

e.g.

xii. 15.

I give

Luke

xi. 17.

*.AaAsb oiLDQlO
itself.

a house which
REM.
V C (O^> heart
iv. 5,

divided against
frequently
*

Less
; e.g.

occur

in
;

reflexive
T

signification,

Lukeii

.51

^m^? head

p^O)

spirit ; e.g.
T
ff

Dan.
by
X

""?

*.

fj-^j

//e/ Ps.

vii. 6.

The pronouns (*^' and

e.

pOQlO
j

way
*>

of periphrasis for other pronouns;

T

g.

Rom.
;

x. 3.

|1O(J2
;

.OOlmSUj
ix. 3.

their

own

righteousness

Cor.vi.19
i.

Phil.ii.4,5

Rom.

-.Vr>ftir>

\}\ I myself ;
B.

Heb.

ix.

28.

OTHER PRONOUNS.
are thus expressed
:

The other pronouns

1. 2.
.

This, that,

see

56. 3.

Each,

every,
xl.
is

are

expressed
iii.

a)
;

as substantives,

by
;

Gen.

*aJ] I Cor.

8
ii.

vii. 2,

Gal. vi. 4
vii.

the latter
xi.

doubled in Acts
;

88,

45

I Cor.

17

21

II Cor. v. 10

I Thess. iv. 4.
xiii. 1
;

Sometimes they are

H" r"

expressed by

-"" ^o Rom.
Luke
;is
l>)

^^

33

Eom.

by ^O Matt. vii. 17 1 John iv. 3 ^) by a re^k> .^Ao Assem. I. 11, A. 19 e. noun defined of the ; g. II King? petition by each, every
xii.

Eph.

**jl ^3

xiv. 33

**J;rilo
a)

or

**!

^
;

v.

18;
;

adjrctivcs;

168
xvii. 29.

OTHER PRONOUNS.
^Ql
e.g.

i<ii every nation

iv. 4.

Matt. xx. 10

plural

Amos

Ir23

^ every morning

7 ) by the sometimes
;

by

the singular which

Jer. xxxvii. 21.

is to

be considered as a distributive

e. g.

jk>Qj^> each day.

iv. 25.
is

The neuter

is

ex-

pressed by Vo,iD ^\a John

3.

Whosoever, (quicunque),

expressed by
;

ufcj]

^O

or

John
I

i.

1 Cor.

iii.

13

>

^S
16
;

Matt.
;

xiii.

19

John

iii.

> > l

198,12. Matt. x. 27.

4.

The neuter by

^k) Mark Acts

vii.

Barh. 195. 3

iii.22

iv.

23

>
;

Somebody, anybody

(aliquis), in interrogative
%
**
;

and con-

ditional clauses, are expressed

iv.

33.

io)

Aj

dfcj

by AJ| and \r^\\ John Sak hath any one

I Tim. vi.3.
;

brought him aught

to eat ? vii.

48

*j1 A^)

S^oy
vii.

> if any one teach ; Eev. xxii. 18 b) by ^So Mark ^> hath any one? c] sometimes by 16. Ol^ Aa]> v
x
*^

1*

^^
1,

Rom.

iii.

3.

^ooilLo

.(

e't

TIVS^;

Mark

xii.

or

more
iv.

in ac;

cordance with the

'2,

Hebrew
*

idiom,
is

by ]<*" Lev.
;

2
*

v.

vii.

27.
P
t

The neuter

expressed

a)

by

X>D

Acts

v.

36
;

vii.4

*S> OOl ^jio? ^/ia/I /ie ivas something (great) ; John I John ii. 15 6) sometimes by ^li) Lev.v.9. ]So> ^i
;

.vowe (of the] blood; or

5.

UQO. (= -Q^ T
^J

Gen.

xviii.14.

Nobody, no one
Matt.ix.16;
;

a) as substantives, are expressed

i.18
;

by

,.*jl J]

John

James i.13
;

J]

*jl Acts

xviii.

10 flCor.ii.ll

'rO..
;

lfNum.xxxi.49

**l\

j]'jer.li.43;

John

vii.4

sometimes by ,j1j
^
P
"

A^X John

xv.13;
fol-

or simply

by Ao^

with an adjective or participle

lowing;

e.g.

Matt.xix.17.

|L

A^ no one
A

l'

is good. vi.

The neuter,
7;

by

X>^ ffor iTlx^k)

Phil.

ii.

Tim.

A^

fol-

OTHER PRONOUNS.

169

lowed by 5o) Matt. x. 26 with iO,io preceding, II Cor. without So^D James iv. 2 vi. 10 b) as adjectives, by U
;
; ;

** p.

after the noun,

with the verb, I Cor.

ii.9.

Z!A U p
39.

^ no eye
11

hath seen
creature
;

it ;

before the noun, Horn.

viii.

lA^^o

no

]>ni
Eph.

A^
v.

by AA\ with the noun following, Luke iv. 24. wo prophet ; Heb.iv.13 with the noun preceding,
; ;

with the words standing between, John xv. 22.

Zooi A<Ji they would have had no

6.
;

sin.

Some, any, are expressed a) by > Li] Matt. xvi. 14. y ^. > with words interposed, AJ| some say ; John ix. 9
;

vii. 12.

^i^l?
viii.

>..

OOOl A*f for some said

iii.

>

Jju] A**}

I Cor.
Phil.
cally,
i.

7
;

xv. 34; II Thes.

;

11

b) by ^j] ~^j]
ix.

15

I Tim. iv. 1

^So fiu]

John
32
;

16

c)

elipti-

by

^k), Matt, xxiii. 34.

;

shall ye kill
*P.

Mark

xii.

Acts

^pAj") xvii.

^iS^o .bouSo
;

some.
;

Eom.

iii.

d)
27.
is

sometimes by the plural of the noun

J
;

e. g.

Dan.

viii.

""*^

|Ak5CL some days

in

poll

Gen. xxix. 20.

The neuter
;

expressed by verse 8.
7.

>

A*J, Matt.

xiii. 4.

^2U>
^

L*\ some fell

^
"1

also

"*9^
,

Some, others, are expressed

;

xxviii. 24
VSr**l

or

by
I.

AJ) ^ml] _
;

? Ajf)

Matt. xvi. 14
10.

by Pi-**! ^*J( Acts i. Phil. 15 ^j] au] b) by John vii. 12 or with > Auf
;

a)

repeated, Assem.

Hem.

1,
;

c)

by t oouio

.oouSo

Acts

xvii.

32

Barh. 105, 10

with the sign of the case

prefixed, 114,14. ^)aii\*\

>Q1 ^oouSolo
;

OL^Q
by

some Ihey

hilled, others

he blinded

finally

**? . Mr**]

Barh. 93, 18.

REM.

When

some

signifies tlie

greater part,

it

i-

i-xj.'v^.'

170

OTHER PRONOUNS.
John
vii.

40.

Some

this

others that,

by

Acts
8.

xix. 32.

The
\^

one, the other, (alter) are expressed

'

a) of persons,

by
iii.

'r^\\

masc. "\L\i**
%

t^yt
xii.

fern.,

repeated; or
.

by

\^\\
;^

1r^*

Isa.

<V

Gen.

xiii.

11

also of inanimate objects,

Matt.

13.

oi2;j
it

^f Alo2o ovj\4*2>
^i ^tf
;

he stretched

forth his
Col.
iii.

hand and

became sound as

the other; I Cor. xiv.7;

13. ISoioi OlJ^uI

7

A*f^J*
ii.

if
;

one hath an

accusation against another

Phil.
7

3,

b)

by

,-w

or ^JOl

repeated, Rom.xii.10; y**.^ r** Matt. xxiv. 10 Remark)

ne
;

to the other

comp.

John

xiii.

(=eachother, 35 also by
;

JjpJ} _ pM Matt.

vi. 24.

^^1
same

^>>*1 John
noun,
;

iv.

37
xxi.

c)

by the

repetition

of the

Acts
)j,js.

34.

_ ]AJ!

one <^w, another that

/ei
is

or by

Gal.vi.2.

QH^O
R EMt
interposed between,

owe bear another's burden.

7
7

One another

represented by ,-M p**, with a preposition

xiii.

John
feltM*

14;

xxii.

34, 36
X

sometimes by the
one another
;

simple preposition with

or in like

suffix,

Rom.i.24.
xvi.

^OOIQ among
;

manner by

(Jr**

John

19

Barh. 41, 18.

9.

The same,

himself, herself,

itself,

are expressed

a)
;

by

a personal pronoun doubled, with

Heb.x.ll.

p placed between p
;

e. g.

a ? iCUOl P 7T>**^

tQJCn /Ae same sacrifice ; Phil.iii.l. 7 \ the same; also without e.g. Assem.I.44,13. ^A-JOl .01(712 jOOlQ at the same time ; b ) by a compound(

ing of the demonstrative pronoun

17.

1.

Rem.;

57.

1.

Rem.)
i.

v%9

42.

by the pleonastic suffix before the noun; e.g.Mark & lAlaC) oia at the same hour ; Heb. ii. 14 ix. 24.
c)
>
* ;

OlS

into heaven itself; Matt. xxvi.

44; Heb.

ix.

21.

OTHER PRONOUNS.
)lo> ^io Oilio with the

171
^>-i>

same blood
*
T

with
%
*.

and the noun

following;
416,
1
;

e.g.

Assem.

1.415,3. ]Al*> oilnj

J/te

sawe year
suffix

</)

sometimes by f^on and JLOOLO with

iv.

(58.

A), Matt.

John

v. 26, 43.
T

19
,

REM.
exactly

More
tin-

definite are

OO1 QJG1
;

equivalent to just the same,

^niie

/John

i.

15

vii.

25

Barh. 26,
k*

2.

10.

A
r**
;

'

certain (one)

a) by

HS*

masc.
^i

],**
],-**

fem.

John

iv.

46.

(rAk) a certain king;

;

v. 2.

]ADOJ a certain

place
I.

Barh.l 16,10
;

117,3
;

with ^So following; e.g.Assem.

b
)

33; 22, 27

Barh. 93, 6

by

o& relating to things

e.g.

Barh. 170, 3. f2> into a house; 178, 2; 194, 3.

HEM.
tion,

Xf>

^1 p

when he had entered

In proper nouns
g.

it is

sometimes expressed, by circumlocu;

by OlSo*j aufje.

Assem. 350, 18

351,

2.

11.

As

threat

as (tantus quantus)

is

expressed

OVM \[ they saw e.g. Barh. 190, 16. OO1 llDOi'j ]j^lo] no need so great as on this day. Of which nature of such,
or so
(ix

^V

(tails
;

(jualis),

are expressed

by

pbd

>

1^3 )

e.g.

Assem. 1.39 17,18. ~iOloA*f ]i3Ol - IjoSoil AjVliil' ]ioa1 This latter idea f/.v /An .v^////r w;AfcA <AOM Afl^ seen, so is he.
alone
is

also expressed

by

^1

and a pronoun

folio wing;
;

e.g.

John

iv. 23;

^Ol >**1j such;

Barh. 55, 13

70, 18.

THE VERB.
59.

General View.

brew,

and of the Future, as iii the Heso comprehensive, that by them almost all tne other relations of time are designated, in accordance with definite rules (comp. 65). This, however, is usually in such a manner that the preterite designates those tenses which stand in connection with past time, while the future has the same influence upon future time.
use of the Preterit
is

The

60.
1.

Use of the Preterit

designates
;
;

In the Past

it

a) the absolutely past tense

toe

e.g.

Mattii.2.

oiX3Q2
to

have seen his star;

Ol!^

_^ms2A ^L\

w are came
;

wor-

ship
ft)

him; John

iii. 16; Assem. L 361, 26, 27 the Narrative tense (Aarisf) ; a) mostly before

the subto

ject; e.g.

Mark

xi. 11.

5aS*lol]

Qaa/^I Jesus came

is

Je-

rusalem ; John ii.22.

bered;
e, g.

^010,1 Vl\/ Opj2^

his disciples remem-

) after particles

(when something actual

\f

denoted),

,O,

Bark
"

68,12.

Q\r>n

since they did not receive;

line 4.

> "jSoi until that;

;

Matt i

25.
"w<i7 Ae died
;

brought forth ; Barh. 24, 6

/L^OJ fcoi

213,

18; 21T, 3; Assem.

31,17; Ephr.

196,

USE OF THE PRETERIT.

c)

172

the Pluperfect ; a) in relative clauses which define the in point of time, precede it ; e.g. Matt. principal action, and he did as the angd lliif i 24. ]l$a* OKjffifi OlX

jQ2>

of the Lord had commanded ;

e-g.

was 'born ;

,0 ichen, after ; verse 9

&4, B. 6.
>

Matt iL John ii 22 ;

yQi Mark xL 6 b) $Qa* ,S*2] 1.

; ;

after particles;

,0 trfon Jesus
;"

vi. 23,

24

Barh. 90, 9

Assem.
%

>Aa

q/2er tfa/;

Barh. 39,7.

W^Q;

>2kd

CDCU>^
RE*.

he hadslainDarius; 164,8. j after that

>Ao

^So, ibid;

Assem.

213, A.

25;

>

Vr**>

*> **>

a*

Barh. 79. 12.

stands the

More

for the pluperfect, frequently, however,

(

periphrastic
I

form of the preterite with lOOi denotes the Present Tense ; condition ; a) in verbs of quality and
It is

65
g.

).

e.

Matt

xvi, 2, 3.
the

red ;

John

iv. 35.

O>a*> ]&i\

jields

which are white; Isa, L 3 ; Ephr. IL 117, A; 6 ) in general designations of time, denoting simply what is usual

and customary ;
db^cn
;

e. g.

Ps. xiv. 2.
it

xxv. 2

c)

when

*n** M^O Zorrf denotes a state or condition

e.g.

Gen.
3.

iv. 6.

^JL

*li^l

lVn^ (

why

art thou
;

angry ?

It

marks the Future Tense

prophecies,

asseverations, and the like, (for the most part, however, only in translations from the Hebrew), which are viewed as already fulfilled and accomplished ; e.g.
a) in
Isa. ix. 2.
xvii.

lo> 1>O1QJ OV*

;

they shall see

a great
is
1.

light :

Gen.
he

20

sometimes after verbs in which

e. g.

involved the

idea of a future action

Barh. 80,

ou> ;iof

promised that he would give

; b)

the completedfuture (futurum

; e.g. Mark xii.25. ]Alio exactum) after > tchen they shall rise from the dead; John iv. 25.

KD

oiocj ]lo

4. In exhortations, and in clauses which contain conditions or conclusions, the preterite also expresses the rela-

tion of the subjunctive

participle or adjective)

a) of the present tense, (]oci with

XX

e.
;

g. I Thess. v.

6.

^-'H-^
ii.

^-COI
b
)

let.

us be vxttch/ul; Terse 8

Eph.

ii.

11

Tit

9,

10;

of

174
the imperfect

USE OF THE PRETERIT.

e. g.

^oA^OOl (.>Wx) would ye have had then tO^\ Zooi were blind, lAjt^M if ye
:

John

ix. 41.

A \T AA^

"i'

'

"

no sin

\v. 19;

of the pluperfect

e. g.

John

xi.

21.

wi_jl fool 2p> ]} AjOOl ^jZ O-L. hadst thou been here brother had not died ; Barh. 93, 10 Ephr. I. 225, E.
;

my

OO1 10
f
..
i

is

sometimes wantdo not thereby

the imperfect
(

ing; e. g. Matt. ix. 17.

poi
i.

^-i^^So
;

(J) *Ae bottles

;

burst ; xxv. 24

Mark

44

ii.

21,22

Luke

v.

36

subjunctive

is

more frequently expressed by the future

61)

and

sometimes the preterite with

(

wtdA

oA, that, denotes the optative

65);
;

e.g.

Rev.
III.

iii.

15.

AaOOl l^JO *J<lL

Oil ,\I ^SD AiOOl

oh,

that thou wert

cold

Ephr.

284.

B^ol would that I

were not of her children.

cases

This idea seems also involved in the

under

c.

5.

Finally,

the preterit

also stands

for

the Imperative

and the
a)

Infinitive ;

looi occurs as an Imperative in connece. g. Mark v. 34. tion with an adjective or participle
the preterit
;

]Vn.V

jA*OOl
^^n...y

itf&i

uyirjff

II

Tim.

iv.

Rom.
;

xii.

9, 10.

nn.
iv.

..jl

.oA^OOl

love

your brethren
;

I Pet.

ii.

13

after

preceding imperatives

e. g.

Luke

x.

37.

I Pet.
b)

iii.

15

the preterit
to

ing

come,

stands as an Infinitive after verbs signifyto go, to send, etc., without the copula e. g.
;

Barh. 415,2.

QOL

^A ]{m ]2T he
;

came

to besiege

Acco

402,

8;

with the copula, Barh. 403,

16,

17.
;

o&oo.o>|
Barh. 68,
1.

they sent to entreat

especially after **\

If

e. g.

.T

**A2>

.-I'P*

Ae

be^-f/n to

open

a/jrf /o offer

up.

USB OF THE FUTURE.

REM.
Assem.
I.

175
;

But
288,

this
2.

union frequently denotes merely the aorist

e.

g.

o2) OVlf)

they arose to go

\.

e.

they went.

61.
1.

Use of the Future.

;

The Future
the

stands

a) for

Absolute,

Future

e.

g.

Matt.

xxiv. 35.

^au tf.i\V)0 ^o;}U ]Ly]o jlio* Heaven and earth shall pass away, but my ward shall not pass away; i. 21, 23
;

Luke

xviii.

John

xiv. 13

b) for the Complete Future in conditional clauses, (with the future in the conclusion of the sentence) John v. 43.
;

Z ooiL oiaaj

y>*^

]2p*

r >-}

.f ?/ another shall
.

have come in his xv. 7, 10.

2.

own name, him

will ye receive ;

viii.

28.

Furthermore, it denotes, the following relations of time; a) the Present although more rarely than in Hebrew e.g.
;

John
xa$
o

iv.

13.

]oi
TOU

^J

*ooZ

]"<^

^Ani ^o
-jraXiv
;

*)AaJ

>

^3

iflvuv Ix

ZSaros TOUTOU, S^qtfet

with
>

tf verse 48,

after
X

>

^o^o Luke
crows
;

xxii. 61.

\L ti-J>2' IJQJ
;
'

^o^a fr^re
apace
to
>

<^e cock
F
;

b)
I.

the Imperfect
t*

a
*i

after
T*

such verbs as

j tVr*

Asscm.

27, 20.
/3 )
ii.

CTI^

^op

>
*

^^ Ae
<"

him

(oegfan to spea&) ;

after particles

>

po,l tm!0;
>

^)pD
c
;

before ; e. g.

Luke

21.

)m;22 ^^Aj
;

io^o
xi.

before he

was conceived in

his

mothers tvomb
;

Barh.

15

more

rarely the Perfect

e. g.

Jud.

v. 8.

loi& l^iH

d
after

hath chosen;
,

Isa. xliii. 17,

;

19;
Jer.
i.

d) the Pluperfect;
5.

>

5*0,0 before

e. g.

3.

It serves to express the following

)

Moods
;

the

Subjunctive

of the Present

in general

176

USE OF THE FUTURE.

vii.

John

37.

1AJO ^Lo^
1.

]L\3

let

him come
let

to

me and
/3)

drink; Barh. 79,

>
,

2oSoi

>

nV) now

him die;
;

after

U> with a preceding present or imperative

j^ST'fl

e. g.

John

v. 10.

^QQjTZj

j^ *&*^ "ffit
vi. 12.
;

is

not lawful that thou

should'st carry thy bed;

gather
11,13
;

])> !>O^2) ,0)]

;

-_

nf*)

jAart

nothing be

lost
;

Matt.xxvi.41

Assem.I.377.10,
;

ix. 22.

OLD IjQJ *J \\ if any man should confess concerning him ; /3) after a preceding imperfect e. g. John ii. 25. * * 7 T **P JOICQJ k*J|> (OO1 .Oiiro (J zV tGS not needful that any one
-

b) of the Imperfect * i \ *t <f

|

a) in conditional clauses

John

should testify; after a preterite; v.27. U-? i*"^ ]oou> CTl^S*!

he gave him authority that he should execute judgment ; Barh. 80, 3 ; Assem. I. 359, 5 ; i. 31 after the pluper;

fect

e. g.

John

iv. 8.
;

that they

might buy
223, C.

OOOl oLl they were gone ^Qirspj 7) sometimes with (OO1 appended; e.g.
(7

Ephr.
sem.

I.

looi

Ol^J U=uf how

;

he would do

As-

I.

297, B.

3. v.

c)

of the Perfect sometimes, in con\\

ditional clauses, after

vii.

^ and
_

\\]
;

(in case that)

e.g.

John
B.

51

Ephr.

I.

237, B. and
p

E
e

d) of the Pluperfect, more

;

rarely,

and only with ]ooi appended

r

e. g. .

Ephr.
.00

I. 40,
>

001 It

|AjkJ

^^? U^?
?

oo

.i>.. K

.*

1"."

(?O12

(001

|OOU
it

p'rCDdM (Ik)

what harm would have arisen because

had brought forth

good ears
REM.

May,

might, can, should, must, and the

;

like,

are

also ex-

pressed by the future

e.

g.

Ephr.
40.

I.
,

203, F.
i

Of
f

IVwJO ^lV? "

*
*

that
1

he might go and see

they entreated
1-1
;

John

iv.

.OG\LCL

OOU>

OllSO "^*^>
;

him

that he

would remain with them ; verse 47

o)j
;

v.

Rom.

vi. 1.
ii.

^QQJ

P^O what shall we

Luke
xviii. 7
;

say, shall
vi.

we

continue? Gen.

16, 30, 31

John

28

Heb.

USE OF THE FUTURE.

6
Barh. 63, 19.
not

177
every one
49.

i.

ZoiQJ ww^D,J V>

die
;

^3
ix.

who

of-

fered
^f.

should
|*.
;

08,

18

Mark

]2u*O>

^3
;

\Vn7Z

\^f>">
'

every
*

sacrifice

should be salted

with salt

Prov. xx. 9

jSop
11
*

^3

tiki can say?

>

By way
*")i

of circumlocution,
e.

may
twus<

and should are expressed by

M
;

g. I Cor. xi. 7

by
iii.

J
2.

JJO

with

a future following

e.

g.

John

iv.

24

Tim.

B) The Imperative
tf /ear not
J]
;

a)

in Prohibitions
iii.

e.g.

Matt.

i.

20.

John
6)

vi.

20

I Cor. xv. 33, 34.

;

sm

wo

after a

preceding imperative

e. g.

John

i.

40.

REM.
there
be

verse 47; viii. 11. The third person of the imperative, which is wanting, is
xai iSsrs, *px;e<r&6
;

^opaZo o2

always expressed by the future

light.

e. g.

Gen.

i.

3.

]>O1QJ

]oGU

let

C) The future marks the Infinitive after verbs which involve the intention of some action e. g. Barh. 34, 4, 5.
;

Jla he sought
he thought
to kill
1.
;

to kill ; 90,7,8.

^
1J>
r

him

Matt.

ii. f

22.
.

go ; and

Assem.
to

33, 25.
iii.

M-r
(J

x r

Uj> he feared

to

^JO

pray
4,

John

3.

5>OO ^J> +*\

he began to fast
iV

|V"J>
>

**>.^^f>

U he cannot
viii. 28).
;

see

verses
like
viii.

xv. 4 (without

following, Matt.
;

In

manner occur
55
;

)ZJ Matt, v.17

^r-I xvi. 3

rQa Luke

Acts
The

i.

and many
with

others.
also

REM.
pare
4.

infinitive

follows

these verbs.

Com-

63.

B.

Finally,
to be

about

xi. 14.
?

is also expressed by r-iAl ready, and a following infinitive e.g.Matt. ( 12|k2L rAl> he who is to come ; John iii. 14.

the future
)

= ^XXeiv
*(>*.

oijri

QLoiZASo^ ^Al (1201 even

up
;

*T
35
;

so

^e Son
;

q/"

3/an
xxi.

to be lifted

vi.

vii.

in the plural

Luke

178

USE OF THE IMPERATIVE.

9.

The implied
the spirit

fooiSo^ ^-lAoi ,_j| ^r"A^ <At* tezV? cowze to pass; verse36. idea of the imperfect is expressed by IOOT apvii.

pended; e.g. John

39.

oVoo*r>V oooi ^j^Alj

\Lo'j

which they were

to receive.

REM.

Also occurs >

^Al

with a following future

e.

g.

Assem.

1.481,22.
Ephr.
I.

f;AJ> JjOia

197,
is

in the plural

/Alj the priest John vi. 15.

;

shall begin;

37,17;

The idea
>

of willing,
fol-

purposing,

also expressed

bv

Js

with

and a future

lowing;

-especially
1

Matt.

xvi.
v.

24.

_}Arb |2pj
;

H^t?
;

^O
e.

whoso

will follow after

Luke

xviii.

13.

me v

40; Barh. 68,6

l *
*

or without >
lift

g.

11'

J>Q-;J

|OO1
;

JO

Ae would not
C\ e

with an infinitive following

ffo

John

i.44.

^fl\ \3t

?.<)

up
he

b)

would

forth.

62.

Use of the Imperative.

expresses either a
*
*
.

1.

The Imperative 7 ?
j^cno siCO^
;

command ;
take

e.g.

John

\\

v. 8.

^QQ X>QO

arise,

up thy bed and

walk

or encouragement and permission ; e. g. r>n\rn O i n to the city ; John xi. 15. g

Mark

i.

38.

REM.
tive

In the same signification the Syriac appends the impera-

of

]2f

(vid.

28. l.Rem.; 2.

Rem.) to the future of the

finite

verb, especially of

|Z and

-Z
\m'

in the singular,
*

when
let

two, are in-

tended

e.

g.

Gen. xxxi. 44.

|VU(") >O*r>1

V>
\L

us make a
;

covenant
e.g.

xix.

32

and

oZ

in the plural,
let

when

several are. meant

John

xi. 7.

^1^1 o2

us go.
after

2.

The imperative standing

the
e. g.

future,

some-

times acquires a future signification;

Gen. xlv. 18.

shall eat;

0X00)0

^Q2^ ^2} /

will give to

you

and ye

USE OF THE INFINITIVE.

179

or the latter of two imperatives, following each other with-

out a copula, denotes the infinitive

e.

g.

John

iv. 16.

*;o

^] go
/iue,

to call

verse 29.

OVM o2 come

to see ;

Ephr.

201, E; or with the copula they stand in the relation of

effect
i.

cause and
this

e. g.

Gen.

xlii. 18.
live.

OtAo o,Al

]>ai do

and

e.,

if ye would

REM.
e.

In this latter case the future also follows the imperative

g. Isa. viii.10.

-*n.A/V

]]'o

]ALs2>

n\Sv

speak a

word,

it

shall not be fulfilled.

is

successive imperatives, when one e. g. expressed by the future ( 61. 3. B)

3.

Of two

is

negative,

it

John

viii. 11.

,_x4*s.Z

)J

ao2 ]O1
xi.

^.Soo

w^l

go find henceforth sin no

more

Eom.

20

Eph.

iv. 26.

REM.
pare
person,

Concerning the third person of the imperative, com61. see

3.

B. Rem.
60. 5.
a.

On

the use of JOO1

to

designate

thii

63.

Use of

the Infinitive.

The
form

Syriac,

which has

not,

like the

Hebrew, a double

for the infinitive absolute

and

construct, denotes the

latter by ^ prefixed

(compare

19. B. 3).

A.

INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE.

The
and
denotes

infinitive

without
its

is

mostly used adverbially,

verb,

in connection with
;

finite

which
;

a)

a strentheninp of the action

e. g.

precedes, Hebr.vi. 14.

it

yut^-CoV cL^lmSoo
~
*

.^D^f QO^aSo
;

7 will bless thee exceed-

inly and multiply th> ^nntly *

%
>

I
is

Sam. xx. 6;
very like him

xxiii.
;

22;
v.

John

ix. 9.

OlX

p^)j

po^o

he

Acts

180 28
;

USE OF THE INFINITIVE.

Pkilem. verse 9
71. <!>>/
;

b) certainty,

confirmation

e.

g.

Barh.

15, 13.

^,io
]]

thou shah

know with
it is

certainty.

Neg-

atively with

before the finite verb

no means

e.g.

John
ix. 6.

xx. 5.
;

went in
e.g. Isa.

Rom.

c) it

equivalent to, by U ^\iiO he by no means sometimes denotes continuance ;

^1

xxx. 19.
7.

^oaoZ U

]n*"W? ye shall not always weep

are also expressed, rather

Exod. xxxiv.
REM.
ever

By

the infinitive absolute

howft

after the

idiom of the Hebrew,

other minute

points of the
7

*?

f> ^*"> ^""Ao language; e.g. much, much more; Jer. xxii. 10. indeed Germ, etwa much Gen. xxxvii. 8. ; somewhat, weep ( ),
7
.

>

^^ AJ

mj
I

*.

*4\SnVf)
xliii.7.

O^l ^flV>
7

wilt
7

thou indeed rule over us ?

then

then, truly;

^_OCT1
vii.

^^r*

^r^ could we

know

? per-

haps, indeed ; Acts

34.

A^pa |U*iO / have

e. g.

indeed seen.

More
29
;

frequently

it is

merely pleonastic;
it is

Luke

i.

22; John
;

xiii.

Acts
7

vii.
i>

45

and
7

appended to the imperative

ye.

e.

g.

Isa. vi. 9.

MSDa^O
it
;

Q^Q
Gen.
iii.

hear
4.

e.g.

The negative sometimes stands before ^oLo^oL ASnSo U ye surely shall not die.
of passages from theOldTestament,is also
;

The case

a, in translations

expressed by the noun formed from the finite verb

e.

g.

Gen.

ii.17.

ZoSoZ 12oSD
Ephr.
I.

FnfaFl

fllfa

thou shalt surely die

7

(compare

24, A),

which

is

closely connected with the ordinary Syriac

i

of expression ; 67. 1. ingly ; see

mode

as
c.

\ "k

1'y

Xg

I*^S>

!^r*

i'

Ir**

rejoice

exceed-

B.

INFINITIVE WITH

OR THE CONSTRUCT FORM.

;

The

Infinitive

with

stands

a) after verbs
tion^

which denote a purpose,

wish,

determina.

capacity,

command,

etc.

e. g.

Luke

xi. 54.

-*^*")

they sought to catch something; Matt. xxi.

46

THE INFINITIVE.
John
v.

181
]T he would not
;

16;

vii.

1.

oaloiSo^ looi
Barh.
_
i* \\

}z>^
83,

go;
John

Matt. xiv. 5;

14,

18;
tiiftn

Matt.
;

vi.
ii.

24.

AJJ
iii.

no

can serve

Mark

x.

21

Barh. 192,20.
;

Aere #foo could he not remain

he sent him to feed
;

Luke xv.

15.

John
I.

iv. 38.

^apo

brought
sAa// take

to eat

Ephr.
;

230, D. oJOUiol
xi. 31.

_
V}]'

to kindle

John

]nnV&
to be

that she goeth unto the grave to

after verbs signifying to begin,
e.

weep; Barh. 12,20;

b)
;

to cease,

accustomed

g.

Matt
;

iv.

17.
I,
1,
T

OlpVlS
2
;

xvi. 21
v. 42.

Barh.
<k
*

5,

2
*

*P

he began to preach ; Assem. I. 5 13, B. 20 Acts

-;ji
;

Q^NSnN OOO1 ^>\s U

i.

M^//

censed not to teach

^-iJlSo

Eph.

16; Barh.
to

5. 10.

(WsnaSfA

Mey were

ac-

customed
REM.
1.

changes.
infinitive

with (which can sometimes, viz. in from the Ilehrew, be rendered by while, or passages translated
wlten
;

The

e.g.

Gen.

ii.

3.

,*"1SV)S loilL

1^?

which

God

created,

when he made
cumlocution
the

it);

forms, after
;

rtAl

61. 4) and after looi, a cir-

for

the future

e.g.

Gen. xv.12.

*");SV>\

^aSQ

]6oi

sun shall go down. But of the llebrew idiom, by which the infinitive, joined with a preposition or conjunction, is explained by
the finite verb,
there occurs in Syriac,
;

only

the construction with

^lO and he
"

>

before

^
*

e.g.

Assem.
to

1.

42,8.

O^shS)
negatively,

^Lo ]oOl ]]* \\O

in
ll-br.
iv.
i.

ceased
^.Vo

not
"

teach ;

1.

<

"v

\\

vVr>\^

*(>>

who should

refrain
*

from
>

entering,
;

e^
13.

who should not

enter ; or comparatively,
T 7*1. wZ.O N^CO wiOl

without
'
in
i/

Gen.

iv.

(2>

crime

is greater,

than

can be forgiven me.

REM.

2.

Tn the poets

we sometimes meet with a

Iran-it ion

182
from the
infinitive
i>

USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.

to
o.

the
.

finite

verb
^P
7

e.
.

g.

Ephr.
9

III.
*,

129, F.

than,

*si 001 |Jo jAaioi> ]liD Ucn^ .^i yap footer t's i, t <me of thirst to drink water, instead of drinking to measure fountains (literally, and we
vi

v* .
ff

>o

will not measure) ; and likewise conversely ; which seems to be done for the sake of the metre (compare Hahn et Sieff. Chr. p. 7
.

Anm.). The Syriac also expresses the infinitive by the future, 61. 3. C ) or by the participle with or without * prefixed (
(

64. 3.

).

64.

Use of

the Participle.

1.

Participles
:

may

be considered either as Adjectives or

as Substantives

A) As

Adjectives,

they assume the number and gender

of their subject; and take their object in the case or with the preposition of the verb from which they are

formed

thus

a
*

the Active Participle

*
' *

e. g.

John

ii.

14.

UaO
i>

..

(OrLO pOZ
;

^il*")lV>> ^iNCJl
;

those

who

sold oxen, sheep,

4,

and

doves

verse 16

viii.

44

Barh. 52,

74, 20.
I.

Ibil^v ^I*> InVf) a king who fears God; Assem.

270,

V'*r&? oiLoi ^ t Sv> full of the Holy Ghost ; Horn. i. 29 John iii.15. Oio ^LOiOiSoj .aiSn him ; b) the Passive Participle, every one who believes on

A. Eem. 9

Acts

vi. 3.

with the case or the preposition of its active Vt QQ ---^V clothed in Syssus ; Barh. 32, 14
;

e. g.
;

Ez.
;

ix. 2.

108, 6

170,
4.

19.

^' i Ir*!

.jL*z>
>

maimed
i

in

the

hand

Lev.
;

ii.

x-

^i rv O \^

cakes anointed with oil

Sam.

ii.18.

blessed of the

Lord.
stand,

B) As

Substantives

participles

in a genitive re;

lation, in the construct state, before the

noun

thus

a) the

USE OP THE PARTICIPLE.

Active Participle

183

e.g.

Gen.

xxiii. 10.
*
t
.

]i>2
t

*\li
..rt

those
those

who

went in at

tiie

gate;

Rom.

vii. 1.

jfnnVn ^xl^
tfie

who

know
11.

the laio
]"l
i

(literally,
.

the

knowers of the law}; Barh. 195,

m
(i.

^Vn

who had drawn

iii.

sword;

214, 1

even before prepositions; II Tim.

2.

IZn^aft*")

^r2^

who deny
|AS>OQii>

e.

re/wse to acknowledge)

favors; I Tim. i.10.

;

^\l

*-*r^>>

breaker

of

their

oath

the Passive

Participle] Gen. xxiv. 31. xxvi. 29.

2. Participles

l*o? Oia*jO

blessed

of God;

mark

the following relations of time

A) The present, noun denoting the

AJ I

in connection

with the separable pro)

;

subject
(

54. 2

e.

g.

John
;

iv. 9.
I.

^|i

thou prayest
Jj]

art

praying )

xv. 15

Assem.

84, 9.

^io ^io

,**">g>

]]

have no

commandfrom our

Lord.

REM.
definite

In the third person which is usually already rendered by a preceding noun or pronoun, the separable pronoun ia
;

omitted
theep)
;

e.

g.

Luke

verse 6.

xv. 5. Ol^ ^\QO and he beareth it (the .*mr>Vn..\ l^DO ^iA.*->\ 1^|o and cometh

into his house

rii.

and
;

calleth

his friends

John

iii.

18,

20;

iv.

36;

17

viii.

47

iv.

23.

]A

]!Zf

11'}

but the time cometh.

B) The past
looi
c. g.
(

a) the Imperfect

a
;

in connection with

65)

/3)

without

"JOOI after a

preceding imperfect;

John.

ried ivith

.ioliDO ^oblSfil looi ^oriAi he tarthem and baptized ; iv. 27, 31 vi. 2 y) after the
iii.

22.

preterite in a relative parenthetical clause

e.

g.

John

vi. 5.

oTZoX
pany

)Z)i

who came

1U-V&0 \*ia li^o unJ he saw a great comto him ; verse 11 Assem. I 75, A.36
;
.

joined with o copulative

e. g.

Barh.

4, 3.

184

THE PARTICIPLE.
>j> they went up on Mount Herman and abode

the Perfect
*

John
and

vii.
see,

52.

i* *

11*
(J

Soja

search

that out of Galilee hath

l^ ^ ^> U^?
v
i

-V"O ***>
arisen

no

prophet.

REM.

It

is

to

be regarded as a mere imitation, and not as a

constant idiom

of the language,

when

the

Hebrew

infinitive
finite

pin
verb,
is
is

or tne participle

^n,

0*7 which, coming before the

indicated the continuance or gradual progress of an action),

of

expressed in Syriac by the participle

(

^1 1

e.

g.

Gen.

viii. 5.

^ffiLo oboi ^Aff U^oo

and

liom spbn vn tr^m

and
more
:

^
C

the

waters,

decreased

more
(

Sam.

ii.

26.
rf

JD-IO ^iT

U^o
to

ateiT bim T

tibn "i53m
/

the boy

grew from day

day.
)

The Future ; a) the Absolute Future ; ^ e. g. John xi. 23. jJDQjsj| y>(o propositions
)
.

in general

thy brother
xi.
iv.

shall

rise
\3\

again
V^r*
-^

(3) after
/^wo?<;
^7iai

a
lie

present

John
;

24.

^OD)

shall rise again

25

7) after a preterite, Barh. 80, 20; 81, 1. >Ao> OlS ;ij lAl_i^S& OlS )J1 JXl^iiD ^lk)O- "JALZ he said to him, that in
three

days he would surrender

;

the city ;

John

iv.

25

after

a future

John

xiv. 23.

my

Father will love

^1^2] OlZoLo him, and we will come

-rnr>.*r>..'i
to

^^^f
I.
it
e

him

362, 5, 8.
shall
after
lie

V) IOGI

U-i^^P - ?
then will
xi. 24.
;

"

Assem.
/)*

souAj

if

granted

me

that
;

I become
^oAj*}

a Christian ;

an imperative
that
""
1"?

Mark

believe
"
"A

ye shall receive
1
1

after

^xJQOUj coicuoi loi, John xvi. 32.

;

'

|Al

]^Z|
;

01 behold
ix.

the

hour shall come

Gen.

vi.

17

xlviii.4

Exod.

18

^ ) in direct

and indirect questions ;

USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.

e. g.

185
Jiol? shall
the

.John

vii.

41.

l>l^n

ftf

M<
<

i^inli.

come out of Galilee ? verse

i
?/.'7*ff

fl^yt 31
6
27.
)

^
;

viii.

22

xiii.

27.
;

AJ] rilj iOjio

tfio?* tw'ft ofo ;

tkefuturum exactum
12]>

) after particles;
sh<ttl/i(n;e

e. g.

John

vii.

^ASo) w/ien fo
*^Aj|

come; verse

81. Barh. 133, 2.

; /3 )

U^o?

Jio
;

as

won

as tliou shall have heard

I.

in conditional clauses

e.g.

Ephr.

218, F.

f^o ^poil

]J1

water.
8.

In like manner, participles indicate various Moods

)

A
}ooi

The

Subjunctive

;
)

viz.

of the Imperfect
e.

with
10.

compare
]3

65

after

g.

Barh.

38,

joZALo
the

"jiZ")

ground

^)ZASo IOJ-M ^| would not break

even though the vessel broke,

;

Assem.

I.

379,

2.

,s7/o//A/

//-:

Zi'ye,

i/??o/, 7ie

should die
besides

after >
that

II ),

Barh. 56, 12.

sac-

they

would not

?///''? ;

in

relative

clauses

(=

imperfect subjunctive);

depending e. g. Assem.

upon a
I.

future
19.

362,

^-^U? ^D |annm^)V
that If dtniild be given

^OOll ^odu2J> ,03

he ordered

them as Bishop,

whom

they should

ask

of the Pluperfect, with }ooi in conditional clauses

;

60. 4. c) e. g. Gal. iv. 15. Zooi ]^0-> (compare " T Iff +." T ** V *A *n\ ^.*^m.r> .oA^OGI _ ^AJ GlLJ-iA had it been possible
.TC
f

Q^

ye

irniilil

have plucked out your

xi. 15;

own
19.

eyes,

and given them to me;

Beb.

x.

2;

IJohn
\

ii.

B
to

The
it,

Infinitive,
in

after verbs signifying to begin, to cease,

to be able, to pluck;

per in

command,

etc.;

e.g.
i.

Matt.

xii. 1.

;* they began

Mark

45; Luke

v.

21

186
xv. 14

USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.

I
;

John

ii.

8.
I.

lv**Ao **;* lioidl they began

37,15.

to see

the light

Assem.
;

\&
;

Barh. 96, 7

108,

19

*;* he began to call ; 50, 160, 7 180, 5 83, 12 ;

;

}Lr *
30.
xi.

^>in
ff
^-t

^& ^4r>
>

he ceased
suffer to
x. 40.

to

build churches

Matt.

xiii.

nonn*
8
;

grow; Luke

xviii.

16

John

44

xviii.
; ;

Luke
ii.

^L
;

ft.^"

CJiS

^o\ bid her

help

me

Mark
vii.

2.

jCJJ ,*!
v.

.n]
43
;

hold them
vi. 37.

15

John
also

19

viii.

P it could not Acts x.47 Mark

;

^*fttvV .OOl^ ^Aj we

Sometimes 9

will give

them

to eat.
;

REM.

stands before

such a participle

e.

g.

Matt, xxiv.30.

VZ]? ]**]* OTpTQ^ ^OV**J they shall

v.

see the
0->

Son

of

man coming ; John

OOO1
4.

19

Acts

xxi. 32.

>>^r>%

r>\r

The
it
;

Absolute Participle
e.g.

ceding
]lv>

Matt.xiv.25.

3*1*rX a) %Cb !>** y^oiSo ,3 ^ou ^oaiZaL 12]

**

is

distinguished
^
*

by

pre-

^l /e5MS
ix. 7.
9

came

to

<Aem walking upon the sea

Ae came seeing
;
7

xv. 32;
6.

John
x

lu*
v
'i.
1>

P
*>

l^o

Barh. 62,

A.<r>

]Lo>
6
)

p
by

disquieted by war he died ; 73,4. |Q;.QQ ^.^ASo l3Ty>lrJ r3 B not standing^but bowed to the earth;

>

preceding

e. g.

Mark

ii.

14.
xi. 2,

]frnV>

A^o o2uj
;

sitting at the

receipt of custom

Matt. xiv. 26

xxvi. 64.

REM.
struction

If to such

a participle, a noun be appended, this consometimes expresses the Latin ablative absolute ; e. g.
..7

-\%P

unwashed hands ; wOlOjj| ^Mr*^3 V Mark vii. 2, 5 John xi. 44. **Ol(Ay^O ^cncy") bound hand and foot. In the translation of the New Testament,
Matt. xv. 20.
;

P **

^D\ p

the participle
finite

is

sometimes to be understood as in the person of the

* r
it
;

verb following

c. g.

Matt.

ii.

8.

O*~lflS

verses 9, 10, 11, 13.

USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.

6.

187
active

The

passive participles frequently have an

;

signification
viii.

those from transitive verbs

e. g.

Matt

18.

14.
t.

~* v* ? ^ " ].^n\ |OO1 MilLo troubling

Oil ^AfAfM} those surrounding him ; Luke vii. r i 7 Ol^ OOOl ^\in> those bearing him ; John v. 4.
t

the water

Acts xxi.16

Assem.
;

I.

30, 4.
2.
;

"U^^-^ P
*
V
"A

bearing the child; 34,9

37,8;

377,

hand
**
T

air*]& oil Zooi ]A.^>V she drew him by the b ) those from intransitive verbs e. g. Matt. v. 4.
;

\\ 7

lJ.-otJ
;

,ooujJOxi. 19.

blessed are those

r

who mourn

Mark

vii.

30 John OOOl ^-4-*M they were come ; xii. 15. *lxD> rirfm^r M/JOW a/oa/ ; Barh. 170, 2 223, 1. tfxL
(CC)|

^x

.r

ff.7 ^\1
REM.

T.I

^SuiU ,2
Participles

sitting

upon a

bed.

sometimes
;
e.

have the

signification
2.

of

the

Latin participle in -ndus

g. Barh. 128,
) ;

^AA*>

timendut.
as

Here

also

belong

compare No. 5
have forsaken all
as

such

constructions

^*2

^L

ji^O I deny

I will.
;
.

6.

Finally participles are also used impersonally thus

L

itp

a) the Masculine; Eom.

becomcth saints
;

xvi. 2.

i,n\ *Ojl> j^| as

;

it

Heb.

viii.
it

Philem. 8
thee

Assem.
;

I.

33,20.
24, 41.

^1
John
ix. 4.

)>!

wi^

TTiy

son,
]3
i/

behoveth

455, A.

loiiLj

IrOll l]a
30.

behoveth not a servant of the

Lord;
;

iii.

flo

^
6

V"^*^>V "jooi ]]o OOl

/

OOll
;

he must increase
1
;

must

;
<

Acts xxv. 27
'.^1?

xxvi.
<>y

Rom.

xiv.
Sri

4; Mark
a-iroXXufjisSa

iv.

38.
)

x
the

^
;

^^u^S U

H./XSI

tfoi,

Feminine

especially to denote the

Zo'oi \f let
it

neuter

e. g.

Gal. vi.9.

Vj]io

not be bur-

densome

to

us: Barh. 45,

13.

U^>

1?0l

'Aw

is

probable

188

MOODS AND TENSES.

1.1

Assem.

79,3.22. 2ooi
it is

lo>1O ]lo
.

it was necessary; 1^!& honorable and right ; 519, A. 4.

482,24.

Here belongs
hands
;
i.

also

Rom.
;

xiv. 4.

^OlO^po ^lo ^

comes
39.

into his

e.
P

he can

and

in the feminine, Acts v.

|J

ye cannot.

65.

Fz'eitf q/"
;

$e manner of

designating all the Tenses

and

Moods

of the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Optative in

particular.

1.

The

Indicative

A
2)
;

of the Present

is

expressed

a)

by the
2. a)
;

preterit
c)

(60,

b)

sometimes by the future (61.

(

usually

by

the participle

54. 2. b,

and

64. 2. A);

) .

of the Imperfect
a

a) usually

by

the participle joined

with |OO1
tive verb,

18.4. Kern.,

and
e.g. ??
;

38

also without the substanii.9.

64. 2.B.
P

J3 )

Matt.
l>

'

-0
-*~'j

1'ocn *K~

^ff he went ;
the

verse 20.
child's life

\fa Olmsu 0001 v

iii.

^QJOI

wAo sought
all

5.

>OOU
A^OOl

CTlSo Zooi
r

fn^l
b

Judca went
the prete(

out; John
rite
(

xvii. 12.

i I kept;
;

by

60. 1. b),

and rarely

by

the future

61.

2.b);

C)

of the Perfect,

besides cases noted in

60.

1 )

a) rarely

by the future (64.2."B.b);

(61.

2.

c);

&)by

the participle

ooi in the same 10

person and

number added

to the preterit

e.

g.

Luke

v.

MOODS AND TENSES.

.

189

*.

|OO1

OlrMl

|OliO

terror

had
;
*

seized
v. 13.

him

John
N^

iv.

8.

OOO1 QA1 they had gone

hidden himself;
the preterit
2.
(

into
s

}ooi wiJ...2j he had

x. 22.

\9 |OO1 |OO1

ta

Arf

ftee/i ;

6)
(

by
61.

60.

1.

c) rarely by the future

d);

E
tive

)
;

of the Future besides cases noted in

a)

61.

1.,

some-

times
(

by
;

the Preterit
c)

60. 3. a)
(

6) by the impera-

62. 2)

by the

participle

64. 2. C);

3. b),

of the Futurum exactum ; a) by the preterit ( 60. the future ( 61. 1. b), somemore frequently ft) by
;
;

times
//.

c)

by

the participle
;

64. 2. C. b).

The
)

Subjunctive

A
looi
3.

of the
(

Present
),

is

given
;

a)
b)

60. 4. a
)
;

very often

by the preterit by the future (

of
61.

A. a

of the Imperfect

a) usually like the indicative of

the same tense,

clauses
;

by the

participle

with looi in conditional

jOAjOOl ^-^r -->U if ye knew me, ye would also know my xxi. 25 xviii. 30, 36 b) by the father ; verses 39, 42 future ( 61. 8. A. b), sometimes c) by the participle alone
1
;

*A

e. g. X

John
*

viii. 19.
11*

2>f .oA*ool

ra&Ji -^1
;

o!&

64. 3.

A.

a)

of the Perfect; sometimes

by the

future (

61. 8.

A.c);

D
6)

of the Pluperfect
(

a)
d),

by the future

61. 3.
(

A.

by the preterit (60. 4. c) more frequently c) by the

; ;

participle with ]ocn

///.

64. 3.

A.

b).

The

Optative

is

expressed

by

the interrogative

190

THE PERSONS OF THE VERB.

preterit

pronoun with a
,ix.

or future following

e. g.

Judges

29.

it-itta IJOI
to

{who will give over

lv.7; b)

JVnS OlV7\l ^j me) this people, in my power

>oA*] oh

,-i oh that

I had
1
;

I Ps. iv.

by
*

the particles widL and

(

terit
* ^
?

following

that, with a pre60. 4.Rem.);the Future; e.g. Gen. xvii.18.

VMM aoA
.

^
I

oh that he might
**

live ;

or the participle with

*

(001

e.

g.

II Cor. xi.l.

*jA ^oA^ooi

17

^-ijnimV)

aoA|
Q_x\

may

ye yet hear with

me !
is
T
.

REM
e.g.

The

optative
T

sometimes also expressed by

r

/} or

*tf T1

Fs.lxxxi.13.
to

il\V>
7

V>\ O-SX would

T
*

that

my people would
;

hearken
e.g.

me ;
xvi. 3.

by verbs that denote a wish with a following >

T

Exod.

iA*iOj ^_iOOl

^iO

would that we were dead!

it is

When
Luke,
the

the substantive
ii.14.

verb denotes a wish,

omitted

e.

g.

|Ol_i(J
1JT|1

Zu*Q^*2 glory
it is

toGod. Sometimes instead of

r

7
;

Hebrew
Job

1^3

occurs the almost correspondent J

,11 ^Lo
viii.

e.g.

xxiii.

3;

but

literally

translated

in

Cant.

1.

oh that that wert

my

brother.

IV. The Imperative, besides the cases under pressed a) by the preterit of looi ( 60. 5. a)
;

62, is ex;

b)

by the

future, especially negatively

(61.

3.

B).

V. The
expressed
ture
ple
(
(

Infinitive, finally, besides

;

the cases under

;

63, is

a)

61. 3. C)

( by and more frequently

,

the preterit

60. 5. b)
;

b)

by

the fu-

c)

by

the partici-

64. 3. B).

66.
1.

The Persons of the Verb.

The

third singular masc.

is

and

fern,

of the active and

j

passive conjugations

sometimes used impersonally thus

THE PERSONS OF THE VERB.

a
)

191
1I<
l>.

the masculine;
it

of the preterit;
;

e.g.

x.

34.

.aaL ^oja
he

pained you

Luke

x.34.

^CTIOAI Ol^
Deut.

^4oZ|
vi.

cured for
it

him

ft )

of the
;

future,
Jer. vii.6.
;

24.

^k a|j
it

would be good for us

;

would harm you

T

b)
t*

the feminine
A* 1

^QStL aipoj of the a) preterit

,

Ps. xcv.10.
erf)

OOl {>,> JL* Ajpo

;
.

t'J

shames me, (I
*

am

asham-

of

Mw generation
xviii. 23.
9.

Ps. xxxi.9.
7

wiA

Am
.

?7

grieves

me ;

*
it

Luke

01^

Au'pO

pained him

/3)

of the future,
;

Gal. vi.

^
Ol

tV^ll B

ft

will not be grievous to us

it

Ps.

Ixix. 20.
2.

Ip2>

^V>!^

whom

grieved.

In like manner in Syriac, the neuter

pressed ; a) verb, thus ;

by
)

is usually exthe third person singular feminine of the

in
;

impersonal phrases, as

Luke

vi. 13.
;

ZoiyJ ^\

it

was

light

John
.?

vi. 17. 7

Aaa.
report
it

it

was dark

pas-

sively, Barh. 84,14.

AlLoA| Me
Ol

i*

Ajbyi with the demonstrative proin connection 7 ft ) 481, e. g. John L 28. noun or with adjectives as subjects
;

Assem.

I.

298. A.ll.

was spread abroad; was revealed to him ;

this

came

to

pass at Bethany
;

i.

3.

Zooi
JjiOiO

]f**
-

IJa]
^">

there

ii'as
it

not

any thing
to

Ephr.
;

I.

240, F.

i .

]ya\ L\Zi

seemed good
it

Assem.

I.

380, 4.

^S

A*iIZl \o>)
;

Moses passively, seemed just to us. Yet

there will be no

we

also find for the neuter

;

6)
.

the third person singular mas]3

culine
rest

e.g. Isa. xxiii. 12.

;

i^S .vull

OlS jiUI it VHIS said to him; 133, 8. for thee Barh. -T _* * T --^2OuAj ^| it shall be permitted to me. Assem. I. 362, 5.
3.

When
it is

nite,

the subject of the verb is general or indefiexpressed, in Syriac, in various ways, as in the
;

English,

thus

a ) by the third person singular

e.

g.

192
Gen.
xi. 9.
is

THE PERSONS OF THE VERB.

l^b he
calls; (i.e.

one

calls,

it

is called) ;

to

which

Hebrew
verb
tread
;

appended by way of explanation, after the idiom, the participle or participial noun of the same
also
_
k

e. g. Isa.
(

xvi. 10.
;

j*Q-i?

jo,J

the

wine Ireaders shall

*0 %

no more wine
e.g.

i. e.

no one shall tread);

Ij^.t looi jSof he
*

or Jkjf and
(i.

IrQy,
said ;

I Sam.

ix. 9.
1 \*^rt\
*

e.

any

one)

John iu.4.

V
]^Q

T
.

*
r

\*

XaAj> itf."^^ tluf how can

or passively Matt. xxvi. 13.
13.

if

one be born when he

it

is

old?

shall be told

Acts xvi.

L^ ]ooi liwASo ^L
58, 13, 15
;

there b)
(
i.

prayer was wont

to be

made ; Barh.

by
e.,

the third person plural ; e.g. Isa. Ixiv. 3. men in general ) have not heard ; xlvii. 1
f

o2 .
;

Jl
i.

they

Dan.

12

9"

Heb.

xi. 3.
sees,

^OOl
what
;

^VAS0>
is seen )
;

-^ nfl what v

they see
X
7

e. (i.

what
parti-

any one

also

with an explanatory
%**?*

ciple or adjective

e.g. Isa.

xxiv. 16.
;

Qi^M
Luke
ii.

Ucil they fail*

r
i

ed

c)

by

the second singular

bringest; I

e. g.

4.

o^oZ

w^en ^AoM
ferest
(i.

Tim.

ii.

1.
)

e.

that there be offered

vi.

>Q;nV> looiZj that thou ofsometimes the verb is in

the second plural, Matt.

plural
itive
;

24

d ) sometimes by the

first

e.g.

Mark vii.27.
any
v.
;

J&JJO

*QQJj
and

(or

by

the infin-

with ^, Matt. xv. 26. GuS0;Sa^o __ -^foVr>V xxii.17),

(i.

that ive

e.

one) should take

cast

e)

more

fre-

quently by do men gather ?

they say

the participle alone;

e.g. Matt.vii.16.

^>^o\
;

]vn\

15

ix.17

x.

29

I Cor. iv.12

Barh.6-2.

58, 9.
A

REM.

Here belongs
one

also

|^O|ASo
Acts

they say,
;

it is
e.

said

and imxii.

infinitive following personal phrases with an

g. Matt.

12.

^vVnV ,^X
we (any one) must

may do

v.

29.

nrftk

^AVn\

]]Q

obey.

VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

4.

193

the Deity or those in high stations (e.g. Kings), the first person plural denotes the of themselves speak ]*j] ,}U lei us pluralis eaxellentice; e. g. Gen. i. 26.
>

When

(i.

e.

I will} make man;

(i.e. I,
.

xi.

7; Barh. 90,
;

9.

hold we
to

Justinian), have written

11.

^
a
)

^inAo 101 be^DoAs ivrile

passage*

us (me) REM. Sometimes though

the

for

the most part only in

translated from

Old and

New

Testaments,
viz.
;

the construction

changes from one person to the other,

to the second, or vice versa
;

from the third

Micah

vii.

18.

^*Zo2|

|O

AJ]
there

,^1
is

Uo orZoZ;^
no

God

as thou,

who forgive th
;

sins,

and

remitteth

the

remnant of his heritage, and retainest not IL Mai. ii. 15; Gal. iv. 21. 284, A. B ) (compare Ephr.
transgressions of the

.OOOU9
\sysre
6
)
fioi,

ol

uiro

vo'fxov

^eXovrgg g/vai the

1

Rom.
;

ii. 1

Matt, xxiii.37

from the
Vr
'

first

to

third
r \.\

OOLkJA f\
him,
in
-

^i(j>> ^oA because we have sinned against hath he poured out upon them (us). Here also belong the
first

V _ CJLa

person
T

e.

g.

Isa. xlii. 24, 25.

instances where writers include themselves, in the

person plural,
Ixvi.

what they declare of

-

their

ancestors;

e.

g.

Psalm

6.

9 Ym

OlO IpwJ

^D^

then did

we

rejoice in him.

When

several verba

having different subjects follow each other in the same person, it appears to be rather according to the Syriac idiom, not to indicate

more

particularly the difference of the subject

e.g. II

Sam.

xi.13.

67.

Construction of

the

Verb

with various

Cases

and

Prepositions.
I.

VERIJS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

1.

With an
)

Accusative are construed

Verbs
;

Transitive

e. g.

Matt

ii.

6.

^oiQoAp

ooi}

194

VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

who
shall feed
2

my people
*
*

; iv.

16

even

intransitives,
;

having
214,
2.

at the
V ?

same time a
^

transitive signification

e.g.

Barh.

rriQ**

lOO

^3>

fo rode upon

an

ass

215, 11.

REM.

Here
;

also
g.
xii.

belong such verbs as in other languages govern

7
1>

other cases
believe ;
\0

e.

og> t

to

command

Matt, xxviii. 20.

SdiOl
ii.

to

John
answer

38; Romans
III.

x. 16, (
7

with
to

*2 John

23

|ll

to

Ephr.

285;

;*"><**

announce; Acts

xvi.

10. etc.

Here belong the following

put on or put
;

classes of verbs
to

those

signifying to
cover

off clothing,

adorn,
;

to gird, to

with anything
7

-*^V
7.

I Cor. xv. 53
that he
ii.

Eph.

vi.

11

Barh. 223, 12.

ments
;

^'nnX
Col.
;

.*Vsi>
/
7
l1

put on our gar;

iii.

;0| I Sam.
^

Acts
x
;

xii.
lV*

even passive verbs e.g. ja&lZ] Acts xii. 8 -'**/} Ps. and /3) those denoting a ivant or excess ; e. g. Acts civ. 2
;
.!>

P-

<s

7
(^

--

(Zoni JOO1 ySD er ; xiii. 10 Eom. i. 29 Mark he harm as to his soul. if suffer
vi. 8.
iJjk.*jO
;
;

he

was full offaith and pow36.

viii.

;rn*i Olma/
7
T>

}
;

Furthermore here belong

>OIL

7) verbs of remembering

and
ii.

forgetting,
;

John xv. 20
vi.
;

Luke

i.

72
;

pj2f John

17, 22

]l

Heb.

10

and

finally

verbs of coming and going to a place

]2.}o he
;

e.g. Matt.

xv.21.

'O teoQxA!^
v.

came
iv.

into the region of

Tyre;
iv.

Mark
John

38

Luke
'

ii.

51

John
ii.

^jl
%
'
;

Luke

42
3

vi. 1;
ii.

yS>O\

Luke

39

iv.

14
;

|k> Acts

ix.
;

John
c)

12

aaj

i.44

.nSrr> v. 1

^1 xviii.33
;

several neuters also take an accusative, viz

a) in

connection with a noun,

;

as

their object,

formed
,**]
to

from the same verb

e. g.

Judg. xiv. 12.

IZ^o)

VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

.

195
* f

propose a riddk

E/. xvii. 2

Acts

ii.

17.
;

MOV**
xiii-

]wi>, y>V
Ephr.
I.

to

have visions
253,

dreams

Matt

24

251,

especially

f3 )

when
e. g.

the

noun
ii.

ia

more' accurately defined by an adjective;

Matt

10.

]Aa> l^OpM
Assera.
I.

CU^
;

they rejoiced

exceedingly;

John

iii.

29

362, 18
;

Gen. xxvii. 34.

i.

]W> I^S^V^S-V^
to

lamented sorely

Zach.

14.
to befall,

OO1 10
also
**

ia the sense of

happen
e.

to

any one,
xiii. 2,

governs the
*
9

accusative
9
,

of the

object

g.
;

Luke
Acts

W*

P 7

tdj|

JOO1 ~

112O1>
a

because this has befallen them

vii.

40.

plo what
2

has happened

to

him

Acts

xxviii. 5, 6.

The
)

following govern a double accusative ;

Pe. of which takes an verbs in Pa., 4p^- and /S'Aa., of verbs accusative, viz.; putting on or off" clothing, a)

adorning,

covering

with anything;
I.

e.

g.

Mark
%

xv. 17,20; Ephr.

T

239,

A.
;

fri'ii
II. 178,

he clothed them with garments

John

xix. 2.

.? YV
;

pa..9|>

|A*jJ

^oldjkCQOO
ft]

they put upon him a purple robe;

;

Ez. xvi. 10
I.

verbs of filling up, satisfying

e. g.

Ephr.

527,

A.

\L*>
loith

<Ae vessels with oil;

CfcoL A.'\V> Luke i. 53.

;

gry he fills

good things

y) those

which denote

teaching,

or showing ;
/eacA

e. g.

John

xiv. 26.
iv.

^Q,SnV)

yow show us the Father

6
)

all things ; I
;

Tim.

6; .John xiv. 8.
;

s]

tC

verses 10, 32

Here belong
the thing)
;

verbs in Peal with a double accusative signification. of a) verbs of clothing, covering (also with
;

e.

g.

Ephr.

1.

239, A.

Jil^OT ^djf

\a?\

he

196

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

^">
to

girded them with girdles ;

anoint, Ps.xlv.7;

*&)] to

sow

Lev. xix. 19
e. g.

/3)

verbs ofJilting up (also with *o and^-So);

John

ii.

7.
;

{l'.?)]*

&

^jfoSLo /K
;

(tfiem) ZAe
I.

water

pofe wi^A i^ater

verse 9

Barh. 212, 2

Assem.
with
*
*

332,

A.

12; y)verbs of commanding, ordering, (also

^Sr>

and ^loi

the person and thing)

he

e.g.

Gen. vi.22.

had commanded

him',

Mark viii.ll.
;

oipQSj \o all that "jZ] OlS OOOl r*-M*

<

ft *

they

demanded of him a sign

any thing to any body, thus and so e. g. Gen.

;

5) verbs of showing or doing or making a person or thing to be

P

xvii. 5.
9

^A^OU
7
<y> *

Ja]
>

/
jr

7iave ?nade
t^/Aa<

/Aee
est

a Father

John

viii.53.
i.

AJJ
I.

r^^ Olio
A.

makAlis

thou thyself? Heb.

Assem.

346,

4. v.

E.

so with

an accusative of the material of which anything

;

formed

e.

g.

I Kings

viii.

32.

V*a,So Ja pi ^jjl
;

he built of (them) the stones Isa. Ix. 18 ; I John iii. 1.

an

altar

s) verbs of

naming,

IT.

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

-JD

1.

Verbs are construed with

in, on,

which

in English

are

joined with
especially
;

a) verbs
e.g.
;

upon, about, concerning, etc. Here belong which denote some state or emotion of
i.14.

the

mind

Luke

oi^QSoo OrMj
* t o

they shall rejoice

at his birth

Barh.90,20;
iii.

*s pD
x. 38;
i
;

to

have pleasure in someat;

thing

Matt.

17

Heb.
ii.
it

*Q OlLo22f to wonder
in
;

Matt. xxii. 33

Luke
;

47
v

Q \>& to hope
on
;
i.

Matt.

xii.

21
ii.

John v.45
*a
I.

*Q ^0*01
/oo^ at
;

to believe

Mark
;

i.

15

John
;

11;

*rJ

io

John

36, 43

Barh. 190, 13

Assem.

89,

A. 17

*Q Zois

io 6e

ashamed of ; Rom.

i.

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

16

197
or threaten
r

JD ;..
viii.

to

rebuke

Tim.
;

v.

]]s

ibid,

Matt.
at
;

26; Luke
;

iv.

41

Barh. 53, 10; *Q o*VS

to

mock
ii.

Matt, xx.19
6)

xxvii. 31;

*O

nV)

to

laugh at

Acts

verbs that denote acknowledging, denying, swearing -.-*"> 1?QJ> -ViV5 by, calling upon ; e. g. Matt. x. 32, 33. whosoever shall confess me ; Mark i. 5 Acts xxiii. 8 ;
;

13

Rom.
shall

x.

9,

10
;

Matt. x. 33.
;

*JL>

deny me
372,
8,

xxvi. 34

Tim.

v. viii

>aa2J> ^So whosoever Assem. I. 341, A.

;

23

Matt. xxvi. 63.

/ at/jure thee by the living

\LL 1'oCLfi ^S )j| kooLo God ; Mark v. 7 I Thess. v.27;

;

a ]p
some one
16;

to

call

upon

Gen.

iv. 26.

Here

also belong

c)

some verbs which denote a doing something for or against " x T x ir j 3 t^H, ^>| and *uOw to some one e. g. prove against
;

Acts xxiv. 27

xxv. 9

Rom.

ix.

17
;

Tim.

i.

2
;

JOICD (also with

^A)
10

to testify
;

against
iV
to

Deut. xxxi.
to

28.
ter

Of verbs
Luke

of motion, here belong

d)
\

*Q VLjS

encoun(i.

viii.

27
;

xxii.

and *>

\L\

come with

e.

bring) something

Psalms

Ixvi. 13.

REM.
*

Here
* %^A
p

also belongs
*

]A*

to

drink from

Gen.

xliv. 5.

j;iO O1Q |A> 1^*^ the cup from which my Lord drinks. Some times J2 denotes a part of the object e.g. II Sam. xxiii. 10. T r P Aa\^~> I..*.B ajA* Ae marfe an overthrow among the Philistines ;
;

and here are to be placed

I

^*. and x^Soi

to 7a6or at

something;

Kings
2.

ix.

23.

The following verbs

;

are construed with

as a sign of

the dative
e. g.

a) those of giving, permitting,

commending;

John
7
;

xiv.27.
;

wtlto lV)X ^orA p] OCTLmT

my

gt'ye

?o

you

Matt, viii.21,31.
v.

^A

C*

*^ T Q2>| permit

peace

me

MS

Mark

13

Luke

viii.

32

Acts xx. 32,

198

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

tCioL pi / commend you
to

God ;

I Peter iv. 19

and displeasing ; e. g. John viii. 29. b) those of pleasing rnV r2iy VOfLo that which pleases him ; Rom. xv. 2, 3
Heb.
e.g.
xiii.

16

or

those that denote likeness, similarity;

Luke

xiii. 18.

loi-^? IZaolk) Uio>

like ?

]*&\
ii.

to

what
;

is

the

Kingdom of God
Ol

verses

9,

20

Heb.

17

Barh.

137, 12.

Alt IQ

thou art like him.

REM.
fitting

Here

also belong impersonal phrases, such as

|]O

it is
iii.

/or, and

^
n

A*|

equivalent to

to

have

e.

g. Matt.

Luke

xvi.

28,29

John

x. 16.

(with the accusative of the object in

-

relation ouVo

to

sx siv

Jotn 9

^
4.

^*V
and

xai rdv irars'pa xa< TOV uiov

to

e'^si),

15^ ^ AA^

V^Uo Voi
equivalent to

no<

Aave

Matt.

xiii.

21
e.g.

Johnxiv.30.

In the same signification

occurs also

loOl

Barh. 66,

JllO OlS OOO1 1'ASZ

he had three sons.

3.

"With ^So are connected

verbs which denote

to
;

fear, Jlee,
e.g.

guarding
xxiii. 40.

oneself, refraining, ceasing, releasing

Luke

Aj| ^\**> ]oi!$L

^3 tf af fearest
ii.3.

thou All>

#p7x* ^OL^J OU^>

not

God? John ix.22; Barh. 94,9; Rom.

18
x.

oo^2

i/a< thou shall escape the judgment ^SsD

;

of God;
O>OT>l|

I Cor.

vi.

14

Barh. 170, 4
;

Matt. x. 17.
;

ftf".i">

^>

beware of men

xvi. 6, 12
jOl")

Luke
*
.

xii.

15; xx.

46

John

xvii. 15.
eu?7
;

]!") ^So
I Peter
lusts
-I
.

j^2> that thou shouldst

It

m yrom
?

ii.

11.

01
;

A.^_..

^Lo QO^)Z]
;

abstain
t,

"

from
-1>

of the flesh

Acts xv. 29

I Pet.

iv.l.

|C3l4**
I.

^O
;

OlA i\
II Thess.

he ceasethfrom sin; Barh.102,9;

iii.

Assem.

42, 8

3.

}i*">

^D

oaoicuaj he

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

will keep

199

you from

evil

b)

those of filling up, lacking, ami

failing

Luke

xv. 16.
;

lao^ ^Lo
;

OlflDp yV)Sn\ to Jill hit

vi.10.
ii.

belly with husks

Barh. 69,1

Tim.
;

fZoiSOiOT
18
r
;

,-io

&L& they came

asking,

short of the faith

II Tim.
*

c) those of
-

beseeching; John
;

iv. 31.

OllLo OOO1
ii.

vo

they

besought him

verse 40; I Peter

11.

REM.

^Lo

also expresses the Latin prce ;

e.

g.

_l

A^lO

to die

before ; or per, with

vA

and -^\**> John

>

x.

1,2.

4.

With

are construed verbs, which, in English,

;

may

be followed by about, concerning, viz. a ) some which ex-Ai XLM>A| an the Matt.xv.22. mind; e.g. press affection of
be merciful to

me ;

xvii.

15

Rom.

ix.

15

xi.

32

Matt.vi.

28.

^oAjj
;

r^s*
xii.

U^>
26.

laol V>A why

^A
;
.

take ye thought for

;

raiment
it
r

Luke
if

J...J

T r

^OA 5<imoZ|

to be

anxious
it
J

Matt.v.22.

to rejoice

over
_.f

Rev.
r

xviii.20.
to

^oA

*f

pa to iveep
l
r

.i>

over; Lukexxiii.27,28.

vA ^AloZl

take counsel concern-

ing

Matt. xxvi. 4; b) those which denote power or authori-

e. g. Luke xix. 14. ty over something that this person should rule over us
; ;

l*

poi ^i\S ^AlQj> Rom. vi. 14 ; vii. 1 ;

]*Z]j

Barh. 40, 6

Matt, xxiii. 35.

xxi.
* %^
t

,OTL.S^
xviii.

shall come

vpon
J

you

Luke
T
t
?

34
*

John

Luke

woia\l

|A^A> fear fell upon him ; c ) those which denote a doing for or against, or an occupation with someV
t>

A\u

thing

e. g.

Acts

vii. 58.

^OlQAl
xxvi. 62

Ojoifloj
;

v i\i|
i.

those

who

testified

against
tJiat

him ; Matt.

John
light

8.
iii.

^A joimjj
26
;

he might bear witness of

to

tJte

v. 31.
of,

accuse
i.

John
;

viii.
;

46

^A >QAs

in icrile

concerning,

John

46

v.

46

Acts xxi. 25.

^A

>]

and

200
to

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

vii.

speak of, about; John i. 22, 30; xiii. 22; d) verbs of covering, protecting, or burdening ; e.
.

13

.7

.7

J>.

g.

Matt.

xvii. 5.

oouAl A\l
i.

IZj^ou Jill a 6ri^ cloud covered

//em
the

Luke

35.

-.*>.

\A
\T

* 7 _

p.ff

.
(

\v; Ol\i*

the

power of

Most High shall cover thee ; ^A \& and ]iQD have the II Sam. xiii. 25. same signification Jer. xviii. 23
; ;

-^.

.\v jo]j

J]> 50 that

we

shall not burden thee.

And

finally

e)
e.

several verbs that denote a charge,

g.

command

or petition

;
;

^\i r^21
to
;

to

charge one
;

II

Chron. xxxvi. 23

^JL *aAo
to
I.

prescribe for one

II Kings xxii. 13.

^i
;

\1O

pray for
50,
6.

John

xvii. 9.

^1

^J*

to

ash after

Assem.

REM.

Here

also
;

belong phrases compounded with nouns derived

?

-tf 7

from these verbs

cosi

e. g.

Peter
;

v. 7.

|O1_^
5.
i.

yowr cares upon

the

Lord

Barh. 77,

J/n\.
]Z;n
5.

j^^ they took care for the

King
;

; Isa.
vii.

14.

xv OOO1

they are a burden to

i

me

Job
A ' ^

20.

*
,

With AxO
Gen.
i.4.

'*" *

I >.*">

and Al iO between, are construed

;
'

verbs which denote dividing, separating, distinguishing *

e.g.

pnt>\

***'*
;

fioiOJ

Zu)
i.

^) Ae separated beA^jQ
;

tween light and darkness

<o see,

Ruth

17.

^>r

an(i lv**
;

to

perceive a
18.

difference between

II Sam. xix. 35

Mai.

iii.

6.

"With

>Aa

after, are
)
;

joined verbs which signify

*
o

(equivalent to to follow
/Aey followed

e. g.
;

Matt.

iv. 25.

go r GliAo o^i|
"*

to

him ;
after

xii.

15
;

Mark
2
;

x.

32

Matt. iv. 19.

;

wjAo oZ follow
I

me

xix.

John viii. 12

>Aa

Tim.

vi.

1 1

II Tim.

ii.

22.

PASSIVES
RKM.

AND THEIR CONSTRUCTION.

with
the

201
find

More

in

accordance
to

Hebrew idiom we
I

>Ao
xiv.

with verbs signifying

;

put away, destroy: e.g.

Kings

10

xxi. 21.

GENERAL

REMARKS.
as in

To
-L

seem,

to appear,

are expressed,

Hebrew,

by
]ooi

- * ' ^*~>

in the

relation of genitive
;

or with the suffix be

i

longing to the person

f
r

e. g.

Gen.

xix. 14.

\Q

wolQjA** he seemed
- * -

to

his

sons-in-law;

II

Sam.

x.

3.

v>

(he) seems

to thee.

When

rendered more definite

by

the adjectives
;2i

^
vi.

good or bad, they are expressed either by ''

,

and

\*~i

or
;

vlo2) without
Gen.
;

ill

V)

e. g.
;

Acts
or in

Rom.

xv. 2. 3
"
- -

xxi. 11

Matt. xxi. 15
I.

connection with
]l;So
.

^*"*

e. g.

Ephr.

240,F.

looi ;-*>

. i .

^o

*3

would

this

seem good toGod f

SoxsT
is

In the trans-

lation of the
;

New Testament,

usually expressed

by

e. g.

Matt. xvii. 25; xviii. 12; xxi. 28; xxii.17:

Luke

x. 36.

To

suffer,

permit, are expressed either

by

Off)

to

com;

to cause (without the e.g. copula following) or they are expressed in such a manner that Barh. 72, 12 the thing to be done is implied in the imperative itself ; Barh. 27, 2; 114, 14.

mand, or j,*

III.

PASSIVES AND THEIR CONSTRUCTION.

in passives
is

1.

The
e.g.

active cause
vi. 16.

usually expressed
they

by
be

^;

Matt.
;

I* "">V
1

that t oV"Aj?

may

seen by

men

Luke

viii.

29.

Ol^ }ooi ]^

he was caught by

202

VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

1.

him; Assem.
voice heard ly

39,14,
;

and

16.

o
find

01

^oA**)

there

was a

him

Barb. 152, 11.

frequently

REM.

Yet we

also

^S0, Matt.
13
;

iii.

14.

j*1^0>

,iQl2] that
2.

I should

be baptized

of

thee ; v.

xx. 23.

Passives

whose

actives

govern
of them
filled
;

double
e. g.

accusai.

tive,

sometimes

retain

one
she

Luke

41.
;

l7QjO> ]1*0> A.VrtZ^

ii.

was

with

the

Holy Ghost

40

Barh. 32, 14.

;

QQ ,in\>
108, 6
;

li^Ui o wa?i w/io w;<w

clad in Byssus

90, 14

223, 15;

Assem.

I.

86,

A. 27, 28.
3.

When
;

passives,

especially in verbs
signification,
"
''

relating
1
x
7

to

the

mind, have an active

accusative

e.g. I Thess.

i.

2.
;

tZa^^a
7 f 1*^*

they are joined with the

'

^aa.^ ^L*p>ALo
to ^Ain^,
;

twe

remember you in our prayers

xv. 5
;

.*"lnZ]

Rom.

ii.

^joA*]
;

to
iii.

recognize,

Acts xix. 15
to t^wA,

MioA*]

to obey,

Eph.

vi. 1

Col.

22

^.J^f
also

I Tim.

vi. 10.

REM.
cud, Lev.

Here
xi.

also

belong such passives as >>Q..Z]

to

chew the

3,5

and hence
(

passive of the Pe.

4.

may be explained why participles 64. 5) take the accusative of the object.

Passives have also frequently a reflective signification

58.
-

24.2; (21,2; 7 22.2; * * Jesus ^CLM-I AxA^ tOl.*Z|

.

A.a);

e.g.

John
;

viii. 6.
;

bowed himself down

verse 8
those

Mark

i.

I Tim. v. 14.

^yiO?P o'^fo 7 7
iv.

y
to

J-^-if

who

are young shall

xix. 16
to
;

marry ;
11
; .

13

>
;

.V>

\x**Z|

wax

strong,
;

Acts

xxiii.

i^Zl

to Ai'cfe,

John

viii.

59

turn around, Matt. ix. 22.,

etc.

REM.

Many

neuters take a passive signification

e.

g.

PL

to

MODE OP EXPRESSING GREEK COMPOSITES.

r,

203
to

Luke

xxi. 8.

|OX
<

iQ
"
1

w irXav^rs
xalsrai rupi
;

,O_i

burn,

Matt.xiii.40.

])QL2 v/.
etc.

'

*'

^J
viii.

to fall, iii.10.

ouf,

12.

Upon

the use of verbs for adverbs, see

82. 1.

Appendix

to

67.

MODE OF EXPRESSING GREEK

To
which
ed
as
1.

COMPOSITES.

the subject of the construction of verbs with cases and prepo-

sitions,

belongs also the manner of rendering Greek Composites,

in the Syriac translation of the

New

Testament, are express-

follows

By

simple verbs, in the signification of which

preposition
is

a) the idea
18.

of
r

the
-

Greek

included
.

e.

g.

Matt. xx.
;

-i -'

oxcft

* t

AyapcMvofMv
;

vin. 1.

AuJ

,2 xarapavn
;

in. 2.

Q2o2

fi<ravoM-

xvi. 5.

n ^t

JireXa^ovro

or

by verbs which

b ) without respect

to the

Greek preposition, answer to the simplo

Greek verb

e.

g. Matt. xi. 5.
;

^M
HUM

ava/SX&rourfi
avt^rtfiv;
5.

Acts

xxiii.

33.

Q2GU
x.31,32.

avaovr
r

Rom.

14. 9.

Luke

XV. 24,

32

if
avrorapjjXSiv
;

J^l

Acts xxvi.

^-^H

*poyivw<fxovrff

Rom.
2.

xv. 4.

*oAaZ(
;

-Trposypa^Tj.

By

verbs

with a preposition answering to the Greek

;

e.g.

^xoaL =
x. 34.
^r

avr<

Luke

xiii.lY.

ai\non\ 0001 ^kli^bj

^oA

e} avnxsijxsvoi

auru

Acts vi.10
CTlL
T

Rom.xiii.2.
xai

=
T

^*i'

andxara;
;

Luke

uO1OAl
x

^4^21

tirsps\i)i\ aurou
tfou

Matt.

xxvi.C2.

- -

^ v _i)OUQLO

xaTafxaprupouO'/v

^Ql

a'Cv

Rom.

204
vi.8.

PECULIARITIES OF VERBS.
OliQl M*J
;

tfu^rjo'ofxsv

aura),
f *

Heb.
*V.

iv. I

15
o'

II

Tim.

i.

8.

1
Trpotfopsuo'ov'r
e.

irpo

Acts
9
*
;

vii.

40.
)

^iV)^ ^Q^lp>
JU9> ^LO
,

Matt.
x

ii.

or

by an adverb of similar signification

f
r

g.

JLO> ^LD
Heb.
vi. 6.

= ava,
Rom.
i.

I Peter

i.3;

iA
2
;

= iOipo ^So
2
;

-irpo
i.

II Cor.

xiii.

"poi'pT]xa

Col.

5.

3.

By

another verb representing the preposition, which usually

stands

first,

without any connective particle,

finite
J*
xiii.

in the

same
(

tense,
be-

number, and gender with the

fore
)
iii.

verb
\*
A

e.
*

g.

^OpO

to

come
vii.

tfpo

Mark
35.

23.

o| ASOpO

irpos/p]xa,
;

Acts

52;

Rom.

xi.

This verb sometimes follows

e.

g.

John

xx. 4.

4.

If the
it is

composite

is

formed from a noun or adjective and a

into its
iii.

verb,
***1V c

usually resolved
x
p

components
X

e.
7

g.

Mark
O

iv.
7

20.

|2>

^jkOOLi

xaprfoipopouo'iv

4.

iO) O|

2L&> ,*^\^\

Matt. xix. 18.

ZojOlCD jOlCoZ ]T

REM.

It
is

seems to be merely pleonastic, where in John

translated

ir. 4.

by

68.

The Substantive
chiefly relating

Verb,

and some

other

Peculiarities

to the

Construction of the Verb.

A.

USE OF looi
to be

A*f AND AjjS

38).

Instead of }ooi

(with which, according to

65. B.

and D, the imperfect and pluperfect are formed), the Syriac

INDIRECT
also uses A*)

DISCOURSE.

205

and in negative phrases

A^X

with suffixes,
(]ooi),

and with them also in connection with the former

forms the imperfect
verse
1-i.
;
.

e.g.
**

John

ix.24.

]ooi ^Oio/u] he was;

Loci ouA_i] they

9

were, etc.

REM.
'

|OOI sometimes stands pleonastically with the preterit

it

without giving
T

the signification of the pluperfect

e.g.

Mark

i.45.
is

OO1 If

**'f*

fie

began

Luke

i.

John

iii.

25.

It

sometimes omitted as present or imperfect, according to 54. a mere copula between the sub2 ; or when it would be e. g. Matt, xxvii. 29 and object 65. III. Rem.) ( ject
;
;

Luke

i.27.

It

seems

to

mark emphasis
John
vi.

after

|J

(in the Philoxenian

version

Q\ nowise);

e.g.

32.

^QH\ *)OU )*OlO

;

]oO1

11

Moses has not given you; verses 38, 58

or
in

xiii.

interrogations
]]

with
not ?
,

Jj

= nonne
;

11, 18
e.

Heb.

ii.5,16
xiii.

g.
;

Matt.
xi.

55.
xvii.

JjOl looi
17.

is this

xx. 13

Mark

vi.

Luke

40

Concerning ]ooi

A*| and A*_^ with

2.

to

have

not to

have,

compare

67.

II.

Rem.

B.

INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
is

The
r

indirect

discourse
j
l 7

commencing with
t 1
A

= 15
T r

usually expressed directly, on ), e. g. John iv. 17.

thou hast riijhtly said,

t7

iT3 taJal AjAj <->^'r^O( Vf no husband ; verse 53

V
;

'r^Si
ii.

I have
11.

17

vi.

31

Barh. 51,
;

AlSoij ^o]"
jj]
(

p as he said;
>
is

I (he)

have heard; 135,10

69,7.

IOCTI

|J

]g>i>A ]nVvr>^ fo.

no King of

^j

ooi he swore, he would

I will)
REM.

be

the heathen ; 223, 11, 12.

Sometimes

wanting
)
;

at the

beginning of the direct

;

discourse (especially before 61

e.g.
e.

Barh. 131, 11, 12

;

374, 13
;

443, 8

more frequently jioV

g. Barh. 106,3

183,9

219,6 ;

206
243, 10
;

ELLIPSIS,
486, 5
1.
;

ZEUGMA,

ETC.
I.

543, 19

596, 11.

Compare Assem.

479, A.
g.

24, with 480,

79, 19.

The
^OCJl^

indirect discourse also occurs;

e.

Barh.

]2l^

]aaCD
thee ;

J]>

Ol^ O'^sfthey
3
;

said to him, the

tribute is not sufficient

for

94, 1

97, 1.
e.

Sometimes the
10 and

direct discourse passes over into the indirect;

g. 276, 8

vice versa

166, 19,

20

513,

5, 6.

C.
1.
it is

ELLIPSIS

ZEUGMA

PARONOMASIA, AND PUNS.

"When a verb has previously been used in the protasis, usually omitted in the apodosis, where it would proper;

ly be repeated

e. g.

Matt.i.22.

JJjsoAjj

Zooij oils ,_> ]>oi

it

but what has happened (has happened) that

led;
.

might be
;

fulfil-

xxi. 4;
*>

John xx. 31;

i*
'

Horn. v. 20

I Cor. ix. 25.

that they

tn*"imi> ,_k_oi>> ^jkAOl those

obtain ; II Cor. v. 13
;

who run (run)

19
;

may

Heb.

vii.

viii.

I Peter

iv. 11;

John

iii.

6.
;

Sometimes the verb

Matt. 27,25.
T

is

to

be supplied from

the context
us;

^i^\ T
yL>|

OlSo> his blood (come) upon

as
it

Acts xxiv.6. ^cnnVHQ*

(is written

in our

law.

REM.

The

ellipsis

must be considered

as a peculiarity of the Sy-

riac language,

where the Philoxenian

translation, omitting the > in

the apodosis, adheres strictly to the Greek words ; e. g. Matt i. 22. * * IP * 1 ^* * fy *) (jOI TOUTO 5s bXov y^yovev ; John xx. 31. &OOI Con'

QUO

iteming the omission of

Y*

^D|

see

B. Bern, above

and concerning

die elliptical use of |OO1 see A.

Rom.

Sometimes a verb, by its signification, can belong to only one of two connected nouns (Zeugma), so that to the other noun another verb must be mentally supplied;
2.

USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL.

T
f_

207
*

e. g.

Job

_^*

%*****
broken
;

iv. 10.

**^>ZZ|

|io

V>|> |AiooU

ike

roaring

of

the lion (is stilled)

3.

and

the teeth are

x. 12.

Paronomasia and puns occur but rarely in Syriac.

is

The former
Ps.
xl.

a mere imitation of the

Hebrew

original in

3.

^pfMJb
see it

1U^
rejoice.

<OU*J>

that

many

and

(iBT'n D^ai Puns occur mostly in names

1T)

where the language does not require any such alteration to be assumed e.g. Gen. xlix. 8. fOjcu ^L ]>OOU Judah (thy
;

brethren) shall praise thee. verses 16, 19.

CHAPTER

THIRD.

THE NOUN.

69.
1.

Use of

the

Noun

in General.

Abstract nouns not unfrcquently in Syriac take the

place of adjectives
genitive
.

and then they stand in the

noun,
the

relation of

to
**
*

the

with

e. g.

Matt.

t?OO>

V**o;o with

HolyGhost; John xv.l.

iii. 11. %/ * * % f * ]>;*> I^vi

the true vine ; I Cor. xv. 44.

Especially does this union, as

in Hebrew, occur with adjectives which denote the material

or substance of which a thing

ff

is

*-0

**

ap>

p..J stone

water-pots

composed Heb. ix. 4.

e. g.

John

ii.

6.

208

USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL.

x.

a golden box ; II Cor.

20, 10
pillar.
;

4
;

II Tim.
7.

ii.

20

Barh. 11,

7,

88, 2

172, 8

228,

1>O1QJ> fjoSoi a

fiery

REM.
.Am.,
|

Adjectives of material, however, do occur

i

e.g.

Barh. 59,4.

jj_i_2i0| a brazen celestial sphere

and

in the

same con;

struction adjectives of quality with J prefixed, used for substantives

?

(>CU> |Aa week of the white (clothes). e.g. Abstract nouns with J in connection with a pronoun, supply the
Michael. Chr. 85.
*P*

77

place

of the

predicate
;

e.

g.

Rom.

vii.

14.

pf JdO>

_>

*l

<\*

pj

but

I am

carnal

or

place of an adjective to which a

ii.

with a preposition prefixed they supply the noun is to be supplied e. g. Heb.

;

17.
* J

]oi_-:L r 2 in divine
one of the
jisvoff.

things
;

) ;

Luke

viii.

49.

household

even

with

suffixes,

Some

abstract nouns, in the relation of genitive with

;
e.

>

following,

precede as nomen regens

;

g.
;

Barh.
195,16.

170,

20.

DJ iVuCUDO many writings; 172, 4

>

178, 5

^^

*> in the

according to
2.

remaining fortresses ; 198,13. Here also belongs 55. B. 2. Rem.

Especially are adjectives or concrete substantives deetc.,

noting possession, custom, similarity,

*
\*>

expressed by
;
7

way
2;rj

of circumlocution, by means oi the nouns ^O eon

x

daughter
ruler
it is
;

^\1O and

IjLo lord, master

>i

and A*> prince,

and

AA>

house.
;

In respect to the use of these nouns

to

be observed

a)
Tit.
i.

}> designates
12.

a)

Gentile names, inhalitants, etc.

e. g.

Vo

-"^
;

Cretans; Barh. 167,1

Acts xxi. 12;

citizens
;

]>Z1 +jji>
91, 2
;

01 ^vToirioi

Barh. 80, 17.

species,

]^J-,io %^J>
;

/3)
3

the idea of race,

kindred
;

e.g.

Rom.

a kinsman

xi.14. ' %*% X

Deut. xxiii.2

I Cor. vii.22.

p|**

USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL

.

209
Michael.

a freeman
Chr. 5.

John
X

xviii. 35.
T

]iOL -**"> heathen

;

ClxCD9Ol \z* a heretic

;

Assem. 11.248.

courtier

Rev.

ii.

14,

20.

(Here also belongs

tfuv

y) participation,
.p. * * f
'
-

likeness,

(==
;

ofAog)

e.

g.
;

Eph.

iii.

6.

|ZoZ^i
xix. 24.

<"
tfuyxXr]p(5vofi,oi

mi I Thess.
;

ii.

14
i.

Acts
10.

xviii.

)Zoiioo} ;o
;

OJJLO'TC^VOS
;

Dan.

jo

con-

temporaries

Phil. iv. 3

Gal.

i.

14

5) locality, 1.

situation,

and other circumstances

Psalms cxxxii.
2.

e.g. Isa.

xxvi.

]>a*

^ a moat;
;

1O

;a a

necA; chain.

And
;

finally

the adverbial phrase olAl* \szfortliwi1h, immediately ; Matt. xiii. 5, 20 John v. 9 xiii. 30 Acts x. 33 xxi. 32.
; ; ;

b)

Z^D

plur.

AlQ forms

a) rarely abstracts ; e.g. ]sD>] concretes

A^3

circumcision;
e. g.
/3)

more frequently
7.

in the
;

feminine;
it

I Mace. xi.

!>]**

2;o
;

one born free

e.

or

denotes;
grapes',

the product of anything

g.

lAl_o^

Z^

]ASQjk

Z;a ^um on sea-weed

x. 16,

and
;

tropically

po Z^3

voice

Rom.
22
;

18

Gal. iv. 20

and in the

plural,
;

Acts

xii.

y) implements, clothing,
;

descendants, *'/' Hebrews-, yxjljnj Zja

5)

rm<7

]Ali3 L\& napkin 1> *** Luke xiii. nations, etc.; e. g.

*>

^r
16.

the

Matt. xxi.

o.

*J

^CLiOl.

Z^i

T e/er?^

salem, or
c)

its

inhabitants.
;

^AQ denotes ]^V^> ^AS counselor xiv. 5. |LDQ**Z ^AO

V^D Luke
vii.

)
;

mostly concretes
Matt. v. 25
; ;

e. g.

Rom.
;

xi. 34.

xiii.

28,

39

II Chron.
;

neighbor

/3)

sometimes nations
;

e. g.

an Ethiopian.
(I)

In like manner

41.

;io

debtor

Ephr.

II.

360,
e)

*o> forms

concretes of a) principally

masculine

offices

210
e. g.
ft

GENDER OF NOUNS.
II Sam. xviii.
;
ojxovojuios
;

1.

*o> a chiliarch
*
*
iv.

Luke
/ 2D>

xvi.

1.
;

(AjuO
I Pet. v.

Hub.
;

14.

pLoOD

ap^iepguj

Luke

xix. 2

/3)

abstracts ; e. g.
;

Luke

xvi. 2.

|2oA*r3 Aoj

o/xovofjLia.

In like manner

/)
41.

afcjij
- t

;
*.

a) concretes of
X

masculine
;

offices; e.g.
ii.

Luke
ii.

viii.

|AO13

**-> ap^itfuva/wyoff
;

John

8, 9;
;

Acts

29;

I Thess. iv. 16

**"
;

/3)

more

rarely abstracts
\

e.

g.

Matt, xxiii.
;

6.

Js/Qio *A-O
7

tfpwroxaSsfyi'a.
;

Sometimes
*

it

denotes
z

7)
the

<*
J

the extremity of a thing

J

e.

g.

pSOQ^flD
the

***}

orifice
;

of

stomach
#)

|l^l ^au) aperture of

denotes
;

mouth.

Finally
in

Aa2
is

a)

the place or receptacle,

e.

which a

thing

found or kept;

g.

Acts.

xii.

17.

WiraV A*o
Acts
xvii. 19.

prison;
"fcLij

Matt

xiv. 2.

"(Alk)

AaI3 grave;
xix. 29.

A*> judgment
;

hall;
_-*..-*

Luke
.

]Aii

A*>
;

oZwe ^ar-

efen

Heb.

ix. 4.
iv.

cense);
I.

II Tim.

(Snmo A^Ti censer (literally, house of in13 /3) countries, cities, etc. e.g. Assem.
;

169,B.7,

ll!&ooi>

A*o

the

Roman
^

dominions
'A
*

Michael.

Chr. 10.

UCD^
A*d

A*Jb

Persia.

REM.
and
]
f -

Here, however, do not belong

^_DGU AxS Mesopotamia,

signifies between.

forehead,

where

AxS

More

rarely
er.
..;>

we
-

find similar compositions with

*2>"\

father, and Vo} moth-

Of
T

the latter only occur

(JLO)

|So"| ^Ae

crown of

the head,

and

|^k)> P>D( hydraulics.

the Hebrew, uses
inhabitants
.

The Syriac also, though more rarely than the names of countries and cities for nations and
I I .7
;

e.

g.

Barh. 150, 12.

*1*\2)\ Africans

248, 6.

?.

A*ry*|

Tagritians.

70.
1.

Gender of Nouns.
take the
termination of

Nouns which

in the plural

GENDER OF NOUNS.
another gender
(

211
retain the gender of
is

44. Kern. 2

and

3),

the singular, and in this case respect

termination.

rarely

had

to the

Here belong
in
*'
r

masculines with a femi;

nine
*

termination
T

the
"r
t^
f

plural

1 tOOlS A.\

%'"

(j^0>

fZo>M
jQj|

place in which there

7-17

e. g.

Matt.
is

xii.

43.

no water;

I Cor. x. 9.
(

]2oOM

OfSo]

the serpents destroyed them;

;

f&ool ( from fcocu ) ]2ollL from 1LJ) Luke ii. 13 Matt, xxviii. 20; l2oaS (from laS) Luke xxi. 34;
}2b>ou (from 1>OU) Matt.
..

vii. 25, 26.,

;

etc.

b)

feminines

with a masculine termination

r

e. g.

John

xi. 35.

^iZf
;

wOlQlk)>

jiOO1 tears
xiii.
;

came

into the eyes of Jesus

(from ]LbL) Matt.

30;

flic (from

}2^b)

xxiv.35;
;

(from }AliD)
i%

x.

30

^xi

(from }ta) Acts xxiv. 17

(from

]Al)

xix. 34., etc.

2.

When

the abstract stands for the concrete,

its

or

when

the noun takes another than

proper signification, the

gender in both

cases,

is

regulated

by

the sense.
80.
g.

Concernto the lati.

ing the former of these cases,

ter belongs

]A^o

= Xoyos
it

compare
Christ
;

e.

John
;

4.

)ALk> IOOT ^oioAu)

(literally, beast

was

the

word; verse 14

or Jl
;

2cLi^I

of'tooth]

ovn'^pitfToj:,

Rev.
;

xiii. 1

xvi. 2,13;
;

xvii. 7, 8.

oai a myriad
334, 6
;

(of

men)

Acts xxi. 20

Barh.

65, 9, 10

395, 19.
;

Ua/,

in the plural,

= inhabiis

tants; Barh. 159, 10; 236, 8

548, 20., etc,

as of verbs,
e.

3.

In Syriac the neuter of nouns,

(

desig18.

nated by the feminine

66. 2
;

g.

Rom.
Assem.

vii.
I.

axov

in the plural,

218.

212

NUMBEK.
the old

B. 11. \LLfLo ]AcLiAl^ r A'tWf they despised ike new.

and

71.
1.

Number.

Some

nouns, particularly those which denote cohesive

materials (liquids, metals

and the

like),

form a plural only

when they may <>-

be conceived of as consisting of several

^0

parts; e.g. (Z^LOD barley, plur.

*..
.

(,100 barley-corns
;

in like
vi.

manner

|4** from
;

|A&* wheat
1>

Matt.

iii.

12

John
12.

13

..

I Cor. xv. 37
2.

and

"

ZiVft&er ;

I Cor.

iii.

lectives

Some nouns 44. Eem.

7

singular have a plural signification

7),

(col-

and then they take Ribui

;

6. 2.

As
iv.

such they are joined either with the plural

.<>?

e. g.

John

30.
lar
;

(JL)|
e. g.
;

QQ2UO
John

<Aere

came out people.

or with the singuAear

x. 3.
8.

01X0 fvvn*

|il ^Ae sAeep

Aw

verses 4
1.

REM.
occur,

As

collective

plural forms,

the following
;

sometimes

l^tQO

locust ; Michael. Chr.

63,11

79, 6.

l&lio (proper-

ly part) remainder,

members

; 102, 5, 8.

REM.
\ 0% % < ^f

2.

As
T^

pluralis excellentice, the Syriac has, merely by im7ff7

7
*.

itation of the

Hebrew
T

-iJ>{ or wiJOjj
szi'ore

p|

15^^

Michael. Chr. 30.

AJ09|O /

6y

the

Lord.

72. Apposition
1.

and Duplication of Nouns.

A noun

in apposition, usually includes a

more

accu-

rate definition or explanation of the previous noun, as for

APPOSITION AND DUPLICATION.

213

At example in the names of cities }A*^O, lAo>, -.V^ Assem. I. 349, 3. "jAoi lAi^^ UDQA^J] Antioch, a great
,

city.
its

The noun
;

in apposition takes the

f

number and
T

case of

subject
;

e. g.

Matt
7.

x. 3.

y^Vo ^Aio

Matthew

the

Pub-

lican

Barh. 32,

]\*>~> 1ov& \\~> IpAa

the
;

image
2.

of Baal (of

]lMn
naanite.

.)>]

a) god of the Babylonians ; 11, 8 nSv> ^.k) from Mekhisedeck (from

12,

the)

Ca-

REM.
principal

Sometimes the noun in apposition stands before the

noun;

e.

g.

Barh.
;

39,

11.

JOLBO^
>

VZAjj
i
.

.^mi
^'iVf 9

he took for wife Roxane

so too with nouns of weight, measure,

;

and
*(>
I

time, in the genitive

T

e.

g.

Rev.

vi. 6.

Jx>QLftJQ2 \L\\L

ACD?
2.

three

measures (of)

barley.

The

duplication of the
;

noun denotes
III. 154.

x>

a)
.

a great num.r

ber or quantity

e. g.

Ephr.

^jJQJ
;

^iO OlO A^l

9, 10.
f

^iJOJ ^ere are many

fish in the sea

b)
e. g.

the distributive
Matt. xx.
V
l>

sense expressed in English

^>

tip*

by
;

each,

by

;JL>
;
;

a penny each
424,
e. g.

Barh. 85,
*
*
*

6.

^i*>
;

^in

by heaps

10

165, 19.
vi. 7.
;

Especially in respect to

numbers

Mark

^_>Z ^->

two each
;

verse 40.

l]So }]io a hundred each

II Cor. xi. 24
(

c)
e. g.

it

forms a

circumlocution for
7.

all,

every
To-roug

58. B. 2)
Tit.
i.

Matt. xxiv.

]OO>
a
iroXiv

JaO^
;

xara

5.
e.

P-ij^
g.

pLir^^
ii.

a diversity, variety
;

Mark
Acts

17
46.
;

.^

various diseases

John
;

v.

x.

AV^
1.

with different tongues

13,

xxi.

34

xxv. 19

Assem.

A.

6.

v.

E.

*>Jk>
;

*>>o ^1?
A.
7. v.

l;So]io
;

discourses having various contents

191,

280.

214
B. 13. v.
e.g.

THE EMPHATIC STATE.

e )

a strengthening of the sense

77. B. b)

John

vi. 7.

VuXo

^*o very
The Emphatic

little

II Thess. iiL6.

73.
1.

iState.

The Emphatic
with
this
is

State expresses the

noun with the

that in
(

article

less definiteness,

from the

fact,

many
45.
1),

nouns

form

also denotes the absolute state

which
also
it

no longer

in use

e. g.

Matt. x.

9.

Sometimes
;

supplies the place of the indefinite article

>;^>^ ^^
; ix.
Vr>

e. g.

John

iv. 7.

"jZAjj vii.

22]

there
xi.

maria

Acts

37
e.

came a woman of /Sar even with H* masc. 24

;

fern,

appended

g.

Luke

xix.

12.

yt

a man.
REM.
which

From
r+*
is

this should

perhaps be distinguished the cases in

;

used numerically

e. g.

Eph.
r

iv. 6.

2.

Hence

to avoid

any ambiguity OO1

is

also

sometimes
it

joined with the emphatic state in order to designate

such.
r

as

It stands either before the

r

noun
7

e. g.

Matt. ix. 33.

\*'r**

OO1
it
;

.||*

vlLo
g.

the

dumb
v.

spake
9.

John
\
7

xviii.

16
?

or
the

fol-

lows

e.

John

OOl

f^yi ^Q-lMZj

man

became whole.
REM.
In the
follows
first T

case
;

the
g.

absolute

state

usually
* j

occurs,
r v

when
the

OOl

e.

Luke

xxii.

27.

.V)V)>

OOl

servant.

3.

Hence

also the

emphatic state with

;

> following is

used in the relation of genitive

e.

g.

Eev.

xviii.

2.

THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE.

215

devils

Uo> Voj IZjo&lo 1o->? l'io a and a hold of all unclean spirits.

habitation of

74.
1.

Tlie Construct /State

and

the Genitive.

In the Syriac also the Construct

state

serves to denote
in the

the relation of genitive,

plural of the masculine

more frequently, however,

and the singular of the feminine,

its

where

it

can at once be recognized by *

9 7
.

special

form

e.g.

Matt. xi. 12.

xiii.

^JLuCLt wLiOO* ^So

-

since the
;

48.

fo
I. 2,
;

-.^m
1.

the shores

of the sea
7

days of John ; Acts xxiv. 16

;

Assem.
yirsZ

B.

IrMO *

A^Z Ala wOl

*

year
;

37, 3, 4.

t* .mo'-Ao Av.^no

that is the thirty//ie

^
i/iez'r

rmcfe/ q/" /fe

cZerws

40, 4.

.ooiZaiifluOl

2o^^!D

deficient

faith,

literally,

the deficiency

of

their faith.

REM.
before
tlio

Yet the masculine singular of the noun occurs

gonitive
in
tlic

also

construct
the

state
;

c.

f*^< UlAO
on
the shore

<'

g. Matt.
^.
* r

x.
*

41.
tt
T

the

name of
;

Prophet

xiii. 2.

pL

^IfiD >\1

of the *ea
of

verse 50.
adjectives

In addition to the nouns which

(

supply

the place

69. 2

it
xiii. 1

also
;

occurs
iii.

in

Q..

miitst,

and

h<nnl,

etc.

e.g. Matt.

CJal.

19

IJarh.255.il.

^
04.

.ffi*

Q^2
f

in the interior
tin
1

of

the jmlace.

Here
and

belongs moreover the use

participles
(

construct state in adjectives

tlie
is

1. 1>),

followed
& * *

l.y

noun

\vith a preposition or
tlie

particle belonging to both,

relation
II
;

by which
.

denoted either

genitive
;

e.g.
fl.

Luke
" fi

i.

'js.

]m An^^
>

Messed of (among) women

;

Tim.

iii.

lAyi'A -.*"^*^"
r
*

shires of jxtssion

Tim.

i.

10.

\\

\yA <-*r^^

violator of

an oath

or

a more accurate

216
definition
.

THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE.

of the
7

"7 I '

adjective

or

participle;

e.g.

Luke

i.

7,

18.

ornAVo^.o
^
'
*k

7
i <

tjJj..|ID ^* x
*">!

far advanced

in their years ;
;

Rev.

xiv. 4.

|i)|
2.

r^n

redeemed from the earth

is
;

Acts, xxiii. 23.

Far more usual

a)

the connection of the emphatic

-

state as
e. g.

nomen

regens,
t> ..

with a following
o

before the genitive

Matt. x.

5.

fol

>

kjo|>
at the
the

into the

way

of the Gentiks ;
;

verse 15.
xii.

fcjjj

]LOQ^JD

day of Judgment
;
0*m
7

verse 42;

42.

jiiQaZj
;

IA^VV>
;

queen of the south

47.

** *

xiii. 11,

45;
o^

xxiii.

35

xxiv. 3

John

viii.

|Ol-^> (Jk) <Ae

w;orc?

^oc?

or

genitive

b) with a pleonastic suffix e. 55. B. 2 ) following, (

;

referring to
g.

the
8.

Matt.

xii.

}AQ> OTjSo Lord of the Sabbath; xi.2. f IMUL*LO> ^oiOpdl * f t* ^ i the work of the Messiah xii. 40. Pk>|> Oli^2 in the
'
'

heart of the

earth.
>

REM.
construct -x *f

Rarely, and chiefly in foreign words,

state
y
>

stands after the

before

the

genitive

e.

g.

Matt.

xiii.

22.
23.

(>Zoi>

-* Vft

^e

deceitfulness

of

riches ;

John

x.

.nV)>\> l<l&fiol the porch of Solomon. But it is commonly used when one or more words are interposed between the nomen
regens and the genitive
the
;

e.g.

Barh. 421.13,20.
;

^aL>o]?
when
I.

OO1 1>2j
gen21.

region,

that

is

of Jerusalem
other
;

or

several

itives

follow

each

e.

g.

Assem.

83,

B.

the convent

desert ; Barh. 81, 2.

of the Mother of God, of the Syrians in the Scythian The nomen regens is sometimes wanting, and
is

the genitive
J <

then to be distinguished by

>

e.

g.

Rom.

xiv. 8.

v t^Dj
;

the

Lords are we

Matt.

xxii. 21.

Sometimes

is

wanting when the noun forms an i

genitive
e.

g. Matt. xii. 39.

|*">1 ^JCLa? OIL] the sign of Jonah

the

with apposition " f "tV

a preceding

the propJiet.

>

stands before proper nouns, especially

names

THE CONSTRUCT STATE A$D THE GENITIVE.

of countries and
definite designation
cities,
;

217
more de
A^*~>

when they thereby

Matt.
ii.

acquire a

e.g.

1, 0.

f>OOL> ^QjjJL

Bethlehem in Judea.
scriptions of
plies
l'

In some instances, especially in the super;

some Psalms

e.

g.

Ps.

iv, v, vi,
;

^
the)

the place of j;

"t

HH-^
;

%** * pLO>Q2)

very rarely elsewhere

e.g.

(^ auctoris) supBarh. 17, 4.

1.

the deliverance

of the

(i.e.

by

Lord ; Assem.
is

346, A. 25, 26.

cated
e.g.

So too with

^O, when

origin or descent

indi-

Barh. 372, 16.

cities

he took fifty

of the

JjJvJ^S ^So lAj_^ib ^.**n/ .^rni Franks ; or when there is indicati-1

:i

choice or selection from several;

e.g.

271,

1.

^
IM-\*ffi

one of his slaves ;

270,18.

i*29O

^lo

many of

tin

Turks.
3.

The

genitive
22.
P

is

sometimes to be understood objectively;

faith of(\.
(i.

e.g.

Markxi.
ii.

]AoiScuoi loi^j *
P

e.

in)

God

John
vii.

17.

^Ajui? OUl^
xi.

the zeal
T
f

of

e.for)
the

t/iine

house;

13

Hebr.

26.

|i,V)>

01,01*4

reproach of

Christ

(i.e.

that attached to him).

X
k
-j

REM.
Isa. xvii. 2.

Other turns of expression imitating the Hebrew are

i-kAO;!)

(j)OO

cities

of (about) Aroer
the

Exod.xxii.il.
Ez.

an oath of
iniquity of

(by)

Lord
;

xxxv.

5.

(at) their

downfall
object

Isa.liv.9., etc.

Not

unfrequently

is

this

genitive

of the

connected with the

is

of the verb, from which the nomen regens preposition

e. g.

derived

Barh. 53,
1.

1&.

^SOD> ]2aiiaoi

the faith in

our Lord

Assem.

347,20.

4. Sometimes, especially when geographical references are made, the genitive occurs (as in English) where apposition e. g. Acts vii. 40. would be more strictly correct
;
i*
ft

_9

.7

li^-Loj |l>| ^S>o

from

die

land of E<jypt

xx. 6

Rom.

xi.

Barh. 114, 13.

^JnK? ]yQ^

o&al

the

whole mountain

of Lebanon.

218
5.

DESIGNATION AND USE OF THE OTHER CASES.

Standing after adjectives, the genitive
to define
*
7

is

often used

merely *
p
t

them more
P

(L >j,n
Acts
vii. 51.

>O

(1
+ \PP

S>
.

-.
7 i
*

.m*. o|
7

accurately; e.g.
7

Luke

xxiv. 25.
;

-*P

UrO

an

_P

/oofo
?/e stiff

and slow of heart

;

O|

necked

Cant.

ii.

5.

]Akl*ji

2oL^D

sick for love.

REM.
adjective;
xxi. 6
(

Sometimes a noun in the genitive takes the place of an

9

e.g.
54.

John,
2.

xviii. 10.
;

|*

^> Vn% OU>|

>

Ais

ri^^ eor;
e.

Rem.)
%'

and
i
'

vice versa the

nomen
John

regens ;
ii.

g.

Luke
first

iv.

25.

y'.\?

|A^:sD>| *^<\tCD *oXXa

^p

ai

12.

In the

case the Philoxenian translation uses, instead of

>,

the explanae.

tory 0(71

|A.
it

and wOl, equivalent to that is, namely ; . ^n. ^01 and > is to be understood as a
prepositions
1

g.

relative,
I.

OU/} when

follows

with
7

suflSxes

e.

&**.* B.
3.

g.

Assem.

30,

17.

|2>OOCQu)|>

^OOlSfll

wtM

(them) the bishops.

Compare

55.

75.
1.

Designation and Use oftiie other Cases.

The

dative and accusative have

for their

common
;

sign,

which may be omitted before the accusative

4.

e. g.

Matt. xvii.
cles ;

^iSSflV) A^Z

.^*

let

us make three taberna-

Barh. 60, 9.NQ i n] \>i V*jZ>o>9 he raised a great perse-

cution.

No

difficulty

is

thereby occasioned even

;

when
21.

the

two

cases

stand

together

e.

g.
;

Acts
xx. 32.

xiii.

V^Q]A^ .OO& *20U he gave them Saul

REM. With verbs having a double accusative ( 67. I. away in both cases. The same is also to be recognized
ceding pleonastic
suffix

2)

falls

in the pre-

to

the verb

55.

B.

I)

Usually

DESIGNATION AND USE OF THE OTHER CASES.

219
;

^
e.

fiia

)
;

stands

before the

noun

in

the emphatic state

-,

g. Barh. 14, 9

or before proper names, 11, 20.

|QJ-_lA OILS

he built Nineveh.
F)j$

For
I.

this, in

Gen.i.

3,

the Peshito has

Al

=
ii.

(compare Ephr.
iii.

116, D), which moreover occurs in

Eccl.

17

iv. 1

viii. 9,

17

Cant.

iii.

viii. 4.

2.

The
;

accusative

is

also used adverbially,

(

and then de;

notes
vii.

a) direction towards a place

;

67.

I.

b)

e.

g.

John

14,35; viii.14; xviii.3

it

Barh.58, 18,19; b) in indicating

time
6.

denotes
X
T

^-kiocu

_A|
;

a) the question,

How

long ? e.g. Barh.7,5,

;

l^lo fool

the

rain continued forty days

they
;

3, 15, 16.

,_*J-

l]k> ^oio!Ll O^a|2l

24, 7,
f

mourned for him

6,

a hundred years
18,

85, 19,
i.

20

195,
"

Assem.I.
]o<JI
'

A.1
to

/3)

When

Luke

59.
;

jliiZ?
s

jioll
:

it

came

pass on
night
;

the eighth
c)

day

Ps.

i.

2.

.Wr> ]wr>* |
}ooi
179,

5y
;

day and

in reference to measure
;

and weight

How

long ?

How
it

high f etc.
three
* X
- f .

e. g.

Barh. 38, 19.

long;
20,

^jf
13.

ivas

O>|

_
he

cubits t
the

6;

aAa
was

h>-^^to,

snow lay four fingers deep;

e. g.

d) concerning, in relation

as

to ;

Barh. 37,16.

^^
iaij
38, 4;

beautiful as

to

form

17.

he had small eyes

and a small mouth ;

;

Assem.
REM.
T

I.

74,

A. 30

77,

A. 22

86,

A.

25.

In indicating time,
.

How

old ?

is

;>

or

L\Z

with the addition of the years

fifty years old
;

commonly expressed by e. g. John viii. 57.

;

Barh.

3, 20.

3.

Derivative nouns also take the accusative instead of

;

the genitive of their verbs, viz.

a) participial forms;

Heb.

220
xii. 2.

THE CASE ABSOLUTE.

^mVft.rriV iJoSo.. the finisher of our faith; James b) infinitive forms ; e.g. Kirsch.Chr.136,1. Bl
the conquest

iv.6

of Constantinople.
;

4.
e.g.

The vocative is distinguishable in part by its connection

Matt. xxvi. 39, 42.
;

]-^*^>
;

/|
-

+*>]
9

my

Father
;

if it be

possibk
,
11.

Eom.
99

viii.

15

-J

partly
;

by

O*),

prefixed

e.

g.
;

Eom.

1.

fJ^D

of

man

verse 3

I Tim. vi. 11

James

v. 1.

EEM.

The Philoxenian

translation

imitates in
;

Greek nouns the

e.

vocative termination

belonging to that language

0so'<piXs
;

g.

Luke

i.

3,

and Acts
5.

i.

1.

]llaof2 o]' w
is

Tim.

vi.20.

Finally the ablative

n

distinguishable

by the

preposi-

tions, *o, ^Lo, ^Ql,

etc..

prefixed.
is

REM.
ner
;

Time,
g.
I.

When
viii.

? *

e.

Gen.

11.

j t* [m^Dy \*-^ a ^ eventide

p

frequently expressed in a similar

;

man9
;

Prov.

vii.

Assem.

37, A. 11.

76.

The Case

Absolute.

By the case absolute is meant a noun, which, at the beginning of a sentence, by itself and without connection with what follows, forms a clause, and is usually to be explained

by supplying,
especially
;

as

to,

concerning,

and the

like.

Here

belong
1.

the Nominative absolute, which

7
>(

a)
e.

either forms the

subject of

the following clause

.

g.

Gen.

xxii. 24.

Lj^jkO

_ OlAoojjO

*,

and

his concubine

she also bore ;

THE CASE ABSOLUTE.

or
6) is to

221

be rendered by an oblique

case,

which a
;

suffix

to the
itive
.

noun in the clause following shows

e.g.
r

to be

a)

a gen-

Ephr.

I.

242, E.

or,a>> ]*^<jv> ]ocnZ

4

p ]ju]
man a

(At^Nn
blemish
;

if there be
I.

found on the skin of the body of a

Matt.
;

110,

iii.

or the suffix to the prepo;

sition indicates it as
"joi-ls,

/3)

a dative

e.
to

g.

I Cor.
is

vii. 7.

,-lo

OlA |^<TL_ jAaoiQiD .^iVn

;
f

each one

given a

gift from

God

Acts xv. 21
. 7

y)
X

an accusative ;
'lV
(J

223, F.

wtouooi
befallen
*

tilo

_LM ,-iA ^ ^ r;
(

* *

e. g.
tt-e

Ephr.I.

__

UoSD

ibuno not

what has
*)
*

Moses
9

67. 1.

an
\

ablative (with a following

r

oio (001 A^| jAiiN^ jcooSoj m gate} |Aa4> shadow of the good things to come ; Ephr.
oiilb
o/"

.?.

.x

Rem.) Ps. Ixxiv. 17; and ^SD) e.g. Heb. x. 1.

c.
;

0.

//

//"

is

the

I.

237, A.

anything leavened and of honey, Lord.

2.

briny ye

no gift

to

the

The
"\\Q

accusative

absolute;

e.

g.

Gen.

xlvii.

21.

|;al
he
if)

^Lo <0)f ^jai ]Soilo

city to the other.

the people led

he (literally led

from one
Cfases

3.

with

prepositions

e.

g.

Gen.

ii.

17.

o/" <^e

/ree

of

the

knowledge of good and

evil

(of it) shaft

thou not

eat.

REM.
absolute
>

Sometimes, instead of the

is

suffix,
vi.

the
7

preceding noun
^
1 m

repeated
.

e.

g.

Esth.

9.
let

K*"\t^ ^\
be clothed ;

(;*^.i.^ fcjtOIQa i*">\1O as for the

man

thus

him

likewise

wth

the pronoun

e.

g. Jer. xxvii. 8.

222

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

77.

Comparison of
A.

Adjectives.

The Comparative.
usually expressed

The comparative *
jective,with^Lo

is

by

the simple ad-

=prce

following and before the object com53.

pared
f

e. g.

John

viii.

.obV ^
11
;

fcol Ajf a> Ajf "

iOOl^j
31
;

art thou, then, greater than our father

Abraham

vii.

xiii.

16; xiv. 12

xix.

Assem.
is

I.

378, 19.
to

^of
the

]An\So ^Lo w_l

queen
7
i
|

J" V Y she was a LOOl PLI)}

372,

3.

JL my v. E Barh.
;

mother

dearer

me than

82, 20.

f^a.I

cubit taller than

any

.6ob ^man.
or

REM.

Besides

^Lo,
is

sometimes also

Q4 very,

i^A* more,

equivalent to
the meaning
*
>

by far,
;

added

to the adjective in order to strengthen

J-iA^

e.

g.

Acts xx. 35.

JDOT-J p-^U *JiO1CLDa^

*Ofni>
Heb.
iii.

(Ju|
3
;

^Ghappier by far is he who gives than he who receives; iv. 12. The simple adjective is used as a comparative
age of two persons
;

in stating the

e.

g.

Kz. xvi.

61.

A^ifiQJ)
sisters,

loQ^l^O
the elder

]A.^rA
the

wiS^CLMJ] since
;

have received thy

and

younger

Barh. 27,
to

6, 7.

Rarely

after the

He-

brew idiom, are we obliged

from the context
e. g.
;

supply the comparative adjective

*

e.

g.

Job

xi.
1<s

17;

more frequent
"\\
i

is

^Lo

too ;

Deut. xiv. 24.

V'1
an

-/

JOI

*" the

way

is too
e. g.

great

for
iv.

thee ; or before
P
-

13.

innV>\

infinitive * p 7

with ^ = than
greater than that

that ;
it

Gen.

^Lo

|o5

can be forgiven.
;

This construction with

^So

occurs also with verbs of quality

e.

g.

Lam.

iv. 7.

]*"^T VSP
is

oio^O

U^2
The

^So QjO>

they are purer

less,

than snow and whiter than milk.

respect to numbers,

adverbial

more or

in

expressed by
3.

^D

J^A*andJu^S;

Barh.

156, 2

Assem. L 414,

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

223

The Superlative.

The Superlative is expressed ; a) by the positive, with the noun following in the genitive plural ; e.g. I Cor. xv.9.

]>*\>
the least

.OOlidll

the least
e.

of

the Apostles

or with *Q

in-

stead of the genitive;

g. Matt.ii.6.

among

tiie

(princes) towns in
;

}>oou> ]^V<^>"> 1r*^ Judah ; or simply by

%* *
Ir**

the emphatic state

85, 7.

e.g.
1

Matt. v.19.

the k<*st

Barh.

llS^il? lta>
;

LL&
is

J&Q'J fame,
335,
;

the greatest city

of Italy
or

Assem.

1.
*

323,
..-

A. 20;
eXa^irfTa

A.

14. v.

in the

plural, ICor.vi.2.

\OfQy

when a

preference

II Pet.i.4. (2>O> ntyitfragiven to one individual over a

;

^k> and a following plural Ephr.I. 204, C. ^0*^5 ^\3 ,-& lo> the greatest of all b) by doubling the adjective or noun, so that the

whole

species,

by

^a

e. g.

evils ;

latter

stands in the relation of genitive in the plural e.g.Gen.ix.25. * * .*... ? * _ , *"* v r ,^1 /A-- meanest slave ; Exod.xxvi.33. M->ao
;

^*

the holy of holies,

i.

e.

the holiest
the

place

Num.

iii.

32

^o^o
Bar h.

530,

3, 4.

iest king',

].3-\to yi.A-V) king of kings, *L and before the adjective juA* c) by

i.e.

the might;

e. g.
;

Rev. xviii. 12. Barh. 87, 3.

REM.
^To

|;nV> ^AJt ]m*n

the

most precious wood

also

denote the superlative, use

e.g.

is

made

of the words

*u> and l;ib;

physician
;

Barh. 170, 13. ^Loso}' *m^9 the most excellent

1.

Assem.
like the

335,

B. 4,
-,

5.
tt

(Sa*9> j^O
;

the

most

mem'

ful

more

Hebrew, by J01_^\
i.e.

e.

g.

Ps. xxxvi. 6.

(JQ^

}(3l-^v the

mountains of God,
is

the greatest mountains.

Z
r

In verbs,

a strengthening

denoted by

* .1

CD

much
;

e.g.

Barh. 56, 11.

(

wwJi>Z] -'
c.
(3)
;

.*

he was
;

much
135,

disquieted
1.

or,

by

2> many

67.1.

5 e.g. Barh. 6,
,

To be noted
(is

also are such forms ju

literally,

whose wisdom

known) for

the ivisest.

224

CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS.

78.

Construction of Numerals

50).

A.

Cardinal Numbers.

The cardinals from three upwards, are connected with nouns in the following manner a) the object numbered pre;

cedes the emphatic state plural

three

e.g.

Luke

i.56.

}A^Z

\+*r-*

months
;

Barh. 133,

6.

^*Z>2o

^,m\
;

\LL

twenty-two
years;
7
.

years or b}
T..
-h

4, 5.
it
.
r,

V>mO ^_2p>D f^l* two hundred and five

e.

follows in the absolute state

g.

ii*.

Matt. x. 29.

^*r2)*^*LjL two /sparrows; xiv. 20. ^1^200 ;&!> twelve baskets ; John v. 5 Acts xx. 3 Barh. 135, 10. REM. Exceptions to this rule, however, occur, the object numbered standing after the number in the emphatic state e. g. Barh.
;

160,17.
164, 4
;

Ir^l v '^^
or
;

*.!

V)Z
iv.

ei(jht

thousand slaves
e o

;
>

121,8;

the cardinal, though rarely, stands as nomen regens in

i
7

the construct state

(literally,

e.

g.

Matt.

25.

jAl

|V)

;fflS ten
P

^e

few

o/ the

cities).

Some nouns, such

;

as pCQ-i,
I.

also follow

the numeral in the singular

e.

g.

Assem.

213, A. 21,

22.

]Vnn

,^^0

^Vf>

r^?

^7^

when

fifty-one

days had pas-

sed; Barh. 10,16. Concerning the designation of age

by pD and Z^Q
;

comp.
50,13
7
;

75.2.

Rem.; Assem.I. 31,21

7

377, 1

Ephr.I.195,D
Barh.
5, 12.

Barh.

179,4; with the omission of

For the one hundred and sixty-five years old. combination of numerals without any numbered object, compare 50; in respect to which it is to be noticed that, contrary to the He brew usage the smaller numbers follow the larger ; e. g. Num. iv. 43 1 Kings v. 11. Concerning suffixes to cardinal numbers, see
;

mSQj^O

_AO

^1

]]&}

^)

46. 2. b.

Rem.

B.
1.

Ordinal Numbers.
,..
r
r

Ordinals are connected like adjectives with their nouns

in the

same number and case

e. g.

Matt. xiv. 25.

CONSTRUCTION OK NUMERALS.

225
Rev.
iv.

]A.v.A; i n
vi. 9.

the fourth

watch of the night

;

]IatV)>. ]L^4

the fifth seal

verse 12

xvii. 11.

2. The cardinal numbers also supply the place of ordinals as follows ; a) the units, especially in designating time ; a) with the noun standing before the numeral in the emphatic

state plural

hour
state

hour
b)

e. g. John xix. 14. A* ^*\ about the sixt/i with the noun after the numeral, in the absolute ^ v * A* e. g. John iv. 6. woolAa| it was the sixth v verse 52 Acts iii. 1 x. 9, 30 but more especially ;
;

p*

/3)

in

numbers above ten with the noun preceding

;

in the

construct state
teenth year ;

e.g.

Luke
2,

iii.

1.

^,mv<^. Aj^o
r

in the fif-

in the

Assem. I. one hundred and

;

A.

1. 2,

v.E.
;

|ioikib
A.

"j^D

AlAO

seventeenth year
;

388, 3

389,
state

1, 3, 5;
;

407, 10

or with

17. B. 19 ; p. 3, > following in the

emphatic

e.g.

Barh.

4, 16.

]vAs> ]a&> "jAris

c)

in the

year of t/ie world one thousand ; or

cardinals to ordinals
;

the

>

prefixed raises the

e.

g. Matt. xxii. 26.

;

^-o^? tM second;

VAlZj
the

the third

verse 39

Luke

xii.

38.

AX2

of ^LiL*
;

second or the third ; especially in designating the years of the reign of a sovereign; e. g. Barh. 10, 14; 11, 1
86,
11.

object
plural
i/car;
.-.

REM. Sometimes also, in accordance with Hebrew usage, the numbered is repeated after the numeral in the absolute state
..x
;

. .

e.g.

Gen.

fii.ll.

i^*** |(SO

'A**** A AlAO m
the tenth

the six

hundredth
;

ji

and the years of the reign are given with

Barh. 19,
9.

^-J
>

with a suffix

%.

rftCAi^> i n Ol^jj

year of hit reign ;

<>0, 8.
i

In giving the days of the month,

either

without

r'j)oated after the numeral, before the

(

A.s -m. I. .2, B. 12. v. E. ]|m \ASAa on the 13th of Ni^"^ mn(Aprii); 272,15.31 399,19,20; 407,8,9; or, reversely, after the name of the month, before the numeral following it; e. g. 397, 13.
;

name

of the

month

e. g.

Oio

)iAo

-VM ^t>2

on the 9th of June

or

with

226
before
>

KELATIONS OF NUMBERS.
the numeral and the
;

name

of the

month which

follows with

repeated

e.

g.

398,

7. ;

^Qi> oJ^>.2 ^JfOllO

274,30;
or
reversely, so

]->
that
;

on the 27th of December

stands after the
14.

name

of the month, before the numeral

e.

g.

399,

Oia ^-V&LO
Matt, xxviii.
I. 2,

gust.
e.g.

cm the 22nd of Au<--> This takes place even in designating the days of the week ;
v^)
* 1.
J

y>Ox2
,-**

++*Z}

*">*">
|

the first

day of

the weelc ;

John

xx.

19; A.ssem.

B. 12.

v.

E!

C. 1. Distributives

Other Relations of Numbers.

are formed
;

a)

by doubling
40
;

the cardinal
;

numbers

72. 2. b)

e.

g.

Mark

vi.

Barh. 19, 14

b)

sometimes by circumlocution by means of

41, 16. yl* ^-i>Z
2.

^3

e.

g.

Barh.

^yl two each ;

in

17.

answer to the question, How many times f (Multiplicatives) a) by ,-** and 2 before a cardinal number following, which more 'clearly defines it
Numerical adverbs ; a)
;

e.g.
),

Gen.

iv. 15.

j\*^n
*

,-M seven-fold;
/3)

Luke

viii.8;

without

Jer. xvii.18.

^L
T

r** twofold ;
(i.e.

by

the simple numeral

with JO, Luke xix.8. |Loi^i

to the question
nal, lish
;

How often ?
time,

]ail) fourfold; b) in answer )with the signification of a cardiI

by means of ^QJ
e. g.
;

plural ^il**>1 times,

as in

II Cor.

xi. 24, 25.

^}
Luke

Vr** once ;

^-ii
John

Eng.</>!
38
;

five times

Matt,

xviii.

22

xvii.

xiii

by I^ISI plural fAiai, Assscm. 1. 484, 27, 30; sometimes more rarely by time, plural ^*J A, Barh. 10, 19 by

^
>,

li)ol
ber
?

ivay,

or merely
iv.

e. g."

Gen.

24

by the feminine of the ordinal numin an ordinal signification, in ft)

such a manner
with

that either

U^l

of the cardinal
;

precedes

and

is

repeated after it in the plural

e.g.

A\Z>

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH ADJECTIVES.

iai' (also elliptically

227

AlZ> U^>1 or

^laf

AJiZj) for the

e. g.

third time

or

by adverbs of the ordinals

the

in 2o,

Jude,

verse 12.
3.

2.QL*lifor

second time.
a)

Fractions are represented

;

by

special forms derived

7.

from the cardinal numbers

third; vi. 8.

e. g.

Rev. via.
;

]ALoZ

one-

)l2O> one fourth; Heb. vii.2

b)
;

by circumloEphr. 1.204,

cution

e.g. 2.

Rev. xi.13. IJmL ^So H* one-tenth

Ez. v.

<OD

AlZ

,-So

1^.

79.

Connection of the
is

Noun

urith Adjectives.

The

adjective

related to the

noun

either as epithet or

predicate. I. As epithet

it

follows the
1.

noun
poi

in the

same gender and

high mountain
;

number

e. g.

Matt. xvii.

]ia/m

xvi. 4. iZj^ytO \
ation
;

lAaO lAo;* *
..

xi.

8.

a wicked and adulterous gener*..r r I y, PLI^I |A**J soft raiment ; John xi. 47.
miracles.
;

1&*_IcD l2oZ|
to

wowy

The same

is

true in respect
JJoi fo>^ this

pronouns and

participles
;

e. g.

Matt. xv. 8.
8.

peopk ; verse 12
door.

xix. 1

Rev.

iii.

V*-^2>

K'2 an
by the

open
ad-

Collectives in the singular

;

are followed
I.

jective in the plural

P
*.

e. g.

Assem.

78,

A.

4.

*^J

ILQI

jcboSOJ the people who hold to the law ; so also with nouns in the plural having a singular signification e. g. John vii.
;

38.

**

1*^

living water

Heb.

x.

24
T

or in the singular
.

T
//*

ad sensura ; e. g. Num. which was spread out.

REM.
^

iv. 5.

CLa^)> (iiZ *xaf

veu/

The pronoun
I
////.

frequently

rnmcs
:

first

e. g.

John

xi.

47.

man

Matt,

xviii. 1

xvii. 18.

Adjectives arc also used

228

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH ADJECTIVES.

titles; e.g.

emphatically ,especially in

Assem.l.25,A.l4.

w;iD

^Oa;/) the pious Ephraem; 117,B.23.^.1**O w;SD l-pO the holy John; 286, A. 1. If an adjective is appended to the demonstrative pronoun for the sake of more particular designation, the pronoun e. g. usually stands between the noun and the adjective Ephr. 1.
;

124,E.
12V,
er.

UiDpOO

1,-ftJBJ

OO1 }JO1OJ

this

light first spread abroad]

this great teach;

D;

or before both, 132, F.

(as a
* *

]s& ]l^\Sn OO1

^a occurs
o

noun) exclusively before the noun

^
this

e.g.

Matt.

*y*/>.

xv. 13.

1,-if

|A)^J ^\D

55.B. 2.Rem.).
0"

whole planting, (with suffix, compare word, generally a particle, sometimes stands be* IT*
;

tween the noun and the adjective

.
.

e.

g.

Acts

xvii. 20.

;_*...

|J_Lo

\^

But very rarely the adjective follA-ifDQJ strange words indeed. lows in a gender different from that required by the noun ; e. g.
Barh. 454, 18.

with nouns of the

}*JrO ]^> (fern. ^AajfO) the common gender, the gender of

is

holy

cloister.

Or

several adjectives
g.

following one after the other, 61. 1, 2.

2.

interchanged

e.

Michael. Chr.

As

predicate (with the substantive verb expressed or to

be supplied) the adjective precedes the noun, which follows in the absolute state, or with a suffix e. g. Mark xv. 23.
"A
*

pQSo
28.

**\!c7 OLD -'A*f*

s
ff

'i'

I'riQj^

wine with which myrrh was mingled

verse 26.

]A^1 Zooi "

r

^uAo
^'
\

as reason
is

was written

Matt.xv.

*A3^.QlSaol ^oi
;

great

thy faith.

In like manner
is

the pronoun
the

e. g.

Mark

xv. 26. ]I>6ou> ]n\V> aiCT thai

ii.

King of

the

Jews; Luke

12. 12]

o:A

1>OT that shall fa

for you the sign.

REM.
viz.:

Sometimes the
several

adjective, as

predicate, follows
%

the noun,
signiX
*

when

words follow which define more closely the

Of

*P.
1

fication of the adjective

e.

g.

Gen.

xix. 20.
to flee
e.

(*"^;Q |>O1
unto
;

A^jo
*">

^oAL
bial idea
T
e

O;SV)^> i^OI
is

this city is

nigh
;

or an adverv^

embraced
*

in the preposition
i.

g.

Gen

xxix. 7.

.V

OCU

it is

yet high day,

e.

high in the day.

Sometimes

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.

the adjective
e.g.

229
noun
;

singular, as predicate, stands before the plural

Barb. 542, 14, 15.

;

]]Lo

OlO *CuLD

to

that

same were

the
;

words written
e.g.

or

it

follow* a plural, being

itself in

the singular

.Win.

I.

21,5, G.

OlL

n\
Rev.

f^i-JkioiO

l^U.'

.ODD songs and

hymns

were composed by him.

;

But

especially the adjective in the

xix. 1.
4.

plural follows collectives

e.

g.
;

^to]>

]^*>.^CD
is

]^*^
also

a great multitude, who said

expressed by a noun
;

Barh. 88,
Cor.
v.
xii.

The predicate

e. g. I ;

27.

|..^r>% tOAj] O1^2>

ye are the body of Christ

Eph.

30.

3. When several nouns of different genders are connected, the adjective as epithet and predicate, usually conforms to

the masculine
' * f (CTlJ^v

abeth

Mcia vs. cn ZAj1o VP1 e.g. Luke i. 5, 6. xxrfc ..r f and his wife ElizZachanas OOO1 .O(7L)Z. _kU>1 zOfO Barh. 106,9. both feared God ; verses 6,7
; (
;

REM.
2,

Concerning the neuter the same rules prevail as

70. 3
;

in

66.

and

e.g.

Assem.
;

I.

36, 6.
I.

^uta> ^Ol
;

that which hat

been written; 372, 19 he did that which was

Ephr.

241,B

Barh.24, 18.

evil.

80.

Connection of the
in

Noun

with the Verb.

to the subject;
refer-

The Verb conforms

but to this there are
varielate generis

number and gender

many exceptions, which may be

4.

red to the following cases.

et

Compare Agrell Comment, de

numeriin LL.OO. Lundce, 1815,

A.

In regard

to

Number.

Here it should be remarked That collectives or those nouns which are regarded as such,are connected with plural verbs. Here belong, U^M; e.g.
:

1.

Barh. 94, 10.

o!iaV JX>z&

]Iio6>j

]]^.>1 the

Roman army

230

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.

;

proceeded towards Persia

96, 9

vJD

e. g.

Acts xxvi. 13.

;

OO01

>V)S

^a

all
,

who were with me ; Michael. Chr. 15,5

t

and its compounds, u So; e.g. Assem.I.39,3

all

5. ooAo) *Ao

wrote

^VlSo
**]
""

e.g.Michael.Chr.14,15. OjSo|>
*

^VlVa

all

who

said

^O;
i

e.g.Barh.277,6. oioiZ .alSo* that every

*

one wondered; alsojAia; e.g.Lukexxiii.l.^ooialS Olio nVnr>

the

iP

**.

whole multitude arose;

;

ft.. aa>;e.g.Bajh.422,10.]),iaco . o y ^\ \^

o2j

a
v.

great multitude came

3.

Assem.I. 386,15,16; (iQl;

^_fciO>
;

e.g.

John

loupj 1T-y^ Uo^ OOO1

227,8; 312,7;
the others fled

^k^O12
I.

in these
;

(pools)

fay a great multitude of invalids

Assem.

483, 19

Barh.

95,6,7;

la-,*'; e.g.

Barh.211,8.

o^i ]L^
;

>p;\Sn^

construction are
e.g.
*
v

; According to the same 342, 19. names of places put for their inhabitants VrSooi cloister; Assem.1.411, Note B. 4 6. ];

when
REM.

the

monks saw him.

also are found with the verb singular
its
;

The same nouns

;

e.g. e.g.

ILj^, Barh.551, 13
309,14;

^iT, 288,12, and

314,2
;

compounds,
'l

,\n

kV)S^;
^
;

e.g.
9 f

Ju]* ^!b or

V);e.g.373,l;alsofrid3;

e.g.Acts xiv.4
r
.." .

pill; e.g.Acts v.26;Barh. 301,9,10.

e. g.
"

In like manner,

abstract feminines occur for concretes;

.

]2ciaj), Barh. 490, 18.

for prisoner;
;

Ao^l (QJU| Ol^D

490, A. 31
;

tf

all

men fled ; (AjL^l*

^"4

Assem.

1.

lAl^fSo

for inhabitants] e.g.Acts xiii.44

}2.fL for con-

gregation; e.g.ICor.xiv.23. Still more remarkable is the construction of these nouns in one and the same period with a singular and plural verb
;

e.g.

]L-M, Barh.212,1.
took

aOIO^ilo
him

)]JUM
."

^OldSl
.
*."

^.ii

an army conquered him and

4
;

captive ; *JLJ( ^oJD e.g. 388,3,

8.

]iQl;
2.

e.g.

Acts

xxi.

36

Barh. 371,

tion

Nouns with a plural form having 44. Eem. 6 ), are either ( a)

;

a singular significain respect to form

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.

'

231

connected with the plural verb;

18.
e.g.
t
-

e.
;

g.

|2>|,

II Cor.
;

iii.

IA*^,I ^240 with uncovered face ^ T

-

Barh. 201, 1
*

\^'t',

John iii. 15. ^Q\i^> PLM

v.26; Barh.219,12
p..
;

O" ^OOOU he shall have eternal

John
*

+.

life ;

JliD; e.g.
_0
r

v.7.

Q^fZZf
;

|itf 7, 8,
;

]l^(o when the water was troubled; Barh. 194, 3

r i f
1
'

268,

*
o-Jpavoj

12; and]

iV);e.g.Mark
%
P.

>.

f^io* ao>Aco|
J

**

typ*Mi
;

James

v. 18.

1^^

CIQOL* l^io*

oupavo^ Cerov g&jxev

or b)

more
* *l

to signification, they are connected rarely, in respect

with the singular verb

i>Z
Zt^
;

<7i

vai'i

was rent

Tl'^*^ John looi PA>* OlO

;

e.

g.

Luke

xxiii. 45.
*** '

**ia1
i?i

.f

i.

4.

Am ^OA
TU>

rr _

Num.
^Ar
;

xxxiii. 14.

].i
*p

Sr>
r

^..SoZ |ooi *"

f f

A^ iAere teas

.7

t^ater

Luke

iii.

21. |^SQ
iii.

^.AaZ|

^Ae

heaven was open-

ed; as feminine, II Petr.

cupavoi
i)<fo.v

5.

Ja-rD

^Lc>

Zooi ouAit V*^2*

sWaXai

Barh. 228, 10.

3.

lar

A*)
X

With the noun plural also is connected the verb singua) a) when the verb preceding is use I impersonally rnr \v ^\ and Ax^; c. g. John vi. 9. t^ru -^r> ;

>

Y"'

^_iJQJ ^iJLO
xxi.
;

|,-\CO>

he has five barley-looses

;

^
;

and two

Jishts ;

were (AiQxi OIQ (OOI AJI| v ^ Assem. I. 352, 13 /3) other verbs
| ;

25 I Cor. xv. 40 1 i "?} * r> rr>

Barh. 144, 8

with looi, John v.

in the

2.

A^ T Men
%<** T '

same
x

five porches ;

relating to
**

persons

e. g.

Luke

ii.

13.

M^O>

%*

iM-vt00

^
;

n ^- - ^*U*M ^lcre aP'

t*

'

%j:

peared

many

of

the

heavenly host

Barh. 124, 11.

U-^*

^-e

Arabians made peace four thousand;

133, 12.

a^
6)

there died

177, 14;

339,9; or
;

when

the verb follows though more rarely

e.g.

o)

A*) and

A\;
e.

Barh. 148,
five walls
;

10.
/3)

*>nn\ "|ooi Ai ]>a

|aSaL Chisum
;

had

other verbs relating to persons

g.

232
Barh.
t* ^

IN RESPECT TO GENDER.

1-.',

iO.

^k&o

7 ^'" *

\
.

l^ ^

many were slain

;

125, 14, 15.

*

>,>>V)( {--

the

Arabians chose for king

the inhabitants

190, 9.
;

wk.12
;

^? p
513, 3
;

532,

fALk^o since
1

feared

298, 17

9.

Some have attempted to explain this singular of the verb as the third plural prat, defectively written ( 6 ; comp. Agrell a. a. O.p. 12,13) ; still it is remarkable that one and the same author, as
REM.

On

Barhebraeus, should employ interchangeably both ways of writing. the contrary this construction is found in Hebrew and more

frequently in
defective
is to

the Arabic form of the 3

and

to both of these languages, such

pret. plur. is

unknown.

When

a plural

be considered as distributive (one of them, or each one of them), the Syriac uses not only the singular but the plural also, and marks 1>7 7 N-"> tOOliiO * this construction more r** or ^lO accurately by ,
.

s-Aoi;
*.

e.g.

Barh. 434, 12.

;

Olj7lT r*xLs ^fT.QJCn each one of

7 7
,

them went into his country

*

101, 14, 15.

,-M

Xf v) Qil*7)
*.

f
.

.OOlllO each one of them had answered.

4.

The

dual,

which

is

used in four words only,

;

44), is

connected with the plural verb

,_i)2 two shall be
;

e.

g.

Matt.
;

xxiv. 40.

xviii.

19

xix. 5

Barh. 165, 19.

r^LtO and

V*

they both brought forth.

REM.
singular

Sometimes,
is

also,

according to the sense, the verb in the

',

found with
that it

^*>t^>

e.g. Barh.396,12.
;

^>*^3 Ao2U>
Similar
is

Ol^l ^k)

should be called Egypt

433,20.

Barh. 121, 11. ^'paio ^-^'^ Z?> there departed two armies.

B.
.

In

respect to Gender.

1 Nouns masculine, singular and plural, sometimes take the verb, whether it precede or follow, in the feminine when they are masculine in respect to the termination, but

not as to signification
l.b).

(compare

43.

Rem.

2,

and

70.

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.

|

233

must be considered as a solecism or a designation of the neuter when the verb feminine is found with a noun masculine ;
It
i

REM.

e.g.

Barh.527,10. (^iO)
viii.

Zod
15
;

,2 when

it

wot evening

compared
" ^
;

with Matt.
there

16

xiv.
;

or Barh. 152, 14.

ll*<\t*

CT

arose

a quarrel

compared with Matt. xxvi. 5

Acts

xxiii. 10.

2.

Feminines take a verb in the masculine; a) when they

are feminine merely in respect to termination (compare 70. l.a); 6) when abstracts stand for concretes (compare
70. 2)
;

e. g.

^aaJ, }hmsufor mankind; Barh.236,8.

>**f

oA-kiO

A*2U
;

l^2& ^'^Wi
585, 14.
these

there died about fifty

thousand

men
* 1

548, 20
f
I'

\L\zsoL army; 581,

-s

12.
I
'

naioZf

|/'^m^
ry

.Nrn

armies were assembled

; or |/n^.\g> milita-

for soldiers ;

607, 20.
;

REM.

These nouns are also found with the verb feminine

e.

g.

Barh. 341, 10, 11.

^*2U Jla^L

'jto>L

yui]'

^/Uio

there died

about twelve thousand men

masculine
612, 14.
579, 14.
20.

is
~<>.

to
T

But the preceding verb ; 348, 15, 16. be considered as impersonal in such cases as Barh.
T V*

|A2)|

kOOU^I

there

was occasion given

compared with
; or

Zooi lAo> lAa]

there

was much occasion

;

606, 19,
6.

^A^isjj

Ol2oA ]oOl

he

had fear

compared with 136,

fear fell upon

3.

the king.

Sometimes the noun

is

with the masculine and feminine of the verb

connected,in the same sentence, not only, a) ;

;

nouns of the common gender e.g. Mark v. .Vrn these unclean spirits went pVCr> }Aai_
but
268,
6)

13.

Uoi
e. g.

QQSJJ
;

out and entered

;

such also as have a determinate gender

Barh.

10.

OnLaZlo iv^*" ,_ou2>2

;

they

both (mother

and

daughter) fell and were su/ocated

260, 11, 12.

234

CONSTRUCTION" OF SENTENCES.

O.

In

respect to both

Gender and Number.

1.

Collectives feminine often take, in accordance with the

;

meaning, the plural masc. of the verb e. g. Barh. 561, 6, oocn ^iPi*! 7. T^cuu] the inhabitants had fled ; Gen.
xli.

57.
viii.

o2] }*A} CTlLa the whole people (country) came

32.

Matt.

nVn _ *OT 1;na Olio

I.

this

whole herd

perished; Assem.

53, 17.

^QO plAi^^ CJlLo AiMoZl

So
1.
to be

all the inhabitants (the

whole city) assembled and wept.

;

too the names of cities **% *\ r A* A' *

e. g.

Assem.

I.

51,

Note B.

.Q^juOAj> AO2L1 wiCDOf

;

the inhabitants

of JZdessa went out

slain

Barh. 248,

6, 7.

*)Zn

i . i

for

Mohammedans; Barh.

580,
2.

1, 2.

plural feminine, sometimes occur verbs e. g. singular masculine, as well before as after the noun
;

With nouns
**

Isa.

iii.

1Q.
;

* 01

Ala
7.

^QjtJZZ] the daughters of Zion are

a// of his cnfZor^ ^ailo liaZ] II. A. been had "JOO1 *l*a plundered; Ephr. 145, goods ji01i\S there were ivritings composed concerning

haughty

Barh. 215,

Jer. xiv.5.
;

.nnO

ff

yX.>
;

-.

|AXi| ^Ae Aznc?* calved and

7

forsook

Barh. 368, 11, 12

eyes.

10, 9.

woioLl\iiA AlZ ^^r

were three
REM.
'

Seldom are cases found, where the verb singular feminine stands with the noun plural masculine ; e. g. Job xxxix.13, 14.
t.ff

X-

t 1

OlAlQ (*^*

"*~>* the ostrich leave th her eggs.

D. Construction of sentences when

there is
is

more than one subject,

or where Hie subject

compound.

l.When
inative

and

the subject of ai sentence is compounded of a noma) usually to the genitive, the verb conforms
;

CONNECTION" OF THE

NOUN WITH THE

VERB.

235
there
.

nominative

e g. Barh. 228, 7. ]>QSoL 2ak>>

* *

AJv^Zf
*

was seen

the

form of a

pillar

613, 14.

pJimLo>
348,

the cry of the poor was heard ; verb conforms to the genitive, when the

20

b) the

latter contains the

the

principal idea

e. g.

Job

xxxii. 7.

v a\Sfl I*JL> iKiQLOD

multitude of years shall leach; Barh 96,8,9. |Aju.,So> cnff.ntn ~ * * ^\ t* A\2U a great part of the city wan destroyed ; 141, 10; 241,
10, 11
;

188, 7, 8.

oooi

^^at&o _. jA^lo ^laj

is

multi-

tude of the dead were buried.

REM.
Matt.
viii.

In the last connection ^\O, almost always

found

e.

g.

34

Acts

xxi.

30

Cor. xiv. 23

to which the verb

all

rarely relates, as Barh.61 1,3.

Ol/Jio2 <-Ol^D lEo^Aj

of his

petitions should be granted.

2.

When
a
)

it

verb stands as follows

der
e. g.
;

has several subjects connected by and, the A) when they are of the same gen;

in

the plural

thus

a.

before the subjects

John

xxi. 2.

^pAjO
Barh. 19,
slain
;

there
7.
;

lLoo}2o la|r> ^QlSoi )^s|'o6oi t OOUA*f were together Simon Peter, Thomas and Nathaniel;

rfk

'

78, 8

Saul and Jonathan ivere ^AjOiO \>o\* oNftnZ] Assem. I. 30, A. 1, 2. ,.!-> 193, 17
;

it

t*

p
;

]*i? OlSso *DO',-kXo when

were assembled ;

the clergy

and
/3)

the

whole congregation

Ephr.

Exod. xvii. 10. and Hur, went up.

in the singular
;

1.

223,

after

the subjects
Moses,

>cL*o t ojOilo
is also
;

loSo

Aaron
;

But the verb

frequently found

6)
1.

a) before the subjects

e.g. Matt, xxviii.

V4**l ^tal'riOO
lene

and

the

VAAS_^0 ^ol'rSo Z2^ Barh. 106, 4, other Mary

,;

then

came Mary Magda;

121, 19

159, 9

160, 13.
ilence
;

193, 19

ilZoSoo ]iaa Assem.

;

looi there arose

I.

famine and
;

pest-

272,

A.

35,

36

Ephr.

I.

216,B;

236
230,D
i
.

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.

j8)

after the subjects

r

e.g.

Johnii.2.
disciples

^QJU obi

&
;

t
/its

*'r&L\

fejOiOr^So^Zo Jesws ano?

;

were invited

Barh. Ill, 10

Assem.

I.

234, A.

6. v.

B
it

B) when
;

the suba) to the

9.

jects are of different genders, the verb

conforms
;

^** _
|

gender of that standing nearest to

"j
7

e. g.

Barh. 106,
.1>

*"

V*>
f

N^r> l*jo

a * in r^ when men, women and youth had r^vt v

*

.0.8. .

assembled together

y>>...

192, 10.
;

(OJ...O

(>CL

n> Vtfc| mountains

the masculine
;

and

islands appeared
if
f

195,

or b)
*
f

is

pre-

ferred, especially

the verb follow the subjects

t

e.g.

Barh.

ff

-ex

74, 12, 13.

oocn

^G>Aio oiA*o
;

^flooticojolZ Theodotiu*
;

and
C)

his sister were educated

77, 7

78, 2

finally, when there are several tion commence with the singular

subjects, if

Ephr.I. 253, A; the construc-

of the verb, in the conis

tinuation of the sentence, the plural of the verb

>^
k> P 7

used

e.g.

Barh. 137, 14. QDjlo' ^Oio'^ulo flrLI J*lo Gabala and his
"**

confederates
* 7 *
p

arose
r..

and

fled
7ic?

155,

1 6.

pu >

OlZo_!k

-<-"*>*

QO^OO
REM.
V

PJLI>O

<^e

yc?^

the elders

went out and brought.

The verb
"Hf>
> ^

in the plural also follows,

;
9

when

several subjects

are united by ^CtL with

P* 7

e.g.

Barh. 197,5,6.

XlL jQ2uLiJ
the
different

fii^

pu^DOJj

|ZoXkAj w^ew Nicephorus with

Roman army
subjects,
> 7

returned; 72,2; 85,9.

of which one
first
is

When

there
first

are

two
r.f
-x

a pronoun of the
;

person, the verb follows in the

yjs.

e. g. Luke ii. 48. person plural ^ P *% P T ^ 7 CQ I and thy ^*^ It _iOOl father

J2O^
25.

*,

^^O

^O2|O p]

*-.\

(we) have sought thee

with

much sorrow

Assem.

T.

173, B. 23

Yet sometimes
is

when
the

the subjects are in the

first

and third persons, the verb

1,

in

first

person singular

e.g.

Assem.

347, 28, 29.

]iiV>0

|j]

land

the

Messiah are (am) one nature.

PECULIARITIES RELATING TO NOUNS.

237

81.

Peculiarities relating to

Nouns.

A.
1.

Ellipsis.

the subject of a sentence would be repeated in the predicate, before a genitive for the purpose of defining it
If

more
11*

accurately, that subject

is

omitted,

and only the geni-

tive is used ; e. g. Matt iii. 4. I'A00 ? looi _iOio/u| ~" " " f John (Jia..> his clothing was ( a clothing of) earners hair ;
\^
9 7
.

oiorA

v. 36.

^J-MQ^J ^lo (O>> (ZojOUCD a witness which

of John;
1

^'l

fc

is

greatv.

er than that
]Z' r r
'

x.

21;
to

xi.
those

Heb.

iii.

3;

14.

]Alka2O
;

r^Gyt?
22.

who

are of full age belongs

strong meat

Col.

iii.

REM.

This Ellipsis also occurs in designations of time and place,

;

with 1'Ali
>

e. g.

Assem.

I.

394, 6, 7.

CIO Zboij

"jAi
for for

A .in >CDO>OUQCD
;

a year before the Nicene council,

/Ae

1.

11.

]Al> Ol>Ao
xiv. 9.

year thereafter,

|Ali,

Mark

1>OI

**L\ZXX) lpZ*2>

lo*V

^^

(viz

this >2l) where-ever

my

gospel shall be preached.

is

2.

Sometimes the accusative

wanting with the active

verb,

when

the object can be easily supplied from the sig-

nification of the

verb

e. g.

;>>

to

plough,

literally to drive
;

(j^> \ z -V ^
t

the
to

yoke

-plough), I Sam.viii.12. (in full,Luke xvii.7)

bring forth,
i*^<T>1 to

V Aph. r-^o|
"1

^ *"

to

beget
to

Piio), Gen. xvi.

xxx. 1;

marry, literally
;

take (]2Aj)); Ezra.

to cast lots,

ix. 2,
to cast

12

(in full,
lot)

Barh. 39, 11)

;

**&>!'

literally

(]ma a

I Sam. xiv. 42
;

(in
to

full,

Ps. xxii. 19);

to

also

nouns with prepositions

^QD

consider, literally
full,

lay

(V^^

in the Heart) ;

Job xxxiv. 23 (in

Acts y.

238
to

ZEUGMA AND HENDIADYS.

}j>
ship, literally to go, (]V>i*">
viii.

4)

upon

the sea)

Mark vi.
66. 1, 2)

48

Luke

23.

REM.
like

Here

also
,

seem
*

to

belong impersonal phrases

to
*

^
*"
;

AA^S
ft

^
A
'

AJ pD
to
*

which may be supplied

t*

(*><
7

or
*

V*O9
it is

and

^ S(2

which

may

be supplied (*^\
is

To ^GVt-1

clear,

and
or

A^>
]AiOCL.
B.

if ts c?ar&, it

forced

and

unnecessary to

supply

k>l

Zeugma and Hendiadys.

noun
as well as with

Zeugma
(

occurs with the

the verb
the
;

68. C. 2); e.g.

the.

Gen.

ii.

1.

^ooil^l oilao ]Ly]o Jlso

all their host

heavens and
e.g.

earth

and
y
r

7i

or Hendiadys

Gen.

iii.
i.

16.
e.

.i^tl^OO w^Hx^p
the

thy sorrow and thy

sorrow of thy conception ; Job iv. 16. Cases of Paronomasia are merely imitations of the Hebrew;
conception,
e.g. Isa.

xx viii.

10,

13;

and passages of accidental asson-

Barh. 102, 18. Hifinn persuasion but by the sword.

ance

e.g.

BY

]n>

'<*>

ff

not

by

APPENDIX.
The Rendering of Composite Greek nouns.

The Syrians render the Greek composite noun as well as the verb (compare Appendix to 67) into their language, in the following manner 1) by simple Syriac words of
;

like

signification;
y**"

e.
i.

g-

I Tim. iv.
"*

fl-apaxXritfif

(ZOIQ

9.
Q

WS/Offt
;

l1
by

x "7
;

13. .avayvwo^
^ *"*?
avotfioi
T
|

U-^;
Matt.

U-^-w
i

%0

xviii. 28.

<f(ivSo\j\os

(Aia

or 2)

writing two words for

one

Acts ii.23. a) in the relation of genitive; e.g.

lALp-I ZoSOfQSO; II Tim. iii.2. dxapirfToi IZdSu^a or 6) by two nouns, of which the latter stands in apposi-

THE RENDERING OP GREEK COMPOSITE NOUN8.

T"
r

239
r - T

-*
]

tion
c)

e.g.

John

xi.16.

ftpjM&irai

><>

+*a\OfL+

.^n\/
;

by a
;

participle
g.

verb
or

e.

and noun which correspond with the * -0 10 .. Acts iv. 13. aypa/jL/xaroi |^U& ^tArt |J

by

participles
;

and adjectives and the noun with

P
f

prex
;

fixed

e. g.

II Pet.

iii.

16.

iuftfqnc
;

iLaafiOA -o.mv
g.

or

rf)

by

the pronoun

and verb

e.

I Cor.

vii.

8.

; 3) they are frequently resolved into their component parts, and rendered in the same manner as in cases mentioned above a) in the relation of
;

|mj ^o<jk ^>\i]> ed 'from adjectives and nouns

a/afAoi

Zu^>

If the composites are form-

genitive;
Col.
ii.

e.

g.

Mark
*
T

xvi. 14.
X

rfxXripoxap&'a
7

]">^

ZCUAO;
xxiv. 24.
adjec-

14.
.

xsipo'/paipov
. r

^jk2OM i&*
;

Matt.

^sufoirptxpijTai

|ZaOrO> f^*^*
ii.

6)

by

the

noun and
;

tive
13.

e. g.

Phil.
'
<'''

3.

xsvofogia ]a^* r co

Vxaa*

II Cor.

XL

4/u <k'r&

roXo '

P-yi?

]i^
;

sometimes

we can
and
22.

trace definite laws of rendering

a) nouns, adjectives,
;

adverbs compounded with

wavoirXi'a ]L*1

iras,

take ^ta

e. g.

Luke
;

xi.

OlSs

xxiii. 18.

fa^fX^si 1*13 OlSa

;

Sap.

xviii. 15.

ira.vToSiva.pos

IA^SD

^3j

6)

when they
is

are com-

a pounded with

privative, the

latter

represented
U';

by

U'and
i.

J]j

e. g.

I Cor. xv. 53.

;

Aaavatf.'a
iii.

]2oZallO

Eph.

4.

6t(jLW(xos

y>c^o V>

Matt.

12.
tfuv

atfatros ]aij ]Jj.

,

Finally, in

composites formed with

;

this

is

often ren-

dered by >Qi
ou

e.

g.

Philem. verse
xvi.
9.
5

23.

*Sa> ]>^

Kom.

CHAPTER FOURTH.
PARTICLES.
82.
1.

Construction

and union of Adverbs.

51, is

Besides the formation of adverbs described in

to

be noticed as a special peculiarity the expressing of them

certain verbs, which, either stand in the

by

same

tense,

numIn
con-

ber,

and gender, with the

finite verb,
r

with or without the

copula, or the infinitive of the verb follows with *

this connection stand
;

^.
to

a)

^Ol
out

to
;
;

return,
e. g.

V and 2iQDO]
viii. 10.

tinuefoi once more, farther, again

F

Gen.

again he sent her

thou shall bring

Ps.
;

Ixxi.
vii.7.

20.

me again
;

Job

^DQ2)CnZ JT
*acoo")
iv.
2.

they shall no more see

Luke xx.
203, A.
7,

11, 12.

>ro

he sent again

Assem.
.

I.
;

8
;

Gen.
also

r^lio^ Aacoo] she bare again

ding pleonastically
fo\\r\
to

Barh. 152, 3

by *

JDoZ again ;
will

Gen.

ij

ad**
(J

viii.

21.
the

aflDO|
earth
;

QoZ /

no more curse

fy

make much,

for very ; e. g. Barh. 92, 14.

CONSTRUCTION AND UNION OF ADVERBS.

he esteemed very
6.

241

much

II Cor. viii.15

II Kings xxi.
;

-">;

,*"1SV&

<M

SVCD 1

did

much

evil

c)

^oS

to
'

Ae Aarf no

y<tf

cfon

speaking

d)

without the copula) for before

6e/ore;

; e. g.

to ^0,0 precede (always * i* ^ A * ' L'^o] AlD^O / Aaue saztf

iii.

Acts
;

ii.

31

vii.
ii.

52

Born.
iii.

9,

25; viiu 28,30; xi.

35

xii. 1 1

I Cor.

7;

Gal.

8.

REM.
in Hos.

More according
vi.

to the

Hebrew, seems
(tjj'n xxxvii. 7

to he the expression

;*O
is

^oJoSOj $]
Gen.

&5Vft
;

^fc) <A

rfw,
ii.

which early

scattered ;
l

or

II

Kings

10.

A^l*

Ajky-Qol
I.

pare Ephr.
X

(^ISb tl" 'ppn) thou askest too great a thing;com519, D. E fcO^Sn n HChron.xxvi.l5,is expressed
;

'

-T
;

by

wi_fcQD|
it

compare Jer.iv.5,and onward. If the

be omitted in adverbial usage
T
;

finite

verb already

precede,
x

may
XT

e.

g. I

Sam.

xx. 41.
the

*A-JQD]
most.
2.

riOj

>O^O

mn
r

they

mourned

but

David

Adverbs
;

like adjectives, are

a)

connected with nouns

g.

and stand
]2\^S>1
days
;

before

them

e.

Luke

iv. 25.

many widows ; John

; ;

ii.

12.
;

lAl0a-_i
;

Assem. I. 30, 15, 21 Barh. 78, 1 105, 3; 106, 8 E with words A. 6. v. 270, standing between; 284, A. 10. more seldom after the noun ; e. g. I Cor. v. 6. v. E. /)
;

JiVUt a

little

leaven

II

Chron.

ii.

9.

]tf>

i'

much wood
placed under.

Barh. 80, 16.

A**Al

^s2>

1>QJ

the fire

REM.
tive
%
;

Sometimes nouns represent the adverb by a following genig.

e.
r

Ephr.

I.

219, A.

ISA? l^JUioT

.CXJl^

JoOlA*V Purlieu-

(>aSflSO they had continually the cloud and the pillar.

242

INTERROGATION, AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION.

should be noticed

larly

^O^D

\*

>\n*"> almost

or

So v^_XD

\\iSn
3.

>Z1

^3, i^fO partly,

etc.

The

repetition of the

adverb indicates
;

a strengthvii.

ening or increase of the meaning

e. g.

Gen.

19.

+L& *al quite ready ; Matt. Barh. 65, 14. John vi. 7
;

iv. 24.

-*">

.iO very bad ;

84, 17.
is

^So

^iSrv~> and

>Ao 5Ao by

degrees ; b
;

sometimes a diversity
I Kings xx. 40.

expressed

by adverbs of place and there.

e. g.

]ZLO

\& here

83.

Use of the Interrogation, Affirmation, and Negation.

construction of the interrogation,
it

A. Upon the
be remarked
1.
;

should

That the simple

direct question is distinguished

a)

by being preceded by an interrogatory pronoun or S> Olio who is the greatest 1 e.g. Luke xxii.27. particle
either
;

John
10.

ix. 26.
--.

y^
..T

r^
\
i>

.00
By

M^O what has

1l*i t\

he done

to thee

? verse

- * -

v
vii.

^>*Aa2]
35
;

how were
33, 15
;

thine eyes

opened ?

verse 19

Assem. 1.

179, B. 25.

tasLiV^
6)

.Vrn oooi
position

by the in word of the words employed, the prominent

r-*^i-*

whence know they thisl

or

forming the question being generally placed

Matt, xxvii. ll.
the

first
j

e.

g.

t?OOU> ]n\V>
I.

OOlAj] art thou the king of

Jews?

Assem.

33,

17.

U-^^

^
Ao?

A*l

is

it

thy

wish ?
2.

A question with
iv. 35.

|j

usually contains an affirmation

e.g.
tf

John

1?'^*

ftf

^i-^ Uo>V

^&i \Aif

ye

wo<, that after

four months cometh the harvest

INTERROGATION', AFFIRMATION
xviii.'Ji;

AND NEGATION.

243

but with
ftl

45.

^dol

embraces a negation; e.g.John v. >..;^nSl) }$]* ^pAj] ^^CO ]iol Mieve ye thai
] it

I shall

accuse you

? ]

Xv 21

xviii.33
is it

or a doubt

e.g.

Matt.

xxvi. 22.

+*o
"T '^*">
'

ISo
e. g.

Lord

I? John
240, F,
?

ix. 27;

xviii.25;

so
-

also
D r

l-;io

withwkS; would
vii.

Ephr.

I.

-O

]ooi

;-**
xxiv.

this please

God

Luke

xviii.

8
~

18

John

35.
question
for
is

REM.
131, 12
3.
;

The
with

direct

also

found with

Wi*
f>|

(apa), Barb.

U^

febl

119, 10.

The

indirect question is

indicated

by ^

= whether
J

e.g. Matt. xxvi. 63.

thott art the Christ the

1ouL> Ol;a
son of God.

]iaV>
The
in the

ooi AJ]

whether

disjunctive (whether

or (utrum
Matt.
xi. 3.

an)
1

is

marked by oj

second part

e. g.

nfhV> 001 r> *MQ'oVl2)> OC31 OOl^Aj] art thou ^1 he who should come or shall u>e look for another ? John ix.
2;

Assem.
REM.

1.

87, B. 12, 13; 377, 20, 21.

affirmation or negation of a question
is

The

usually expres;

sed by a repetition of the leading verb with the personal pronoun

e.g.

Assem.
*

I.

375,
*

7.

oo]o
*

2ji0T>

*i>
t

T <k*

* t

Z;io|>
said ?
.

V^^xn
is it

^.lSQ

have you htard, my brethren, what

V
.

J^J[ ^oAliQ* I have

%>
(J

and

they answered, yes, all

true or

10.

Q1OO

0|
i.

r*r*
e.

fM'fy

not ?

and they answered

e.g. Matt.xxvii.il.

it is true,

yes

sometimes by another verb;

said
it,
i.

LO\
same
not,

Aj| thou hast

;

e.

yes

in the negative with the

Assem.

I.
I.

378,

7, 11.

Sometimes only
?^*0
f

repetition

e. g. e,

appears

g.

Assem.

33,19.

-t>|

(J

^O|O and he

said,

No,

my father.
)

B.

The negative

particles

]T and

o^

(and nonne?

are

distinguished from

A^S by

this latter

forming the negation

244
to

PREPOSITIONS.

A ), and with nouns, adjectives, and participles ( 58. B. 5) or with suffixes ( 38. 2), it includes the substantive
verb.

REM.

JJ is

I Cor. xi. 11, 16 (but the negative sense is lost cle is to be taken affirmatively ; as in Matt. v. 25

repeated in the latter of two negative clauses ; e. g. when the partiparticiples

it

To

adjectives
(
i.

and

cation

= un,

Luke xxi. 34). gives a negative or privative signifi;

*!>
(J

in, -less) ;
f

e.

g.

Eph.

i.

4.

^OQlO

spotless ;
it

Rom.

23.
less

vio Avn
than
;

|]

imperishable.
-

Before nouns
f <^^ IV (J

signifies

nothing

e.g.

Deut. xxxii.21.

nothing

less

than

my

(God's) people.

Before the future (equivalent to an imper;

ative) it is prohibitory

compare
(J
),

61. 3. B,

and

62. 3.

Doubviii.

led(jJo _ |Jb or JJo _

it

signifies neither

nor

John

19;

ix.

3.

84.
1.

Prepositions.

"When prepositions come together, in many instances ; the a) signification of one of them is only apparently lost.

Thus

for example,

^Lo

a)

before

prepositions,

denotes

the direction from a place whose position is more closely e. g. defined by those which follow Assem. I. 46, 21.
;

]f^t

|ap A^xZ

out from under a rock, 1. 37,19 ^.So

/3)

after

prepositions it denotes a removal from the place more closely e. g. Assem. 1. 64, 7. defined by those which precede
;

"{LjL

^> Aj^A^ wiOiaSdCD they buried him under

16.

the

Churth

Barh. 200,
66, 13.

1'Au^O ^b -^ before

the city;
e.

72, 19, 20;

;
~

fio*

^&

^.lik

from
t

beloiv,

(i.

above) the walls

figuratively, 31, 17.

U^'O' 001^3
is
;

^ ^^
b)
;

aoove

M ex

celknce
e. g.

one of the prepositions

merely pleonastic

Eccl. x. 14.

01>Aa ^ib

after

him

Assem.

I.

36, 22.

I'KEPOSITIONS.

246
wiOIQlo,0 ^lo
King.
be-

^ofrom
fore
2.

ttee

37,

Dan.v. 24.

him

Barh. 65,

9.

feV*n\ Zol

to the

Several of the prepositions have a peculiar consecu;

tion
*.

e.g. betwixt
r T

and

between,

^O
.

**!*>; e.g. Mattxx. 17.

between him and them ; ^OCTL^O wiOiQlA^ frequently with-

out the copula, xix. 10

^
^
;

AxO

e.

g.

Barh. 60, 13.

;

~Ol>o|] ,jl AJJO between

15
;

Haran and Edessa;

e. g.

75, 17,18
;

83,
to,

146, 13

rarely ^

Barh. 60,8

from

]iOA-^D;e.g.Matt.i.l7.
to

-0^1 t^l *Om\$ ^O

7.

from

Abraham
out fcOrL;

David ;

in

more general designations

also with-

e. g.

Barh. 99, 17; 105,

55. B. 3. b) preposi3. Besides the cases mentioned in tions are repeated with several nouns which follow after one another, and depend upon one and the same preposition ; but the preposition is quite e. g. Barh. 82, 10; 104, 11, 13 as frequently omitted after the first noun ; e. g. Barh. 6, 1 ;
;

40, 12

66, 6.

REM.

As

are special idioms,

to be regarded
sis)
;

*O sometimes
Ol2lJj^iCt2
16, 17
;

stands for

^ (v =

the following
ii.

a)

e.

g.

Luke
city ;

3.

looi ^1 f
;

^*^^

each went

to his

own

iii.

Barh. 66,

or serves to designate the value or price of a thing, equiva;

lent to for

Barh. 64,

6.

k i\V>
149,
8,

^tVu.O
9
(
;

^-TZJiflQ for
2
;

two

hundred and

fifty oboli ;

191,

1,

193, 19
;

b)

denotes direction

towards a place

67. 1. b. 5)

with

feoA

preceding

= about
|J

with numerals,
show, some(

to ; c)

Zo\

and

frfl.S

times a possession in a physical

e.g.

and

intellectual sense

= penes)
;

Job
rf)

xv. 9.

^ZcUi ]ooi

which stands not in our power

51. 3. a)
;

23.

14;

adverbs ^Lo forms

expresses
T

the

pronouns

anybody

some

(
;

58. B. 4, 6,7), and sometimes indicates the die.

rection to a place

g.

Assem.

I.

485, 28.

|1,V> ^io

toward*

246
morning
(
1.

CONJUNCTIONS.
29
;

e)

^\i
x. 4.

often occurs before a duty or obligation

It
;

67.

II. 4.

b)

Ezra

may

also in respect to signification,

(>

be considered as a preposition f ) (J > without ; e. g. Barh. 227,5. *T> r p..y * i %? without hands and without feet. Vy.j tJ>O Mr* I W?

85.

Conjunctions.

in common with the other Semitic but affluence of very deficient in conjunctions periodic diction in all languages arises from this class of words. Hence in syriac, upon the one hand, the periods are wanting in variety and continuance and on the other hand the connective particles which do exist have many In general the following may be observsignifications.

The Syriac language,

dialects, is

1.

Those conjunctions

(e. g.

when,

then)

are frequently

omitted, which, in the protasis indicate the relation to the

apodosis,

Gen.

xix. 23,

and the two members are united by and ; e. g. *&* ]*Q* when the Sun had

^ 4^
;
e.
;

arisen,

Lot came

xliv. 4.
fall

REM.

Moreover the following

;

away

a)
f

(asyndeton) after
;

II 'V*

verbs of motion

g. Matt. ix. 7.

^1 1

^OO

he arose and went

;

Barh. 25,
xv. 6
;

1;

197, 19
;

especially in earnest discourse

e.

g. I

Sam.
^_i>2

b)

of or

e.g. II
;

Kings
<hfk

ix.

32.
in

^ 1 JV> icnSo
1
f

1^2

two or three eunuchs

usage
;

c)

^\

more

accordance with

Hebrew

e. g. Isa.

1.

2.

**J]

AJLAO AjZ|
there.

^^ wherefore was, J
O
*
is

came, (when

I came),
"*>

no one

On

the other hand

7

often
*

;-^oZ|O A^iOO repeated (polysyndeton) ; e. g. Barh. 51, 20. 7 9 7 * ff7 t .rs\cnr> ^ooo he was died, buried, arose, and went to

}*

].Cn\
heaven
2.
;

82, 17; 38, 5, 6.

As

correlatives, conjunctions

are used doubled in a

CONJUNCTIONS.
sentence
as well
a) the

247

as, both

same word e. g. o -. O and 2>| aaY and ; e. g. Assem. I. 291, A. 10, ll,v.E;
;

of of either
er
o>v
(

or

Barb. 112, 4; 223,

4,

5;

fA
- 9 *
t

'-o-

M;-as;
> ]i*Lil

217,13; or 6)different words ; e.g. (1301 Assem. I. 75, B. ll, 13, v. E 374, 23, 24;
;

with
yet;

preceding; Ephr.I. 214, E;

J]

^DJ although

e.g. Barh. 91, 12, 13.

3.

The

conjunctions

>

= /Aa,
;

thereby, or

(J>

= *Aa<
;

wo<,

e. g. Asare usually connected with the future ( 61.3.A) sem. I. 515, B.32 ; Barh. 213, 6 but in as far as they have the signification of since, because, (quod), they are connected
T

'*

with the preterite

they praised Barh. 24, 9.

e.g.

Matt.

ix. 8.

2OU>
;

|oi\y

n^^
13, 11

God, because he had given

12,

41

4. Concerning the use of particular conjunctions, the low ing may be noted
;

fol-

sometimes used in comparisons ( e. g. ^io) and xix.24 likewise in Matt, xi.22 b) ^*1 comparing one thing with another of the same species; e. g. Isa. i. 7
a) o]
is
;

Job

xxiv. 14;

Assem.

I.

75,

A.

1.

v.

168, B. 29
;

with
if,

numerals it signifies really, about == av ) denotes, in doubtful (

Barh.104,13

c)

ajL

subjunctive

||

v=

cases, the relation of the

QJ^

el

in cases of certainty,

denotes

the indicative, and also occurs in indirect questions ( 83.3); it is negative in those passages containing asseverations

under oath, yet only

according to the

in those

which are translated,and which,

it is

Hebrew
^|,

idiom, are without any negation;

with a negative U
0!$

]]for^l Uf,

afnrmative(compare
;

and go

Q,

Gesenius Lehrg.

p.

844)

e. g.

Cant

2. 7.

248

CONJUNCTIONS.

wake
use of which see
a)

not, rouse not

d) J (for the further

74. 2.;

56

69.1
it I.

73. 3

78.B. 2)

from
>

particles

which

follows, forms conjunctions

34,
;

e. g.

r*]just
as,

as,

Assem.
viii.

17

so
I.

that,

Matt.
;

ii.

13

>

^n^f just
7,

John

28

Ephr.
;

214,

>

^A&f
As-

(of time) 05, when, Assem.I. 485, 15

>

-OlQ
and
7

since, because,

Barh. 112,
sem.
I.

160, 12

> ifco, 39,7,

<>

>

>hL

,_k>,

213,

A.

25, afterwards

>

olAl*'^ as soon
;

as,

1.218, 16,

27

>

fco (of time) wfon, 1.485,20

>

^&, Barh.160,
wnfe7,
;

and

>

^i,

158,12, since,because

>

fcoA

i!7ia<,

(including
;

the terminus ad quern),

>

Ephr.

II. 125,
;

242,

UD"^
;

**cril so

much

that,

Barh.193,2
> is

!>O^o 6e/ore,150,l3

^S)

in the signification of that,

sometimes omitted before the

future

e.g.

John
r

xxi. 3.

tfaJ JO.l
v. 7.
**

M ^l] /^o thall may

~

catch fish; after ,i,

John

^f

p| ~ ]Z|
;

p| ,1 w?i^
Matt. x. 13.

^Aa^
*

7
*

come
]Ajb2
vi.

or

it is

pleonastic after ^j
the house is

e. g.
;

OOl
;

/)

ld>
John
;

when
viii.

worthy

Mark
21
;

viii.

Luke

36; after ^af, Matt.

ix.

]3'c& Mark

13,

20

e)

the copula o also

denotes

a) that, especially
;

after

verbs of sending, entreating, commanding, etc

I.
it

e.

g.

Assem.
221,2;
is

77, 23, 24

Barh. 11, 18
the apodosis
; ;

97, 8; 105,

152, 5;

forms

/3)

e.g.

Barh. 39, 7.8; and

11, 16; 16,

7)

equivalent to but

e. g.

Barh.

9;
yuJ\

S)

it

sometimes supplies the place of the comparative

e. g.

Job

v. 7.

Also the Hebrew

T

db^ T

is

translated

by the fre-

quently occurring ^o^JD

yet, nevertheless.

INTERJECTIONS.

249

86.
1.

Interjections.

The

Interjection

which denotes an imprecation or cry of

to thee !

distress, is

x.

6.

v n\

usually connected with

*

_iO woe
;

ii.

Matt, xviii. 7

xxiii.

13-16

following ; e. g. Eccl. * \ * %*O woe to you I ^n*l\ xxiv. 19 Ephr. II. 135, E.
1
(>.
;

1>OO1_
f

*o WOK to the king of Judah I 274, D. j ]n\VlS * x * ' A * tT Al v **~mALD rjj ^iO woe to fAose wAo meditate deceit ! 351, C. r * ?0 jQ; or with E appended; e.g. fco +**woe to me!
t
~ " *
T

Ez. xxx.

2.

JiooiA oio| woe for

1.

the

day! sometimes with

to

^L

e. g.

Jer.

27.
*

t ool

\S -O woe
>

you

or

_l2>,

fjoi ^So oioj woe to this generation. Without an intervening preposition, they are the usual expressions of grief and mourning, and the noun is then to be
p. 449.

Amira

(Ao^

taken in the accusative

alas,

e. g.

Judges

xi. 35.

^2^a

oio]

my

daughter ! Kev.xviii.10,16,19.

REM.

Sometimes O| occurs as an ordinary exclamation, with

;

as a sign of the accusative

e.

g.

Barb. 333,

3, 4.

As a

particle of

IX, properly, verily, truly ;

compare Amira
2.

p.

436.
interjections,

the following

Concerning the construction of particular may be observed

:

a) ]oi lo ! behold, is frequently pleonastic; e.g.

Ephr. in.

la^in jTZ loi VZokiij 001 ^y-ASOl }\^ the mortal 149, B. body is thus dependent upon the soul ; or at the beginning of a period it serves to give animation to the discourse ; e. g.
Ephr. 111.247,0.
is

separated

lo ! our brother (member) ^f)?O1 uu;> }oi in designations of time,- like the Greek >?], it
e.

signifies
i

now, already;
v\
f

g. Matt.

iii.

10.

^">>f" )..;j ]ai

'V i |1\i|>

\'r&

\&

Num.
sem.
I.

xxii. 28.

^IQ] B&L *
;

the axe is already laid at the roots of the tree ; "* 17 % * |O1 already the (Jiird time ; As1

369, 30

with

^io following,

since tiat

e.g.

Acts

250
x. 30.

PECULIARITIES IN THE POSITION OF WORDS,

?

\**0

* % ?

p| iof

ii' ^

^io "

|O1
(J
,

smce

that

11'

preceded

by

(J

(01

from which comes Q.^)

I have fasted; V

Col.

i.

ou^i,

nonne ?

*O1 ]^>^^> .jsf ]oi |Tdo not even the e.g.Matt.v.46. ^-r^ publicans the same? verse 47; xiii. 27 ;
1?01
b)

jBX**/ar 6e

tY,

with
;

^ of the person and

e.g.

before thefu*p

ture of the finite verb

"

Matt. xvi. 22.

thee,

*;_Lo

^J^ JH**

^
it

(JOT ^*-^ |OOlZ> /ar 6e

from

my

lord, that this

should hap-

1. 341, A. 30. IbllL^) joaajj ^r>>i us that we should God 13. Some; 375, far from deny times the participle follows Assem. I. 51, 12, 13. e. g.

pen

to

thee;

Assem

be

it

.7

J-i'r^Oj

_^

07

ffU

^Lj
e. g.

/ar

6e it

from us
-IV

that

we should deny

the verb follows in the future, with

^f

preceding (=Ej$ com;

pare

85. 4. c)

I Sam. xxiv. 7
;

or in the infinitive

with

e. g.

Gen.

xliv. 7

c) o.QQ^ ( noun following with ^,

hail /

= iTE'ia
to
;

with suflix plural, and the

which the preceding suffix relates;

e.g.

Matt. v.3.

in spirit; verses 4-11

I.

***o^i ]innr>Vt\ ^OQliOn^ hail to the poor with a word interposed; e.g.Assem.

95, A.

3, 6, v.

E.
;

la]a <QlSn

thee,

/Simon Peter

^S 2>V r*>&4 hail also to B. 3. v. frequently absolute without

E.

2*012* of .iniOa^

hail to thee

Sichem

96, A. 17, 19.

The Hebrew ^5
I

is,

in the Peshito, expressed

by

Jjf

e. g.

Kings

xxii. 12.

APPENDIX.
Peculiarities in the Position of Words.

In the position of words, which, as in the Hebrew, is very easy and natural, besides the peculiarities referred to in the preceding chapters, the following deviations from the usual
^
"
7

collocations, occur

)the verbs (001

and

V*

;Sb| are interposed

PECULIARITIES IN THE POSITION OF WORDS.

251

between words, which,according to their grammatical connecT *.

tion,

cannot be separated e. g. Exod. vii. 7. j_O i*o-Lo '** ]6oi Moses wag eighty years old; Luke v. 3 ^-fcJLLoZ
;

Exod.v.lG.
ye.

QD)} The same is

^
;
' -.

^-'Ao] ]l*"iSO
;

n^ bricks,say they

to u-s,make

true
;

b)

of personal pronouns, having the

~ p

e>9^*7
*
9
*

*y
^ *"

signification of looi
are Abraham's seed
. .

e.g.John viii.33.iOOl^i|>
37
;

^<>
'

oil>1
S

we
^

verse
**X

Heb.
t

vii.

28.

|i

.i~>

|ft^r>Vr>i

TT>

fiOQD ?>O>nSO |OU ,2 OO1

?'<

//te

law which makes priest* of

;

feeble
e.

men ;
him

more

rarely the

same occurs with the noun

OlS

xvi. g. Matt.

1.

besought

that he
it

^Qjf )OMJ> |IiO <_k> }'L] ^H] would give them a sign from heaven
occurs with particles
;

they
;
i.

more frequently
VAljifiQ^

e. g.

Mark

45.

^OU>
and

Al|l^.. he should go openly

IT
(

into the city.

Compare

1(71

"JOT

86. 2. a).

EXERCISES

SYRIAC GRAMMAR,
AND

CHRESTOMATHY,
rBKFARED WITH REFERENCE TO

THE TRANSLATION OP

UHLEMANN'S SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

BY ENOCH HUTCHINSON.

NEW YORK:
1855.

Entered according to Act of Congiv 'ss,

in tho

year 1865,

By

E.

HUTCII1NSON.
of

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for thu Southe n District

New

York.

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.

The

following Exercises are designed for beginners,

who

need something simple, and at the same time, something which will lead them into a thorough knowledge of the

grammar.

A small portion of Syriac,

lected

perhaps a page, should be seand carefully analyzed in reference to all the import-

phenomena of the language. Every peculiarity in respect to each word should be critically examined. Perhaps the best course would be to trace one peculiarity throughout the page, searching the grammar and other helps then
ant
;

and so on, until every peculiarity shall have been examined. Thus the most important facts will be
trace another,

strongly impressed upon the

memory.

great difficulty, especially with beginners, is. that they often attempt to investigate too many subjects at once and thus do not obtain clear ideas of any. There is fre-

The

quently a great inclination to press forward and translate Hence, many important subjects of investigation rapidly.
are entirely neglected,
Superficial scholarship,
is

the un-

avoidable result of such a course.

That nothing may escape observation, a few general

rections

di-

are

presented

to

aid

the

learner in

making

his

In mentioning those points, which are to be exanalysis. exact order in which they occur in the gramthe amined,

25i

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.

it is

mar, has not been followed, but they have been so arranged, hoped, as best to facilitate the progress of the student ;

and they are intended to embrace the most important phennomena necessary to be attended to by the learner.
directed to the Introduction of the grammar,

Before commencing the examination the pupil should be that he may

become somewhat acquainted with the history and literature of the Syriac Language. The grammar should be studied rather as a book of reference than as one, which must be
committed
it

to

memory. The

student, at

first,

should consult

an aid in analyzing. At the commencement of the analysis, he will feel the need of assistance, and that assistance
as

he must find in the grammar. When he there discovers a principle of the language and perceives its application in By the parsing, he can easily retain it in his memory.
time that he has carefully studied the Exercises and Chrestomathy through, he will not only have a considerable

knowledge of the language

mar committed
no
loss of

to

but will have most of the grammemory, with but very little effort, and
;

time in learning rules and principles, whose apdoes not perceive, and which consequently are he plication After the pupil, in the course apt to escape from the mind.
of his analysis, shall have become somewhat familiar with the grammar, he may recite it regularly through, and it will not be an unmeaning nor an uninteresting exercise.
general divisions, in the Exercises, are marked by the character ^[, to distinguish them from similar divisions

The

in the

grammar marked

Smaller divisions are inserted

under Remarks and Explanations.

GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYZING.

I.

Find the Guttural Letters on page

Vid. Gram.
1.

first

of the Chrestomathy.

Rem.

3, 4.

II.

"

"

Aspirates, or on

what

letters
1.

Kushoi and Rukok

are found.
III.

Vid. Gram.

Rem. 4

5.

"

" Diacritical Points, for which the vowels are designed to compensate, formerly used instead of

vowels and for other purposes.

Vid.

2,3,4,

and Rem.

IV.

"

"
"

Long and Short

Vowels.

Vid.

3.

Rem.

3.

V.
VI.

"
"

Simple and Mixed

syllables.

" Pure and Impure, Mutable and Immutable vowels.

Vid.

45.

A
13

48.

A.
letters.

VII.

"

"

Dipthongs, Quiescent and Otiant

Vid.

3.

Rem. 4
VIII.
" "
Line/at

14.

Marhdono, Mehagyono and Sheva.

Vid.
is

IX.

"

"

Linea Oocultans.

8.

X. Find on what

syllables the Tone

to be found.

Vid.

9.

XI. Examine the Marks of Punctuation.

XII. Find Ribui.
Vid.
6.

Vid.

10.

XIII. Read the Syriac.

XIV.

Translate.

XV. Examine

the

Changes of Consonants
dropped

assimilated

trans-

posed
12.

added and exchanged.

Vid.

256

GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYZING.

the Changes of
Vowels

XVI. Find
XVII. Find

thrown back

exchanged
Vid.
15.

transposed

dropped and added.

the Suffixes and Prefixes, Sufformatives and Prefer

natives.

Vid.

16

36

46.
ascertain whether they are
Voice

XVIII.

Parse.

In respect to Verbs

Simple or

Compound

Their Conjugation

Regu-

lar or Irregular

Active, Passive or

Neuter

Number

Person

Gender

Mood

Tense

Conjugate and Inflect

etc.,

them
found

to the Case,

Mood, Tense,
19., etc.;

where they are

Rule.

Vid.

59., etc.

Nouns

Signification

Suffix or Prejix

Adjective

or

Substantive

Derivation and

Formation
Case.

Declension

Person

Number
44;
71

Gender
;

State

Vid.

43;

10;

45;
etc.

73;

74;

46;

47;

48;
Pronouns,

50;

77.,

What
Suffix

kind

Person
Vid.

Number
;

Gen der
54., etc.

Case

Rule.

16

17

Participles

Derivation

Active or Passive

Conjugation

Rule.

Adverbs

Primitive or Derivative
;

What they qualify.

Gender
Decline

Vid.

51

82.

Numerals

Cardinal

or

Ordinal

To

what they belong.

Prepositions
Suffixes

What they govern. Vid

Suffix or Prefix
;

52;

84.

Conjunctions
connect.
Interjections

What
Vid.

kind

What
53. 3;

they

53. 1, 2

85.

Primitive or Derivative.

Vid.

86.

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR

EXERCISE FIRST.
VID. GRAM.
1.

REM.

3, 4.

IF

1.

Find
1.

the

Gutturals on

the first

page of the Chrestomathy.

Select all those letters

which are EVER used as

Gutturals; thus:

loioilloilloioilloilloilloioiloiloi
I 1

01 01

Ol 1 I Ol Ol 1

Ol 1 I j

1 Ol 01 Ol ] Ot J
1

t'Cn 1

1 1 01 01 1 I 01 01 1 A* )

01 A*

01 01

)oi]oijsoi)}1 oiloiioiloiloiloioiloil

Hoiioi11oioi1cn1]oi]]i|i)oilin
01 1

01

1 1

1 01.

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

The above
The

are

all

guttural letters, but not all used as such

in the text from which they are taken.

6)

guttural

resembles the Spiritus lenis of the Greeks,

258

EXERCISES IN SYBIAC GRAMMAR.

being a scarcely audible breathing from the lungs,

i has always

a feeble sound.
the Hebrews.

The Galileans pronounced i and An Arabian would pronounce i as a

It is

M like

fc<

of

sort of vowel

sound like

a.

a kind of soft breathing (comp. Gesenius'

6).

Hebrew Grammar, by Conant,

as
7.

The Greeks

express *>*

well as i, sometimes

by Spiritus asper, and sometimes by

Usually

** is

sounded like hh with a rolling of the palate.

our h (Spiritus asper); but when uttered after
little

Ol before a vowel

is

a vowel,
softer,

it

has nearly the sound of h in Korah, perhaps a

!

as in ah

oh !
;

It is difficult
still it is

to

ascertain exactly the

sounds of these letters

fix

important that the learner should

upon a definite pronunciation of each.

2.

Find those

letters

which are here used as gutturals.

01*

oi^jkAOioioioioioioioioioioioi

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

3.

word

3., Ol is

a guttural, as

it

would in Hebrew
its

take a composite sheva, and

it

has no vowel of

own.

(Some

would perhaps

prefer to call Ol

a regular movable consonant, and

consider 1 at the end of the word as otiant, and

in
6)
c)
)

as quiescing

Verse 3. word Verse

3.

4.,
6.,

is

a guttural for the same reasons.

word

** is a guttural for the

is

same reasons.
It

d)

Verse 4. word

6., Ol

a guttural being movable.

be-

longs to the second syllable of the word, being preceded

by a

vowel

15. 4. d).

The

other cases

may be

similarly explained.

HEM.
letters

It should be

on the

first

remarked that there are some other guttural page of the chrestomathy, which should be con-

KXK.RCISE FIRST

GUTTURAL LETTERS.

259

merely as movable consonants.

It is true that all gutturals

arc sounded, and might be said to bo movable consonants (coraStill we Ian> (irscn. Hub. (THUM., transl. by Conant, 23.2). prefer to make a difference between gutturals and regular movable consonants. The latter, letters on are the

though guttural

page

first,

following
.'$.

Find those guttural movable consonants

:

letters

which are regular

01^1101^1 01. EXPLANATIONS.

Verse
1.

a)
is

word 2.,

} is

a regular movable consonant,

,

and

sounded nearly like the vowel

its

and does not quiesce

]

in

vowel.

In dialects kindred to thellebrew,

far
its

melts in-

to the

vowel

more readily than the sound of the Hebrew

Still ] retains its

&

melts into
)ii;int.

vowel.

power

as a

movable

eons*

It is

very

common

in Syriae for a guttural let-

ter to take a long vowel, where in Hebrew, it would have a (vid.GesComposite She va. This seldom occurs in Hebrew
cii ins'
II

eb.
1.

Gram, by Conant.
w.
5.,

23. 2.
it

Rem.

2).

6)
is

V.

Ol

is

movable, as

does not quiesce and

not otiant.
c)

V.

1.

w.

8.,

(not a guttural)

is

movable, as the preis

ceding

letter

is

not sounded,

and the following one

quiescent.
d)
its

V.

1.

w.lO., 1 should

sound
it

be considered as movable though melts into the vowel, we can scarcely perceive

that

has the

power of

consonant.

260
e)

EXERCISES IN SYEIAC GRAMMAR.

V.
1.

w. 11.,
(

1 is

not movable, as

it

quiesces,

though

seldom, in

13. 1.
11.,

/) V.

1.

w.

Rem). Ol is movable
it,

for the

same reasons as

others above.
ble (comp.
g) V.
3.

preceding
5. 1. f;
2.,

belongs to the previous syllaa suffix, and

f
w.
(

15. 4. d).

Ol is

movable as

it is

ft

of

the

Hebrew
V.
9.
it

13. Rem.).
9.,

h)

w.

is

movable
1. 1. b).

as

it

has a vowel of its own,

it is

though

so flows into the sound of the vowel that

scarcely perceptible
It

(T

should be remarked that t\ro of the guttural letters | REM. and 01 are sometimes used as quiescents and sometimes as otiant 12. A. B. and Rem.; letters ( 13; 14).

EXERCISE SECOND.
f
Find
ening,
\.
the

2.
9
*i

Aspirates or in what
*.

letters

Kushoi (*A*OO a hard-

and Rukok (^3O>) a

softening are found.

\.

Those which are ever aspirated

(
.

Rem. 3).
.

&

A A A A A 2 A A A

o4

2a

a .o

Find those, which are aspirated on page and Rem. by Tr.). (5.
2.
fc

first

A AA A 2 A A A
2
>

aA
r

2
>

z>
r

2
r

^ ^D
rr
.

2)3>>

>

>

>A

Oir3

EXERCISE SECOND

ASPIRATES.

261

EXPLANATIONS.
a) Versel.
r

word
c. a).

1.,

is

aspirated as
it

it

closes the syllable

($.

).

2.

Rem.

h)

V.I. w.2.,
(

is

aspirated as

follows an open or sim$ 15. 4. d).

ple syllable

5. 2.

Rem.

c. c.,

and

O
in

A is aspirated, because a letter, which would take a vocal Sheva, precedes it ( 5. 2. Rem. Hebrew,
V.I. w.4.,

c. b).
'/)

V. 2. w.
1

4.,

is

aspirated as the preceding

it

word ends

with

(5.

2.

Rem.a).
aspirated as

e) V.3. w.2., . is 5. 2. Rem. c. c).

follows an open syllable

it

/) V.3.
c. b).

w.4.,

A is
is

aspirated because

follows a letter
5. 2.

which would in Hebrew take a vocal Sheva, (

g) V.3. w.4.,

Rem.
letter

aspirated as
2.

it is

preceded by a

which would in Hebrew take a composite Sheva and would

of course be vocal (5.
h) V.3. w.5., 2>
(

Rem.

c.

b).
it

is

aspirated as

follows an open syllable

5. 2.
i)

Rem.
2.

c. c).

V.4. w.7., >

is

aspirated as the preceding

word ends
(

in

(5.

Rem.

a).

k) V.4. w.7.,

is

aspirated as
aspirated as

it

closes a syllable closes a syllable

it

5. 2.

Rem.
1)

c. a).

V.7. w.4.,
c. a).

> is

it

5. 2.

Rem.

m
ble
(

V. 1 0. w.
5. 2.

4., r is
c. *c).

aspirated as

follows an open sylla-

Rem.

3.

Find those which are not aspirated'

EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse
1.
>.

word

5.

word 1., Rem. a).

is

not aspirated as

it

begins a

262

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC

GRAMMAR
it is

I) V.4. w.l., ($5. 2. Rem.a), c)

is not aspirated though because it begins a verse.

preceded byl

Y.6 w.3., A is not aspirated as it is preceded by a letwhich, in Hebrew, would not take a vocal Sheva, and which has no vowel ( 5.2. Note by Tr.).
ter,

d)
abet,

For the pronunciation of these and 1. Rem. 3, 4.

aspirates see the Alph-

REM. when aspirated is sounded like v, and when not aspirated like b ; r like th in that, when aspirated, but otherwise like d ; ) when aspirated is sounded like pk or /, aud otherwise like p ; A when aspirated like th in thin, in other situations like t ;
.

is

sounded

like

g hard whether

it

be

aspirated

or

not *

aspirated is sounded like hk or Ik with a rolling of the in other situations like k. In general the aspirates are palate pronounced like the corresponding letters in Hebrew (vid. references above and Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar by Conant, 6. 2. 3. and
;

when

Note by

Tr.).

EXERCISE THIRD.
1
(

3.

4 and Hem.).

Find the diacritical points for which the vowels are designed to compensate, formerly used instead of vowels and for other purposes
:

OCTIO

]A\ ocn
001

1^ ^1^ ^ 01 'Zooi
TOCTI ] 2]> IOCFI

1ooi> ]ooi 0010

IOCTI

12] u>]L

4d> fooi.

* The aspiration of
palate.

would be indicated by the

rolling of the

EXEKCISE THIRD

DIACRITICAL POINTS.

263

EXPLANATIONS.
REM.
1.

Diacritical points sometimes

(

mark

particular tenses

and

persons of verbs

4.

Rem.).

RKM.

2.

in the time of

The vowel system of the Syrians began to be introduced Mohammed. Then and even after the system was

completed by introducing characters from the Greek vowels, the ancient diacritical points were used to some extent by many writers.

They

are

now

seen in the more ancient writings.

The diacritical points here presented and others, appear Syriac writings, perhaps from the fact that they have been copied from more ancient editions, and in some cases doubtThe several less, directly from the oldest editions of the Peshito. editions have been copied with so much care, that even after the vowel system came into use, the diacritical points, which had been
REM.
3.

in ancient

used long before, were copied as well as the more recent vowels. Thus appear sometimes two characters to represent one vowel sound. As later editions have appeared, however, those points have graduvowels substituted, though, some remnants of ally been omitted and
the old system are
still left

(2;

3;

4).

a)

Verse

1.

word
H
.

according to the
catcs the

]A. The diacritical point under \ 4., principles laid down byLudov. deDieu,indi-

vowel

We have then here the

vowel and the

ancient diacritical point for which the vowel compensates (4. Rem.).
b)

V.I. w.

5.,

ooio.
*

The

point under

Ol,

according to

Amira, indicates
c)

(4.Rem.).

V.3. w.

2.,

^to.

The

point under -i indicates, ac-

cording to Ludov. de Dieu, the vowel

<[)

(4. Rem.).

V.3. w.

3.,

looi.

Diacritical points are often placed

under and over the radical letters of verbs,sometimes to distinguish particular persons and sometimes to indicate vowels In the imperative and infinitive it may 3. Item. 1). (vid. T be wholly omitted or inserted underneath (vid. 4.Rem.; also compare Hoffmann's Syriac Gram.
14).

264

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE FOURTH. 1 4
Find
I.

the

Long and Short vowels

:

3.

Hem.

3).

Find the Long ones

EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., JL _I are both long as they are lowed by - quiescent ( 3. Rem. 3. b).
b) c)
fol-

Y.l. w.5., _l

is

long because o quiesces in

is

it.

Y.

1.

w.

11.,

_L

long as

it

has a quiescent (13.

1.

Rem.).

The

other instances need no explanation.

2.

Find the Short vowels

EXERCISE FIFTH

WIMPLE SYLLABLES.

265

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse
V.
1.

1.

word
10.,

2.,

_L
is

is

short as

it is

a regular short

vowel.
b)

w. w.

^L
is

short as Olaph
it

is

movable, not
it

quiescing.
c)

V.

3.

1.,

JL

short as

has not O quiescing in

(3. Rem.3).
In v.l. w.2., ... and several other short vowels on page form dipthongs with O and These quiescent letters do not but melt into them to fully coalesce with their respective vowels a greater extent than they would do in Hebrew, under similar circumstances. They can scarcely, therefore, be considered as raorable consonants, as they would be in Hebrew. Still the vowels in these cases are heterogeneous and the quiescents do not sufficiently coalesce, in our estimation, to make the vowels long (vid. Gesen. Heb. Gram, by Conant, 8. 4 ; Uhlemann 1. Rem.4).
first,
;

REM.

EXERCISE FIFTH.
f
Find
I.
X

5.
/Syllables

the

Simple and Mixed

(15. 8 and
:

4).

Find the Simple Syllables

JC
T

;J3 *A|

OA

* ^*t K W* Vl* *> |001 SO |AA 0010 LO A-^ *j|

I

OA

1 ^'

V
I

*V

|O01

1 *

|O

A
V
|
*A

IOT tjf

oA IOGI 001
'

Lo

]Al
l
*

01 ]j

**\oh ]ooi ^\^>

r

ooi

&o

i o.|

*'W

Us

|.*
*

Lc |o A*
/
*

**

U*
fc

**1*

(001

MO|A
*.

V"*

aA OJ

*".
|i01

^J. 1 Ut O01O QJ (901 Ar>

QA
en

AjO

QA

]>

V ^

Icn

cL

266
*

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

0>0l
**1

V
(Z

*>

OJ |J01

w.01

IV
1J

JO
ft

001 ]OG1 QJ

'A
JJC7I

?
|

W GU)
*
(J

n?

])O1

VA
1

I'ooi

Q-J T>oi
|_T3

1> 12

10

&

loOl 10

EXPLANATIONS.
REM. A simple syllable terminates in a vowel sound, and that vowel sometimes has a vowel letter quiescing in it. A mixed syllable terminates in one or more movable consonants. Every vowel stands in a simple syllable when the following consonant takes a
vowel.
is a simple syllable as it ends in a a) Verse 1. word 1., vowel sound, although it has a quiescent * has a vowel of its own and is of course sounded with the following syllable 15. 4. d). (vid. 1" 5. 1. Bern., and
;

u^

b) V.I. w.2., jl is simple for the same reason as last, the syllable ending with ** and not with A (vid. 15. 4.d).

Y.I. w.2., oA is a dipthong and should be considered, think, as a simple syllable because o coalesces in the vowel to such an extent that the syllable ends in a vowel sound, though the coalescence is not so perfect as in a reguc)

we

Some may regard o as a movable consonant as it would be in Hebrew, under similar circumstances, but we incline to the former opinion (vid. ^[4. 2. Rem. Gesen. Heb.Gram. by Oonant, 8.4).
lar case of quiescence.
;

d) V.I. w.4.,
e)

JsO is

simple (vid. reference above).

simple, 1 quiescing in
is

V.l.w. 4., lA!^

k

is

/)

V.I. w.5., ooio

is

simple, the last

g) V.I. w.10., 1

simple as

o quiescing. which follows Olaph has

though compare
,

a vowel of

its

own.

it

h) V.I. w.ll., lo is simple, Olaph quiescing in seldom quiesces in that vowel (vid 13.1 Rem.
1. 3. e).
i)

V.

3. w.2.,

IQ

is

simple, 1 quiescing in

and

^ being

otiant

EXERCISE FIFTH

is simple as longs to the next syllable (15.

Tt

MIXED SYLLABLES.
is

267
2> be-

a long vowel and

4. d).

V.4. w.5., aA is a dipthong 1) as _* melts into the vowel to such

ly
!><

Hi -brew.

considered as choose then to place the syllable

and ends in a vowel sound an extent that it can harda movable consonant as it would be in

We

among
7.

simple ones ; wU. in verse 4. word 7., and %*Ol in verse word 8, are similar instances (vid.^[4.2.Rem. ; ^[5.1.c).

m) V.4. w.6., cu is simple as O quiesces in making it a long vowel, and 01 belongs to the next syllable (15.4.d).
ri)

syllable
2. d).

V.7. w.3., ccA is simple as Ol belongs to the penult and follows a long vowel (15.4. d. : compare IT I.

2.

Find the Mixed Syllables

A^-m

* ZoL

ZoL

^SJD

01%

'Zooi

y>* oi>

01
*

01
?

501

Nn\

ut_L

oi r ,-

EXPLANATIONS.
Verse 1. word 1., /u is mixed as </) sonant sound (vid. 1" 5.1. It-em.).
b)
it

ends with a con-

V.I. w.

9.,

Zo

is

mixed, ending in a consonant sound

(vid.

5,l.Rem.).

c] V.3. w.2., oi r is mixed as Ol course movable ( 13. Rem.).

pj

in

Hebrew and

is

of

rf)

V.7. w.7.,
it,

not quie.sce in
(vid.
15.4,

is short when O does kO> is mixed as and the following consonant has no vowel

and

3.

Rem.3).

268

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

EXEECISE SIXTH.
1
Find
the

6.

Pure, Impure,
(

Mutable

and Immutable

vowels

45.

48. A).
:

1.

Find the Pure vowels

EXPLANATIONS.
REM.

pure vowel,
is

An

impure vowel

is one with which no consonant one with which a consonant coalesces.

colesces.

is pure* as the syllable oA is a a) Verse 1. word 2., o 3. Rem. 4 also Palfrey's Gram. 2), and dipthong (vid. does not fully quiesce in _!_, though it so far coalesces that it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant. Still as the vowel is a heterogeneous one and O does not fully coalesce in it, we scarcely feel authorized to place the vowel among the impure ones, though some may prefer to do so, 1"5. 1. c. and 1 ; Gesenius' Heb. Gram(vid. T 4 2. Rem. mar by Conant, 8.4 compare 15. 4. d; also ^[ 6.2. Rem.,
:

and
1}

6.1. Rem.).
is

V.I. w.9.,

movable consonant and

mutable

pure as O does not quiesce in it, being ^ preceding being pronounced

^[ 6. 4. b

with a vocal sheva.

It is also

).

EXERCISE SIXTH

IMPURE VOWELS.

269

is pure as c) V.I. w. 10., Olaph does not quiesce in that vowel. Olaph is here a movable consonant according to the analogy of the Hebrew (vid.l. Rem.4.;also Geseniusr

Heb. Gram, by Conant,

<l)

23.2).
first

V.3. w.5.,

(the

one)

is

movable consonant does not quiesce

ces).
e)

in

pure f as 1 being a _L (vid. last referen-

V.3. w. 7.,
if it

is

pure as O

is

movable, Ol being sound-

ed as

had Sbeva, and forming a part of the syllable. T is pure and immutable as Ol does not V.3. w.9., f)
it,

quiesce in

being a guttural (comp.

is

^f

! 2.

a).

g) V.4. w.5., above).

h) V.7. w.3.,
*

pure as _iA
is

is

a dipthong (vid. a

is

pure as Ol

a guttural.

is pure as Ol is fi in Hebrew and is of t) V.7. w.9., course a movable consonant (vid. 13.Rem. _i. is also mutable according to the general rule (^[6. 2. Rem.).

2.

Find the Impure voxels

EXPLANATIONS.
and are both impure vowels a) Verse 1. word 1., as they have -i quiescing in them.
f

__

is

also

immutable

^[ 6. 4

).

270

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

is

b) V.I. w.3., 6. 1. e).

impure

as 1 quiesces in

it

(compare

it

is impure asOlapli quiesces in it, c) Y.I. w.ll., though does not often quiesce in that vowel ( 13. 1 and Eem.). The other cases are similarly explained.

REM. As a general thing, those vowels, which are pure are mutahle and those which are impure are immutable ; hut there are as in Hebrew many exceptions (vid. ^[ 6. 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i).

3.

Find the Mutable vowels (compare

:

1f 6. 2

Rem.)

EXPLANATIONS.
)

Verse

1.

word

10.,
*|[

is

mutable
c
)

(also pure, according

to the general rule (vid.

6. 1.

as

it is

in a simple sylla-

ble (compare ^[
b)

6. 4. d).
41

V.3. w.2.,

is

mutable as

it

has no quiescent and

it

is

long.
c)

V.4. w.2.,

is

mutable as

is

in a simple sylla-

ble.

4.

Find the Immutable vowels

EXEKCISE SEVENTH

DIPTHONGS.

271

EXPL AN ATION8.
REM.
a vowel
letter quieeces; or

Those vowels are immutable,a8 in Hebrew ; in which either from which a vowel letter has fallen away;

forte;

short vowels in mixed syllables which would inllebrew takeDaghesh and vowels immutable by nature.

o)

Verse

1.

word

1.,

are both immutable as well as

impure, having quiesccnts.

is in a b) V.I. w.2., simple syllable, is pure, and cannot properly be considered as immutable though O coalesces will it to some extent (vid. ^[4.2. Hem. ^[5.1.c T6.1.a).
i
;

c)

V.l.w.4.,
is

over So

is

lA^SiD

derived from

^o

immutable by position as Ml verb, and the L is in

reality doubled and the first would, if expressed, take Linea This is similar to Daghesh forte in Hebrew, and occultans. inn !<-, us in that language, the preceding vowel impure and

immutable (compare
<l)

48.B.Feminines).
is

V.I. w. 10.,

short but in a simple syllable

1"5.

l.g)
e)

and consequently not immutable.

V.I. w.10., (the first one) is immutable by nature A. Masculines) it is sometimes, however, like all the other vowds, mutable (vid. Ifnl.b; 45.2.b) as in "Hebrew (vid. Stuarts' Ileb. Gram. 127).
(48.
;

/) V.I. w.ll,
2. c).
</)

is

immutable as

quiescesin

it

6.

V.3. w.l.,

is

immutable as

it is

in a short

mixed

syllable.

272

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GBAMMAK.

EXEECISE SEVENTH.
1
Find
the J)ipthongs, Quiescents

7.

and

Otiant Letters

13;
I.

14).

Find the Dipihongs

2)
:

3.

Eem. 4

Palfrey's

Gram.

o_

o__ o

o_ o_

o_

EXPLANATIONS:
is a dipthong as o is in the same <z) Verse 1. word 2., syllable with _!_ without fully quiescing in it, though O so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be considered as ending in a vowel sound (vid. T"4.2.Rem.; *J"5. 1. c and
1
;

o_

Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant,
b) V-3. w.4.,
is

8. 4).

a dipthong for the same reason as

last.

c) Y.4. w.5., .__ is a dipthong as a unites with does not fully quiesce in it (vid. references above).

but

REM. It will be observed that dipthongs in Syriac as well as in Hebrew, are quiescent letters with heterogeneous vowels but in Hebrew the quiescent letters are movable while the reverse is true in
;

Syriac.

2.

Find the

Qwiescents

- ^ -llol -1 111 -T ol J - 1- * 1 ] - o all o ol ol oil 111 a Ul

UU

EXERCISE SEVENTH

OTIANT8.

273

ioi
.

oiui-

u oinnn
it

nin
b)

EXPLANATIONS:
unites with the

a) Verse 1. word 1., ^ is a quiescent as sound of the preceding vowel (13.3).

a regular quiescent letter but does not it forms a though dipthong and so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be considered as ending with a vowel sound (via. *|7.1.a).
V.I. w.2 M
is
;

iv fully quiesce,

c)

V.I. w.3.,

ant, 01

O is not quiescent as it is a movable consonnot being sounded. The following } however qui-

esces in the preceding vowel.

d) V-l. w.5., O (the first one) is in Uebrew take a vocal Sheva in JL
;

movable as
the

it

would

second O quiesces

e)

V.I. w.9 M

does not

quiesce in

as

it is

movable

(vid.

16. l.b).

/) V.I. w.ll., 1 quiesces in usual (13. l.Rem.).

quiesces in

IX
2., ** is

though

it is

rather un-

3.

Find the

Otiant Letters

~i.~i<~i._<_iwj._>_.t
a)

Verse
is

1.

word

otiant as

it is

a part of the suf-

fix

and

not followed by OOl (vid.

is

14. 2. b).
it

b) V.3. w.2., t

otiant because

follows a quiescent.

74

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

EXEKCISE EIGHTH.
1
P P

87

\9

FindLinece, Marhetono (jl^Ol^D),

Mehagyono

(p-..,iOlk>),

Sheva, where there

is

no accumulation of consonants.
i

/
:

1.

Find instances of Marhetono and Mehagyono

EXPLANATIONS:
a) Verse 5. word 7., >> Here is an accumulation of consonants,and to indicate that they could not all be sounded conveniently, Marhet<5no (or a horizontal line) would regularly be placed over > In this case the > would in Hebrew take silent Sheva. > must of course be pronounced with a vocal

Sheva (vid.7).
REM.
first

1.

There seems to be no instance of Mehagyono on the

page. A.T.Hoffmann in his

SyriacGrammar gives (A^**)

as

an

instance.
(vid.
7).

The x

is

to be

sounded as though a short

e followed it

REM.
there
is

2. It appears that Marhetono indicates silent Sheva when an accumulation of vowelless consonants, but under no other ^

silent Sheva, in reality, frequently occurs as circumstances, though *

in
is

Hebrew.

So Mehagyono represents vocal Sheva only when there

is

a similar accumulation of vowelless consonants,though no accumulation vocal Sheva often occurs.

when

there

2.

Find instances of Simple vocal Sheva

EXERCISE EIGHTH

VOCAL SHEVA.

275

EXPL AN ATION8.
would, in Hebrew, take a vocal a) Verse 1. word 1., Shcva, and as it cannot well be pronounced without the aid This canof a vowel or half vowel we must use the Sheva. not be considered as an instance of Mehagydno, for there is no accumulation of consonants which are destitute of vowels According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the (vid. $ 7). Syrians <//</ use the Sheva and pronounced consonants accordingly, as in Ilebrew (vid. 5.1).
6)

V.

1.

va

like

a under a
We
find

w.4., i* should

be pronounced with a vocal She-

(vid. references above).

RKM.
to

no characters to indicate Sheva and seldom any

/ /

Marhetono and Mehagyouo, still we are to pronounce the consonants where those characters would regularly occur, as we should if they had actually appeared.
indicate

a is pronounced with a Sheva. The prec) V.3. w.5., en ling syllable being simple, belongs to the final syll>

able.

d) V.3. w.9., 01

makes a part of the

first

syllable of the

word and should not be pronounced with vocal Sheva. is pronounced with a vocal Sheva as e) V.6. w.3.,

it

constitutes a part of the penultimate syllable, being preceded by a long vowel ( 15.4).

should /) V.9. w.9., (vid. last reference).

be pronounced with a vocal Sheva

3. Find the silent Shevas, where there is no cumulation of consonants destitute of vowels
:

ac.

.* r 01 ca

>

01

01

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

1.

word

1.,

A would

reguhirly in

Hebrew take a

276
silent
2. a.

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

Shcva (vid. Conants' Gesen. Ileb.Gram. b and Bern.).

10; also

*[8.

b) V.I. w/2., o would in Hebrew take a silent Sheva, being a movable consonant at the end of a syllable but in Syriac it so melts into its vowel,that the syllable may be coneidered as terminating in a vowel sound, and O does not take silent Sheva (vid. ^[ 4. 2. Kem. ; comp. references
;

above). c) V.3. w.l.,

ble.

^ takes
Ol
is

silent

Sheva

as

it

closes a sylla-

d) V.3. w.2.,

syllable being equivalent to

a movable consonant at the end of a fl in Hebrew and takes silent

Sheva.
OT is at the end of a mixed e) V.3. w.9., syllable with a short vowel, and takes silent Sheva though a guttural (vid.

^[8.4.d; l"6.1.f
3).

comp. Gesen. Heb. Gram, by Conant,

22.

a dipthong. It /) V.4. w.5., A forms with the vowel would in Hebrew be pronounced as a movable consonant and take a silent Sheva but in Syriac it so melts into its vowel that it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant and does not take a silent Sheva (vid. ^[4. 2. Rem.;
;

18.3.b).
g) V.9.W.5., * takes a silent Sheva as it is preceded short vowel and ends the antepenultimate syllable.

by a

4.

Find instances of Composite Sheva

GiAcnoicnoioioioioioioioioioi*
Verse 3. word.3., Ol would in Hebrew take a compoSheva and is pronounced as though it did here (vid. Gesen. Heb. Grammar by Oonant, 22. 3 ^[1.2.a).
a)
site
;

b) Verse 3. w.6., ** takes composite sheva for similar reasons as in the case above.

EXERCISE NINTH

LINEA OCCULTANS,

277

Ol does not take composite Sheva but silent c) V.3.W.9., Sheva simple as in Hebrew. The Gutturals take simple Sheva where other consonants would take silent Sheva (Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant,22.3).
.4. w.6.,

Ol takes composite

Sheva

(vid.

a above).

EXERCISE NINTH.
1
9.

Find instances of Linea Occultans

(8)

O1O1O1O1O1O1O1O1O1O1OI*
EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

1.

word

2.,

OJ

indicating that the Ol

B., also Rem.).

is

is an instance of Linea occultans, not sounded (vid. 8 12.1. A. aud

;

V.I. w.3., OJ is another instance of Linea occultans. horizontal line under Ol shows that the letter is not to be pronounced. In this case o begins the syllable. The othe cases are similarly explained.
b)

The

278

EXERCISES IN SYBIAC GRAMMAR.

EXBECISE TENTH.
1
10.

Find on what Syllables the Tone

rests (
*v
''v

9)
i

A
>

V*

"

u]

fooi Lo 0010 Lo
n
x
'

y1
w.j
')

*i

'

|ocn

i" v ZoA

-^
*

x n

^1 jooi

OOI SO Ol

%A]
7

JOOI
A*
p

AA.A
*

Zo^ ^

l*t.tt*'

\O

O1 r

(OO1 1

0*P0
]
|,-M

ZOOI
.

f *

LO,.
K

O1)

Ol->
1>

(001
7
.

C* M ^001
1
.*

fc*. QJ 1 0010 QJ OA >Ol

fcS*.

a*
*

(J

oi_o
,_.!D
"
'

* *t

(001 J
[>

?>
*,

^So

cnSn* ^_i 01
I

V
|

tf '

o> JOT \VL

*l

QJ ^al

O1 r
T

(J

OOl (OO1 QJ

"*
CUJ
'r*.^

501 tA_l

K0
Ala
is

*.**. 7* >O1 \SA O-J

(OO1

%a]

]OO1
II*
|J

|>

1^ ii

10

*^'
01,.

|OO1

10

oul

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Yerse
2).

1.

word
it

1.,

the final syllable and takes

(

the tone because

ends with a movable consonant

9.1

and
b)

_T

V.I. w.2.,

a| takes the tone, as

in the final syllable

oA
Ol

is

and

not movable (vid. ^[4. 2. Rem.; wa are not sounded.

*|"8. 3.

9.1

and

2).

c) Y.I. w.4., l> is the penultimate syllable and has the tone according to the general rule (9.1).
*

d) Y.S. w.2., oi r is the final syllable because Ol is movable.

and takes the tone

EXERCISE ELEVENTH

MARKS OP PUNCTUATION. 279

e)
>

V.3. w.5., 1 is the penultimate and takes the tone. belongs to the last syllable (15. 4. d).
it

/) V.4. w.5., tOOl takes the tone because movable consonant.

g) V.5.

ends with a

is inserted above as receiving the tone w.3., to the general rule, though it is somewhat doubtaccording ful whether, in such cases the tone was on the penultimate or

Qa

ultimate syllable ( 9. 1. Bern.). favor the former opinion; there

Euphony would seem

is

to

another instance of the

same kind

in v.7. w.3.

EXERCISE ELEVENTH.
f
11.

Find the Marks of Punctuation (10)

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

1.

word

4.,

is

mark of punctuation more gen-

erally used to denote the end of a period, but sometimes used in the middle to denote a slight pause similar perhaps to our comma. It is used so here (l0.d).
6)

V.I. w.l5.,

denotes the
indicates the

full close

of the period.

c) V.5. w.4.,

end of the protasis (10.a).

d) V.5. w.7 M * is supposed to indicate the longest pause of any mark of punctuation. It is sometimes written tnus :i (10.c). * indicates the end of the apodosis(vid.10.c). e} V.6. w.5.,

280

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

EXEKOISB TWELFTH.
f
12.

Find instances of Ribui (6)

..rnn v\^rt
r >

r
,

1M> |^MO

EXPLANATIONS.
over the word is an instance of a) Verse 3. word 4., Ribui indicating that the preposition has a plural suffix (
16.0). 6.1.Rem.; b) V.4. w.2., here Ribui indicates that the noun over which it is placed is in the plural number though it is rendered as if it were in the singular. This word occurs only in the plural form (44.Rem.6). The same is true in respect to v.4. w.4. c) V.4.W.7., Ribui indicates simply the plural form of the noun as above.

EXERCISE THIRTEENTH.
f
Read the Syriac
Verse
aithau
:
r r

13.

//
1.,

B erish'ith
/

aithau
/

vo meletho v*hu mel'tho ~

t

>

vo

voth aloho. valoho aithau vo hu meletho.

EXERCISES IN 8TRIAG GRAMMAR,

281

V.
V.

2.,

hono aithau vo
;

v*rishith
.'

voth aloho.

3.,

* .'" . : _' kul bidheh hhe vo v'vel'odhau ophelo hh'dho hhvoth

:

medh6m dahhvo.
V.
4.,

b6h

hhaye hh*vo. v*hhaye aithayhun nuhro

dhavnaynosho.
V.
5.,

v ehu nuhero v'hheshuko man hurt v*hheshuko lo

V.

6.,

hhe vo varnosho dheshtadhar me"n aloho * shem6h

yuhhanon.
V.
7.,

hono etho

sohedhutho dh'nashedh al nuh*ro.

d'kulnosh n'haymen bidheh.

/

'

e V. 8., lohu he vonuh ro.

elo dh'nashedh al nuh'ro.

V.

9.,

aithau vo ger

nuhero dhashroro-.dh'manhar lekulnosh

detho rol*mo.
/

V.

10.,b ol

__ mo h
e

vo. v*olemo v'idheh h*vo. v'ol'mo lo yadheh.

EXPLANATIONS.
X

a)

Verse
is

1.

word

1.,

*r

is
e

the

first syllable,

O not mak-

ing a syllable of

itself.

The

answers to the Sheva in Hee,

brew, and
b)

pronounced like a very short

2.,

V.

1.

w.

*1

is

perhaps best pronounced like

ai,

In oA, o havthough the a sound is scarcely perceivable. ing a heterogeneous vowel, does not fully quiesce, still it so melts into the vowel that it can hardly be considered as a

282

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAifMAR.

Ol
is

movable consonant (vid T4.2. Rem.). it takes Linea occultans (8) and the
c)

not sounded as
(

** is otiant

14. 2).

V.I. w.3., IOOT. OJ

occultans,

is not sounded on account of Linea and o becomes vocal by beginning a syllable.

the a

scarcely "perceivable in pronunciation, though being at the beginning of a syllable it is a It is at the same time a gutregular movable consonant. tural letter and must have the sound of the Spiritus lenis of
is

d) Y.I. w.10., 1 is sound that it

pronounced

a.

Olaph so unites

with.

the Greeks (vid. 11.2.Rem.).

is pronounced broad and long as e) Y.I. w.ll., }o. _L has a quiescent (13.1. Rem.).
:

it

3 is pronounced thus kul, u taking the /) Y.3. w.l., broad and short sound. The -L. is short here as it has no quiescent (vid. 3. Rem. 3).
g) Y.3.W.2., oi,-4s bi'dheh.
otiant.
]

quiesces in JL, and

-i

is

Ol is a

movable consonant though a guttural /

v"veleothau.
r

letter.

h) Y.3.W.4.,

must be sounded with a

is as-

pirated.
i)

vocal Sheva (vid. 1"8.2). * as well as OJ

. a
J

being preceded by a vowel

is otiant.

"

Y.3. w.9., fOOflj dahhvo.

first

Ol

ced with the sound. j ) Y.4.

syllable.
7

movable and pronoun_L has a broad and short

is

5>.

w.5., **A thay.

is

short and broad as

it

has

so melts into the vowel that it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant (vid. ^f 4.
2. Rem.).
/

no quiescent though -

k) Y.6.W.I.,
is

]ooi hhe vo.

]

Ol is

pronounced with Sheva.

vocal and

quiesce? in J_

EXERCISE FOURTEENTH

TRANSLATION.

283

EXERCISE FOURTEENTH.
1 14
Translate
Literally
:

Verse
lie

1.

(or it the)
it (the)

In (the) beginning was (the) Word and Word was with God and God was he

or

Word.

2.

This was in (the) beginning with God.

3.

Every

(thing)

by

(the)

hand of him was

and

without him also not anything was which was.

4.

lives

In him life (lit. lives) was, and life was were) (the) light of (the) sons of man.

(lit_

/>.

eth
;ui(l

it) light, into (the) darkness, shinor (lit. causing permitting to shine 23.2.a.#), did not comprehend it. darkness (the)

And

he

(or

6.

(There)

was a son of man, who was sent from

(lit.

God, whose name

7.

the

name of him)

(was) John.

This (man) came for a witness, who shall (should) bear witness concerning (the) light, that every man might believe through (the) hand of him.
8.

He

was not

(lit.

not he was) (the) light

but

(came

tor a witness)

who might bear witness concern-

ing (the) light.

284
9.

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

For

(that light)

shineth 'upon world.

10.

was (the) light of truth, which who cometh into (the) man, every
in the

(He) was in (the) world

(the)

(lit.

and
not

world was by his hand and

him.

world was) (the) world did

know

EXPLANATIONS:
a)
the is

Yerse

1.

word

1.,

no distinct character in Syriac for It was originally expressed by the the definite article. noun in the emphatic state but this is by no means uniThere are many cases, as in tlebrew. versal in laterSyriac. in which the definite and indefinite articles have no word nor character to represent them, and they must be supplied
supplied.

A^JU^.

In translating

this

word,

There

is

in translating
b)

(45.1).

V-1. w.2
-

and 3., TOOI ^oioAaf was.

to

The

substan-

tive

verb ]ooi

be,iu connection

with the other substantive

.-iCnoA*])

verb A^l

to be, (third person masculine imperfect tense, was (38.1,2).

forms the

001 is a pronoun of the masculine c) V.I. w.5., OO1O gender. It is pleonastic md need not be rendered (55). As the neuter gender in Syriac is included in the masculine

and feminine oqi might be considered masculine and may mean he or it (43).
_

either as neuter or

d) V.3. w.3., |ooi is rendered was,

and

is

in the imperfect

without wOioZu]
e)

(vid.

65.B.a).

V.3. w.7.,
is

opi

is

rendered was, same as

\t>

last.

The

same

true in respect to fooij (v.3. w.9).

w.6.,

/) V.3.
together.

fU* and
first

The

means

should be taken J>ojLk5 (v.3. w.8) 'any and the second something or

EXERCISE riFTKKNTH
limit/.

ril.\.N;KS

OF CONSONANTS. 285

Taken
Y.-l.

toiretln-r

they should be rendered any thing.

The noun always is rendered life. form though it usually takes a singular iiii-anin^ and has sometimes a singular and sometimes a pluHere it takes a verb singular and in v.4. w.4., a ral verb. verb plural.
<!)

w.2.,

i-i-M

t:iki's

the plural

h) V.5. w.4.,

of

tin-

is a participle but tense of the verb (64.2.A. present

;

jouio

it

is

used instead
also ^f

andRem.;

18.5).
t)

V.6. w.3.,

>>A}> means

(lit.)

is

sent;

but with ]oOl

it

forms the imperfect tense.

EXERCISE FIFTEENTH.
1
Find
the

15.
Assimilated

Changes of Consonants

Dropped
1.

Added

Transposed

Exchanged (12).

Find those which are changed by assimila:

tion

All of those letters which take Linea occultans, are in reality assimilated (vid.
12.

2.

Find those which are changed by transposi:

tion

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

6.

word

3.,

i?A*|>

is

in

the Ethpa. conjugation

286 and

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

and A are transposed, the appropriate place

for

A be

ing before

(12.2).

Find those dropped :

3.

Consonants

which have
.

been

nnnnnnn
EXPLANATIONS.
4.,

a)

Verse

1.

word

]t&&

is

from

flic, const.

A\V>>

1 is

dropped.
b)

V.3. w.2., O1,

fc>. 1 final is

dropped to give place

for

the suffix.
c)

V.3, w.7., 2ooi

Table).

is

dropped to form the feminine dropped before the second dropped

J.

(37
e)

d) V.4. w.7., l*-L*-iDj. 1 is

Y.5. W.4., >OUio*

is

after the preforma-

tive So*

/) V.7.
fore l.

w.7.,

and

v.9.
j

w.
.

7.,

^Ailoj.

is

dropped be-

g) V.7. w.8.,

SfiiOlJ*

] is

dropped before S0

4.

Find consonants which are added

-iOio

1A o 1A

^010
<

o
1

wiOio

]A

1
1 ? 1

o s 1 -D 1 01 o wcno 1 Z > 01 o 1 ] ^oou '|o'|Sool1oi]> |Aloil1jj1> ^ou a

1
)

01
01

?
1

-010

l;ioi?ilolol>
a
is

01

EXPL AN ATIONS.
a) Yerse
1.

word

1.,

A^i_j>.

added as a

prefix.

EXERCISE FIFTEENTH
V.I. w.2., ^oioA^f.

CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 287

1
is

1)

prosthetic (38.1). **C3lo

is

suffix.

c)

V.I. w.4., ]A\k).

1 is

is

added from the construct

is

state

and

added because the word

.

in the emphatic state.

at the

.,
I

emphatic
j

d) V.I. w.10., (OL^. state (^[18. y).

%9
&

is

added

end

to

form the

<

V.2. w.l., poi. Perhaps

should be considered as adbe a kind of emphatic state

f

ded here because poi seems

of
iOi,

to

though we have omitted

above as the word usual-

ly appears in the emphatic form.

f)

V.3.W.6 ,1,^.

] is

added

to

form the feminine.

<7)V.3. w.7.,

Zooi. L
]
> *

is

added

to

form the feminine.

state

//)

V.4. w.2.,

1 is

added to form the emphatic

is is

(11 8.v).
i)

V.4.

r \v.. >.,

inflection

and

*|

jOOLAj). ^oou at tin- beginning

]

added

in

the course of

prosthetic (38).

k)

V.4.W.6., ]joiOJ.
y).
tr.3.,

is

added to form the emphaticstate

(118.
1)

V.5.

PQA**S.
7
7

is

added

to

form the emphatic

state.

joilio. LD w.4., the course of inflection.

m) V.5.

is

a preformative occurring in

r
I

ri)

V.5. w.7., OL-DJjj.

is

added

in the

Aphel conjuga-

tion.
o) V.6. w.3., ??A*1>. A inflection (coinp. 1"15.2 a).

and

are added in the course of

j>)

V.7. w.l., >OI

i>.

J is a j>re formative.

288

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

q) V.7. w.8., flection.

^-kuou
**

^OU
J is

is

added in the course of

in-

r)

V.8. w.6., >Ql-m J>

added in the course of inflec-

tion.
s)

V.9. w.9., ]Vo

\\S

is

added to form the emphatic

state.

5.

Find Consonants exchanged

for each other

for } before Ol

There are no cases on page first. 1 is often exchanged and vice versa. Other letters also exchange

with each other (12.4).

EXEKCISE SIXTEENTH.
1
Find
the

16.
exchanged
15).
trans-

changes of vowels thrown back posed dropped and added (

1.

Find those which are thrown back

EXPLANATIONS:
a)
i

Verse 1. word

2.,

^OT^U

'|*

_L

is

thrown back from

tol(!5.2.A.b;
b)

13,1.3).

Y.I. w.7., -oioA*1

same

as above.

KXKl,

IV.KNTII

CHANGES OF VOWELS.
is

28*>

*)

V.I. w.ll., loi-^o.

_L
_L
is

thrown back from

]

to O.

d) V.3. w.2., Oir4^ account, of the suffi'x.

>')

thrown back from

to

on

\' .").

w.4.,
its

ioulo.
1). **

ped and

v)\vcl

falls

the characteristic of Aphel is dropback upon the preformative of the

*

participle k>

(23.
f*

/) V.6. w.3.,
;/)

>>A|>

__i is

thrown back from

,
T

to j.

V.10. w.8., Ol-ir-l. _L falls back from

to
z

(36;

18.37), as the vowel -I. of the original form VJ,^ is tuid ;i suffix appended (116.2. e, and4.Z ; ^[18.37).

dropped

2.

Find those which are exchanged

*
.

r
,

*
,

for

for

for

EXPLANATIONS:
is 3. word 2., cn,-^ is derived from ,. of in the course inflection and is added JL and JL droj>ped a the word to here in from thrown back 1 (T"16.1.rf) being

a)

Verse

the suffix state.

Some would
c

prefer to say that

is

chang-

ed into
b)

JL, (T16.4.

and

5. d).
is

V.4. w.7.,

]! i"m>
;

changed into

in the con-

struct plural (45.2.a

T V

118.1).

c) V.5. w.4.,
F

iouio. In the second

into

as the third radical of the

is

changed verb from which iouio is

syllable,
T r .
-

is

derived,

Resh (23

1).
f

d) V.7. w.8.,
T

V)iOU v *

is

derived from

^o| *
.

ischangpassing from
*

c ,l ij^o

and

in the last part, into

in

IVal to Aphel.

But

it

is

better to say that

is

dropped

290 and

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

added in one case, the other (116.4.h 5.r).

;

and

dropped and

derived from ^r, and has the appearance of being changed into _L on "account of the suffix (36.A.Rem.) but J_ is dropped and _L thrown back
e)

V. 10.

w.8.,

Ol.V,.
;

is

xx

added in

upon

(116.1.0 and 4.6; 118.37).

3.

Find those vowels, which are transposed

EXPLANATIONS.
with O is a) Terse 4. w.6., IJOIQJ from >OU or >OOU. transposed in the emphatic state from the last to the first part of the word (vid-llS.y).

The other

cases are all similarly explained.

4.

Find those vowels which are dropped

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Yerse
7
;

1.

word

2.,

nOloA*} -has an additional

X is

syllable

wiO!O__

but the original vowel

it

not dropped as w*
;

quiesces in
b)
_!_ is

making
]A^SP

it

immutable (vid.!5.3
derived from
|)lO,

48. A).

V.I

w.4.,

is

construct Al^So.

dropped to form the construct

is

state

and JL of the con-

struct state

dropped

in the emphatic state because the ad-

EXERCISE SIXTEENTH
.

CHANGES OF VOWELS.

291

dftional syllabi-;
c)

is

added (vid.15.3; compare

is

^[16.5.6).
is

V.3. w.2.,
tin;

Ol,-*V-^

derived from H*
is

dropped

ami from
the
si
i

emphatic

state,

dropped

to give place to

ili

(compare

^[ 16.5.d).

f/)

V.3. w.6., }r** is the

(vi.l.

feminine form of -*

is

drop-

ped
e)

16.5.7).
I* !*)>
is

V.4. w.7., )

dropped from the plural

ab-

solute of

Aia

in passing into the construct state (vid.

"

15.3,

and Rem.;

/)

V.5. w.7., Oiaijl

is

Aphel of ^o> with a

suffix pro-

of the verb is dropped and noun. In taking the suffix, of the suffix added (vid. Il6.5.?rc; 118.7).
g) V.7. w.3.,
1

AOJOIO&
"*

is

in the feminine emphatic state,

*

from the noun

>OICD, and, in

the course of inflection

is

dropped (vid.li6.5.^; 118.17).

j *

h) V.7. w.8.,

^.SQ*OU

is

a verb from ^lof, and

inflection,

is

in the
in the

first

Aphel conjugation. In the course of part of the word is dropped and

in the last part,

and

other vowels added (vid.^[16.5. r;

i)

J[18.22).

V.9. w.5.,

!>;>

is

compounded of > and f>^

The latter

a noun in the emphatic state from \ falls away in taking an additional syllable (15. 3) to form the emphatic state (vid. ^[ 16. 5. * [ 18 32).
is
;

A-)

V.9.W.9.,
state

]Sn\v\

is

compounded of

and ]V>\%, em-

phatic

phatic. state 16.5.<; 118.36).

Z)

from 2oAi. is dropped in forming the em($lf>.31 as an additional syllable is received (^f
f

V.10. w.8.,

on,

is

a verb with a

suffix,

derived from

292

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

In taking the
is

suffix,

dropped and

falls

back

upon the

first

radical

(36

^[18. 37).

5.

Find those vowels which are added

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

1.

word

2.,

^afloA*).

is

added in the course

of inflection as a part of the sufformative of the verb.

b) V.I. w.4.,

IA^D

is is

in the emphatic state

from the con-

struct state AALo.

16.4.6
;

dropped and

added (compare ^[

11^.

d).
is

c)

V.I. w.10., ^OlSL

in the emphatic state, but as

it al-

ways appears in this state it is perhaps better not to place (at the end of the word) among the vowels added.
..
.

d) V.3. w.2., oi,_tt>

is

derived from

is

dropped
state

and a new vowel,

Ir*].
is

added.

Then from the emphatic

;

_L

is

added

dropped to give place to the suffix with 46. 1. a ; (via. compare ^[16. 4. c
__

which
*|f

18.

ra).
T Om

* is

e)

V.

3.

w.

4.j

*uQlo,S\)0

from

\AO

is

added

with the

suffix.

f)

V.3. w.6., lr** is the feminine

form for H*

is

drop

ped and -1 added.

EXERCISE SIXTEENTH
*
9

CHANGES OP VOWELS.
assumed over

293

y) V.3. w.9.,

focnj.

is

j to aid in the

pronunciation

(vid.^[18.i).

added
i)
is

1} V.4. w.fl., IJOIQJ is derived from >OU or in the emphatic state (vid.^flS.y).
-

joou.

is

V.4. w.7.,
?

l*i^ia>.
.

at the

Mssiunod (vid. 15.4.6).

0P"V

The remainder of the word

beginning of the word is comis

pounded of JJJD and Uu|.

7

The former

in the construct

and,in passing from the absolute to the construct plural, plural, X

is

dopped and

added

(vid.

15.3 and 4;

^fl'6. 4. e\

18.1).

k) V.5. w.3., emphatic state is the

I)

pQ*a
T

This

is

from

^O.
JL
is

though the
added.

more usual form.

This
is is

V.5. w.4., iouio.

7

a participle active, Aphel,

from >ou.

The

first

assumed, forming a part of the

preforrnative (vid.^[l8.5).
*

m)

V.5. w.7., OlO>> I

is

V
is

a verb in the Aphel conjugation

in the preformative.
is

assumed from ^i>. assumed with the suffix (vid.^16.4/; 118.7).

n) V.(\ w.2.,
pai-pO
7 f

also

is

in the

emphatic state and

is

ad-

ded
o)
T 7

(vid.l"l8.9).

V.6. w.3.,
^H

>>A|>
7

^*
is

of compounded *

and the verb

formative. in Ethpaal.

is added as a >>A], Ethpaal from >,** part of the preThe first JL is assumed in the course of inflection

p) V.7.

w.3.,

lAojOim.^

is

in the feminine emphatic state

from joico. In the course of inflection and JL is dropped (vid.^[ 1 6.4# ([18.17).
;

and

are addrd

q) V.7. w.4., JOICQJJ is

compounded of the

relative >

and

294
*

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

7

the verb jcnmj,

Aphel of
*
T

JOICD,
18.18).

is

assumed in Aphel

in the course of inflection (vid.

r) Y.7.W.8.,
7

^SOiOU

is

a verb in the Aphel conjugation

*

from

^StO|

In the course of inflection,

is

in the first part

of the

word

dropped and
7

added, and in the latter part

ti

of the word,
22).

is

dropped and
7

added

(^[16.4.
p

^[18.

1 9'r9

is

compounded of
emphatic
state

>

and ]>;*
\

The
If

latter is a

noun

in the

from

or >;*.

considered as derived from the former, Z_ is dropped on account of the additional syllable (l5.3),and, in consequence,
>

_!_

is

having no vowels, > takes the new vowel _I_ (15. 4. 6). also added to form the emphatic state (vid. ^[ 1 6.4. i
;

118.32).
V.9. w.9., ]SQ^>sL
phatic state from SQAl*
is

compounded of

and ]V)\\, em-

phatic state as a syllable is

.4. A;

is dropped in forming the emadded (15.3), and _L is assumed

118.36).

EXERCISE SEVENTEENTH.
1
Find
the

17. and Preforma-

Suffixes

and
lives

Prefixes, Sufformatives

(16;
:

36;

46).

1.

Find the Prefixes

7

Q ,Q & O A

77 Q
}

} A,

fi

f f

EXERCISE SEVENTEENTH

SUFFIXES AND PREFIXES. 295

>

1 a

EXPLANATIONS.
a)
b)

Verse

1.

word

1.,

O is a prefix preposition.

V.3. w.2.,

JD is
it.

a prefix preposition with the vowel

thrown back upon

c)

> is a relative pronoun prefixed to the V.3. w.9., >. two rowelless consonants occurring together, _L is assumed to aid in pronunciation. The other instances need

verb, and,

no explanation

2.

Find the Suffixes

H

*
.

Ol_ wOlO_ Ol_ Ol_

Ol

Cl_ Gl_ Ol_

EXPLANATIONS:
n

a)

Verse

3.

word

2., (71

is

a suffix pronoun with

its

union vowel.
$)

V.3. w.4., wiOio..,

is

a suffix pronoun added to a prepoto AJ]

is

sition,

though the same form when attached

a suf-

formative.

REM.

We

use the terms sufformative and preformative to indiare suffixed or prefixed to words as necesto

cate those letters which

sary appendages

in order

form

particular
states,

conjugations, tenses,

moods, persons, numbers, gender* or

of inflection.

Such are
word

men
to

according to the course formative letters and properly constisuffixes

tute a part of the

which they are attached, while

and prefixes are appendages which have more distinct significations of themselves and do not necessarily compose a part of the word to which they am attached.

296
3.

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

Find the Preformatives

So

V A T

-J

-tfu

-J

Lo

EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse 1. word 2., } is, strictly speaking,a preformative but the letter seems to constitute a part of the word through all of its changes and does not so properly come under this head as it does under "consonants added"
;

6)

Y.5. w.4.,

So

is

a preformative added in the course of

inflection.
c)

V.5. w.7.,

} is

a preformative added in the Aphel conare preformative letters

jugation.
d] V.6. w.3.,

added in the

Ethpaal conjugation.
e)

V.7. w.8.,

JOU

is

a preformative added in the Aphel

future.

4.

Find the Sufformatives

7

no_ _cnc_

0.

|t\

jicno_-.

?.
|

"V L ^OCTL_ \

EXPLANATIONS:
a)

Verse

1.

word

2.,

^qio_

is

a sufformative as

it

forms,

according to the inflection, the third person singular masculine preterite, though it is in reality a noun suffix attached
.

to the original
b)

noun A*
is
p

being.

V.I. w.4., VA
state,

the sufformative ending of the emphais

tic

or rather 1

the ending of the emphatic state

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH

PARSE.

297
emphatic
is

and A
formed.
c)

ot

the construct from which the

V.3. w.6.,

is

the emphatic ending.

d) V.3. w.7., L takes the place of } and is a letter in constituting the feminine gender.
e) V.4. w.f>., inflection.

formative

^oou
_

is

a sufformative found in the course

of

/) V.4.

w.7.,

is

the ending of the emphatic state.

g) V.6. w.2., | is an emphatic ending.

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH.
1
18.
:

Parse
)

Verse

1.

word

1.,

A.

>

ja

compounded of the pre-

position

a w and
x
x

the

noun AjuJto beginning.

the ablative case
(

is

a pre;

position governing
84).
a-i)

AA^O in

75.5

52

AJL*J>

is

a denominative noun (41) from the root

/irincipal,

chief,

head (Hebrew EJ8H Chaldee

its

ijijjo )

form(Ml

by adding
is

to

root the formative letters AA, (>39.2).

The vowel
13.3). Ajjfcai

addt^d

and aids to form the syllable AJ (15.4;

first

is

of the

declension as

its

vowels are im-

mutable (48. A) tliough

flection
(se<- its

plural)

it is somewhat irregular in its inthird person, singular number(44).

298

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GBAMMAR.

.<

if
and
at the

..i

UO, plural ]AxJLi>.

compose Ribui.

same
it is

points over > in the plural point belonging to > still belongs to > time is part of Ribui (6.2.Rem.) feminine

The two

The

gender as

the same as in Hebrew and

It

is

transferred from

that language (43.2.Rem.2).

ends also in (A a feminine

termination in the emphatic state, ) being the regular emIn the phatic termination (vid. last reference and 45.3.5).
absolute state the form
is

Axi^i, emphatic 1 AjuLj

45;

in the ablative case after the preposition 23

it

and governed by

(75.5).
b)

Y.I. w.2.,

^OloAa]

is

an auxiliary verb from

jj\

to be

(vid.Lexicon).

L-^\
-

is

formed from the noun

is

being,

with

a prosthetic
7

1 it is

-iOloA^|

irregular

takes the

noun suffix

derived from a noun, though that suffix is here to be considered as a sufformative (*[ 17.4. a; ^j" 17.2.
j(Jlo_, as

Rem.)
digm)

neuter

66.2

19)
1.

singular

number (38.1. Paramasculine gender

;

third person

(38.

Paradigm)

(vid.last reference)

indicative

mood(65.1 compare (18.4)

it is

preterite imperfect tense,as*|oOl immediately follows(18.4.

Rem.;

38.2;68. A). Inflect to the person where

found.

First person

common gender

** A/)

/ am), second masculine (

*
i

^Aa]
with
B.2).
c)

(thou art), second feminine

is)

T iAj|

(thou

art),

third

masculine ^OloAj) (he

its

(vid. 38-1. Inflection).

It agrees

nominative lA^So, though of a different gender (80.

V.I. w.3., loOl

a

is

a substantive verb signifying

irregular

to

be

(38.1) verb
it

V verb (38. 1)
effect

third person

singular number.

(32) neuter ( 19) "When used with another

38. 1)

has the

of

Vau

conversive in Hebre

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH

PAUSING.

299

masculine gender and used here merely as a helping verb

to the preceding, in forming the imperfect tense($38.2).
d)

1.

w.4.,
to

}A\LD ivord

is

a substantive noun, derived

(vid.

from

VnLo
b.

speak,

forming in the absolute state ]^Lo

),

39. 2.

third

example

construct state A\lo, emphatic

first 6. 4. c).

declension (45. feminines

A; 48.B. feminines;
plural absolute,
third
per45. 3)

Decline. Singular (vid.above)

construct AKVo emphatic

\k&D

son singular

feminine

emphatic

state

nominative cose to

looi uiOloLf(80.B.2).

compounded of the conjunction and tho pronoun OCT. O is a copulative conjunction (53. It connects the two nouns, a prefix (53. 1. Hern.). 1)
e)

V.l. w.5.,

0010

is

")

ocn

may
is

Syriac
43)
ular.

be translated by he or i', as the neuter gender in included in the masculine and feminine (^[ 14. c:

a personal
It is

pronoun separate (16) third person singpleonastic and need not be rendered in translaFor explanations of the next three words
vid.

ting (55).

supra.

f) V.I.

w.9.,

2o^

with,

a preposition governing

(52

84).
0.,

g) V.I. w.l

}CT_^ (iod

taken from the Hebrew

God. and that probably derived from nibjfc is a denominative noun taking the Syriac emphatic terminal on
*)

VI

is

the ending of a large

number of Syriac nouns,

-\\\^-

timcs indicating the feminine and sometimes the emphatic

state (43.2;
45.3).

Some nouns always appear

1 *

in the

em-

It

plmtic or suffix state

45.1. Hem.).

|oi-^ has the form ot

300
the

EXERCISES IX SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

emphatic

state.
o

It is a substantive
1.

noun and may be

declined like -*"".. (Decl.

45.masculines

A)

third person

singular-masculine-emphatic state

ablative case

and gov-

erned by

2oL (75.5).
1
?

h) V.I. w.ll.,

|oC^o. O and, is a
]oilL
God,
is

prefix conjunction con-

tinuing the sense.

in the nominative to
vid. supra.

)oOT
i)

^OToA^

(80).
is

For further explanations

V.I. w.l 4., O01

a pleonastic pronoun (vid. supra).

wore?, is

/) V.I. w.l 5.,

IOOT

|A^Lo

in

the nominative after

^cnoLf (80;
-p
o

7\l8.b).

k) V.2. w.l.,

pOl

this, it

same.

It has the

form of the em9

phatic state

though

should be considered as one of the

f

original forms of the word.

The forms

are ^Oi and poi

(17)
it

a demonstrative pronoun

singular-masculine-nomi.

native case to }oqi _cnoZLi] (80)

used as a noun.

Decline

(vid.17).
1)

V.3. w.l.,

^3

all,

every, each, (58.B.2.#,6)

a pronoun

used as an adjective (58.B.2.5) the noun thing to which

it

belongs being implied declined according to decl. 1. of nouns third person-masculine-absolute state. The im-

plied

noun would be

in the nominative to ]oOl; or

^O itself

might be considered as a collective noun and in the nomi

native to looi (80. A.I and Bern.).
* X

ra)

V.8. w.2.,

Olpila by

the

hand of him or by

his

hand

O is a prefix preposition governing H^* The whole word is compounded of the preposition 2 by, the noun ^t emphatic

}rl 7mnf?,and the

suffix
,-

Ol_ of him or

his.

,u}

is

a de-

rivative

noun (39), from

and takes a

suffix

(Hebrew TI

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH

PARSING.

301

Chaldee*p)-2nd.declension-singular. Absolute and constr.,*,

*

r l, construct ^p*!, ri|,pluralabs<>lute r* * emphatic emphaticl * * r Mr *l third singular masculine (45. masculines B) ablative case

and governed by
to the

(75.5).

Ol_
\

is

a suffix pro-

emphatic .state and masculine (16. Table) a)-third singular

B.2) and governed
ri)

noun attached

falls

away (46.1.

genitive case (54.

74).

by ^Jl (16
to be is

16. B;

V.3.W.3., looi

here rendered was, the imperfect

It agrees

being sometimes thus formed (65).

"f at

with

o)

V.3. w.4., .-1010,% v")Q

7

and

without

him

compounded
suffix
f*

of the conjunction

o, the preposition

,VV>, and the

a conjunction as above. ^V") It governs its suffix without is a preposition with a suffix. "7 ..7 *jOiO- vO!O- him, is a noun suffix plural (16.Table)

pronoun

wicnio^.

o and,

is

third singular masculine

ablative case

and governed by

jilo
and

(75.5).
also not, neither

p) V.3. w.5., fla]

\P 2>| also.
]3
S*
.

compounded of JI

not,

2>| is
is

a conjunction(53.2.a) and continues the

qualifies 2oqi.

sense.
q)

not

an adverb and
.

Y.3. W.6.,
r*j, is

(rM one, any one, a certain one, certain, any;

pronoun (58.10.a and b) or a numerical adjecHere it has the sense of an indefinite pronoun tive (50.2). singular feminine and belongs like an adjective to the noun
from
a

*0^-io (58.10.a).
) is changed into 2 to r) V.3.W.7., 2opi to be from looi* form the feminine (19. Table). Imperfect and parsed like

(vid.

n.supra)

302

EXERCISES IN SYBIAC GRAMMAR.

V.3. w.8.,

s)

^o,So any
;

thing,

has a similar meaning to

It is It is
.?

that of },** above

but has more the sense of a noun.

f

sometimes used in the same manner as

r**
1*

(58.10.6).

the pause between }oOl and iO,__io

tance (^f 11. c]

is

rM belongs to it, as one of minor impor-

10)-third singular feminine-absolute state-

nominative case to Zooi (80).

t)

V.3. w.9.,
is

tOl> which was

(

compounded of }ool and j.

17.2)
is

>

which

a relative pronoun
looi

in the third singu-

lar

nominative to

u) Y.4. w.l., oi-T) in him,

compounded of

in

and OL.

him.
i

is

a preposition, governing the ablative (75.5);

(

OL.

is

a suffix pronoun

l6.Table;

52.Table)-third person

singular

in the ablative case

54.B.l).
. .^K ?
| i

and governed by

75.5.

compare

v) V.4. w.2.,

?y^, is

a verbal noun(concrete)(40Ta-

bleA). It occurs always" in the plural form(44.Kem.6),generally with a singular signification (vid.Lexicon;

80.2)-deriv-

ed from V-*
plural forms
is
its

to

Ztve-appears in the emphatic form,like other

usual form.

mentioned(44.Kem.6 and45.Rem.)though this It is an anomalous noun having no

person plural masculine (45.Eem.)regular declension-third _

nominative case to fool (80.2. Z>).

*
7

w) Y.4.
tion

w.4., JJL^O

and life
This

and,

and )^-M
it

life.

is

compounded of the conjuncparsed like the same word

a plural verb (80.

above, only
2. a).

is

in the nominative to

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
x) V.4. w.5., ^oouZu")

PARSING.

303
third person

was, literally were

plural masculine, and agrees with jl!l. in gender and number (80.2.a; vid.also c. and d. supra).
y) V.4. w.6.,

IJOIQJ

light, is

a verbal noun from 5ou

to

shine

an infinitive form in the emphatic state like

W^QO
The io

from

^^o

40.Table, II. A.

a).

Infinitive absolute >OU,

iou

or ioou, emphatic
in the

state 1>OU, ]jou, ]>O1QJ.

is

which appears
39.2.6.and
40),

infinitive here dropped (compare though the emphatic form is the one in

which

it

usually appears-declensionIV.(45.masculines,D)-

third person singular-masculine-emphatic state, and in the

nominative case after ^oou/ul, but used as the construct before > of the next word (74.2.a).
y>
r 7
.

1)

Y.4. w.7.,

li

>!*">>

of the sons of men, a composite

noun

(41.1)-compounded
the
genitive
',> son,
7

of

>,

oJii and

VJl

>

of,

is

a sign of
is

case,

which follows (74.3).

j

AlJb sons,
X

from
y

primitive
* "7

anomalous. Singular absolute ^D,

construct ;o. emphatic 1^3, plural absolute ^iio, construct p

...10^

emphatic ]*1O (49.masculines)-third person plural-

is

masculine-construct state(in form and because the next noun in the genitive)-genitive case, though in the construct

state, as
(i

sometimes occurs

in

Hebrew
by
>

(vid. Stuart's
]JLJ

Hebrew
is

raramar,

434. l\ govornod

(74).

man,

from

*AJ], the 1

being dropped (12. 3.a)-derived from theHebrew

word
1,

"Epja

man (Chaldee
it

'CnDJSjVa primitive noun-declension

singular as

third person (vid. Lexicon) has not Kibui, though it has the same form which appears in the plural-masculine emphatic state abso-

but somewhat irregular

304
lute
x(>

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

and construct
B 9

ufcj],

emphatic V*j], absolute

plural

V '*M

or |mJJ-genitive case and governed

-kJT)

by

the preceding

noun

(74).

2) V.5. w.l.,

ocno (vifLsupra
_ p

e).

3) V.5. w.2., \jcnoj light,is in the

nominative absolute, with

the participle >ouio(76.1).

For farther explanation of the

word

vid.

y above.
"

4) V.5. w.3.,

pQ*n>O in(the)darkness,is compounded of the

and pa*** darkness. pQ*x is a sub(the Hebrew form is 'nts'lf* a verbal noun)
(

preposition
stantive

2 in,

noun

declension fourth
lar

45. masculines

D)

third person singu-

masculine-emphatic state-ablative case and governed by

(75.5).
5) V.5. w.4.,

9OI&D permitting to shine a

participle from the

irregular ^2>, active intransitive verb (20.2)

>OU

to

shine (33)

-in the

Aphel conjugation

19 Table;
23.1).

19.B.4;
It
is

23.1)for

an active participle (19.B. 4;

used here

the third person singular of the present tense(64.2.A.Eem.) and rendered the same as though it were a verb (vid. Trans.
^[I4)third person singular. Conjugate to the place where
it is

found.
II,

Preter. Peal JOU, preter. Ethpeel >ou2f (

21.1), preterite Pael >ou (l9.Table
19.
II,
1

l9.Table
22.1),

and

and

preterite Ethpaal >CTj2i*(

Table

II,

22.

and

Kern.),

preterite

Aphel >duf (19. Table

II; II;
II;

II;

23.1),

future

Aphel

JOUJ

(19. Table
(

19.B.2,5;
19. B. 1;

23.1),

imperative Aphel

19.

Table

23.1), infinitive

Aphel

(19.Table

I9.B.3 and 9;

23.1)participle active

KXI'U'MS

KIUHTEENTH
19.B.4;

PARSING.
It

305
is

Apln-1
in the
der,
it.

iouk)

(l!).T:ible II;
\P
*.

23.1).

found

Aphel conjugation-active
to JJOIOJ
(

participle

masculine gen-

and belongs

64. 1. A), or is absolute with

6) V.5.

tion as
*
T
"*

w 5., poa >jQ and the darkness. O is a conjuncabove, and po.>* is in the nominative case to
For farther explanations see
*

Oi_oi>|.

4.

supra.

%r

7) V.5. w.7., Ol-O>j|

comprehended

it~is
*

an irregular
*

ac-

live intransitive verb,

composed of ^>> and Ol_

*
f

Irregular-

active voice-intransitive (19. Table 1 )-indicati ve (65.l.B.b)

-Aphel
is

preterite.

The usual form is

^>>|*

When
is

the suffix

appended, the final vowel of the verb

last

dropped (15.3)

and the
*7

consonant forms a syllable with the suffix *

_^

OU.
Pael

It is in the 3rd.person masc.;

7

Peal
* ^f

**

^ j>, Ethpeel ^>?M,

its

^>j,

Ethpaal *i?M, Aphel ^>>|, and agrees with

nom-

inative ]">* r The suffix CTL is a personal pronoun third masculine singular-accusative case (54.B.l) and gov-

erned by

*^5>1.

8) V.6. w.l., looi ivax, is a

Lomadh Olaph verb

Peal

active voice-3d. singular-masculine-indicative mood-present

tense (32.1) and agrees with |^j;*"^ (vid. ^IS.c).

]*J;Q son of man, is a composite noun (42. r r p ;Q is a primitive 1) compounded of ^3 son and *J| man noun anomalous singular, construct (vid. paradigm 49. third person masculine nominative case in.-isculines)
9) V.6. w.2.,

\V

11*
opi.

>~

(AJ man,

is

a noun derived from

ofcJf ??2an

prim-

itivr
])ltatio

declension first-third person singular masculine-emstate-in the genitive case

and governed by ^D (74;

1181).

306

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

10) Y.6 w.3.,

>?A]> who was sent,is compounded of j who,

j is

and 5>A1 was se?^.

culine, a
prefix,

a relative pronoun-third singular masto >>A*]

and in the nominative case

is

(17.

56).

J>A)

sive

voice

a verb in the Ethpaal conjugation pasregular third singular masculine indicative

imperfect tense (60.4), and agrees with * i ^ 7 y 7 Peal >>, Ethpeel i?A |, Pael >>, Eth-

mood
its
77

preterit
>
W*

nominative

paal >>A*|.

In Ethpaal and the other passive conjugations

ft

is

transposed (vid.^[15.2.a).

11) V.6. w.4.,

^o from, o/J is a preposition and governs the

loOL
God, a

ablative case (75.5).

12) Y.6.W.5.,

noun
state

declension

first

third

singular masculine

emphatic
;

ablative case,

and gov-

erned by
*

^>

(75.5

*l8.g).

13) V.6. w.6., Olio* his name,

and Olhis.

Sa

is

of So compounded * anomalous a noun from Ul

name
third

singular masculine.

Absolute and constr. singular

^Q, emmascu-

phatic
lines).
state,

UQ

suffix state OlSo* (vid. paradigm,

49.

JL of the absolute state falls away in the emphatic and from the emphatic is formed the suffix state by _ and adding Ol (46. La) nominative case to dropping
f>

looi wiOioA-0 was (implied).

(vid.^[18. b

In reference to looi aOloA*f

a suffix pronoun, third singular masculine (l6.Table)-genitive case (54.B. 2) and gov-

and

c).

OU

his, is

erned by SQ

(16

16.B

74).

14) V.6. w.7.,

^-L-wQa John, a noun proper-anomalous-

third singular masculine, absolute state-nominative case after IOCTI

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
15)

PARSING.

307

V.

7.

w.

1.,

pen same,

this

a demonstrative pronoun, *
9

singular, masc. nominative case to ]L] (vid. ^[18. fy.

16) V. 7. w. 2., JZI came Lomath Olaph (U*) active voice-Peal conjugation-pret. imperfect-3d pers. singular,
*
ft

masc. indicative
17) V.
t

mood and

agrees with Jioi

(27 Tab.;

32).

7.

w.

3.,

IZojOifflbk/or
*i'7

a witness
*

Jk/<',

and

* >'* jZojOlflO witness.

|2Lo>OlflD

compounded of ig a noun derived from

appears as a noun
*
9

the verb joioo to witness.

of
t

The form

?OlflD

he 2d declension.

Absolute and construct

JOlfiD,

emph.

Ijoifl)

(45. masculines B). The feminine absolute has the

V

same form
2
is

as the

emphatic masc.

viz. (jOlflD.

In

many nouns

inserted before the final ] in the feminine ; o with L is also sometimes inserted (45. 3 and Bern. 3) as in this word. That indeed It has the form here of the emph. feminine. seems to be the usual form in which the word appears

3d

pers. singular, dative case

and governed by

(75.

1).

18) V.
ness

7.

w.

4., ?oi

.ffi

i>

who

shall (should) bear witJ

compounded of
witness,
7
.

>

who, and jai-fiO

to
*

shall (should)

bear
>oi

or

cause

bear

witness

(23.

2.

a)

m,..i is

a verb from

>oiflD to beget, to

bear witness-Aph.

conjugation-active
sing.

voice-regular
?aiflo2],

(26)-intransitive.

3d

Peal >ai0, Ethpe.

pret. JO12D],
fut.

Pa. ?oia> 3 Ethpa. JouoZ),

Aph.

Aph.

fut. >OlfiOJ-fut. tense,

masc. gender.

In the
ble
;

Aph.

3d. masc.

usually we find - in the last sylla-

but sometimes as here we have

(23.2, where are ex-

amples, with

in the last syllable.

and

The future tense is subjunctive mood imperfect

II).

19, Tables I here used in the sense of the

Compare

agrees with

its

nominative

>

tense (61. 3. A. b) and ? is a relative pronoun-3d

308
pers.

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
singular,

PAUSING.
case
to

masculine-a prefix-nominative
^oi
j>.

19) V.

7.

w.

5.,

to, *
.

against, on account

of,

q/-prer

position governing poiQJ

20) V.

7.

w.

6.,

(JOIQJ

?^-verbal noun from iou

pers. singular, masculine,

fo

fiAiwe-declension fourth,

3d

em-

phatic state, ablative case and governed by ^J> (1[18. y).

21) V.
every,

7.

w.
e

and **J

*iis>-compounded of > that, ^b all, man-* is a conjunction (85. 3 & 4, d)-prefix

7.,
7

QJ and connecting ?C5i ^ v>>ou ^o every, a??, is a proused as an adjective (58. B. 2. b. a) and but here noun,

*"

belongs to *~*i
is a noun
7

For declension,

etc. vid. ^f 18.

1.

*-*i man,

from -*> I declension first, but is somewhat irregular-3d pers. singular, masc. absolute state, nom. case to *
^.V)iou.

For further explanation^,

7.
\v. 8.,

vid. ^f 18. 1.
believe-a,

22) V.
irregular,

^ Snou

might

verb doubly
defective
7<

]a and
c).

^,

and

is

placed

among the

>*

verbs (35. 2.

K7

In the Aph. conjugation. Pe. ^o|,

!V * i
'

Aph. ^10*01, future Aph. ^lQ*oll-active voice-intransitive3d pers. singular masc.-future tense and used in the sense of the subjunctive mood, imperfect tense, and agrees with
t

its

nominative
7.

-*i
9.,

(cornp. ^[18. 18).

23) V.

w.

For parsing,
24) V.
8.

vid. ^[

or ly the hand of him. Olpila through 18* m., where the same expression occurs.
(J

w.

1.,

not, is

an adverb and
is

qualifies *|ooi

25) V. 8. w.

2.,

ooi he,

a personal pronoun separatek

3d

pers. singular masc.

-

and nominative case to (001 (comp.

If 18

e)-

26) V.

8.

w.

3.,

IOCFI

was-&n irregular verb agreeing

(vid. ^[18. n).

with

ooi for

its

nominative

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
27) V.
8.

PAUSING.

300

w.
(

v
4.,

poioi Ught-a, noun and nominative

case after "jooi

vid. ^[18. y).

28) V.

8.

w.

5.,

UJ

&w-a

conjunction, a contraction of

fj

no, and

{} ?/ ; it continues the sense. Following this and preceding the next word, there is something implied
;

after U ] supply l2o>Olfn.\ 12} came for a witness, the same which is expressed in verse 7. For the remaining three words of this verse, vid.^f 18. 18, 19, 20.

29) V.

9.

w. 1 and

2.,

]ocn jOioA*] was-* verb and

agrees with |JO1O-J understood, IJOICLJ JJOT that light, being implied. For parsing this verb fully, vid. ^f 18. b. & c.
it

30) V. the sense.

9.

w.

3., 'rt^tfor, is

^
*

a conjunction continuing

jOiO-J 11
after fool

Ught-a, noun-nominative case

^oioL^
9.

(vid. ^[18. y).

f

(>t? of frw^-compounded of > of, and PJ* truth. ])',* is a noun derived from the verb >^ to be co7mVicec?-declension first (vid. 48. A. decl. 1. Rem.)32) V.
w.
5.,

singular. Construct

and absolute, t* or >;, emphatic 1>^

j
f

_ falls away on acforming the emphatic state, from J* count of the addition at the end (15. 3), then -*? presenting two vowelless consonants, ? takes the new vowel (15. 4. 6)-3d pers. singular, masc.-genitive case after j
_

(74.
tive,

2. a).

The

*A
p o

&

expression |>f*> |>O1Q-J

is

an instance

in which the abstract

noun
7

and the phrase

r

is

has the sense of an adjec\*\ properly rendered the true light.

ivhich shineth, or having shoneJ

33) V.

9.

w.

6., JCTLJL _lD>

1

compounded
which.
>O1

of >Ol
1

V> shineth, or having shone, and

.V) is

an Aph. participle from >OU, absolute

310
with

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
> (^[18. 5).
>

PASSING.

which,
*

is

a relative pronoun, nomina

tive absolute with >OT-JL-So

(76.

1J18. 3).

34) V.
t

9.

w.
t

7.,
"^

ed of \ upon, -^3

upon every man, compound9 **l man. ^ is a preposition every and

i

V^

*t

governing the accusative or dative.

adjectively and belongs to J*-l (vid. in the accusative and governed by!^

^3
18.

is
1).

a pronoun used **i is a noun

(^[18. 1, 9, 21).
> t#7io,

35) V.
]Z| comes.

9.

w.
12]

8.,
is

IM? wAo comes, composed of

and

a verb-Peal conjugation, present tense,

and agrees with

36) V.
of
!^

its
9.,

nominative
]V)

> (^[18.

16).

9.

w.

Svs

into

the

;or?c2-compounded

into,

and ]VrSV the world.

is

is

a preposition
?t f

governing the accusative. |V).Nv

+
t
o

a noun from V>\\

second declension. Absolute and construct

V)N\ emphatic

vowel falls away in the emphatic state as a syllable is added (15. 3)-3d pers. singular, masc. accusative case and governed by ^ 37) V. 10. w. 8., (the seven preceding words are exfinal
t>

P&^X

\j In SniA the

plained above).
7

oui r^ knew Am-compounded 7*

e

of Oi- him,

and ^r knew.
anomalous.
**-2>

^r

tached* to it-derived

is a verb with a suffix pronoun atfrom the Hebrew 3? to know, doubly

and

^-Peal

preterit

-3d

pers. singular,

masc. indicative mood and agrees with JaQl By taking The common form of a suffix the usual form is changed.
- falls away and - falls back upon the Peal preterit is <Xr the first radical when the verb takes a suffix (vid. 36).

Ol-

is

a suffix pronoun with

its

union vowel (16. Tab. a)

-3d pers. singular, masc.-accusative,

and governed by

i,

(54. B.

1).

CHRESTOMATHY.

CHRESTOMATHY,
FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.
JOHN
f
i.

10.

^7
1

lA\k)

OO10

VA\SO |001
.

-.mn'X.')

A..|o
Iboi

001 }ooi ^oioAut IOI^NO

.

loi^L

ZoX

]6i!&

Zo\ AU-I^D

IOCTI

wiOioA*!' tioi 2

Zooi

Vr*

ffaV

^oio^loo ^ K T

Vooi
.

oi^t
.

^
J

jooi>
*

(1 in>
~

p..

K..7

r
.
1

..f

jiCTIQJ
*

^OOUA^I
,T
*.

U-*<*O
?

001 pkM 010 4

>e>
. >

11 (J

-\

aio>>]

pa*AjO

ioulo

PQAMJO

IJOIQJ 0010 5
T

(001 c
T
7

pen

V
Ul
r
.

>.

IIOIQJ
* 1

|ooi
*

001

1 (J

8
9

1?>V t/|?

"

.aiNnN >aulD>

**

T .

"
.

'

^i

*"

Jv^j liaioj -^^

|oai

^aio^l

\ ?

]^VvV
]]'

]LAio

looi

ai.l-.'i-^

V-Solio

looi

V>\so

10

314 CHRESTOMATHY

FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

MATTHEW
oo.">
7

ii.

1
*

10.

"

'

*
.

(jOOT-0

t Snn\A*o<i

^jfc*
.

r-M

>

>r
2 ;**.
T

JX>>

3 ^_o

oiSoI
4 ^{j^oo
5

XiS!o] otSoo
Uo^? T^acbo
^QJcfi*
.

M*i'2Z

"i-joio
i

^29

.001^2 uiao*
^ooil }ooi

o^oV^?
*.

>V> ,}LiA\o
.

la-ilj

f.AiA

^iiuZo ^..r
]3"

U^cn
.

Ijoau?

1';Aa o
*

^A-iOOi
.

r
*.

*
'pt-.t

ooi>
7

p^-

^aaskj

'r

n.\

o2
r.?>

*ct

9 loio

olil

1^^^

^
*

nsv^

^_i>

^QJOI*
OCTI

ail

liO^ ^OOUSOrO

]OC31

^?V l^l.V)*^ OV^J

]ri2QD
ffl?

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

315

MARK
^VnkAV
7
*.

xiv.

3242.
33
'

jiOJO
i* i

Vneo
7
r

.p^QASr>y Ipi^AoO,^ oZ^O*

^nr~iv.\r> (gy>|n\

Ol^i ^?O*

.""

P| Uf-^3

i vi '.

'

'

IO>O1

Q2Z 33
liiOM

*>

"

?
.

r .

'?

tt

(OO1 |J>V>Q

JL>(

t* tt i ^\_i \\giin \\.\o

r

1 7

SJOO*
* *
T

35

w^s] (s] ;!0|o* .]Ai^ ouio jr^iZ

o
.

^^'^

^*

^''

'

30

j^lLj

]]]

wAa?

ii

in. y UJ

)joi

1^ -<<^
rrtk'ji
y

roi|
r

3-,

p
.

^
,

01
*.

ip Vp^a
1Z]
"7
*

^oZ
*

0^77
^010*
* r
I

|J 1

ITL^IDO U^^ U*o>

X
.
>

**
7
"i
.

1?

k
>r
**
<.

(Jo
7

wooi ^;>n*
"
r

^001 ii >s? \v^k>

!>

^IJ^LD>
*

,QJ(
J

^001^ -^JO ^il^l A^Z> |Z|0*

1*

^A'"

Oil
x

**>''
*

o^^pn^y^o
ZZIo IZ-^

^O'^p
*

]llD 0001

41

foio
01 1c
.

"jAi*

A^

owujZZlo

it 7^ x

\>lp
.

-J-X

i>oSLC> 001

LUKE

xxiii.

18

27.

Zooi>

.mirng

001*

316

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

7

..

Tit

A.
4l

oOl
21

JO O9 JJ&O

OOOI ^ SO _*9 ^ .OJOl* .

<K

^OJL^
>.

t r |;J9 pD O

31

k^01^2)QOl
llOl

,^1

>iO9

_.

I
23

01^ oooi ^_jk^jo

7 7

*.

(lei JJora
x
.x
[)

oooi
.

-x

OO1
l

77nx7
.

1>P

all*? 001 Ivlco]

oil
i

AJ^

loai )k

*.

]V

QfiD

O1JAO |OO1
7

P7

1.001
^

LUKE
7

xxiii.

33

42.
.

,7
*.

777
lASiD'rD la'rOASO)
fr**

33

.^SoZ ^01Q2lLO1

lAoo,l oZ|

7*7 po*
OO1*

34^1
.

OOL^ >\\N -v~

VI
t

.e*inf~im

JQJ
7.

(OOl

^loj

^Q*u

-_a>

"7

35

012 OOOI

.o.Vf>Vor>

JV^O ]SQ1

^9

J001

CHRESTOMATIIY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

311

lOOl

OlO
.

0001
x
(

U^
i*

oil

_ko* rnl>oo
^,] [ojooLij |nllo 001 AJ!
j]
.

_.^i

oii

^-i^i:

tOJOl ^lD ^_i> rM*

70

*7
'

pi)OOU)

pNVn QJO1 'x 77

X
; ]-"
*

_
ft

^
V

,^,0
*^

&

|po*

^
?

_ 7

P707
Tffx

\J_

si\

\+2<o ./a^i

U^
77
.

^> ooi AJ]

^ 40

x
'

)OI

->O_>?
*
7

"
I

A--*I.M^

L>jO

*.

1 1

*~i

'*'/
.

'

'

(J

|icft%

^O,iD _ij pOl

"

L'^Z) ir^l>
. '

tu]o
.

o.*.7

A^^?!"!

rr -^

<>

LUKE
.

xxiii.

43

53.
,

jiVnn
y

.^
*

..\ p|
..o

jlJo|
r

.Vr>|
..

QQA* Oil
x

liO|* 43

*,

err
|4^

(,

7.

47

77

e>

."JOOIJ

318

CBEESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

480001
7
.

iii~)?
x
t 7

A.I
7

.001X00* JJLID "

7 *
1>

.}ooi ]ru>i VJQ..

^\
7

vA ^ i?)^fe
49
*ji

'^0^^P^
.M*

p OQ2G1

JOOlJ iOpiO
,

OVj
I
*

P
(*
fc

\\

*
V<^

Ol QiL

fOGl^O LO>jO)

OOOl
*"%
*MiZ,

^^
t

oo^
*
I
i

^^0 01 _
50

l^ i.

_*A^JI ^-

L&J P^ o

^o^Ljt)

Vn

51

]jOI*

]boi

53OISDCOO

*)jA2> li
x

i>n
7

^i

'^

OlDpO
7
"

J001 V>er>77]

^*P|^

*jl V? OO1

.0122
*-*+

ACTS

xvii.

2232.
r
t

'

%DOtj|o JDoLoS) x7
.

i>O

23

A^oai ]LMO A^oai

001
*1liirt

;^..

lailL?

*ou.^i }oai
x
*
fc

x
|

'

A
JJ

.\..;% ^oAj

^xi^
*

p>

pii) >.. ]aiK*

^nn\ VI ;^mV> pi
QLiOOlO
*

.7X

1>

7 7

CIIKESTOMATHY-FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

*
9

319
x

***r

*t*t
.AJl_k^^
P

r*
.^L
7

* *
v^iJ^^O

^.^OO'^

* kAJ2LJ

-*_-*>

OT^ O Ol )
7

*J^-\Q

2C

ivy
.n.
>.? IOCTI
i
ft

*v

^
*

1*

U ^)> ^^So
x 7*^

01!^

in
.
(

"- ^-.
f

001
*

oai cnilo

7X07

-v

(>

J 'rA..

AJ]

^j

*.]! iin

!>

*X77
7P

,Uoj|ao oila U'

m7r>iVn.rnV

**?7

^^j"

T7
'

OOO1

OOO1

ROMANS

vi.
*

1
7

10.

IQOJ

320

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS

IN TRANSLATING.

3
P 7

?
y
P 7

*<o AJ]
7

^H

U o

i]?

.IZoSol lA->nVisV>n oiSoi

'H-.

tin

loou oiASn

nn

>]

]IDOI

'.aiZolDj

>..

*.(iV) ^ai
]>
*
7
i

^Ajlo \uj5oi
*

J
*>

*]A*4M ^So ail

V>>
ff

_P

.012
fc

4-^A*^ M ]Zolco
7

10OO1 ^J-M

777 ^M)O

.Z|io
X

poZo T

,]L*

.Ql

IrAt

/UiD 001

COLOSSIANS
P

iii.

15.

X777
'^1
.
0.

(M^^C?
. 7

Q^2
I

v^?
7

'"t

^' ^01 ^oAioo '4V>

*
y

7,

\y^r>ai
7

^ *

>

JmiV]^
.

(>.
p

.^VnViv^>mn

.oAj)

^"7P7i'P

&]

^r-iOl

77*.*. iM QjOOlJ >>^l X7

>o

^
*

---- r> .',

*

77

^
*

^j
7 r

Uyy

&

t p

aiu.oi |Z1
\k

'HKI
\k

r v-Aai

^^4^* .IpAa AL^? ^01

CHRE8TOMATHY-FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

321

X
.

"

(ZniO
A*
1
. 7

(AScu, |kiO j

r^

.]a>Q..

10
11
'

*
t

ff

99
'

7ft*.
'

."jZoljOlO
,001

U'
1>

*"

'

]J012

P..

">;>.
'.

.0.

,>

HSJ

nn

^^

V
OIlOjs*
v-L

---

13

..

ijl

,acan
.

oAj1

*2)]

IIDOI M
15

TT .in %

>77
.o/uocno
.

7
,

^a

>

..

REVELATIONS
7

v.

10.

001
7

^ j n ^?

.l>

a.

322
JL

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING

."

(JO*
7

.OlX.J
ff

f^\ 0770
7"*

(;Vr\r>
>

*|oAo^ ..
7 v
e

]3o

.JiVl

^A )]o x^il ].vn-^

]ooi

907
o V=>Anl
*
i

13

o^As^ol
x

PJDZ
*.

|J

.wA
a
(>

7*-^^i7
'rlD]
r

*>(>

1*1*0
'*
:!?OCTlj>

.OJ01
.

17

i>

*r

OO1 *ri??
7

Ir^

oai

17
7

]A2^ ^SO9 OO1

>

11

z r

*>

77

!>

'

fc

*77

po*

JEOJov^ ^u?

ooi>

. .

-Ji

:|Snfhn

'la*?

CHKKSTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS

IN TRANSLATING.

323

REVELATIONS
'rD
0.

xxii.

10.

^-1
7

]*J

001 o

i>

To*
*

^
t

-(VnVnv\ "j/n.nnjl
T.

7r
ooi>o

NOOU aio

1'r^o]

]oau

"

*
1^
|J

loou

^ooil loou
,

on \Vnin

po
001
I

oai
T

A\ZLJ
P
(

4
..

X
.

Ai2

wiU,

t** wA ^o* ^Aai ^A loai

t
.

'

]OM^O>

s,

fJSol 5x)oA^Z U

wA ^"jo*
* 7

loil]] 'O^jJS) 7^ 7 PC

POT
f

10

'rO) 'r^..

U^l

001 .]jOT j^AOj

324

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

REVELATIONS
7
*>

xxii. 11
.

21.
1>

77
11 1?
y r p

'7

OO1
x y

^o^
.A.

V>CLU

.^QiSoj 001*

llo
* x
-p
7

13].
*t

Vn

o
4>

.7

'

001

.OIO ^SL^ p] p|*

?
*.
.

CrUk*}
^
p

(,11 ^OToAj|5
.7 P 9

Of.*'
H/t\.f)m

14

.film .Qj| V \

MAOf> f*

001O

t*-J'

OO1

(jj-j| -

OO1O

*..7

|jJio
16

piOj?

(mi

..

^^ o l^ai 001 ^A*| p| .\L^ ^0,

(>

I 7

ff

.7

U%*

.KrS. 001 i)****) \23QD OO1

' >
r*'
<

k*

71

^7

.7

0010 ,U]j Id.

,

0010

.U **r^P
.

^Q

0010
7

.")-

PI jaico*

i
10

AJ]

^o* *pai

*7P
21

001
1>>
7
-x

ll

|">

CHHKSTOMATHY-FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

325

PSALM

xlv. 1

10.
.

*~\

tt*

m. ip 2
i3
4

.VnVv
]ZoL.?i
v*

.mor>
)

]l

)]2UO1

*..i

Vn.
:

Vn
10

.O

PSALM

li.

110.

**oi> ^Soo

^oi ^So ^iii..

:]j}

^p*

326

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

AJ|*

^.

-w

AioZ l^oio

PSALM
)CL1
:

civ.

10

^L

Va^
9
:

nnSm*
ASoco

)i j]]

ouomojo i":^^
t^rAoiio

|J ?

^ooilu

ISoow*

: .

10

IJ'Q^

Aiaiao

.]J**jri

CHRESTOMATHY.
NOTES ON THE BEADING LESSONS.

AFTER having analyzed the first page of the Chrestomathy, and thus given a specimen of the manner in which the learner should proceed in reading his first lessons in Syriac, it will only be necessary, in respect to the remaining pa-res of the Chrestomathy, to explain the derivation and formation of the most difficult words which there
1

occur.

Thus the student

it is

will

he thrown upon his

own

resources,

and

be induced,

hoped, to assiduously study his

grammar.

EXPLANATIONS.
MATTHEW
i>

ii.

10.

i *
is

1) Verse
V*
X

1.

word

3.,

,-^tZ^

a verb in the Ethpeel conjugation,

from
ti) r

V.
y

1. w.7.,

_fclon**")

is

compounded of
9

a preposition and

*V)Q-i a noun of the fourth

7

decl. construct plural, from

^OQ*

*
is

3) V.
(viil.

1.

w. 10.,
16).

oZ]

a verb from ]Z] Pe. pret. 3d. masc. plural

Is.
2. 2.

4) V.
5) V.
0) V.

w.

5.,

^-V**
r

is

a verb from |]-M

is

w. 10.,

imV)
is

a verb in the infin. pret., from

in Kth]>eel

rve&*

3.

w.

5.,

M^lZZ]
*
V

a verb

conjugation, from

or

^J>1

7) V.

1.

w.

1.,

.am

is

a verb

in

Pa. conjugation, from *A13.

328
8) V. 4. w. masc. plural.

NOTES ON THE CHKESTOMATHY.

X
-X
,

2.,

^poila-from

A3

and takes the noun

suffix-3d

9) V.

4.

w.

3.,

*xO>-constr. plural from

10) Y. 11) V.

4.
4.

w.

7.,

^iso-is a
11.,

part,

w. 8 and

IOCT

is

from

indicate the imperfect tense, the latter 64. 2. B. a; 65. B. a). ciple ( vid.

,S^Ak). These two words word being a passive partifrom |OOI

12) V.

6.

w.

6,,

*jAOO1 is a verb
TV

in the second person

fut. Pe.,

13) V.

6.
6.

w.

12.,

*OQ2LJ-third, masc.
It

from

*oaj*
suffix,

14) V.

w. 15., wiOIOi
7

V,J

a verb in the

fut.

with

from

15) Y. Lexicon). 16) Y.

i*

7.

w.

8.,

M-ipO

is

compounded of puf and

O
y

(vid.

7.

w. 10., w.
6.,

-V"M *
is

is

a verb in Ethpe. pret. from |V*

in

17) Y.
28. 1

8.

Q^l

a verb

the imperative from

r

^l]

(vid.

and

2).
7

18) Y. 19) Y.

8. 8.

w.

f>

7.,

*">\
*

imperative from
*A
'

^Q1*
*

w.

12.,

uCJLJOA*xSL
~
* that

^*
I

j is

composed of
>

iOU -meaning
.

him-ZA. masc.
in

suffix,

a conjunction*-and
y

JOA*xQ|
28. 2.

a verb

Aph.

conjugation, 2d. plural,

8.

from

>

i^
masc. (vid.
^ If

20) Y.

w.

13.,
11

o2

is

a verb 2d.

pi.

Rem.)-

imperative from

"\L\ to come.
'

*77
is

21) Y.

8.

w. 14.,

wiJOfOM
suffix

a verb from
(vid.

(OM

2d. masc.

plural, imperative, with a with suffixes 37. 3).

;

pronoun

37. table of verbs |T

22) Y. 10. w. 23) Y. 10. w.

7

5.,
7.,

.p

a verb from (,* Q^rMis *

7

(AS)

is

an adjective noun,

fern. sing,

construct,

from
*In connection with the preceding word

PO,

it

forma a compound conjunction

meaning when.

(vid.

85. 4. d. a).

NOTES OX THE CHRESTOMATHY.

329

MARK
24) V. 32. w.
4.,

xiv.

32

42.

)lj>AlsOj

is

eomjKxsed

of

Vr^

and

The

relative J with the preceding

5<i.
.'{.

pronoun should be rendered that

is

which (vid.

n)

l^'^ASo

an

Ethpe. pass, participle, from

25) V. 32. w.
2f>)

8.,

Q^
*

imperative from
A *

js

29. 2.

Rem).
.

V.

32. w. 11.,
7.,

lSliO-Pa.
1

act, participle
is

from

l\.

27) V. 33. w.
tion

O'rLQOASOA
infinitive

composed of the prefix preposi-

and

(lie

verb
8.,

Ethpe.
is

28) V. 33. w.

QQlZAsiAo
in
7 J

composed of the conjunction O,

the prep. -^ and the verb

the infinitive from

~

*)dl

or

29) V.

.'it.

w.
\v.

9.,

OOOc

imperative from
*

|QD
Ethixj.

30) V. 34.

11.,
9.,

O^ZZJo-iraperative,

from from

Jl) V. 35. w.

|M>*>V>-Aph.

fern, participle,

32) V. 35. w.
53)

10.,
5.,

^2-lV.

17

future,

from

;L.
x
7

V. 37. w.

^i"lSg>

is

a participle, plural from

.*V>> and

that from the verb

^>*
b-^ZALD -infinitive, Ethpe. from iOL
or \L.

34) V. 37. w.

If).,

35) V. 38. w.
36) V. 38. w.

2.,

Q-kf praij imperative, Pa.

from|^

4.,

.oil!

(\G)shull enter-Ve. fut. 2nd. plural, from

37) V. 38. w.
38) V. 40. w.
suffix

8.,
9.,

]n i \"*\\
tOOl
f..

irillin>T-a.rt. part.

f.

Pa. from

^>Q&.

i I i

S ///>

(V/c.s-from

|1

>\ with a plural

pronoun.
x
r

19)
T
r

V. 40. w.

10., *

n*n*
lipi

heavy-tin adjective In the plural, from

40) V. 40. w.
41) V. 41. w.

13.,
8.,

i*. ..

Jt/M-M'-from *
/*',</

Q*JuiJZZ|o

ye-Ethpe. imperative from

330
42) Y. 41. w.

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

14.,

y>\AV) being betrayed-Efhpe.

lj
*

participle

from

43) Y. 42. w.
44) V. 42. w.

2.,

future of
7

to go.

6.,

V>\V? betraying-Aph.

participle

from

LUKE
7

xxiii.

18

27.

45) Y.

18. w.

1., 6.,

n\D

cried out-3&.
f>

masc. plural, from

Ov

46) Y. 18. w.
imperative, with

^ O1 \cins
pronoun
>*

take him

away-2nA. masc.

plural,

suffix

(vid.
}

36.

table of suffixes).

47) Y. 20. w. 48) Y.

y

8.,
6.,

l^AJ-future from

to release.

21. w.

aCTL^>QOl

crucify Am-imperative, with a suffix

from

1Q1 49) Y. 22. w.

.

19.,

**OlQjj>l-/
pronoun.
1

will chastise him-iut. 1st. sing. Pe.

from (>> with a

suffix

50) Y. 22. w.
1st. singular,

21.,

^QIDin. *"!!-/
pronoun, from
r>.

^*

will
7

let

kirn ^o-future,

Pe.

with a
3.,

suffix
r

rt *">*
7

51) Y. 23. w.

*")")/,

with

OOO1 urged-a

part,

from

JQOL

52) Y. 23. w.
36. Table).

10.,

^OUJQaap

(that) they shall crudfy him-

pret. Pe. fut. 3d. masc. plural, with suffix pronoun,

from

iOl

(vid.

53) Y. 24. w. 54) Y. 24. w.

sing, noun,

4., 5.,

1ooi7
*v
"
.

should Je-future
7*
TV

of "(oat

tOOlA^t*
suffix
>

(according

to) their desire-& feminine,

with a plural
a

(16.
ti

Table).
will-&

55) Y. 25. w.
plural from
.

16., tOCTil

iO
y

their

noun with a

suffix

iO
v
*
r

56) Y. 26. w. 2., ^ ^*^ part, plural from

\noSo

leading or causing to lead

away-Aph.

,,
laid hold o/-from ,**]
.

57) Y. 26. w.

4.,

OA*|

NOTES ON THE CHRE8TOMATHY.

58) V. 26. w. 59) V. 27. w.

331

13.,
8., t

might carry-future from

bcwailing-A^h. part, from .09

LUKE
60) V. 33. w.
)1)
5.,
7.,

xxiiL 33

42.

UjJDA^ ^-Ethpe. pass, participle, from *

r

Y.

34. w.

*OQJQ* /or^tre-imperative, from

62) V. 34. w.
*)3)

16.,
1.,

0*ioit ow/-Aph.
J

3d. plural from

V.

35. w.

s/attdw^-participle from
/o

64) V. 35. w.

12.,

<rfA-plural from

^>*]-with
f

the

prefix prep. Loniad.

65) Y. 35. w.
66) V. 35. w. 67) V. 3G. w.

13.,

srt?W-Aph.
T

prot,

from

M-M*
%*

14.,
1.,

shall srtre-Aph. future,

i

from U^.
p
.

-part. from >japD

r
.

Aph. from (--M

69) V. 42. w.
7

:>.,

remember wic-imperat. Ethpe. with

suf.

from JS>

LUKE
* *

xxiii.

43

53.
.
,

TO) V. 45. w.

3.,

wtpgt
o

(.

was

rcnt-FAlipe. part, from (;12. 2.

is

transposed and changed

p

into

Rem.).

71) V. 46. w.

3., 7.,

(JQ

iv/i<r-with
?'/

a prefix preposition.
/^/ Aflw/A'-from

72) V. 46. w.
preposition,

s^i^|o

with a prefix

and a

sullix

pronoun.
act. participle

73) V. 46. w. 74) V. 48. w.

8.,
4.,

iOJCO w/Wi<j--Pe.
x
.

from ^OQflD

>>!').. came

together- Aph. pret. plural

from

332
75) Y. 48. w.
plural.

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

16.,

tOOUpM
Sf)
7
-X

their

breasts-horn.

HH^

with

suf.

76) V. 49. w.

1.,

r> ytaTK&Kg-part.
P
ft

Pe. plural from

>

XlQ
with

77) V.
suffix.

49. w.

6.,

j01QLO r
7

his acquaintance-from

(10^
t>

:>

78) V. 51. w. 79) V. 53. w.

7., 1.,

l2OSozmifo7tg--participle from fnco

*
* W
A

*
.

OlA**!
X

took

down-Aph.

pret.

from A**J

80) V. 53. w.
81) V. 53. w.

8.,

01 dug |*'
12. 2.

out-part, passive, Peal from

pret.

^J

13.,

NOiffiZZf was laid-Etbpe.

from

is

doubled

(vid.

Hem

31. 2).

ACTS
*
.

xvii.

2232.
r

82) y. 23. w. 83) V. 23. w.

3.,

^.pAlD

passing %-Ethpe. part, from

y',

9.,

An] Ifound-Kph.
OljAl
7 Z

pret. 1st. singular

from

84) y. 23. w. 85) y.

14.,

on

it

^A with a suffix.
^
T

23. w. 29., ;*-)fT>V) dedare-P&. part, from

1

86) y. 25. w.
87) y. 26. w.
fut. 3d. plural

2.,

*SoA*So ?z7or5Ai^w7zg--Ethpa. part, from *SQ

8.,

tOOOU
'^*^
x

shall be,

with

^iOl

should dwell-Pe.

of the defective verb (OO1

2.,

88) y. 27 w. 89) y. 27. w. y from -^ ov

90) y. 28. w.
T

seeA-Mzg-participle
'

from (12*
participlo

4.,

^ i ^HSV) . seeking, feeling-P&Ql pass,

TIT
4.,

qj

i i

our

life-pi,

absolute form with

suf.

^_
and

from

I i i

91) y. 28. w.
suffix

5.,

,J i\ilZA!aD

owr

wiot^-Ethpe.

part,

from

^Ol

or ^1

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

person plural from A*]
you^-composed of
9

333

92) V. 28. w. 93) V. 28. w.

with and >

6.,

^Aa}../r

1st.

12.,

fQ2-^> who
T

with,

tQO
.

you,

-irhn.

94) V. 28. w.
biillix

16.,

^sDGlQ^
7

our offspring-horn pOOICL^ with

7

pronoun.
* t
7
i
)

'.).">

V. 29. w.

8.,
9.,

ni

our

debt,

from .*1i

with a

suffix.

9(5; V. 29. w.
(

;nmV) *
+e

to
7

think-m&mtivc, PC. from

written or ^rawi-participle, Pe.

JT) V. 29. w.

15.,

(ZuA..-

c
98) V. 29. w.
99) V. 30. w.

from

16.,

I'ZoiLDolG by

art,

from I'ZoiiOo).
Pe.

15.,

QoAj

shall

report-future

from

100) V. 31. w.
the prefix >

6.,

fO,J> that shall jiulge-faimc Pe. from

1

with

101) V. 31. w.

14.,

il^fO ami

showed, made

known-Aph. from

102) V. 32.

8.,

iniV>V> wootz^-participle, Pa.

ROMANS
103) V.
104) V. 105) V.
106) V.
1.

vi.

10.

w.
w. w.
w.

4.,

]oQJ
T
T

5^// /e;ai-Pa. future from

*

]oo
f

1.

8.,
7.,

JA^ZZ ^j//iciM?M/an/-Etlipa.

future from

>A*.

2.

UJ ./<// /r-futiirc
7 7

Pe. from

\L.
Pe.
1st.
pi.

3.

6.,

tr^t? who
7

icere

baptized-prct.

from ,101 with the prefix >

T

107) V.

4.

w.

1.,

^aoZ]
.

are iwr/<v/-Ethpc. pret.

1st.

pi.

com.

from ;^XQ.
T

I')8)

V.

4.

w. 14., wiOiao|>^^w/rt//^;r-anouuiuthe8uffixstate,

334

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

1
'

3d. masc. singular, from

&(
7

with the prefix >

should watt-future Pa. from

109) V. 110) V. 111) Y.

112) V.

4. w. 20.,
5.
5.

*AOU

Vf.4t.,^^^3L\

hare been planled-Ethpe.pret. from

t^fJ*

w. 11., ToCTU shall Je-future Pe. from YOOI.

r

6.

w.

1.,

^1 tSpi knowing-participle, with a

suffix

from

113) V.

6.

w.

5.,
1.,

*2lQ>l1

is

crutified-'Etbpe. pret.

from

114) V.

6.

w.

^^sAjj /^
*

should be destroyed-^fhp&. from

with the prefix J

y

115) Y.

8.

w.

116) Y. 8 w. 117) Y.
from
9.

^SOtOU JeZiei-e-Aph. 10., }^J shall live-Mme

6.,

future from

Pe. from
participle

77
13.,

w.

*4^Afl0
JUM

being powerful-Ethpgi.

+Q\
9.,

118) Y. 10. w.

Zm?z^--part.

Aph. from

COLOSSIANS

iii.

15.

119) Y. 120) Y.
perative,

1.

w.

7.,

Q1O
7 7

seg&-imperative of
2/oiir

2.

w.

2.,

QljZ) to

affections be

placed-Efhpe. im*
7 i

from p>>

121) Y. 3. w. 4., pron. and the prefix O 122) Y.

4.

m>

..

7 7

>

?/ottr

/i/e-from

(i

with a

suffix

*.

w.

9.,

tOXtLi

(ye) shall oppear-future Ethpe. from

123) Y. 124) Y.
plural

5.
5.

w.
w.

1.,

07 from >O>O1

3.,
.

oAxSo] mortify-Aph. imperative from 7 t 7 nniV)>Ol your wtewiiers-Suffix state, 2nd. masc. V
i

NOTES ON THE CHRE8TOMATHT.

125) V.
w. 11 and 12.,

335

5.

*0l **ai>*

These pronouns seem to

include the substantive verb (coinp.

X
T
,

54. 3. a).

126) V.
7

7.

w.

8.,

^'"XJM'nAVn turning or having turned-Ethpz.

T.T
*.

from

ascn .
8.

127) V.

w. w.

3.,

Qu..1| put away-A.ph. from

*QJ
*

or
*

ojJ

128) V.
129) V.
7

9.

2.,

^OOOlZ
^
>

ye shall ie-future

from }oOI

9.

w.

3.,

^ \\r^ ^*

tywgi deccitfvJr-p&rticiple Pa.,

from

130) V.

9.
.

w.

7.,

-lOlCUx-^O* put

off,

cast

away-imperative Pe.,

from

w.^
-X

It takes a suffix.

131) V.

9.

w. 12.,

^Oioaaboi
^.fj^ALDj ?Mo
'

his deeds-stiff, state, plural

from

paooi.
1:52)

V.

10. w.

3.,

ici//^

renezoft-Ethpa. part, pas-

27 ,-M with the prefix >

133) V. 10. w.

6.,

OU'pOj

icho created

him-from

1^

with a

suf.

pronoun, with the prolix >.

134) V. 12. w.
with the prefix

7.,

]*Vi*nMO and

fee/<7w^-plural

from ]^>

".

O
1.,

135) V.

13. w.

^pA*OO1O
if n
*

and yf-from O01 with the verbal

termination-2nd.

pi.
2.,

with the prefix

O
part,

v OlV)X>0 and w. V. 15. 1., 137) O and prefix pronoun,

*
a

136) V.

13. w.

fnV? forbearing-Pti.
his pence,

from

'o>.
suf.

from fin\
r

with

138) V. 15. w.4. M aa2oA?/o,/-/v*r/,v, from 139) V.

15. w.
6.,

U^ with

suf.

pron."

ioL*iaL]

ye are called-YA\\. 2nd. plural from

140) V. 15. w.

10.,

^-oo

So

thiin.kful-\w[(t. active

Aph. from

336

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

REVELATIONS
.

v.

10.

141) V.

1.

w.

1.,

A^VxO and I saw-Aph.

pret.

1st.

sing,

from

with prefix O.
'

142) V.
with prefix

2.

w. 10.,

o^A^VlX
II
Ti

to

open-Pe.

infinitive

from

ww^)
from

X
3.

143) V.

w. 17.,

OLQuVlN

to look

on #-infin. with

suffix

^V** with the prefix

^
A*OO1
ii

144) Y.

4.

w.

2.,

w-formed from Zu| and OO1,

] being

The phrase, including the word preceding and the one dropped. following, means literally, it is weeping much.
145) Y.
4.

w.

7.,

tMk2*

was found-Ethpe. from

per.
fut.

literally thou shalt weep-2nd. 146) Y. 5. w. 8., ao 61. B. a). masc-put for the imperative (vid.

147) Y.
(rid.

6.

w.

6.,

^OpOj

to

stand.^Q\O

is

a participle from

64. 3. B.
6.

Rem.).
8.,

148) Y. 149) Y.

w.

fa^1 s/aw-pass.
o>A*1> who

part. Peal. fern,

from
f.

6.

w. 21.,

were sent-3d. per.

plural,

.77

Ethpa. from

)>.
REVELATIONS xxiL
1

10.

150) Y.

2. w. 23.,

^OlQa^O

and

leaves

of tV-from

]a^ with

suffix,

and

prefix

O*

151) Y.

3. 3.

w.

4.,

152) Y.
plural,

w.

Pa. from
5.

foou shall &e-future of looi. 14., wOUJQASnjU shall serve him-ht. ~ ASa with a suffix.
?

3d.

masa

153) Y.

w.

16.,

JOUkJ

causing to shine-Aph. part. masc. from

>ou.

NOTES ON THE CHRE8TOMATHY.

*
P

337
T

154) Y.
155) V.
from

6.

w.

15.,

fliOnV)\

my

to s&nfl-infinitive,

Pa. from **<!***

8.

to worship, to prawe-infinitive, Peal w. 13., ryiff>Vl\

rV^B

r f

*
be filthy-fat.

156) V.

11. w.

7.,

lUfrJ *^#

Ethpa. from

]L.

157) V. 14. w. from \>A

15.,

<oSu
9

they shall enter in-fat.

3d. masc. Peal

158) V. 17. w. 159) V. 19. w.

4.,
3.,

|Z (xwie-imperative of |2|

>k^J

. T

s/ta# teA-

away-Pe&l

future from

>^

, f

338

NOTES ON THE CHEESTOMATHY.

POETRY.
present a few specimens of Syriac poetry, taken from the Peshito Bible, published by the British and Foreign Bible Society, in 1826. It will be observed that the text does not appear in a

WE

rhythmical form, nor are there any divisions into verses. Peshito or literal version was made near the close of the

The
first,

or beginning of the second century, while the divisions into chapters and verses were introduced in the thirteenth century. Points, in
addition to Ribui, will be noticed over and under particular letters.

These are intended to mark the occurrence of Kushoi and Rukok.

PSALM
1) Verse
2.
.

xlv.

110.
This
o

word

9.,

pOTSfjiV)
suffix

therefore.

is

composed of the
Conjunctions as

conjunction

^4^
w.
1.,

and the

pronoun JJ01*

well as other particles often take suffixes.

2) V.

3.

]k)>l
in

cast

(gird)-Aph. imperative, from ]So5

xvii. 27.

See a similar instance

Matt.

PSALM
3) V.
2.

li.

110.
Aph. from
(%**&

w.

1.,

f-yt&Dl

multiply-imperative,

here adverbially in the sense of very much.

4) V.

2.

w.

2.,

il

..>] wash

wze-imperative,

Aph. from

-..

with a

suffix

pronoun.

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

5) Y.
guffix
2.

339

w.

7.,

-iJL2>

/w-imperative, Pa. from

p>

with a

pronoun.
3.

6) V.

w.

8.,

^njSnn

in

all
>

time,

always-from

all

and the prdix preposition, that 7) V. 4. w.8., D>>lZ>

muse, future from JDj1
junction >
j)rt'C('(lcs.

in.

//ion migktest be

just-Ethpa. 2nd. sing.

The preformative

falls

away

as the con-

8) V.

6.

w.
T

7.,

*A-lAljO| thou makest me

suffix
blot

to

know-Snd.

sing. pret.

Aph. from
9) V.
9.

^^
w.

with a
i

pronoun.

7.,

M>\

^-imperative Pe. from

PSALM
10) V.
11) V. 12) Y.
5.

civ.

10.

w. w.

1.,

^oAl
Ol
1

prepared, laid-Ethpe.from

]iO.
pronoun from

5.

4.,

nASo-participle with a

suftix

7.

w.

7.,

^QOliAiO

hastening-m Ethpe.

participle,

from

13) Y.
plural, Pa.

9.

w.

6., . '

OUQmaJO
*

aiul (that) they should not

cwer-3d.

from

jDO

with a

siitliv

prunoiin,

and the conjunction

preceding.

SYRIAC
r

LEXICON.

^ *1 T

"

(2 1,
"

suf.
r "

<^a| a
'^'

1'

father, pi.

Jerusalem.

^ i 9i

1* Ol_>|

|IO1O|

parents.
7

to go, to

go away.

to perish,

Aph.

to cause to

W-

brother.

perish, to destroy.

to

hold,
of.

to

seize,

to

lay

to be sad, to be disturbed.

hold

Abnil (name of an
* "

idol).

the
T

last,
'

the end.
1

Abraham.
m. a reward. |L\1
^\
>

H^r^f
pi.

another;

fern.

m.

l^il ^
|J>|

letter,

a writing.

an

ear.
x

oVor.

an Egyptian.
Adverb,
like

ol
I

-F

(mark of the vocative).

T

the

DOf
and

namely, that

is

(from o|

Egyptians.
*}

hand-ui Hebrew ^i
who, which,
fern,

I2aiibol
f.

skill, ability.

*!

of

puj.

a nation.

so as, according to, as to,

IF just
as,

Ophir (a pro]>er name). *i jiOl9O| Edessa in Mesopotamia

t
,

therewith.

!'*!
*'i

(a proper name).

where?
where
;

there,

IM)O| a way.
f *

]*1

iy whither ?

|A_>O|

*i

the law book of Moses,

whence? ^io T T

the Pentateuch.

Qlu|

where.

342

SYRIAC LEXICON.

how?
that.
pi.

SO

to learn,

Aph. to cause to

learn, to teach.

a
they,
r

^
to

ship.

to constrain, to compel,
I..7
\

truly, certainly, yes.

*^3

at what,

urge any one,

v^

op-

pressed,

(a proper name).
oppressed.
Israel (a proper name).

mother.
honor, a
I
7

mark
*

of esteem,

a solemn procession.

Amida
7
,

in

Mesopotamia

(a proper name).
I am, etc.
1>

il it is, *jiAjl

17

]l iV>l, surely, firmly.

1,

serpent

(e;

Aph.
at the same time-together. to eat, to consume.
just
>
ff

fut.

to believe.

Adv. constantly.
of to say, to speak.
7

as, >

].SO,bf

such a quality (qnalis}.

.
.

i-

i rr>

>

a stranger, a guest

a lamb.

jASo] (with
but,

J following)

y)

yet

(aXXa),

if

not
f

it.
1>

jJ 0)|J} to
7

]j1

lament.

XT*

I, pi.

^LM

we.
**
f.,

God.
godly.

m. ^i

.il

that (<w

J.CG.)

Antinum
name).
f.

(a

proper

divinity, the

godhead.

7J>

Ethpa. to sigh.

an Alexandrian.
Olaph, the
the alphabet.
first letter

man, a certain
of

man,

pi.

and

SYRTAC LEXICON.

343

luiniaiiity,

as

concrete,

'1

a
>

lion.

X T

mankind.

^
1

_iV

ni.

Arias.

l]

f.

thou

pi.
.

Areopagite.
>{ a ruler,

a chief man.

f
f.

"
I

you.

U^'
.

a Syrian, a Gentile.
>
I

a woman, a wife.

an

errorist,

heretic.

]Zaco)

a healing.
pi

ij heresy (a'tgetfts).

j*O>l a bound, a prison.

V
(according
to
9

>] earth, land, country. to find, Ethpe. to

be found.

stylite

ZA]
the creation.
ft

the six days work,

Assem.)
sedition.
oil

]Z] to come, Aph. to lead, to bring, to conduct.

JL\, \yL\ a place, a region.

of cinnamon.
:l

/ nr

vn

soldier.

external
dress,
T

appearance,

in,

from, through, to.

a possessor of a bath.
hypocrite
neither.
t*
face,

ASOLUCDJ
")

09
*1 T

i]i
T

a pulpit

(|3ij|*a).

also, T k7 ^
>\,

Va]

|-.g|
^^2)

\yi

" 7*J

hence.
to be

wk>|
ashamed, Aph. to
to,
a
"

over,
,
.X

according

make ashamed.
7

towards.

I*
a bishop
to he anxious, unea.-y.

shame, disgrace.
,

C*' -/f>\r>o a counselor.

z>

p^)>]

four.

amiableness.
K

jn*

6>| heterodox.

JOQ

awkward, uneducated.

344

SYRIAC LEXICON.

*42
i.
\L\

Pa. mock.
r

+*\*

to

deride,
f

to

Basilius

(a pro-

M.

per name.
i
f.

(from |Z^is.| end)

joy, benignity.

finally.

m. back.
cease, to destroy.

to perfume.
odors.
*

to conceive.

pregnant.

to seek, with to demand.

^Lo to

entreat,

among, between.
in.

]A*x3

evil.

enemy, an adversary.
the seekmg, the finding out.
to take away.
i

m. an evil person-pi.

malice.

m. small-|i**JD feminine.
z

Besoe (a monk-proper
name).
A A
*
i .

a small matter (for the

Adj. small).

7 ->
1>

between, by
?.

Al

7
1

n o

to explore, to discover,

2
7

Vfl

out

Ethpa. with

JD

to contemplate,

Mesopotamia.

a gnat, a midge.
sou.

|A*i a house, the Roman dominion.

Ti

]Alj^S0 .iio an

inhabitant qf the city,

to create.

Bethlehem (a proper
name).
to weep.

Barabbas
name).
P

(a proper

without
|1*")
pl.

a Barbarian.
sons.
7
lit.

m.

Bardesanes
sons

(a proper

Const.

|Elal*") men,
7

name).
X

of men.

^Q is

always used in the

.,;

pO

houses, pl. feminine. to fall down, to

sing, for son.

bend the

to despise. Par^. P.
despised.

knees, Ethpa. to receive a benediction, to bless one's-self.

RYRIAC LEXICON.

345

but, yet.

m. blasphemy,
shame, disgrace.
lid.." Guria

Ethpa. to become man.

man.

(proper

name

of

|>
,'fZ),

the lightning, brightness.

L'fC)
C j

a woman).
IZioVyi
circumcision,

a daughter,
Ik

pi.

',

A^O Ao a young woman,

JA^> ^-S ?
soon,

to laugh, to mock,
for.

a maiden.

>A)
,.

after,
i 7
^
7.

afterwards.
(literally),

-.t

to

uncover,

to

discover,

vnNo )Ao

Ethpe. to be discovered, to be

made known.
7

shortly thereupon.

^.. to rob, Ethpe. to be robbed.

i

public, free.

^K\

an arrow> dart

^,

to choose, to select.

%P

p Vi
7
,

*^
\^

Galilee (a proper name).

a revelation.

a
>

side,

a part,
^

^.. to engrave.
**

r
.

the

wrong

side,

i.

e.

an j/r>'.vr>

an

accomplishment,

enemy.
the choice.

perfection.

to

fulfill,

to finish.

a formation, a creature.
^ 7

mighty.
Pass. Part. ll-J-y\
hidden,

\'t^\ a man, a person.

unknown,

Gethsemane (a proper
namej!
2>_i Pa.
>,.

to lend.

to blaspheme.

]cQL. race, family (ysvo$ ),

offspring. .rr>pn . Aph,
r

*_.
Q.I
in

to

meet with any one, to

*&\t

to lie
.

down.

happen to any one.

the midst, Q-v-^ within.

to scold, with

*S

u. the north.
3J-.

1'O-yi

a troop, a multitude.

a bone, a limb.

346

SYEIAC LEXICON.

>
tive

mark of the Genitive; RelaDaison Pronoun ; while, that, there- l^t>

Pa. the same,
1^i> a

(the

proper name

with, in order that.

> to offer,

of a river).
cloister.

an

offering.

Mr?

ti

monk.
monastic
life.

JQ>

to carry, to take, Ethpe. to

be conducted, to conduct onesself.

testament

> to
>

lie,

Pa.

p>, M-2?
ff

P>
a falsehood.
7

17 Pa. **3> to purify.

pure, clean.

;D> to remember.
> gold.
!

^O>, and )LO> the blood.

j

behavior.

a resemblance, an image,

David, sometimes written

(a proper name).
place.

a likeness.
similar.

>OOU>
^O>,
*

p6>, 1AOO>,

CoTw^r. S^. wkiD> value.

to sleep.
I 7

O>,

*>
i*

to crush.

> to fear, to worship.

*

,i*V)> sleeping

Matt.

viii.

24, pi.

> fear, terror, ]j

M, A^w>
7

^ i nV)> .
^1SD> to weep.

superstition.
.e o ?

]Qa> an Y" '

evil spirit,

the Devil.

pQ-j

to be possessed of

an

o> Ethpa. to wonder

evil

at,

to be

astonished.
t>
p

spirit.

*^._>
who
7

a word accompanying the

to
-n

judge,

Pass. Part.

^>

judged.
Possessive
is

Pron. my, or my.

16,

i\i>

J*iJj the feast of the appearance

of Christ
thy, or

^Xk>
^-i>

who

Epiphany.
*

is

thy.
j

pLD> the beard.

^'

'

but (&).

p-ij a Judge.

>> "

^A.

^>>| to comprehend.

Jlu> judgment.
* This
is

an arm.
Vid.

formed from > and >^ .

Tr.

>> to encounter, to speak with

reference above.

any one.

8YRIAC LEXICON.

347

O
lo

advantage, pleasure.
to
return,

Aph. to lead

back.

]>Cl
P

.I'a.

*j>jOl to lead, to guide.

JL
1
'

erod (a proper name.)

(jOl

this, she,

Pron.(Chal., ytf]).

p>Ol
,

here, hither.
ff

members.

lOl

now, at present.

*""

|>>O1 honor, glory.

9
*.

OO1 m. **O1
f.
t>

f.

and OO1 m.
7

-iOl

IT

the letter Van, and.

1*

that, the former

>
;

OO1 who;
to redeem, Put.

>

*jOT

since.

Iboi
-*
.

to be
*

(Feri

iSM&tf.)

Put.

foou. CUOOT lie,

-X

she.

1,

]l51

time, pi.

]lQl Acts

xvii. 26.

OOl them.
i

customs, deeds.

there, then.

twice

v il*^l A_kZ

thrice

a temple, a palace.

before.

n iVl
trine,

CTI

faith,

belief,
tlie

docsay-

ul

to

grow dumb,

to put to

silence.

1*k>a* ^^*'^
in like

ing faith.

>l just, upright.

f

*
>*} it

manner.

jl
it *is

to be just,
suitable,
?1
it is

befits,

becoming.
corres-

therefore.
t>

!>

70
so, iu this

manner.

1A

agreement,

pondence.
alms.
-.

hence,

for, there.

oi Pa. to wander, to go forth, to walk.

carefully.

o.o
^01,
I

they, these.
<
.

>O11 Ethpa. to beware.

praise,
r f

_1G1
1>

show, splendor.
(a proper

in.

(>G1
this.

f.

plur.

^QJOI

Zenobius

m.

.JkJOl

f.

name).

348

SYRIAC LEXICON.

17
i,

^1 to move, to be

restless,

I?
7

.r** lame.
%

a moving, a dance,
hyssop.
..

r**

m. |pM
f

f.

one, a certain one,

7

.07

](L1 honor, splendor.

a weed,
to arm.
to conquer, to vanquish.

at.
Ir~K,
.

any one

*"!*")

pM

sunday.
\

->p~^ to
^
7
7

rejoice

|As>

\LOf*
.C.-x

to rejoice very much.

fliOrM rejoicing.
*

a conqueror.
VrfciOl
ft

(jrM mutual,
'l*
'

reciprocal.

a song.

t-Ofj* gladness.
joy.

il

species, kind.
in.

fornication,

the breast,
xxiu. 48.

pi.

suff.

Luke,

fornication.

9011, fjoil
small.
7

little,

JQ11S B>

not
y.
7

to suiTOund, to flow around.

*

pjOl

honor, majesty.

to cry, to call.
cross,

uipM *

around.

27 * to renew.

to crucify, to torture.

IX
new,
pi.

Qx, Pa.
dicate.
7

aCU

to show, to in-

V** free,
p

Ijiw^

free.

Q-w
ought.
quiet, concealed
resi-

love. *
Qjst perseverance, patience.

dence.
x
7

injury.
z

beloved,

pi.

^>*^.

(I

to see Ethpe. to be seen, to

Habib (a proper name).

7

appear.

y
[OV
t>

;O
any
7

an
one.

associate,

the other,

A* a vision,

pi.

^.. pop^

an

apparition.
X

to enclose.

June.
to bind.

feast,

a feast day.

SYRIAC LEXICON.

349

bond, union.

to dream,
cover.
for,

Ethpe.

to re-

a view.
to err, to sin.

instead

of.

m.

sin,

crime, pi.

Ethpe. to be angry,
anger, wrath.

and
f.

sin.

(A.^lM
pi.

sigh.

wheat,

we,

us, pi. c.

from p|

"fi

to live, Aph.

a heathen, an idolater.
(

and

life.

It always

rf)Ot

far

be

it.

has the plural form but generally a singular signification.

g 7
..

vehement, strong,
to envy, with

*S*

m. a debtor,

pi.

^iH

M>

to cover Ethpa. to conceal

one's-self.

living creature,

an animal,

a monster.
I

97

diligently.

w,

|J.*-K

force,

an army.

to blush, to be ashamed,

to strengthen.

the back, the loins.

strong.

and )jAS
U

>GUK to be white,
to see, to look out.
K
-.7

-^

17

linen, fine linen.

..

.o

IT |^iO>* 17

-..

wise,

XT

plural

to curse, to detest.

and (V)i^

Pa. to
* 99 7

liberate.

\visdom.

\'r^ a
\L' r+*
f.

magician, a sorcerer.

UAJ vinegar.
-X

from 12;*jl

finally,

the

|4Q

XM a gnat, a fly. \t to mingle, Ethpa,

i)ivrt,

end, enough.
to
]jiuj endurance, suffering.

take

to

associate

with

nm -*, ^ao
Eph.

darkness,
iv.

pi

any

one.
>,

18.

]V>i\

sound, healthy.

to mark, to seal,

to wash.

seal.

350

SYBIAC LEXICON.

to carry.

Ethpa. to be dispersed.
a rumor, a report.
j-

foul, detestable.

good. Adv. very.

unclean.
uncleanness.

Part. P. m. sealed.
seal.

&

to wander, to

wander around,

JQ^ Pa. n> be willin.

(t

to be ready, to

to forget, with

^ to

fall

from

something, to apostatize, Aph.

to mislead, to deceive, to cheat.
error, heresy.

the pious, the good,

happy, blessed.

and
offspring.

pO.

kind, family,

to taste, to taste well.

to

be laden, to bear, Aph.

vine, branch,

to cause to carry, to bring.

readiness,

to overrun.

a part (tomus.)
to

to overflow,

swim over any-

to

fill.

thing, to overflow.

&
'

Ethpe.

to ac-

a mountain.
* r

quiesce, to obey.

5*04
*
,.

distress, misfortune.
'

>^4 to chase away, to drive away.

7 Y 7

04 that which is cealed, |lja4^ secret.

>
.

con-

^^
i' 1 \2>'r4
(7

to strike,
'i

JE%e.

l^af.

Zosu-^

goodness, excel(7

lence, benevolence, grace.

to order, (racro'sjv).

V>|Li fine, suitable, proper.

i>7

an
state

arrangement,

order,

to wish very much, Ethpa.

the same.

a young man, a youth,

to lead, to lead away.

X

girl,

a maiden.

to dry up.

SYBIAC LEXICON.
r*
,

351

U
p

hand,

ri)
of.

by, with help,

now
' r

^OO

i\O
x

daily.
'

on account

JCU
in

a Greek, U(

i
.

1O> Adverb

],_ *

A^/i.

-?o] to thank, with

the Greek manner, accord-

a
t

to believe in something, to

ing to the Greeks.

use,

confess. m r
.

advantage.

\\*

m. acknowledged, known.
knowledge.

a hermit.
to bring forth, Ethpe. to

to know, to be acquainted known ; 'with Ethpe. to be

;

be born.
.,

.,

jlj>A.

to

make known,

to

in-

"
]>Q__Aj a
small boy, a child.

dicate.

an acquaintance, one

a teacher, a learned
man.

known.
knowledge, insight, device.

to learn, Aph. to inform.

* f
T

|VY
to
give,

the sea.
swear, Aph. to cause to
to.

Imperative
r

1*^

* to

^
x

7
;

with
life.

\M2ll to

give

swear, to swear

0*

up

one's

..

*"C^
J.O

the right hand, the right,

)OOla Judaea,
pi.

a suckling, a baby.
Aph. to add.
to increase rapidly.
T

Jews. Jovinian (a proper

name).
i

r>_.

.Tnhn

(a proper name. )

Jacob (a proper name).

%P
*
n

Joseph (a proper name).

*,

\S)Q ^i one

who

takes care,

L, Julius (a proper name).

1

to burn.
flame, holocaust.

mni . \n.
name).

Julian

(a

proper
,

XT

l;*^'

illustrious,

honored,

a doctrine, teaching.

]Soal

day,

lV)V^iO
to day,

great. *x to be great, to increase (in

respectability).

by day, ^SbQji, (liOQ^

352

SYBIAC LEXICON.

a month.

Jesus.
.7

blush.
I
-X
.

AA

being, essence.

(*

1Q
or

feO'p*^)

the
of

^A*
_Lo
;_

extendin

laying on the hand

to
x x 7

remain,
sit.
7

to

dwell,

to

settle, to

every,

\ O each.

iAu more than.

a dog.
superfluity.

a crown.
every thing, any thing,

to win, to abound.

a bride.
to prevent, to rebuke.
x [a,
1

how much, how much

more,

lop

passion.

to be amazed, to be sad.
to give a surname,

justly.
justice, righteousness.

a fellow servant, bosom,

lap.

a stone, a rock, Cephas,

or Peter.

to assemble, to collect to-

l/P
7

f.

a rebuke.

gether, Ethpa.. to be assembled.

'f&

perhaps.

an assembly.

as, during (pleonastic before the Part.).

(03
(CO

a cup.
to conceal,

Pa. to cover,
one's-self.

paiO
P
C
-X

Ethpa. to hide
priest.

]ZoJOl3

the priesthood.

(O3, (m*),

|m*>

concealed,

IrAjQO shame.
famine.

m. a

star, pi.

Matt. xxiv. 29.

to deny, to refuse, to desert

(with .0)*

priest.

where,

JT"

there where.

a cup.
a
cell.

to feel pain,
one.

^ A*p

it

pains

8YRIAC LEXICON.

353

sad,
I.-S

sorrowful,
'

to

abuse, insult.
against, towards.

by, to go.
kfl

GUp,

|(JL*p
!.

infirm,

weak.

to, by, besides, with.

to

announce
a christian.

to blot out.
only, alone.
^^f)l.^>^

p
a

to involve, to roll up, to pass

bread.
night,
ft.

by.
,

HIS,
it is

pa
*

roll,

scroll.

]]*D a
-

collision,

a shock.
.

not.

*^
to

Ethpa.,

*>

]]

A an insane
,

person.
,-^D

humbly

entreat.

up

^1L before,

to write, yl^A. the same.

besides.

a writing, a book.
flax, linen.
ft *
>

to eat.

opponent.

a shoulder.
to remain, to remain behind.

* Xy

tongue, language,

that,

what

>
;

]lD when.

U not,

no

|J> lest,

without.

word, discourse, a part

of speech.

heart.

p]i> a
*">*\-L to arouse, to cheer,
dress,

handle, a covering.
spring, fountain.

a garment.
decision, reliance,
tion.

a blessing, a benedic-

to hold, to take hold.

scroll,

volume,

outside, without,

roll.

to clothe, to cover.

Pa. to accompany, Ethpa

to be accompanied, to be confirmed.

^.SD

freely.

*
,

l*o.*S0 a wise man,

pi.

354

SVHIAC LEXICON.

|*.f1,Sn an

altar.

a heretic, a seducer.
"
secretly.
m

a desert.
1?

redemption.

V) water.
to die, Aph. to cause to die,

cloister,

a chamber.

to mortify.
thus, thence, therefore.

distuiguished, excellent.

}Al_i^D a town, a **
if

city.

humility, modesty.
affable,

something, i>O,iO
eastern,

JJ

nothing.

modest.

]i1,V>

the

noW) immediately.
lowliness,
intelli-

East.

a song, a hymn.
believing, with

gence.

orthodox.

,aVf), j^So to be depressed.

]3_SD to be full, Pa.

prompt, ready.
to be
e
7

to

fill,

-E%*.
i
1>

filled.

a
.

gift.

-<^^>

to deride.
+
Ptff

word, saying,

_pZ?ir.

W So*

y.

pQlD

myrrh.
death.

an angel, a messenger.
7

|M.

^V> a captain.
to advise, to
consult, to

M> ...V)

to strike, to prick, to

bite.

reign.

blow,

plague,

pi.

]h \V> a

king.

a kingdom.

weak, humble.

\\\-

V)

to speak, to converse:

on the morrow.
*

Abs. word.
1..1

a tempest,

pZ.

waves.
.,

wordy/.

(JiO.

to go, to come,

to arrive,
learning.

3/. Prrf.
from,
of; J
of,

over,

on account
speech.

^i^i) whUe.

SYRIAC LEXICON.

355

SJiOwho?

>

^
is

,,V>

Y y

that,

which,

tical
(i.

person),
Christ)
;

($0

our Lord,
title for

who

this?
it

e.

**.o
a

certainly (fJ^v);
superfluous.
of,

often

is

ecclesiastical ladies.

a pearl,
of,

precious

from, on account

since

Zol
o
' I

^
r

stone.

from,

of;

^i
to

to

fall

ofif,

to cast away,

*^1 afterwards, hereafter,

7

make

free.

with

sutf.

^iSfl

of us.

a falling
bold,

oflF,

an

injury.

what?
a faithful servant,
a candlestick,
a part.
T
^

impudent,

a garment,
bitter, sorrowful,

patience,

a chariot, a throne.
that
Christ,

poor.
f.

which

relates

to

baptism.

a
cavern.

hollow,

-iA;LD a flock, an assembly, a

community.

an
an explainer.
\^
,

interpreter,

a messenger,
to anoint.

U fciD

possible.

*So changable, variegated.

the Anointed, the Messiah.

to be able, Ethpe. the same, to have

power to do (with

by, through).
splendor, light.
in

known, distinguished.
)

complete, perfect.
deacon, a minister.
office

the midst.

SDaV) a

midst.

OlaViaVf) the
con.

of a dea-

Lord,

Sir,
(title

my Lord

for

a person sick of the palsy,

bishop or auy other ecclesias-

position,

a bed.

356

SYRIAC LEXICON.

f.

obedience,

abstemiousness.

to extend,
time, a period.

U^iJ a

valley.

A*jJ to go down, to descend,

to lay down, to take down, to
bring, to deliver.
(>.

ALo an
"jA.i

interpreter. necessity.
f

*^.>.7Avn

x.

AMJ

a catechumen.
J.

m. a garment,

pi.

/Wl,

to drop.
7

m. a prophet, Matt.

i.

22.

^J
P
'X

to take care
^
f.

of,

to watch.

lenity,

meekness.

f.

prophecy.
x

Nicsea (a proper name).

.0
i
I'piJ

drawing
suffering.
X
7 7

out,

patience,

piJ.
e

a yoke, a bow.

guilt, injury, crime.

shining, bright.
,

to augment, to honor, to

>OU to shine,
7

Aph. to

light,

Ethpa.

sacrifice, to slay.
t .rf>r>vr>i

7
]

to be bright.

aw

>OU 1".
*

river.
r

.*"imi to take, to receive.

-x

JOIQJ It
shine.

m.

light,

from

3OU

to

pnmi
7

temptation.

*
11*

v^OU

to pour, Ethpe.

.r>mil|

>*QJ,

MJ

to repose, to be ap-

nmi

to ascend.

peased, Aph. to lay aside, to

refreshment.
to
fall.

put away.
*>

+ o

rest.

^pO
f.
(

e 9

>

to
J

a stranger,
*
o

x
r
t

go out, Aph. to take

7

out,

also Newter.

spread.

!>OQJ ^QJ to sleep.

*t>
f
-x

\m
f

*l^

the soul, reflexive,

fight, to attack.

self.

J to
r

I^OQJ
*
1".

distribution, expending.

>OJ

fire.

^J o

to plant.

r
SYRIAC LEXICON.
.

a victory, an exploit.
i

JfCD to order, to arrange.

*

Jsesibis

in

Mcsopo-

>O1D

to testify, to witness, Aph.

*

tainia (a proper
victorious,

name).

superior, clear.
.

-i

IjOlCD Emph. of >GICD a witness,

OP
P.
.

to die as a martyr.

Ethpa. to be avenged
to adhere, to follow.
r

a martyr

=fiaTU).

(ZojOlCD testimony, witness, mar.

tyred one.

JTU
ULJ

to dig, to dig out.

(pi.
"

)ZA/|) a woman.

Q0

a multitude.
.

(>Aj a downfall, a curse.

onense.

ID*
|LD}OD
silver,

>nro to long
take pleasure
t>

for something, to
in.

money.
c

*.

\L\SO a bushel.

IJ^JQCD thought.
to
*>

an old man, Adj.

old.

(n\nm
heaven.

reception,
p

ascension to

dense, extensive.

^OQD,

y).,ro to place, to

inter,

an ode, a song.
to be satisfied.

to add,
to

^A^2
or

to shut,

l0]&
books,

write
X

compose

to believe, .A/, to declare,

to forbear, yl^A. to suppose. hope.

to multiply, to increase.
to worship, to honor.

to punish with death, to be interred, to be Ethpe.

buried.
ft.

(i;O

synod
>

(tfCv

|in.lO._ro
need.

indigence,

poverty,

worship, honor.

a
.

a
cluster.

ee (

a n occurrence.

Syria.
i .1 fT>,
|

(A

..

QD mucli,

yl^/c.

very,
.l'/r.

Syriac,

in

the

a multitude.

Syriac.

358

SYRIAC LEXICON.

i?a0

a Syrian, Adj. Syrian.

to
pull

1'Aaoj,
lips,
r

^/.

VZofflO) the mouth, the

down,

Pa. to
osj'rCD

destroy, Ethpa. to be dispersed.

Pa. to dishonor, to

violate.

]l^ro Satan (a proper name).

Vr^20 a
y

side,

a page.
to

T
7

;*^a

<y>

to

bear,

endure,

to

|jjl a feast, a feast-day.

tolerate.

,li
to

to do, to perform, to yield,

^OuD
]AStC1C>
i
'

the laying on (of hands).

make something (with a

r..

an assembly.
a sword

double Accusative).
F

(^tfif)
*K

PLOD

(f i<pog). . T 7 to expect, Pa. i*1Pf> to wait.

m.

servant,
xiii.

pi.

i,ns,

Mat.
-0
*>*

27.

>

transgression.

|>Q^1
7

creator.

to ascend.

;-U>
AJ);A

to pass by, to pass over;

i>OD.

iooco

to place, to lay upon,

7

with *O, to pass around.

to commit.

Hebrew, Ad.

Hebra-

take ^.Vftm to support, \m*l\ to

refreshment, to tarry.

ically.

shortly.
left,

wrong.
a young cow.

to hate.

hated, mean. to
.

need,

-- X

& until,

ASyl
>
^

not yet ;
until that;

1ffr>

Pr/.
until,

Pe.
7

]^Dyl
>"

1"

'rD
p
I

to make, to do, to visit (the

x
/
</.

^, MA time.
,! Pa. to support, to aid.
church.
to act unjustly.
,

sick).
p

.it
| i

,^(10 a scribe,
i

^-

r 2kD,

fl

^rt),

]AlaAcD

a ship.

a book.

UQI

unjust, sinful.

wicked, ungodly.

8YRTAC LEXICON.

359

a habitation, an abode,
death.

dipping, baptism.

pillar.

Jdl
Bong.

an answer, an alternative
Ethpe. to be troubled,
uncireumeision.

a n inhabitant.
trouble, labor.

to dwell. to hear, to answer, Ethpc. to

Q1

or

'fL

to watch,
>

to blot,

converse.
>

custom.
_
7
i

piety.

jl i

S eye.
<>

one
to stir up.

who

is

dead.

to arouse, Aph.

(ill a cloud.
X.'
1>

a guardian angel.

twenty.

Clover,
of; i

to, against,

on account
ff

Pa. to
1>

inter.

J ^1 because.
?

1 I

>

avarice.

aversion, opposition.
Pfle/, to inquire.

cause.

a root.

an

altar,

Acts

xvii.
i

23.

to

flee.

ml, V.A
into,

to go, with

to

gd

with

hibited
one,
?

carry on prointercourse with any

to

^1 to

to avail, to prevail.

>Al prepared,
the future).

Par<.

(put for

llthpe.

go

into,

Aph.
ancient, old,
rich.

f.

to lead, to lead into.

t t

11, Empti.
generation.

(SONS world,

race,

with, above.
X
..

a nation,

fruit,

j)/.

1>]a.

pi.

to meet, to

happen to (with

,&! to sulfer one's self

ic

di]

>

>

>\

to suffer one's-sclf to be baptized.

body.

360

SYRIAC LEXICON.

to blow, to sound.

an apparition, an enchantment.

(a proper name).
>

work.

limit,
7

an end.
to free, vlp^. to
*

0Q2> mouth.
a command.
.

.fflg>

permit.

to be unwilling.

lot,

a portion,

^Z.

(C0)

>O2> a tower (*

a work, labor.
,

]iijO2> a reward, a recompense.

^
*

P. w 2
to
..0
i?

to free, to deliver.

'

p_OjdZ) redemption,
** *

salvation.
,"

command.
-X

*
to remain, to

-X

P_jC12) separation.

precept, com-

come

mand.

to any one.
)

doubt.

77
'iS)

a camp, a
paradise.

valley.

>^>
an explanation. a
phial.

a redeemer, a deliverer.
salutiferous, saving.

^)
a philosopher.
Pilate

Persia.
?

(a proper

^) a

Persian.

name).
mediation, entreaty.

j>
a
church.
cheek, jole.
to divide, Ethpa. to doubt.
t7
^

to recompense, Ethpa. to be rewarded.

*
7

servant

of

the

O . ^2)

face, presence.

;) ;>

to preserve, to deliver.
to separate, to divide, Ethpe,

to be divided, to appoint.
to break.

Par^. uAi-^P) to work, to

serve.

to extend, to spread. to
return,

Pa. to answer,
just, right.
one's-self.

Aph. to lead back, to make

known

Ethpe. to turn

to interpret.

SYRIAC LEXICON.
.

361

4t

!io-t

^k
wide,

As.
r
"

a word, a matter.
Sf)\
7

cross.

figure,

an image.

to open.
'.

^)
f*

early time, dawn.

in. idols,

images,

Ethpe. to be
burst.

separated, to

an
god.

idol,

an image of a false

5*
11^
fl^
to be filthy.
vile, filthy.

rt

to receive

to happen, to

come

to pass.

'r&O to bury.
i
.

JO.
_ 0.
.

to be

wili',;)g,
-

to wish.

poor)

a sepulchre.

from the beginning.

]ZOO^
v
t

will,

^O-^

-D
f

for,

to,

>

^^

of one's-self, freely.

ere, before.
t
*.9
ff

willing, ready.
will.

the
holy.

first.

. f
f

-n

>*^

will,

purpose.

V
|OL

}oo

to remain, to stop.

to thirst.
,

|]aoo
ment.

a reception, an entertain-

^00 .
:

to fast,

PDO
fi.*-

days of fasting, fast days.

a figure,
a.

>QO U*
,

holiness.

|)0*

pretence.

JXLO to stand up, to stand,

to erect,
to set
up,

tf. to incline,

P.

to pray, with

to
depre-

to pray for any one, to

bless.
a
,

conclude,

to

appoint,
. .

to

termine; with
ceding, to

vA

\Z3\O

make war

with any

M^t
,.

inclined.

one.
.

Ethjte. to be crucified.

a church-yard, burying-ground.

a prayer, an entreaty.

362
li

SYRIAC LEXICON.

OJOO

a servant of the church,

Cappadocia (a prop"er

sexton.

17*.
Constantine

name).

(mn cassia.
tf

(a proper name).
.

\'fO to
11

name, to

call,

to choose.

piJOD

a town, a
)

city.

a Cyrenean (a proper

to approach, to draw ..*">; near, Pa. to conduct, to bring;

'

name),
3 truth.

to sacrifice.

war

m. a murderer, a robber,
cunning, ingenious,
slaughter, murder.
%
(1
9

^
near.

a crystal.

^O

reading.
field,

]*flf) a league, ]V)

consecrated virgins.
resurrection,

(")

Ai2

^D a

a country.

a horn.
7

'pD calvary.

a song.

a a book.
>

priest,

an

elder.

tree, bark,

>.

Cithara, harp.

much, great, loud, chief;

_
7 ,

a player on the cithara.

o p
),

2) a teacher, Emphat. |Q> Abs.

pi.

|]-D a voice,
little.
f r

|oi

Const.pl.

)i

.cr>n.\n

to grow,

Pa. to bring
f>

up, to

the clergy.

educate.
T!

a bride.
to acquire
;

>

a myriad,
7

y/.

^QO>.

Aph. to grant,
>,

> greatness,
7

a multitude.

to bring.

.>

to wish very much, to

|ilo
\7 I 7

a pen, a reed,

a centurion.

desire,

Ethpa. the same.

i to

(jjCOO Csesarea (a proper name),

to
call,

be angry.
foot.

to cry.

y, ]]..

8YRIAC LEXICON.

363

i> to stone.

a
rank.
feel,

prince,

a person of

to mark, to

Aph. the

-x.

same, with *fD to perceive, to

p*0> a sign.
) beloved.

remark.

a wish, a
3

y>
desire.
;

,>

to

love,

Ethpa.

with

go, to
5

chastise

with and

^
]V)>>

to feel compassion.
pi.

ithoiit

(^

-*"> to ship.

compassion,

benevo-

lence, love.

a persecutor.
i>j persecution.

J love.
to
lie,

idl> to luisten, to tremble, /,'%'.

to float.

to be afraid, to be terrified.
li

to be far distant.
c >

lloman, Adv. romai-

smell,

cally, Latin.

spittle,

to run, to hasten.

> the first

named.
firstling, ,J

anger, misfortune.
ning,
i>
j?Z.

-t_a~o
.0.0

begin-

|A^Au)
the high priest,

m.

spirit.
i>

i> f.

wind, breath,
spiritual.

spirit.

MO)
,OJ

a person of rank,
to ride.

bowel

love,

bowels of

1>

grcies.
>j

O> Ethpa.

to feel mcUned, to be

distance

(n>O> ^io
I T

moved.
)>, ]L)'>
f.

im a distance.
ph.

lASoi high,
iv. 6.

loud, p/.

iT"**

!>Q

ii]

to raise up,

]Soi James
.

to elevate.

o>

to

lie,

to be placed, Aph. to

305 a

gift.

cast, to send;

with

*VV"')
r

to

a quarrel.

administer; with
life.

(a^l

to lose

3OJ a clothj a rag.

364

8YRIAC LEXICON.

3> Part. P. thrown down, given

up.
f

to praise.
captivity, destruction.

j hills,

Luke

xxiii.

30.
suffer-

praise- worthy.

patience, long

]A*i

a v i, ie

a sceptre,
evening. to guide, to lead,
seven,

to sprinkle.
'

>

Pa.
i>

to obtain

again,

seventy.

Ethpa. to be reconciled.
i
*.

to leave, to give up, to

permit, to let go.

&a]SOQl> mournful, deeply moved.

J

a herdsman.
*
) sense,
.

a week.
mind.

an uproar.
restless, uneasy.

to be angry.

to kindle.

thunder.
to dance, to mourn, to lament.
) sinful,

Ethpe. to be moved, to be
indignant.
*_;

a transgressor.
sign.

IP* to throw, to
.*
T

precipitate.
r T

to
7,,

make a

it* Pa. to
is sent.
.

send,

Ethpa.

>>A|

wwZ)

to be inflamed, to rejoice.

5O1* to awake.
Sapores (a proper name).

IQ
_
*.?-

to be worthy, Ethpt. to be
7 7

an

evil spirit.

considered as worthy.
ff

to entreat,

Pa. to ask; with

some
one.

|d, f^d*
*
>

equal. ^/. JaQj*

to ask after

renown.

praise,

renown, glory.

entreaty.

*,CL, wUi to wash.

to reconcile, to cairn.
nearness. to free, to tear away.

8YRIAC LEXICON.

365

dishonor, shame.

in.

IVTS*

peace,

change, exchange.

a name.

consummation, end.
to despise.

polo* Samona
1*
T

(a proper name,.

Simon (a proper name).

ft

power, authority, right.

V)

heaven.

JOO*

way,

street.

Samosata
name).
.

(a

proper

a wall.
i

Vf)

beginning.

to finish, to complete.

to hear.

IJJQA

confirmation.

Simeon, Simon (a proper

gain, advantage,

name).
to serve.

awkward,

stupid.

despised, small, inferior.

)pl.
f.

the sun.

^iH

present, Aph.
find,

P.*

Pa. to go away,
Oi*Lo
.0

fnVn\

Or

t\ to

be able, to

Zol

to die.

to send, to put away.

|)ji,
T

P-,
]l*,

|-kJ-* insane, foolish.

.\
t

!Al

to cease, to rest.
*
.
(

year.

*,

rest,

torment, pam, torture..

sudden,

|1
I
1

tooth.

an apostle.

<*

sharp.

Pa. tft\
be powerful.

to be able, to

Ethpa.

wAAl
J

to relate..

an hoar;

to approach fulfillment, to
fulfill,

Pa.

Ol

forthwith.
.

to complete; with

^\1
,

jest, play.

to salute, Aph. to deliver up;

]_L*jOi to give up the ghost,

to die.
ness.

beautiful, good, fern, pi x r also the neuter, good-

'366

SYKIAC LEXICON'.

to hear, to take; Apk. with to

*
\'f

not clear, dirty.

that which
able.
is

2) dregs,

go away.

most objection-

an iuhabitant.
7

to

]\M to dwell; with ^\i to besiege,

demand. on trade, Ethpa. to

Pa. to begin.
J^'r,
+ t

;.iZ to carry
bio-

win (by trade), to be added.

wonder,

fa'r*

generation,

graphy.
ff

Li

a
9

light,

wax

light,

a candle.

an abyss.

p."

"

Z
a spectre, an ap.

wonderful,

fzx*

r^j-*

to be surprised.

parition.
P
T

Tav-last letter of the Alpha-

p'r* the remainder, the

y

rest.

bet.

>J*,
1*

;.

Ethpa. to be convinced.

or

oZ

l^ij* true, Acfe,

really.

^'

to repent, to turn,

il'fj'p* truly,

to return, again.

1>^

truth.
six.
t

to be astonished.

A*

>oZ
17
.

interpretation.

silently.

)ZoZ
dumb.

repentance.

to be silent, to be

limit,
,,

bound.
,

L
n\
a merchant.

A^_aZ under,

from below,
under.

]Z.V)>Z
Thomas, (a
proper name).
to

shame.

repentance,
urge,

Pai

Theophilus
proper name).

(a

Luke xxv.
|]Z to

23.

hang

up, to raise up.

SYRIAC LEXICON.

36f

8DOW.
Ti

great, strong.
. Ti

the Trinity.
to

XI.* 9^ to explain, to interpret

make a

scholar,

Ethpa

two
the second.
1

to bo learned, to bo a scholar.

a scholar.
.

^>Z

right, true, faithful.

/(Z.

three.

|l>Z a door, a

gate.

10 wonder, to be astonished.

]A^ijZ
.

mind, opinion.

wonderful, remarkable.

1 AAJ

Q1Z a hyinn.a song of praise

service, attendance.
.

lV)V)Z honest,
.

eight.

nne.

there, in that place.

to narrate, from

|jZ

to repeat,

P.

to narrate.

a narration.

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE

CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF

TORONTO LIBRARY